I
United States Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Water
Office of Environmental Information
Washington, DC
EPA 843-R-10-001
National Wetland Condition Assessment
Field Operations Manual
-------
-------
EPA-843-R-10-001
2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment
Field Operations Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Water
Office of Environmental Information
Washington, DC
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
NOTICE
Methods described in the National Wetland Condition Assessment: Field Operations Manual
are to be used specifically in work relating to the National Wetland Condition Assessment
(NWCA). Mention of trade names or commercial products in the document does not constitute
endorsement or recommendation for use.
The suggested citation for this document is:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2011. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Field Operations Manual. EPA-843-R-10-001. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Companion documents for the NWCA are:
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Quality Assurance Project Plan (EPA-843-R-10-003)
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Site Evaluation Guidelines (EPA-843-R-10-004)
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Laboratory Methods Manual (EPA-843-R-10-002)
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
IV
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notice iii
Table of Contents v
Acknowledgements vii
Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA 1-1
Chapter 2. Base Site Activities and Summary of Field Operations 2-1
Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area 3-1
Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer 4-1
Chapter 5. Vegetation 5-1
Chapter 6: Soils 6-1
Chapter 7. Hydrology 7-1
Chapter 8. Water Quality 8-1
Chapter 9. Algae 9-1
Appendix A. Shipping and Tracking
Appendix B. Target Invasive and Alien Plant Species
Appendix C. Vegetation Supplementary Material - Lists of Floristic Resources
Appendix D. Photography
Appendix E. Example Oil Decontamination Procedures
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
VI
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Many collaborators contributed to the development of the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency's (USEPA) National Wetland Condition Assessment Field Operations Manual (NWCA
FOM). These committed partners improved the technical quality of the field sampling approach
described in this document. In particular, state, tribal, and federal members of the National
Wetlands Monitoring and Assessment Work Group provided tireless effort in reviewing
protocols, attending and planning workshops, challenging our thinking, and committing to the
goal of improved national data describing wetland quality. In addition, participants in the NWCA
Indicators Workshop (2008) contributed to the scientific foundation for the manual and
participants in the NWCA FOM Technical Review Panel (2010) provided the final scientific
review of the field sampling approach. While it is not possible to list every person who provided
input along the way, some of the key contributors are acknowledged below.
Mary E. Kentula and Teresa Magee from the USEPA Office of Research and Development are
the lead authors of this document and worked with the other members of the NWCA FOM
writing team which included Gregg Lomnicky, Sandy Bryce and Howard Brunerfrom Dynamac
Corporation, Inc. The writing team was responsible for writing, revising, and finalizing the
document. This involved technical research on indicators, field protocol development and
testing, and resolution of partner comments. They also organized the 2010 Technical Review at
the USEPA National Health and Environmental Effects Laboratory's Western Ecology Division
in Corvallis, OR.
Elizabeth Riley, an Oak Ridge Institute for Science and Education (ORISE) Fellow with USEPA
Office of Water, provided invaluable technical support to almost every component of the NWCA
FOM. In particular, Elizabeth wrote text for the appendices and competently led demonstrations
of the protocols for the 2010 Technical Review and other NWCA meetings. Lenore Vasilas*,
Phil King*, and other soil scientists with the US Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource
Conservation Service provided input that was key to development of the soils chapter. Joanna
Lemly* from the Colorado Natural Heritage Program and Michael Bourdaghs* from the
Minnesota Pollution Control Agency provided detailed reviews of all the chapters of the FOM
and served as co-chairs of the NWCA FOM Technical Review Panel.
The NWCA builds on the work of the other National Aquatic Resource Surveys conducted by
the USEPA and the states and tribes (see
http://water.epa.gov/type/watersheds/monitoring/nationalsurveys.cfm). Other key contributors
are noted below. While space limitations prevent listing of all the people who contributed to the
Field Operations Manual, we gratefully acknowledge their input and extend our most sincere
thanks to them as well.
- Michael Scozzafava, USEPA Office of Water
State and Tribal Programs
Beth Connors, Maine Department of Environmental Protection
Jeanne DiFranco, Maine Department, of Environmental Protection
Jan Smith, Massachusetts Bays National Estuary Program
Marc Carullo, Massachusetts Coastal Zone Management
Lisa Rhodes, Massachusetts Department Environmental Protection
Alan Quackenbush, Vermont Agency of Natural Resources
Kathleen Walz, New Jersey Natural Heritage Program
Kerry Strout, New England Interstate Water Pollution Control Commission
Amy Jacobs, Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control
VII
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Alison Rogerson, Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control
Danielle Kreeger, Delaware Estuary National Estuary Program
David Davis, Virginia Department of Environmental Quality
Michelle Henicheck, Virginia Department of Environmental Quality
Walt Kordek, West Virginia Department of Natural Resources
Virginia Baker, North Carolina Department of the Environment and Natural Resources
*Rick Savage, North Carolina Department of the Environment and Natural Resources
*Barbara Scott, Kentucky Department of Water
Brian Gara, Ohio Environmental Protection Agency
*Mick Miccachion, Ohio Environmental Protection Agency
John Mack, Cleveland Metroparks
Peg Bostwick, Michigan Department of Natural Resources and Environment
Tracy Collin, Michigan Department of Natural Resources and Environment
Todd Lessee, Michigan Department of Natural Resources and Environment
Tom Bernthal, Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources
Gina LaLiberte, Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources
John Genet, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency
Ted LaGrange, Nebraska Game and Parks
Debra Baker, Kansas Water Office
Vince Evelsizer, Iowa Department of Natural Resources
Cat Mclntyre, Montana Natural Heritage Program
Karen Newlon, Montana Natural Heritage Program
Linda Vance, Montana Natural Heritage Program
Jason Jones, Arizona Department of Environmental Quality
*Betty Fetcher, Southern California Coastal Water Research Project
Chris Solek, Southern California Coastal Water Research Project
Eric Stein, Southern California Coastal Water Research Project
Martha Sutula, Southern California Coastal Water Research Project
Josh Collins, San Francisco Estuary Institute
Aaron Borisenko, Oregon Department of Environmental Quality
Janet Morlan, Oregon Division of State Lands
Kathy Verble, Oregon Division of State Lands
Renee Davis-Borne, Oregon Watershed Enhancement Board
Tom Hruby, Washington Department of Ecology
Joe Rocchio, Washington Department of Natural Resources
*Jason Pappani, Idaho Department of Environmental Quality
Terri Lomax, Alaska Department of Environmental Control
Academia, Non-Profit and Private Organizations
Rick Rheinhardt, East Carolina University
Dennis McCauley, Great Lakes Environmental Center
Jamie Saxton, Great Lakes Environmental Center
Chris Turner, Great Lakes Environmental Center
Siobhan Fennessy, Kenyon College
Jan Stevenson, Michigan State University
Cara Clark, Moss Landing Marine Laboratories
Kevin O'Connor, Moss Landing Marine Laboratories
Don Faber-Langendoen, NatureServe
Robert Peet, North Carolina State University
*Shawn DeKeyser, North Dakota State University
Christine Hargiss, North Dakota State University
Paul Adamus, Oregon State University
Rob Brooks, Penn State University
Sarah (Miller) Chamberlain, Penn State University
Hannah Ingram, Penn State University
Denice Wardrop, Penn State University
*Kelly Reiss, University of Florida
John Galbraith, Virginia Tech University
Kirk Havens, Virginia Institute of Marine Science
VIM
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Federal Agencies
Tom Dahl, US Fish and Wildlife Service
Keith Loftin, US Geologic Survey
Tom Heitmuller, US Geologic Survey
Martin Stapanian, US Geologic Survey
Keith Langdon, National Park Service
Kate Miller, National Park Service
*Brian Mitchell, National Park Service
Billy Schweiger, National Park Service
Larry West, US Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service
Chris Smith, US Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service
Rich Ferguson, US Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service
Dan Shurtliff, US Department of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service
Cameron Loerch, US Deparment of Agriculture, Natural Resource Conservation Service
Chris Carlson, US Department of Agriculture, Forest Service
Gregg Serenbetz USEPA
Chris Faulkner, USEPA HQ
Sarah Lehmann, USEPA HQ
Ellen Tarquinio, USEPA HQ
Timothy Taylor, USEPA HQ
Jeanne Voorhees, USEPA Region 1
Tom Faber, USEPA Region 1
Kathleen Drake, USEPA Region 2
*Regina Poeske, USEPA Region 3
Peter Kalla, USEPA Region 4
David Melgaard, USEPA Region 4
Bill Ainslie, US EPA Region 4
Diana Woods, US EPA Region 4
*Peter Jackson, USEPA Region 5
Sue Elston, USEPA Region 5
Mark Stead, USEPA Region 6
Richard Prather, USEPA Region 6
Laura Hunt, USEPA Region 6
Eliodora Chamberlain, USEPA Region 7
Leah Medley, USEPA Region 7
Jill Minter, USEPA Region 8
Karl Hermann, USEPA Region 8
Paul Jones, USEPA Region 9
*Mary Anne Theising, USEPA Region 10
Virginia Engle, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Michael Osland, USEPA Office of Research and Development
*Janet Nestlerode, USEPA Office of Research and Development
*Anett Trebitz, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Mary Moffet, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Amanda Nahlik, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Walt Nelson, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Christine Weilhoefer, USEPA Office of Research and Development
David Peck, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Debra Taylor, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Alex Amario, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Cathleen Wigand, USEPA Office of Research and Development
Charles Lane, USEPA Office of Research and Development
* Member of the 2010 Technical Review Panel
IX
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Errata
A. Minor Errors or Changes in Forms or Labels and Modifications to Accompanying Protocols
Errors on forms or labels that will be corrected on the final data forms to be provided in the Form Packets for sampling in
summer 2011 are:
1) Form AA-1: NWCA Assessment Area Establishment (Front)
The spaces for entering the LAT in the Location oftheAA section have been changed to accommodate entering decimal
degrees, which is the format used in NARS.
2) Form B-l: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots (Front)
a) The right half of the Location field under the header has been changed to document situations when data could
not be collected for Buffer Plot(s) due to inability to access. See below.
b) In the Buffer Natural Cover Strata legend, under Canopy Type, note that more than one bubble can be filled out to
indicate that a mixed canopy is present. See image below.
Location:
O AA Center ON OS OE OW
Fill in bubbteJBJ if plot(s) could not be sampled and flag
O Plot 1 O Plot 2 O Plot 3
Buffer Natural Cover Strata
f NDJ Ime canopy
^(io-40%^, 3 - iss
c) Under Buffer Cover Strata "bare dirt" has been changed to "bare ground".
3) Form B-l: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots -Targeted Alien Species (Back)
a) Canada thistle and leafy spurge have been added to the target alien list.
b) Four spaces for "Other" alien species are included, should states want to record this information for their use.
c) The location and plot coordinates section of this form has been changed and clarified. Now the section is titled Plot
Coordinates. The new form provides instruction on what to record about Buffer Plot location and what to record if
a Buffer Plot is not accessible. See image below.
PLOT COORDINATES
Provide GPS coordinates at the center of the Buffer PW t'#3) at the far end of each Buffer Transect aid for the Buffer Plot at the M CENTER. Indicate the
location of the plot coordinates by filling in the appropriate bubble.
If Buffer Plot 3 can not be accessed, take tie coordinates at the nearest practicable location ALONG THE TRANSECT. This is important because all Buffer
Plots are centered on the Buffer Transects and the coordinates will indicate the location of the transect, nil in the "nearest practicable location" bubble, ill in th<
flag box, and describe wheie the coorthates were taken and why in the comment sectors below. The coordinates of the nearest practicable location can be
either placed as dose to the center of Rot 3 as possible or at the center of tie last accessible Buffer Plot.
Location of coordinates (choose one):
QAA CENTER O N3 O S3 Q E3 O W3
O Nearest practicable location (flag and comment below)
Latitude North
Longitude West
Use Decimal Degrees; NAD83
4) Form V-l: NWCA Vegetation Plot Establishment (Front)
a) Plot Location section:
i) A parenthetical phrase has been added so the plot location section heading now reads: "Plot locations in
relation to AA (in non-standard Vegetation plot layout)". This means that distance and bearing need only be
recorded for Alternate Veg Plot Layouts.
ii) The Veg Plot location column titled "Based on Magnetic or True North" has been deleted.
iii) The column titled "Bearing" has been changed to "Magnetic N Bearing". This means that bearing to plots
from the AA CENTER should be recorded based on magnetic north.
2011 NWCA FOM Errata
-------
b) Plant Species Nomenclature section:
i) The phrase "Plant species names must be based on USDA-PLANTS (http://plants.usda.gov/)" has been
changed to read "Plant species names should be based on USDA-PLANTS (http://plants.usda.gov/)". If
possible, reconcile the species names to USDA-PLANTS. If this is not feasible, then be certain that you list the
floras used for plant identification and naming conventions for each NWCA (see iii below).
ii) Only fill in the following bubble if the species names have been reconciled to USDA PLANTS:
"O USDA-PLANTS - Fill to indicate names for plant species observed at this site have been reconciled to
USDA-PLANTS". Leave this bubble unfilled if this reconciliation has not been completed.
iii) Under the "Record citations for Floras/Field Guides/Databases used for plant identification" section do the
following:
(1) Record the citation for the primary flora you are using for plant identification first under 1.
(2) Record secondary floras or field guides under 2 through 4.
(3) For any species names recorded on Form V-2 or V-4 that are not included in your primary flora, flag them
and indicate the citation (2 through 4, or other nomenclatural source) that applies. You do not need to
flag species that use the nomenclature from your primary flora.
(4) /r/5 CRITICALLY IMPORTANT that the floristic citations used at the site are included on Form V-l to allow
reconciliation of the species names to one standard nomenclature nationwide.
5) Form V-3: NWCA Ground Surface Attributes (Back) - In the Vegetative Litter section in the Plot 1 cell of the
Predominant or Primary Litter Types field, the "E" and "F" bubbles were inverted. This has been corrected so that the
order of choices is the same for all Plot cells in this field.
6) Form V-4b: NWCA Snag and Tree Counts and Tree Cover (Continued) - The form title has been corrected. Previously
the title was incorrect and listed as Form V-4a.
7) Plant Specimen Label - The last row of the label has been corrected from "Plant Habitat" to "Plant Habit".
8) Form S-l: NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front) - In the horizon cells for the Composition field of the Redoximorphic, Organic,
or Mottle Feature Types Section, a small error has been corrected: "M" has been changed "Mn" to reflect the
abbreviation for Manganese.
B. Errors to Figure 5-3 - Several "species presence" bubbles were inadvertently left unfilled on this example of a filled-out
set of Form V-2a and V-2b: NWCA Vascular Presence and Cover that are illustrated in Figure 5-3a-c in the FOM. In
addition, incorrect cover values were recorded for two species. The corrections needed across Figure 5-3a and 5-3c
are:
1) Mimulus primuloides: Plot 1 - Fill the S (Im2-quadrat) bubble for NE corner.
2) Polygonum bistortoides: Plot 2 - Fill the S bubble for the NE corner.
3) Carex2- Rugose sheath: Plot 2-% Cover should read "50".
4) Salix 1 -Yellow twig: Plot 1-Cross out L bubble and fill in S bubble for NE corner.
5) Salix 1 - Yellow twig: Plot 4 - % Cover should read "5".
6) Carex utriculata: Plot 2-Fill the S bubble for the NE corner.
7) Carex utriculata: Plot 4 - Fill the L (100m2-plot) bubble for the SW corner.
8) Aconitum columbianum: Plot 2 - Fill the L bubble for the NE corner.
9) Pinnate-Lf Umbel: Plot 3-Fill the L bubble for the NE corner.
10) Deschampsia caespitosa: Plot 3-Fill in the S bubble for NE corner
11) Deschampsia caespitosa: Plot 4- Fill the M (10m2-quadrat) for the SW corner and the S bubble for the NE corner.
12) Carex limosa: Plot 3 - Fill the L bubble for the SW corner and the S bubble for the NE corner.
We recommend that you fill in the appropriate bubbles in Figure 5-3 in your copy of the FOM so that it is accurate.
C. Chapter 9. Algae - In several places in Chapter 9 of the NWCA FOM, the term "epiphytes" is erroneously used to mean
"epiphytic algae", i.e., algae growing on plants.
2011 NWCA FOM Errata
-------
NWCA 2011 Protocol Clarifications
Chapters. Vegetation
1) Plant specimen collection - Follow the protocols in the FOM carefully (Sections 5.1.3.land 5.2), with the
following change for unknown plant specimens:
a) Collect all unknown species that are mature and have the key elements needed for keying-out and
identifying specimens (e.g., leaves, stems, flowers and/or fruits).
b) For immature or senescent specimens with key parts missing (e.g., grasses or sedges with only leaf blades
and no flowers or fruits; forbs that are seedlings, have unremarkable leaf shapes, or missing flowers), do
the following:
i) If the species has >10% cover, collect it anyway. It is possible that a regional expert may be able to
identify the species even it is incomplete.
ii) If the species has < 10% cover do not collect a specimen, but still record a pseudonym and estimate
its cover.
2) Estimating DBH (diameter breast height) for live trees and snags - Follow the protocols in the FOM carefully
(Section 5.1.3.9, Form V-4), with the following clarification for trees or snags with multiple trunks:
a) If the tree or snag has one trunk up to breast height (1.37m, estimate this height - do not measure) then
splits into multiple trunks above this height, estimate its DBH below the split.
b) If the tree or snag has multiple trunks originating below breast height (1.37m), then estimate the DBH of
each trunk.
3) Cover of Arboreal Lichens and Bryophytes - Follow this clarified procedure for estimating the cover of
arboreal lichens and bryophytes. If arboreal (living on shrubs and trees) bryophytes and lichens are present,
view the amount of branch, twig, or trunk surface area of woody vegetation in the Veg Plot that this group
occupies. Imagine that all arboreal lichens and bryophytes were dropped like a blanket on the horizontal
surface of the Veg Plot and estimate its cover. Make this estimate rapidly as you scan the available arboreal
surface area. It is intended to give a gross indication of the amount of arboreal bryophytes and lichens
present.
Chapters. Algae
1) Chlorophyll-a Sample - Follow the protocols in the FOM carefully (Section 9.1.4), except with the following
addition. When the last volume of algal sample is being filtered into the flask, rinse the graduated cylinder
with a small amount (e.g., 10 ml) of Dl water to capture all remaining algal cells. Add this rinsate to the
remaining volume in the filter funnel on the flask and extract most of the liquid. Rinse the sides of the filter
funnel with a very small amount of Dl water. Add MgCO3 and complete the extraction of liquid from the
sample on the filter paper.
2011 NWCA FOM Protocol Clarifications
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
CHAPTER 1. OVERVIEW OF NWCA
1.1 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES OF NWCA
This manual describes field protocols and daily operations for the National Wetland Condition
Assessment (NWCA). The NWCA is one in a series of statistically-valid National Aquatic
Resource Surveys (NARS) conducted by the Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) to
provide the public with a comprehensive assessment of the condition of the Nation's waters. In
addition to wetlands, the NARS surveys coastal waters, lakes, and flowing waters in a revolving
sequence.
USEPA will collaborate with state, tribal, federal, and other partners to implement the NWCA to
meet three goals:
1. Produce a report that describes the ecological condition of the Nation's wetlands.
2. Assist states and tribes in the implementation of wetland monitoring and assessment
programs that will guide policy development and aid project decision-making.
3. Advance the science of wetlands monitoring and assessment to support management
needs.
The NWCA responds to the long-term goals outlined in USEPA's current strategic plan (USEPA
2006a) to improve the Nation's water quality (Goal 2.3) and to protect, sustain, and restore the
health of critical natural habitats and ecosystems, including wetlands (Goal 4.3). Development
of the NWCA builds on the accomplishments of the U.S. Fish and Wldlife Service (USFWS) and
their production of national reports on status and trends in wetland acreage. When taken
together, the results from the NWCA and the USFWS Wetland Status and Trends (S&T) will
over time be used to measure progress toward attainment of the national goal to increase the
quantity and quality of the Nation's wetlands. These complementary studies can influence how
wetlands are managed at local, state, and national scales (Scozzafava et al. 2007).
1.2 KEY DEFINITIONS
Condition - The current state of a resource compared to reference relative to physical,
chemical and biological characteristics.
Survey Design - 900 wetland assessment locations were randomly selected from the USFWS
S&T plots using a survey design that ensures the sample is representative of wetland resources
at national and regional scales (Stevens and Olsen 2004). The S&T plots were used as the
base data layer because they are the most consistent and current source of mapped wetlands
on a national scale. NWCA sites are distributed across seven of the wetland classes
characterized by S&T to facilitate comparison of the findings from both efforts. In addition, some
states invested resources to supplement the NWCA survey design to provide state-scale
reporting of wetland quality. For example, additional NWCA sites were added in North Dakota
to allow reporting of wetland quality for the Prairie Pothole region.
1-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
Target Population -Tidal and nontidal wetlands of the conterminous U.S., including certain
farmed wetlands not currently in crop production. The wetlands have rooted vegetation and,
when present, open water less than 1 meter deep. A wetland's jurisdictional status1 under state
or federal regulatory programs will not affect a site's status as target.
Sample Frame - The 2005 National Wetland Status and Trends assessment sample frame,
obtained through collaboration with the USFWS. The S&T sample frame consists of all
polygons mapped based on primarily 2005 remote sensing information for over 5,048 four
square-mile plots across the 48 states. Additional attributes added to the sample frame were
the boundaries for states, EPA Regions, Omernik Level III Ecoregions, and Wadeable Stream
Assessment ecoregions.
S&T Classification -A modified version of the Cowardin classification system (Cowardin et al.
1979) used by USFWS S&T. The NWCA will include wetlands from the following S&T
categories because these wetlands are very likely to be consistent with the target population for
the NWCA:
• Estuarine Intertidal Emergent
• Estuarine Shrub/Forested
• Palustrine Emergent
• Palustrine Scrub/Shrub
• Palustrine Forested
• Palustrine Unconsolidated Bottom and Aquatic Bed
• Palustrine Farmed.
The NWCA will not include wetlands from the following S&T categories because wetlands in
these categories are not consistent with the NWCA target population:
• Estuarine and Marine Intertidal Aquatic Bed
• Estuarine Intertidal Unconsolidated Shore
• Palustrine Unconsolidated Shore.
Reporting Units - The survey design will allow USEPA to report nationally on all wetlands in
the target population, all wetlands in the target population by S&T and Hydrogeomorphic (HGM)
wetland class, and on all wetlands in the target population occurring in coastal watersheds. In
addition, USEPA expects to report results by the Wadeable Streams Assessment Ecoregions
(USEPA 2006b) and other geographically-derived assessment units that have yet to be
determined. These may be a "political" unit (i.e., state or territory) or a unit at a higher
resolution, for example, a watershed within the political unit. In addition, states and tribes that
are able to invest additional resources will have the opportunity to leverage USEPA design and
logistical support to produce a state or tribal-scale assessment.
POINT - The location defined by the coordinates generated by the NWCA sample draw. Not all
POINTS generated by the sample draw will be sampleable or part of the target population.
Assessment Area - The area sampled that represents the POINT. Assessment Area (AA) will
encompass the POINT and is typically 0.5ha in area. Most of the data for the NWCA will be
collected within the AA.
1 Impacts to wetlands and other aquatic resources are regulated under the Clean Water Act when an
aquatic resource is determined to be a "Water of the United States." Jurisdictional Determinations are
made on a case-by-case basis according to the definition found in 40 CFR 230.3(s). For more
information please visit the website: http://www.epa.gov/owow/wetlands/guidance/CWAwaters.html.
1-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
Index Period - the peak growing season when most vegetation is in flower or fruit. Sampling
during this period minimizes seasonal phenological variability and enhances plant species
identification accuracy, particularly of difficult species such as grasses and sedges. Although
some early ephemeral flowering forbs may be missed by not sampling early in the season, most
plant species will be in mature reproductive stages and more readily detected and identified.
Vegetation (Veg) Team - a Botanist/Ecologist and a Botanist Assistant. Primary responsibilities
for the Veg Team are:
• Laying out the Assessment Area (AA) and vegetative plots;
• Collecting high quality plant ecological data (including species identities, presence
and cover of individual species, presence and cover of vertical vegetation strata, and
counts of trees);
• Collecting other information related to vegetation condition;
• Collecting and processing plant specimens.
Assessment Area-Buffer (AB) Team - two crew members, whose primary responsibilities are:
• Collecting high-quality biological (e.g., algal samples), water quality, hydrology, soils
and stressor data,
• Collecting and processing associated samples.
Indicator - a major component of an ecosystem or a stressor type that can be used to assess
ecological integrity or condition.
1.3 OVERVIEW OF INDICATORS
Multiple indicators will be assessed in the NWCA to maximize the potential of detecting
anthropogenic stress and describing its potential effect on wetland condition across multiple
spatial scales. The choice of NWCA field methods and indicators was influenced by
considerations of timing and resources, such as the need to complete travel and sampling for
each site in one day. A summary of the indicators, and their relation to wetland condition, is
provided below.
Vegetation will be characterized by collecting plant data in five 100-m2 Vegetation Plots
systematically placed across the AA. Vegetation is a major component of biodiversity found in
wetlands and is habitat for a myriad of organisms. The composition and abundance of plant
species is both reflective of, and may influence, the hydrology, water quality, and soil
characteristics of a wetland. Plants respond to, and reflect, physical, chemical, or biological
disturbances and stressors (Selinger-Looten et al. 1999, Rayamajhi et al. 2006). The presence
and abundance of alien plant species often reflect degraded or declining quality. In addition,
plant data can be used to derive a numerous metrics or indicators that are useful descriptors of
ecological integrity or stress (e.g., USEPA 2002a, Bourdaghs et al. 2006, Magee et al. 2008,
Mack and Kentula 2010). Examples of the types of data to be collected are:
• Species composition and abundance
• Native species
• Alien species
• Floristic quality
• Guild composition
• Community composition
• Vegetation structure
1-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
Soils data will be collected in four soil pits and will include an on-site description of the soil
profile and collection of four types of soil samples (chemistry, bulk density, soil enzymes and
stable isotopes) for laboratory analysis. Soils cycle nutrients, store pollutants, mediate
groundwater, and provide habitat for microorganisms, invertebrates, and other more complex
organisms (Richardson and Vepraskas 2001). Biogeochemical processes characteristic of
hydric soils directly influence wetland condition and the delivery of associated ecosystem
services. Soil structure and chemistry can indicate water quality and hydrology (Hargreaves et
al. 2003, Mitsch and Gosselink 2007). Examples of the types of data to be collected are:
• Soil profile description
• Hydric soil field indicators
• Soil chemistry.
Hydrology data will include an assessment of hydrologic sources and connectivity, indirect
evidence of hydroperiod, estimates of hydrologic fluctuations, and documentation of hydrology
alterations or stressors. Wetland hydrology is the primary driver of wetland formation and
persistence. Hydrology impacts soil geochemical dynamics, plant productivity, nutrient cycling,
and accretion and erosion of organic and inorganic materials in wetlands (Mitch and Gosselink
2007, Tiner 1999). Examples of the types of data to be collected are:
• Degree of saturation
• Degree of inundation
• Types of hydrologic alteration.
When standing water is present at a wetland assessment area, water chemistry samples will
be taken and analyzed for general surface water conditions, various chemical analytes, and
evidence of disturbance. Total nitrogen and phosphorus reflect the trophic state of the wetland,
providing crucial information on possible eutrophication (Keddy 1983). Anthropogenic
disturbances such as hydrologic modifications and land use changes are known to alter water
quality variables (Lane and Brown, 2007; Reiss and Brown, 2005).
Algae samples will be collected from substrates (substrate samples) and from the surface of
vegetation stems and leaves (epiphytic samples), and, if water is present, from water
(planktonic samples). Algae respond rapidly to ecological change in wetlands and have been
widely used as indicators of wetland condition because of their rapid reproduction rates, short
life cycles, and broad distribution (McCormick and Cairns 1994). More notably, because
nutrients such as nitrogen and phosphorus are limiting factors to most types of algae, they
respond quickly to excess nutrients. In addition, diatom species can provide insights into past
hydrology such as recent flooding, standing water, or droughts (Lane and Brown 2007, USEPA
2002, McCormick and Cairns 1994). Data on species composition and abundance, including
guilds, and the presence of algal toxins will be collected.
As part of the NWCA we will also evaluate the utility across regions and wetland classes of the
newly-developed USA Rapid Assessment Method (USA-RAM). Rapid assessment methods
are becoming increasingly useful tools for evaluating the ecological integrity of wetlands and the
risk posed by stressors affecting the broader environment. (Fennessy et al. 2004, Fennessy et
al. 2007). The primary purpose of USA-RAM is to effectively assess wetland condition in a
significantly shorter timeframe than required for more detailed sampling. It unites information
gained from field observations of wetland ecology, buffers and stessors. Once verified, USA-
RAM will provide states and tribes with a wetland assessment tool that can be adapted to meet
their own monitoring needs.
1-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
1.4 NWCA REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
The complete documentation of overall project management, design, methods, rationale and
standards for the NWCA is contained in eight companion documents and two fact sheets.
Ecological Indicators for the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment (In
Preparation) presents the rationale for the indicators and metrics selected for inclusion in the
NWCA.
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Quality Assurance Project Plan (EPA-843-R10-
003) contains the elements of the overall project management, data quality objectives,
measurement and data acquisition, and information management for NWCA.
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Site Evaluation Guidelines (EPA-843-R10-004)
provide the process involved in locating a sampling site, evaluating the site to determine if it
should be sampled, and selecting appropriate alternate sites when necessary.
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Field Operations Manual (EPA-843-R10-001)
documents field protocols and daily operations for use by Field Crews during the NWCA.
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Laboratory Operations Manual (EPA-843-R10-
002) documents laboratory protocols for use by laboratory personnel for sample processing
associated with the NWCA.
National Wetland Condition Assessment: USA RAM Field Operations Manual (In Review)
documents the procedures for completing the rapid assessment component of the NWCA field
protocols.
National Wetland Condition Assessment: Data Analysis Plan (Draft) outlines the questions
we intended to pursue while analyzing data from the NWCA.
State Safety Plans are created by the participating states and tribes for use during the National
Wetland Condition Assessment (NWCA). They are based on state or tribal safety procedures
and not provided by EPA.
1-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
1-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
1.5 NWCA FACT SHEETS
Purpose
Report on the
condition of the
Nation's wetlands.
Help States and
Tribes implement
wetland monitoring
and assessment
programs.
Advance the
science of wetlands
monitoring and
assessment.
National Wetland
Condition Assessment
Fact Sheet
What is the National Wetland Condition Assessment?
The National Wetland Condition Assessment (NWCA) is a statistical survey of the quality of
our Nation's wetlands. The NWCA is designed to:
« Determine the ecological integrity of wetlands at regional and national scales.
» Build state and tribal capacity for monitoring and analyses.
• Promote collaboration across jurisdictional boundaries.
• Achieve a robust, statistically-valid set of wetland data.
• Develop baseline information to evaluate progress.
This is one of a series of water surveys being conducted by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), states, tribes, and other partners. In addition to wetlands,
partners will also study coastal waters, wadeable streams, rivers, and lakes in a revolving
sequence. The purpose of these surveys is to generate statistically-valid and
environmentally relevant reports on the condition of the Nation's water resources.
What are the goals of the NWCA?
EPA will collaborate with state and tribal partners to implement the National Wetland
Condition Assessment to meet three goals:
1. Produce a national report that describes the quality of the nation's wetlands,
2. Help States and Tribes implement wetland monitoring and assessment programs to
guide policy development and project decision-making,
3. Advance the science of wetlands monitoring and assessment.
The sampling design for this survey is a probability-based network that will provide statistically-valid estimates of
condition for a population of wetlands with a known confidence. It is designed using modern survey techniques.
Sample points are selected at random to represent the condition of wetlands across the country.
What is the design for the National Wetland Condition Assessment?
2011 NWCA Site Locations EPA worked closely with the US FWS Wetlands Status
and Trends program to utilize their network of analysis
plots as the sampling frame for the NWCA. This will
ensure that the two studies effectively complement
each other to provide decision makers with
scientifically-defensible information documenting the
current status of both wetland quantity and quality in
the United States
The survey design is a two-stage design with the first
stage design from the FWS National Wetland Status
and Trend survey design. The first stage is an area
frame design stratified by state and physiographic
region where the area frame consists of 2 mi by 2 mi
plots that cover the 48 contiguous states. The first
stage results in the identification of land cover types focused on wetland types within each 2 mi by 2 mi plot selected
1-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
(sample size is approximately 5000 plots). The second stage is a Generalized Random Tessellation Stratified
(GRTS) survey design for an area resource applied to the stage one sample plots. The second stage survey design
is a stratified design with unequal probability of selection based on area within each stratum. Stratification is by state
and unequal probability of selection is by seven (7) wetland type categories.
What is the status of planning and design for the Wetlands Assessment?
EPA achieved a number of significant milestones in 2009 and is now positioned to develop final products for the
National Wetland Condition Assessment in 2010. By the end of the year, EPA will select the survey sampling points,
initiate site reconnaissance, finalize the Field Operations Manual and Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP), and
solidify collaborative relationships with state, tribal, and federal partners.
Some of the major planning accomplishments in 2009 include:
• Working with EPA, the US FWS developed a new stratum of Status
and Trends plots along the Pacific Coast to provide greater
geographical coverage and supply more estuarine sites for the
National Wetlands Condition Assessment.
• Following a year-long stakeholder process, EPA completed a draft
Field Operations Manual (FOM). The manual includes field protocols
for sampling vegetation, soils, hydrology, algae, water quality, and the
wetland buffer. The FOM was reviewed by state and federal partners
during the 2009 field season. Their comments will be used to inform
revisions. The next iteration of the FOM will be complete by April
2009 and reviewed during two technical workshops in April and May
2009.
• Working with partners, EPA began drafting a Data Analysis Plan for
the NWCA. This plan will inform how the NWCA Data Analysis Team
establishes reference condition, develops Indices of Biotic Integrity,
calculates the relative risk of the most common wetland stressors,
and validates a national Rapid Assessment Method from Intensive
wetland monitoring data.
What is the schedule for the NWCA?
Activities
2007-2009
Research
Design
Lab/Data
Report
Scientific issues
Policy issues
Supplemental data analysis
Methods refinement
Target population
Indicators
Field/ Lab practices
Quality assurance plan
Training
Site reconnaissance
Sample collection
Field quality assurance
Lab analysis
Lata quality assurance
Data entry
Data quality assurance
Data analysis
Presentations
Peer review
Final report
Contact(s):
Michael Scozzafava, OW(scozzafava.rnichaele(a)epa.gov)
Gregg Serenbetz, OWfserenbetz.areciafgjepa.ciov'l
Wetlands Division (4502T)
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20460
Chris Faulkner, OWffaulkner.chrisfaiepa.gov'l
Mary Kentula, ORD (kentula.matvfgiepa.govl
EPA-843-F-OS-001
Januaiv 2008
1-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
Survey of the Nation's Wetlands:
A Fact Sheet for Communities
Introduction
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA), states, and tribes are
conducting the first-ever nationwide
survey of the condition of the nation's
wetlands. This survey, the National
Wetlands Condition Assessment, is one in
a series of Studies that will help us
measure the health of our waters, take
action to prevent pollution, and evaluate
the effectiveness of protection and
restoration efforts.
Designed to estimate the percentage of
wetlands that are in good, fair, or poor
condition, this survey will serve as a
scientific report card on America's
wetlands. It will examine ecological,
biological and water quality indicators and
assess the extent of key stressors
across the country.
This survey is a collaborative effort that
involves dozens of state environmental
and natural resource agencies, federal
agencies, tribes, universities and other
organizations. In most states, state
water quality staff will conduct the
ecological sampling and habitat
assessments.
How were wetlands selected?
A total of 900 wetland sites are included
in this survey, representing seven wetland
types and distributed across the lower 48
states. EPA selected the wetland sites
from the network of plots in the U.S.
Fish Wildlife Service's wetland status and
trends report, which characterizes
wetland acreage by type in the lower 48
states. Sampling sites were selected
randomly using a statistical survey design
to represent the population of wetlands in
their ecological region - the geographic
area in which climate, ecological features,
and plant and animal communities are
similar.
Distribution of wetlands in the survey
What about my wetland?
If your wetland is being sampled for this
survey, it was selected randomly from the
total population of wetlands in your part
of the country. Your wetland was not
selected because it exhibits any
1-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
particular problem or water quality
condition, or because it was recommended
for sampling by on agency or organization.
Data from your wetland will contribute to
the regional and national picture of
wetland condition.
If your wetland is not being sampled for
this survey, it was not omitted for any
particular reason, but rather because it
was not randomly selected or did not fit
into the target population of wetlands
(e.g., wetlands that have rooted
vegetation and water not greater than
one meter in depth).
The National Wetlands Condition
Assessment (NWCA) is designed to
complement the U.S. Fish and Wildlife
Service's status and trends report.
When paired together, the two efforts
will provide comparable and scientifically-
defensible national information on
wetland quantity and quality. The NWCA
will also provide a regional - and in some
cases, statewide - assessment of wetland
condition and allow for comparison of a
particular wetland to the range of
wetlands in a region or state.
What will researchers
measure?
Field crews will be taking many
measurements at each selected wetland
site. They will be using consistent
procedures at all sites so that results can
be compared across the country. They
will be measuring such things as:
• The presence and abundance of
grassy plants, trees, and shrubs
• (Algae collected from sediments and
the surface of plant stems and
leaves
• Soil properties and chemistry
• Water chemistry (such as dissolved
oxygen, nutrients, chlorophyll-a)
• Condition of the habitat in the area
surrounding the wetland.
What happens next?
Field crews will sample during the summer
of 2011. EPA intends to issue a report on
the findings in 2013. Between the sampling
period and publication of the national
report, samples will be analyzed in the lab,
the data will be entered into a database
and analyzed, and a draft report will be
written and reviewed. The public will have
the opportunity to review and comment on
the draft report.
For more information, visit:
http://WQter.epQ.gov/type/wetlands/assess
ment/survey/i rdex.ef m
or email us with questions at
5 cozzaf ava.M i ehae le@epa.gov
5 eren bet z. £regg@ e pa. gov
Faulkner.Chris@epa.gov
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
1200 Pennsylvania Ave. NW (4502T)
Washington, OC 20460
October 2010
1-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
1.6 LITERATURE CITED
Bourdaghs, M., C.A. Johnston, and R.R. Regal. 2006. Properties and Performance of the
Floristic Quality Index in Great Lakes Coastal Wetlands. Wetlands 26:718-735.
Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet, and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of Wetlands and
Deepwater Habitats of the United States. FWS/OBS-79/31. U.S. Fish and Wldlife Service,
Washington, DC.
Fennessy, M.S., A.D. Jacobs, and M.E. Kentula. 2004. Review of rapid methods for assessing
wetland condition. EPA-620-R-04-009. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
D.C.
Fennessy, M.S., A.D. Jacobs, and M.E. Kentula. 2007. An evaluation of rapid methods for
assessing the ecological condition of wetlands. Wetlands 27(3):543-560.
Hargreaves, P.R., P.C. Brookes, G.J.S. Ross, and P.R. Poulton. 2003. Evaluating soil
microbial biomass carbon as an indicator of long-term environmental change. Soil Biology and
Biochemistry 35:401-407.
Keddy, P.A. 1983. Freshwater wetlands human-induced changes: indirect effects must also
be considered. Environmental Management 7(4): 299-302.
Lane, C.R. and M.T. Brown. 2007. Diatoms as indicators of isolated herbaceous wetland
condition in Florida, USA. Ecological Indicators 7(3):521-540.
Mack, J.J. and M.E. Kentula. 2010. Metric Similarity in Vegetation-Based Wetland Assessment
Methods. EPA/600/R-10/140. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and
Development, Washington, DC.
Magee, T.K, P.L. Ringold, and M. Bollman. 2008. Alien species importance in native
vegetation along wadeable streams, John Day River Basin, Oregon, USA. Plant Ecology
195(2): 287-307.
McCormick, P. and J. Cairns. 1994. Algae as indicators of environmental change. Journal of
Applied Phycology 6:509-526.
Mitsch, W.J. and J.G. Gosselink. 2007. Wetlands. 4th edition. John Wley & Sons, Hoboken,
NJ.
Rayamajhi, M., T. Van, P. Pratt, and T. Center. 2006. Temporal and structural effects of stands
on litter production in the Melalueca quinquenervia dominated wetlands of south Florida.
Wetlands Ecology and Management 14:303-316.
Reiss, K. and M. Brown. 2005. Evaluation of Florida palustrine wetlands: Application of USEPA
levels 1, 2, and 3 assessment methods. EcoHealth 4(2):206-218.
Richardson, J.L. and M.J. Vepraskas. 2001. Wetland Soils: Genesis, Hydrology, Landscape,
and Classification. Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, Florida, USA.
1-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 1. Overview of NWCA
Scozzafava, M.E., I.E. Dahl, C. Faulkner, and M. Price. 2007. Assessing status, trends, and
condition of wetlands in the United States. National Wetlands Newsletter 29:24-28.
Selinger-Looten, R., F. Grevilliot, and S. Muller. 1999. Structure of plant communities and
landscape patterns in allubial meadows of two flooded plains in the north-east of France.
Landscape Ecology 14:213-229.
Stevens, D.L., Jr. and A.R. Olsen. 2004. Spatially-balanced sampling of natural resources.
Journal of American Statistical Association 99:262-278.
Tiner, R. W. 1999. Wetland Indicators: A guide to wetland identification, delineation,
classification, and mapping. Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, Florida, USA.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2002a. Methods for Evaluating Wetland
Condition: #10 Using Vegetation to Assess Environmental Conditions in Wetlands. EPA-822-R-
02-020. Office of Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2002b. Methods for Evaluating Wetland
Condition: Using Algae to Assess Environmental Conditions in Wetlands. EPA-822-R-02-021.
Office of Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2006a. 2006-2011 EPA Strategic Plan:
Charting Our Course. EPA-190-R-06-001. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington,
DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2006b. Wadeable Streams Assessment: A
Collaborative Survey of the Nation's Streams. EPA 841-B-06-002. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
1-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
CHAPTER 2. BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES AND SUMMARY OF FIELD OPERATIONS
Introduction
2.1 LOGISTIC AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT FOR THE NWCA.
2.2 OVERVIEW OF KEY INFORMATION AND MATERIALS. . .
2.2.1 Site Packet.
2.2.1.1 Form Packet
2.2.12 NWCA Site Maps, Aerial Photos, GIS Imagery.
2.2.1.3 Soil Survey Information
2.2.2 Other Information Resources
2.2.3 Equipment and Supplies
2.2.3.1 Master Equipment List
2.2.3.2 Site Kit
2.2.3.3 Base Kit
2.2.4 Data Packet
2.2.5 Tracking Forms and Immediately or Batch Shipped Samples.
2.2.5.1 Immediately Shipped Samples
2.2.5.2 Batch Shipped Samples.
2.3 FIELD CREW RESPONSIBILITIES
2.4 PRE-SAMPLING BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES.
2.4.1 Sampling Index Period
2.4.2 Determining Sampling Order for NWCA Sites
2.4.3 Planning Field Itineraries and Preparation for Sampling.
2.4.4 Field Instrument Checks and Calibration
2.4.4.1 Laser Rangefinder.
2.4.4.2 Global Positioning System.
2.4.4.3 Camera Battery
2.4.4.4 Multi-probe Meter
2.4.5 Equipment and Supply Preparation
2.4.6 Vehicle Maintenance
2.5 DAILY FIELD ACTIVITIES.
2.5.1 Health and Safety.
2.5.2 Procedures for Recording Data
2.5.3 Daily Sampling Scenario (suggested sampling routine)
2.5.4 Sampling Activities and Forms Applicable to Multiple Indicators or Tasks
2.5.4.1 Determining Site and Sample Status (completing Form T-1)
2.5.4.2 Photography.
2.5.4.3 Guidelines for Global Positioning System (GPS) Use.
2.5.4.4 Site, Crew, and Equipment Cleanup and Check
2.6 POST-FIELD SAMPLING BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES
2.6.1 Post Sampling Base Location Clean-Up and Maintenance of Equipment.
2.6.2 Sample Shipping and Tracking
2.6.2.1 Tracking Forms
2.6.2.2 Immediately Shipped Samples and Tracking Form T-1.
2.6.2.3 Batch Shipped Samples and Tracking Forms
2.6.3 Data Packets - Handling and Transmittal
2.7 LITERATURE CITED
2.8. OVERVIEW REFERENCE CARDS.
Reference Card OPS-1. Preparation for Field Sampling of NWCA Sites
Reference Card OPS-2, Side A. Vegetation Team Sampling Day Activities
Reference Card OPS-2, Side B. Assessment Area-Buffer (AB) Team Sampling Day Activities
2.9 MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST, TRACKING FORMS, and SAMPLE LABELS
Master Equipment List
Tracking Forms Used for Multiple Indicators
Sample Label Sheet with Labels for Multiple Indicators
2-3
2-3
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-14
2-15
2-18
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-27
2-33
2-36
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-47
2-49
2-55
2-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
CHAPTER 2. BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES AND SUMMARY OF FIELD OPERATIONS
This chapter aids in structuring the field season and each sampling day by providing the
following information:
1) Contacts for logistic and technical support (Section 2.1).
2) Description of site information, data forms, equipment, and sample tracking needed for
NWCA (Section 2.2).
3) Field Crew responsibilities (Section 2.3).
4) Pre-sampling Base Location activities - Preparation for field sampling (activities essential for
staging field work and for accurate data and sample collection) (Section 2.4):
a) Determining the sampling index period and the sampling order for sites.
b) Developing weekly itineraries for sampling and compiling needed site information.
c) Instrument checks and calibration, equipment and supply preparation, and vehicle
maintenance.
5) Field Day activities (Section 2.5):
a) Health and Safety
b) Protocols for recording data.
c) Overview of sampling tasks (AA establishment; data collection in the buffer area; data
and sample collection for vegetation, soils, hydrology, water quality, and algae).
d) Field protocols used in multiple NWCA indicators
6) Post-sampling Base Location activities (Section 2.6):
a) Equipment maintenance and clean-up.
b) Sample shipping and tracking.
c) Handling and transmittal of completed data.
2.1 LOGISTIC AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT FOR THE NWCA
Effective communication between Field Crews, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
coordinators, and NWCA contractor support staff is essential for the survey to proceed with
maximum efficiency and to ensure collection of high quality data. This section provides 1) a
general description of the roles of key NWCA personnel in providing logistical and technical
support to the Field Crews, 2) the flow of communication between Field Crews and these
individuals (i.e., who to call for specific types of questions or support needs) (Table 2-1), and 2)
their contact information (Table 2-2).
The EPA Headquarters Project Management Team consists of the Project Leader, Alternate
Project Leaders, and Project QA Lead. The Team is responsible for overseeing all aspects of
the project and ensuring technical and quality assurance requirements are properly carried out.
The Team is the final authority on all decisions regarding field sampling, site evaluation, site
replacement, and laboratory analysis.
The EPA Regional Coordinators are the primary USEPA point of contact for Field Crews
operating in their Region. Field Crews should direct all technical and logistical questions to their
EPA Coordinator, who will work with the EPA HQ Team to resolve the issue. Field Crews
should also work with their EPA Coordinator to schedule an Assistance Visit to occur within
the first two weeks of field sampling. An Assistance Visit is part of the Quality Assurance
component of the NWCA (see NWCA Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP), USEPA 2011a).
To meet the requirements of the QAPP, each Field Crew will allow an EPA employee or
contractor to observe that crew sampling for one day. The Assistance Visit is used to confirm
2-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
the protocols are implemented as intended and to suggest corrective actions, if needed, to the
Field Crew's sampling approach.
The Information Management Coordinator tracks the Field Crew's sampling schedules to
provide packets of forms for each site scheduled to be sampled, and to track the location of
each NWCA sample that involves post-processing. Field crews are responsible for providing
the Information Management Coordinator with their sampling schedule before sampling occurs
and filing a status report after each site visit.
The Field Logistics Coordinator is responsible for tracking the Field Crew's sampling
schedules and whereabouts, providing site kits and base kits with supplies and equipment, and
assisting Field Crews with questions concerning field logistics, equipment, and supplies as they
arise during field season.
Table 2-1. Personnel to call for specific types of questions and support needs.
Personnel Call
EPA Regional Coordinators
- First, to ask any questions about the NWCA,
including questions on the field protocols
- To ask questions about your CWA Section 106
grant
- To schedule a field assistance visit
EPA HQ Project Management Team
(Comprised of the Project Leader, Alternate
Project Leaders, and Project QA Lead)
To ask questions about Site Access, Site
Evaluation, and Site Replacement
To ask questions about Shipping Locations and
Sample Handling Procedures
To ask questions about the Field Methods
To ask questions about the Survey Design
To ask questions about the Quality Assurance
Procedures
To ask questions about the Laboratory Methods
If you can't reach the EPA Regional Coordinator,
IM Coordinator, or Field Logistics Coordinator
If you are unsure of who to call
Personnel
ONLY Call
Information Management Coordinator
- To order more field forms
- To submit a status report
- To notify EPA about a change in sampling
schedule
- To ask questions about submitting the data packet
- If an EPA Regional Coordinator directs you to
contact them
Field Logistics Coordinator
- To order more site kits, base kits, or miscellaneous
consumable supplies
- To ask questions about the shipping contract, or to
order more shipping forms
- If an EPA Coordinator directs you to contact them
- If you can't reach an EPA HQ or Regional
Coordinator, and you have an urgent question
2-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Table 2-2. Contact Information for Logistic and Technical Support for the NWCA
Title
EPA HQ Project Leader
Alternate EPA HQ Project
Leader - Site Evaluation
Alternate EPA HQ Project
Leader
EPA HQ Project QA Lead
Field Logistics
Coordinators
Information Management
Coordinator
Regional EPA
Coordinators
Name
Michael Scozzafava, OW
Gregg Serenbetz, OW
Chris Faulkner, OW
Sarah Lehmann, OW
Chris Turner, Great Lakes
Environmental Center
Jamie Saxton, Great Lakes
Environmental Center
Marlys Cappaert, SRA
International Inc.
Jeanne Voorhees, Region 1
Tom Faber, Region 1
Kathleen Drake, Region 2
Darvene Adams, Region 2
Regina Poeske, Region 3
Bill Richardson, Region 3
David Melgaard, Region 4
Diana Woods, Region 4
Peter Kalla, Region 4
Peter Jackson, Region 5
Sue Elston, Region 5
Mari Nord, Region 5
Mark Stead, Region 6
Laura Hunt, Region 6
Richard Prather, Region 6
Eliodora Chamberlin, Reg 7
Gary Welker, Region 7
Karl Hermann, Region 8
Liz Rogers, Region 8
Julia McCarthy, Region 8
Paul Jones, Region 9
Terry Flemming, Region 9
Janet Hashimoto, Region 9
Mary Anne Thiesing, Reg 1 0
Gretchen Hayslip, Region 10
Contact Information
Scozzafava.MichaelE@epa.gov
202-566-1376; 202-407-2555 (cell)
Serenbetz.Gregg@epa.gov
202-566-1253
Faulkner.Chris@epa.gov
202-566-1185
Lehmann.Sarah@epa.gov
202-566-1379
cturner@glec.com
715-829-3737
isaxton@glec.com
231-941-2230
Cappaert.Marlvs@epa.gov
541-754-4667
Voorhees.ieanne@epa.gov
617-918-1686
Faber.Tom@epa.gov
617-918-8672
Drake.Kathleen@epa.gov
212-637-3817
Adams.Darvene@epa.gov
732-321-6700
Poeske.Regina@epa.gov
215-814-2725
Richardson.William@epa.gov
215-814-5675
Melgaard.David@epa.gov
404-562-9265
Woods.Diana@epa.gov
404-562-9404
Kalla.Peter@epa.gov
706-355-8778
Jackson.Peter@epa.gov
312-886-3894
Elston.Sue@epa.gov
312-886-6115
Nord.Mari@epa.gov
312-886-3017
Stead.Mark@epa.gov
214-665-2271
Hunt.Laura@epa.gov
214-655-9729
Prather.Richard@epa.gov
214-665-8333
Chamberlin.Eliodora@epa.gov
913-551-7945
Welker.Garv@epa.gov
913-551-7177
Hermann.Karl@epa.gov
303-312-6628
Rogers.Liz@epa.gov
303-312-6974
McCarthy.Julia@epa.gov
303-312-6628
Jones.Paul@epa.gov
415-972-3470
Flemming.Terrence@epa.gov
415-972-3462
Hashimoto.Janet@epa.gov
415-972-3452
Thiesing.Mary@epa.gov
206-553-6114
Havslip.Gretchen@epa.gov
206-553-1685
2-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.2 OVERVIEW OF KEY INFORMATION AND MATERIALS
Prior to going to an NWCA site to conduct sampling, the site's suitability for sampling will have
been evaluated using a desk evaluation and in many cases an on-site evaluation (see the
NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011b) and Chapter 3). Site evaluation includes
locating the NWCA POINT and confirming that the wetland at the POINT is a NWCA target
wetland type.
In addition, a variety of other kinds of information important for planning and conducting
sampling must be gathered and reviewed before going into the field. These activities are often
conducted from a base location. The base location is the location from which NWCA activities
are organized and staged; e.g., a state or tribal office, field lodgings, or a camp-site.
It is critical to efficient sampling to keep site information, data forms, sampling equipment, and
gear needed for data and sample collection at each NWCA site organized and readily available.
Likewise, managing completed data forms and the water quality, algae, soils, and plant samples
after collection is critical to data quality and sample tracking. For the NWCA, there are standard
ways to organize and handle the equipment needed to conduct sampling and the data and
samples gathered at each site. Key terms and steps for this organization process are defined or
introduced in this section.
2.2.1 Site Packet
A Site Packet contains information key to the planning and preparation for visiting and sampling
a particular NWCA site. Development of Site Packets should have been initiated during site
evaluation and reconnaissance (USEPA 2011b). However, the Field Crew (or other state, tribe,
or organization personnel) may need to gather additional information for the Site Packet during
preparation for the sampling visit to a site. Also, it is the responsibility of the Field Crew (or other
state, tribe, or organization personnel) to obtain access permissions and any needed permits as
part of developing the Site Packet.
Prior to the Field Crew traveling to a NWCA site for sampling, the information for the Site
Packet must be gathered and reviewed.
Site Packet Components
• Form Packet (see Section 2.2.1.1)
• Applicable Site Maps, Aerial Photos, and Other Imagery:
o NWCA State Site Maps, Imagery, and GIS Data (see Section 2.2.1.2) - Maps and
aerial photos for the NWCA sites in each state are included in the National Wetland
Condition Assessment 2011 Site Maps, with separate versions available for each
state. Maps or images from Google Earth and Arclnfo files depicting locations and
information for each NWCA Site are also provided by the NWCA EPA Headquarters
Project Management Team.
o Other Maps, Imagery, or GIS Data - Any other maps, aerial photos, GIS data, or
sources of information compiled by Field Crews and/or their partners that could be
helpful to sampling the NWCA sites.
2-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Soil Survey Information (see Section 2.2.1.3): Soil maps and soil survey information
pertinent to site.
Land Ownership Status, Requirements and Permissions for Access:
o Landowner identity and contact information.
o Results of communication with landowners.
o Documentation of permission to access private land.
o Permissions for crossing private lands to reach sites located on public lands.
o For public land, response of relevant agency to notification that you will be accessing
a site, and, if needed, permissions to do so.
Permits: Any permits or documentation required for site access, or for data collection
activities or sample/specimen collection.
Information for Accessing the Site:
o Contact information for landowners.
o Notes about whether landowner(s) want to be informed when Field Crew is on site.
o Contact information for individuals who must be available to open gates or allow entry
to a site, and the time and location for meeting them.
o Notes on locked gates, pets, livestock, or other things that could impede access.
o Notes about active hunting, farming, mining, or other activities on or near the site.
o Current conditions that could prevent access (e.g., high water, forest fires).
Site Evaluation Notes (should already be in the Site Packet):
o Site Evaluation notes, annotated aerial photos, sketch map, and completed Form PV-
1 (if a field evaluation was conducted) that can aid with planning for accessing or
sampling a site.
Driving and Hiking Routes to the Site:
o Detailed driving directions may be obtained from the NWCA Google Earth files.
o Results from the Site Evaluation may include driving directions and notations about
site access or logistically challenging conditions on the site, which can be useful in
relocating the site or helpful in anticipating special circumstances.
Preliminary plan for Assessment Area (AA) Establishment: As part of the base
location activities to prepare for field work, review aerial photos and maps of the site and
make a plan for laying out the AA based on rules in Chapter 3. This plan should be
included in the Site Packet.
Any other site specific information useful to the Field Crew.
2.2.1.1 Form Packet
The Form Packet for each site is composed of:
• Complete set of NWCA data forms.
• Complete set of NWCA sample tracking forms.
• Complete set of NWCA sample/specimen labels and tags.
• Complete set of USA-RAM (Rapid Assessment Method, USEPA in review) data forms.
2-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
A Form Packet for each site will be provided by the Information Management Coordinator and
you will need to add it to the Site Packet prior to going in the field.
Note that forms, sample tags, and labels will have pre-printed Site ID and sample
numbers, so it is critical to be sure to include the correct site specific Form Packet in the
matching NWCA Site Packet.
2.2.1.2 NWCA Site Maps, Aerial Photos, and GIS Data
Maps for the NWCA sites in each state are included in the National Wetland Condition
Assessment 2011 Site Maps). Site maps have been produced for each NWCA to provide
nationally consistent base data and imagery to assist in conducting sampling. A separate, state
specific version of this document is available for each state and includes:
• A list of all NWCA sites within a state with basic information about each site.
• An aerial image of each site at a scale appropriate to view wetland and land features
present in the assessment and buffer area surrounding the POINT for the randomly-
selected NWCA site.
• A USGS topographic map illustrating the location of the site at a scale appropriate to view
road and topographic features in the vicinity of the site that will provide helpful information
on site access.
For those who have access to ArcGIS software, a special ArcMap Template containing a layer
with NWCA shapefiles was provided to the state, tribal, and contract NWCA Field Crew
Leaders. The template and shape files link to publicly-available online data that may be useful
in planning sampling activities at each site. This includes the U.S. Fish and Wldlife Service's
(USFWS) wetlands map service, the National Hydrography Dataset feature service, and
imagery, topographic maps, and a new soil data layer from ESRI's online GIS server. The
NWCA shapefiles also include a layer that contains all of the NWCA sites, with additional
attribute information pulled from national databases of protected areas, counties, and 12-digit
watersheds (field descriptions).
For those with access to Google Earth Pro, there is a Google Earth KMZ file containing all of the
sites in the NWCA. Clicking on this file should automatically load the sites into Google Earth
Pro. Clicking on a POINT with your mouse should cause a pop-up box to appear with basic
attributes about the site. National Wetland Inventory (NWI) data can be added to the map by
downloading a KMZ file available at http://www.fws.gov/wetlands/Data/GoogleEarth.html.
The NWCA Site Maps, the NWCA ArcMap template and NWCA shapefiles, and the NWCA
Google Earth KMZ file should all have been made available to you. If, for any reason, you have
not received these files, they can be obtained from the National Wetland Monitoring and
Assessment Work Group FTP site (ftp:\\ftp.glec.com) and QuickR web-site. For more
information on how to access this web-site, contact your Regional EPA Coordinator.
2-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.2.1.3 Soil Survey Information
Site specific information about soils on each NWCA site will be useful in planning for sampling,
as well as providing background information that may aid in generating soil profile descriptions
during data collection. Soil Survey information can provide insight into the soil types that might
be expected at a particular NWCA site and help anticipate likely site conditions and the tools
that may be needed for soil sampling. Soil Survey information for NWCA sites can easily be
downloaded from the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Council
(http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm). In addition, your local soil scientist
may be able to offer useful insights into what tools may be particularly useful for sampling soils
in your area.
2.2.2 Other Information Resources
For each field sampling trip, you will carry a variety of resources (listed below) in addition to the
Site Packets for the sites to be sampled. These resources should be organized for easy access
and kept in the field vehicle or carried in the field, as appropriate, by the Crew Leader (see
Section 2.3) or relevant Crew Member.
• The State, Tribe, or organization approved health and safety plan (see Section 2.5.1),
which should include:
o Detailed health and safety protocols for field work.
o Contact information and locations for emergency and medical services nearest to each
site being sampled.
o Emergency contact information for supervisors and personnel health care
representatives of the Field Crew.
• NWCA logistics and research support contact information (see Section 2.1).
• Floras and field guides appropriate to the region of study (see also Appendix C).
• Soil reference books that are not part of the field equipment.
• Any available, regional or site specific plant species lists or wetland plant species lists that
can be helpful in plant identification (see discussion in Chapter 5, Appendix C).
2.2.3 Equipment and Supplies
Organizing and maintaining NWCA equipment is discussed in Section 2.4 and a master
checklist for field equipment and supplies is provided in Section 2.9.
2.2.3.1 Master Equipment List
The state, tribe, or other organization will provide some of this eguipment. However, some
consumable supplies and some durable equipment will be provided by the USEPA Office of
Water. Items that are provided by USEPA are included in the Site Kit or in the Base Kit (see
below), which will be delivered to the Field Crews by the Logistics Coordinator. See the Master
Equipment List (Section 2.9) for specific items that will be provided in the Site Kits or the Base
Kit. It is also important that each Field Crew review the Master Equipment List to determine
what additional pieces of equipment that may need to be gathered or purchased by the Field
Crew's organization prior to the field season.
2-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.2.3.2 Sits Kit
A Site Kit contains the subset of consumable supplies (i.e., used up during sampling or
requiring replacement after use) provided by USEPA through the Logistics Coordinator. A new
Site Kit is provided for each site sampled. See the Master Equipment List for the consumable
items that will be provided by USEPA (e.g., cubitainers, sample bags, plastic bottles, nitrile
gloves, toothbrush, etc.).
For a subsample of 50 sites, field crews will also receive a Soils Pesticide Site Kit that will
include everything needed to complete the Soils Pesticides Sampling protocol. Soils
Pesticides should only be sampled at the specific sites where this kit is provided.
2.2.3.3 Base Kit
The Base Kit is comprised of the subset of durable equipment and supplies needed for NWCA
sampling that is provided by USEPA through the Logistics Coordinator. One Base Kit is
provided to each Field Crew and contains some of the equipment that is used throughout the
field season. See the Master Equipment List for a list of the items provided by USEPA in the
Base Kit (e.g., laser rangefinder, plant presses, Munsell Soil Color book, etc.).
2.2.4 Data Packet
After a site is sampled, the completed NWCA data forms and USA RAM data forms are
organized sequentially into a Data Packet. The Data Packets from several sites are batched
together and sent every 1-2 weeks to the Information Management Team and accompanied by
a data tracking form (Form T-5) to track which Data Packets have been shipped. Form T-5 is to
be transmitted electronically to the Information Management Team and a copy of the form is to
be included with the Data Packets that are being shipped (see Section 2.6.3).
2.2.5 Tracking Forms and Immediately or Batch Shipped Samples
Tracking forms that describe the status and location of all samples and specimens collected
during the NWCA are typically transmitted electronically to the Information Management Team
at specified times with hard copies packed in the shipping containers with the samples.
• Form T-1: Site and Sample Status/WRSTracking (See Sections 2.6.2.2 and 2.9) is
transmitted within 24 hours of sampling a site to report on the status of the site (e.g.,
sampleable or not), to indicate all samples collected at the site, and to record the Sample
ID numbers for the immediately shipped samples (within 24 hours of sampling, see
below). A copy of Form T-1 is also enclosed in the shipping ice-chest with the samples.
• Forms T-2 to T-5 (See Sections 2.6.2.3 and 2.9) accompany samples that are batched
together from multiple sites and shipped every 1 or 2 weeks. Whenever batched
samples are shipped to their designated lab for analysis, the appropriate tracking form,
which lists the Sample ID numbers for all samples packed in a shipping container, is
included in the shipping package and is also transmitted electronically to the Information
Management Team.
2-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.2.5.1 Immediately Shipped Samples
Immediately Shipped Samples are any NWCA samples that are shipped within 24 hours of
collection. Samples that are immediately shipped are water chemistry, chlorophyll-a, algal
toxins, soil isotopes, and sediment enzymes. These samples are kept cool on blue or wet ice or
refrigerated until they are shipped, and then are shipped on wet ice (See Section 2.6.2.2,
Appendix A).
2.2.5.2 Batch Shipped Samples
Batch Shipped Samples are NWCA samples that are collected, held, and then samples from
several sites are shipped together in a "batch" to a designated lab for analysis (See Section
2.6.2.3, Appendix A). Unknown and QA voucher plant specimens, soil chemistry and soil bulk
density samples, and algae taxonomic ID samples are all shipped in batches.
2.3 FIELD CREW RESPONSIBILITIES
The NWCA Field Crews are responsible for collecting all field data and samples. Field Crews
will also need to conduct a number of activities at their base location (e.g., a state office, a
laboratory, camping site, or motel) that must be completed both before departure to the wetland
site and after return from the field.
Field Crew tasks will include:
1) Gathering information for the Site Packet and obtaining permits and permissions for site
access or sample collection, if not previously completed (Section 2.2.1).
2) Reviewing the Site Packet (Section 2.2.1.1) prior to going to a NWCA site and making a
preliminary plan for establishing the AA (Chapter 3).
3) For each NWCA site, completing those USA-RAM Metrics (Metrics 1 and 2, possibly part of
Metric 5) that require evaluation of aerial photographs or other imagery in the office (Chapter
3 and the USA-RAM Field Operations Manual (USEPA in review).
4) Organizing equipment, supplies, and field vehicle prior to traveling to the field sites and post
sampling (Sections 2.4 and 2.6).
5) Conducting NWCA data and sample collection at field sites (Section 2.5; Chapters 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, and 9).
6) Collecting USA-RAM field data for Metrics 3-12 and verifying office evaluations for Metrics 1
and 2 at NWCA sites (USEPA in review).
7) Post-sampling handling and shipping of samples and data (Section 2.6.2 and 2.6.3, Chapters
5, 6, 8, and 9).
8) Cleaning and maintaining equipment (Section 2.6.3).
The Field Crew is comprised of the Vegetation (Veg) Team and the Assessment Area-Buffer
(AB) Team, each with two members. The Veg Team is made up of a Botanist/Ecologist and a
Botanist Assistant. The AB Team members will have general field sampling experience. One of
the Field Crew Members will serve as the Crew Leader and will have responsibilities for
planning field logistics and sampling, and confirming that all data and samples have been
collected.
2-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Veg Team - Primary field sampling responsibilities are:
• Locating the NWCA POINT and establishing the AA (Chapter 3).
• Collecting Vegetation data and plant specimens (Chapter 5).
• Collecting data for the USA-RAM Assessment Area Metrics 4-12 (See USEPA in review).
AB Team - Primary field sampling responsibilities are:
• Collecting natural cover and stressors data in the Buffer (Chapter 4).
• Collecting field data or verifying office data for the USA-RAM Buffer Area Metrics 1-3 (See
USEPA in review).
• Collecting Soils data and samples (Chapter 6).
• Collecting Hydrology data (Chapter 7).
• Collecting Water Quality data and samples (Chapter 8).
• Collecting Algae data and samples (Chapter 9).
Crew Leader- Primary responsibilities are:
• Developing or participating in the development of sampling schedules (See Section 2.4.2);
then ensuring the Information Management Coordinator and the Field Crew's local
supervisor(s) have the sampling schedules.
• Keeping the Information Management Coordinator and local supervisors updated about
any sampling schedule changes that may occur.
• Developing field itineraries and preparing for sampling, identifying field accommodations,
and making lodging reservations, and checking that needed supplies, equipment, and
data forms are available to conduct the planned work.
• Organizing the Field Crew's daily field activities and pre- and post-sampling base location
activities.
• Overseeing the Field Crew sampling and the review of data and tracking forms.
• Double checking that all data and samples have been collected before leaving a sample
site.
• Ensuring all samples are shipped to designated locations.
• Ensuring Data Packets are copied and the originals sent to the Information Management
Team.
The number of NWCA sites a Field Crew will be able to sample per week is likely to vary
depending upon ease of access, relative proximity of sites to one another and to the Field
Crew's base location, and on sampling challenges posed by various site conditions. An
effective approach to sampling might be for a Field Crew to sample two or three sites per week
on average, using additional days as needed for travel, copying forms, managing plant
specimens, identifying unknown plant species, sample packaging and shipment, confirming site
access permission, equipment cleanup equipment repair, lodging logistics, restocking field
supplies, forms, and crew essentials (e.g., food).
2.4 PRE-SAMPLING BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES
This section focuses on base location activities that must be completed prior to going into the
field to sample a NWCA site. Procedures for these activities are described in detail in the
subsections below and summarized in Reference Card OPS-1. Section 2.6 describes base
location activities that must be conducted post field sampling.
2-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Reference Card OPS-1. Preparation for Field Sampling of NWCA Sites (Tasks are conducted
by Field Crew unless otherwise indicated. Note other personnel listed may be the same as the Field Crew at times.
Site Evaluation and Pre-Sampling Base Location Activities
Site Evaluation (see NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines)
Conducted by State, Tribe, or Other Organization Personnel, or if not, then by Field Crew
1) Desk Evaluation of each NWCA Site
2) Obtain permissions to access and sample site
3) On-Site Field Evaluation of individual NWCA Sites
Assemble Site Packet for Each Site
(Section 2.2.1)
Conducted by State, Tribe, or Other Organization Personnel,
or if not, then by Field Crew
Site Packet Components:
1) Form Packet
2) NWCA Site Maps, Aerial Photos, and Other Imagery
3) Soil Survey Information
4) Land ownership and requirements and permissions for
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
V 10)
Permits for site access or for data or sample collection
Information for accessing the site
Driving and hiking routes to the site
Site Evaluation results
Preliminary plan for establishing AA
Any other site specific information useful to the Crew
Planning Field Itineraries and Preparing fora
Sampling Trip (Sections 2.4.3)
1) Determine which NWCA sites will be sampled
during the sampling trip
2) Organize and confirm lodging for trip.
3) Ensure Site Packets, including the correct Form
Packet, for all sites to be sampled are complete.
4) Review all pertinent information sources about
sites to be sampled (e.g., Site Evaluation results,
soil surveys, maps, plant species lists)
5) Review aerial photos, maps, and other imagery and
develop a preliminary plan for AA establishment
for each site to be sampled
6) Complete the office evaluation segment of USA-
RAM metrics 1, 2, and 5
7) Address logistical issues (determine best
navigation routes to sites, contact landowners, and
arrange any needed meetings with landowners,
individual with keys to gates, soil scientist, etc.)
8) Ensure safety manual and emergency contact
information is always with Crew
9) Take care of all important communications
informing Logistics Coordinator, Information
Management Coordinator, and local supervisors of
your sampling schedule
10) Develop a plan for sites with special conditions
(e.g., tidal, difficult soils, complex sites)
\
Sampling Index Period and Recommended
Approach for Determining Site Sampling Order
(Sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.2)
Completed by State, Tribe, or Other Organization Personnel,
or if not, then by Field Crew
1)
2)
3)
4)
Determine the best sampling index period for each
NWCA Site (e.g., two revisit sites, all sampleable base
sites, and alternate sites identified to replace base
sites dropped during Site Evaluation)
Develop a schedule for the sampling order of the
NWCA sites that incorporates index period and
geographic proximity of the individual sites. Be sure
to schedule to two site visits for the two revisit sites
for your state
Once in the field, if a site must be dropped because it
is unsampleable (Chapter 3), follow the instructions in
Section 2.4.2 (and the Site Evaluation Guidelines) to
obtain an alternate site to replace the dropped site
Important: Confirm that the alternate site is
the correct one and determine when to sample
it with your Designated EPA Contact for your
Field Crew (EPA Regional Coordinator or the
EPA HQTeam (Tables 2-1 and 2-2))
Field Instrument Checks and Calibration
(Section 2.4.4)
1) Laser Rangefinder check
2) GPS battery check
3) Camera battery and supply check
4) Optional multi-probe meter performance test
V /
Equipment and Supply Preparation (Section 2.4.5)
Vehicle Maintenance (Section 2.4.6)
2-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
24.1. Sampling Index Period
Field sampling for the NWCA takes place during peak growing season when most vegetation is
in flower or fruit. Sampling near the peak of the growing season minimizes phenological
variability and enhances plant species identification accuracy, particularly of difficult species
such as grasses and sedges. This sampling index period optimizes characterization of the
vegetation and is also a good time for sampling the other NWCA indicators.
The timing and duration of peak growing season will vary depending on geographic location and
elevation. The typical ranges for the sampling index period for each U.S. state are indicated in
Figure 2-1. Note that within a state NWCA sites (POINTS) occurring at lower elevations or in
drier, warmer locations are likely to be ready to sample early in the index period and sites at
higher elevations or in wetter, cooler locations are likely to be at peak growing season later in
the index period.
NWCA Index Period
CH -April - September
I—I -May - September
• -June-September
^B - May -August
Figure 2-1. NWCA Sampling Index Period by state.
2-14
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.4.2 Determining Sampling Order for NWCA Sites
For many states the Field Crew, Site Evaluation Team, and the group who schedules the timing
and order for sampling sites may be comprised of the same individuals. In other cases, a
different set of personnel from the relevant state, tribe, or organization associated with the Field
Crew may handle this task and communicate the schedule for sampling to the Field Crew. This
will likely be the case where multiple crews are operating in one state. It is vitally important
that all people involved in scheduling or coordinating field sampling communicate with
one another to ensure the most efficient sampling approach and to eliminate any chance
of either double sampling of the same sites or skipping sites.
The sampling order for NWCA sites should allow the most efficient data collection and most
favorable travel logistics while incorporating the appropriate index period for each site. A
recommended procedure for developing a plan for sampling order for the NWCA sites in the
state(s) where you are working is outlined below.
1) Begin by examining the NWCA Site Information Table in the National Wetland Condition
Assessment 2011 Site Maps for your state (e.g., see Figure 2-2). The Site Information
Table is the list of sites randomly selected for the NWCA for your state, and contains a list of
"revisit," "base" and "oversample" POINTS (defined below). The POINTS are listed in the
table in the order in which they were randomly selected in the survey design. All revisit
and base POINTS must be evaluated and should be sampled unless they are
determined to be non-sampleable (See Site Evaluation Guidelines, USEPA 2011b).
• Base Site - A base site is a POINT that was randomly selected using a statistically valid
survey design that allows estimation of wetland condition in the target wetland types
across the conterminous 48 states of the U.S.
• Revisit Site - A revisit site is a base site that is sampled twice in the during the same
field season to gather information on the quality and noisiness of data collected in the
NWCA (USEPA 2011 a).
o The revisit sites are the first two sites on the NWCA Site Information table (e.g.,
Figure 2-2).
o The second sampling visit (Visit #2) to a revisit site should occur at least 2 weeks
after the original sampling visit (Vist#1), but within the index period for the revisit site.
o Exactly the same data and samples are collected for both Visit#1 and Visit#2, and a
separate Form Packet (See Section 2.2A A) will be provided for Visit#2 for each
revisit site by the Information Management Coordinator.
• Oversample Site - An oversample site is a randomly selected POINT that can be used
as a replacement for an unsampleable base site.
o Oversample POINTS are used as alternate base sites in the order they are listed on
the Site Information Table for a state.
o If an oversample site on the list is skipped (not sampled), it creates a data gap
that invalidates all data from sampled sites that occur below the skipped site
and affects the validity of the survey design.
2-15
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Using Figure 2-2 as a hypothetical example, if the oversample sites from NWCA11-
2349 through NWCA-2354 (highlighted yellow) and sites NWCA11-2359 and NWCA11-
2360 (highlighted red) were sampled, the data from the last two sites would be discarded
because the original order of random selection for the sites was not maintained. In this
example, sites NWCA11-2355 and NWCA11-2356 (highlighted green) should have been
selected and sampled instead of sites NWCA11-2359 and 2360.
sitelD
NWCA11-2337
NWCA11-2338
NWCA11-2339
NWCA11-2340
NWCA11-2341
NWCA11-2342
NWCA11-2343
NWCA11-2344
NWCA11-2345
NWCA11-2346
NWCA11-2347
NWCA11-2348
NWCA11-2349
NWCA11-2350
NWCA11-2351
NWCA11-2352
NWCA11-2353
NWCA11-2354
NWCA11-2355
NWCA11-2356
NWCA11-2357
NWCA11-2358
NWCA11-2359
NWCA11-2360
longitude (NAD83)
-123.0963128570
-124.2813068130
-124.0085989120
-117.1504354640
-123.0943877920
-124.2665601820
-124.0051738840
-117.1500273650
-123.0938598280
-122.9878636240
-121.0643413520
-118.7542369630
-123.1803277080
-123.8384612230
-121.0583084510
-118.7810387370
-123.0938713400
-120.9304025330
-124.0089001970
-118.7635813370
-123.1837027550
-124.0077760860
-120.7465554360
-118.7721600290
Latitude (NAD83)
45.2430105404
43.3291727249
44.9187449403
43.7740909380
45.2405347796
43.3481750503
44.9190095524
43.7734788335
45.2447298407
43.5662106679
42.0979519566
43.0501830242
45.4609312255
45.0670693096
42.1010322458
43.0503934583
45.2446996198
45.2009619291
44.9321001106
43.0478968239
45.4637433585
44.9177766355
42.5299049781
43.0552185555
panel
Revisit
Revisit
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
OverSamp
nwca class
PUBPAB
E2EM
E2EM
PFO
PEM
PEM
E2EM
PUBPAB
Pf
PSS
PSS
PEM
PFO
PFO
PSS
PEM
Pf
PFO
PUBPAB
PEM
PUBPAB
E2EM
PSS
PEM
Figure 2-2. Example of part of a NWCA Site Information Table to illustrate hypothetical
example described above.
2) During Site Evaluation it is likely that some POINTS in your state were found to be
unsampleable. The Site Evaluation Team, working with the EPA HQ Project Management
Team, will have used the following rules to select alternate sites from the NWCA Site
Information List for your state (See also Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011 b)).
a) If a revisit POINT was rejected, it was replaced by the next base POINT, and then the
first oversample site on the NWCA Site Information list for the state became a base
POINT.
b) If a base POINT was rejected, then it was replaced by the next unused oversample
POINT on the list. As describe in #1 above, oversample POINTS must be selected to
become alternate sites in the order they are listed.
3) After Site Evaluation has been completed, you will have a final list of sites to sample, which
includes two revisit sites, all base sites not dropped during Site Evaluation, and the alternate
2-16
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
sites (oversample sites from the NWCA Site List for your state) that replaced any base sites
dropped because they were unsampleable (see Site Evaluation Guidelines, USEPA2011b).
4) After reviewing the final list of NWCA sites to be sampled, determine the best index period
for each of these sites (See Section 2.4.1).
5) Develop a schedule for the order and timing for sampling the sites that incorporates specific
index periods and geographic proximity of NWCA Sites. Prioritize sampling date order by:
a) Index period that is most appropriate to each site.
b) Geographic proximity of sites to one another.
c) Proximity of field lodging locations to sites.
This will minimize travel time, maximize in-field time and allow sampling of individual NWCA
sites as closely as possible to peak growing season.
6) Occasionally upon arrival at a site, you may discover that it is no longer sampleable (see
Chapter 3) because:
a) Only a Desk Site Evaluation was completed and conditions on the ground do not match
the information used in the evaluation.
b) It became a non-target wetland in the interval since Site Evaluation (e.g., was developed
or planted in crops).
c) Access permission or sampling permits have been revoked or could not be obtained.
d) Conditions on the site are hazardous or the site is completely inaccessible.
e) An AA could not be established on the site.
If this occurs follow the instructions below for selecting a new site in the Site Evaluation
Guidelines (USEPA 2011b).
7) If a site must be dropped in the field and there is only one Field Crew working in a state,
determine the correct alternate site to use to replace it. This will be the next unused
oversample site on the NWCA Site List for your state.
If there are multiple Field Crews or contractor Field Crews working in a state, then the
individual (varies by state) who is coordinating the sampling schedule for the Crews will
select any needed alternates sites and communicate their location and when to sample
them to the appropriate Field Crew.
a) When either a revisit or base POINT is rejected, it must be reported it to the Designated
EPA Contact, which depending on the particular Field Crew will be the EPA Regional
NWCA Coordinator or EPA HQ Project Management Team (See Table 2-2; Alternate
EPA Headquarters Project Leader or EPA Headquarters Project Leader). In making this
report, indicate which site was rejected, the reason why, and the POINT selected from
the oversample list to replace it. The EPA Contact will then confirm that the correct
process was used to select the alternate POINT and inform the Logistics Coordinator
and the Information Management Coordinator about the replacement.
b) Once the alternate sample site is confirmed, the person coordinating the sampling
schedule for the Crew(s) will designate which Field Crew is responsible for sampling the
alternate POINT (if multiple organizations are sampling within state boundaries)
2-17
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
c) Finally, the sampling order plan is modified to include the new alternate base site into
the schedule based on its appropriate index period and geographic proximity to other
NWCA sites. If the index period for the alternate site has already passed, it should be
sampled as soon as practicable based on logistic considerations.
d) Repeat this process whenever a site must be dropped in the field.
2.4.3 Planning Field Itineraries and Preparation for Sampling
The Field Crew Leader, with assistance from the other Field Crew Members, will develop an
itinerary for each sampling trip (e.g., the length of one sampling excursion may vary from a 1 or
2 days, a week, or longer time period depending on distances to sites and number of sites
sampled). The itinerary includes the sampling schedule and locations of NWCA sites to be
completed during the trip, lodging locations and contact information, and other important
information. Some important steps in developing the itinerary and preparing for the sampling
trip are listed below.
• Determine which NWCA sites will be sampled based on the sampling plan that orders
sites for sampling based on the index period, geographic proximity of sites to one another,
and access logistics (See Section 2.4.2).
• Address logistical issues:
o Review routes for navigating to and accessing each site.
o Call the landowners or local contacts to confirm access permission and notify
regarding timing of sample visit.
o If necessary, arrange rendezvous locations and times with individuals who must
provide access to a site, e.g., open gates, provide any keys to gates, or accompany
the Field Crew, etc.
o If needed, arrange consultation or field meetings with local soil scientist.
o Determine the best locations for field lodging during the sampling trip, make needed
reservations, and confirm lodging plans.
o Identify your nearest FedEx drop off location, or arrange a roadside pickup for
immediately shipping samples
• Ensure the Site Packets for each scheduled site are complete before leaving to travel to
the sites (See Section 2.2.1).
o Confirm that the correct and complete Form Packet is included in the Site Packet for
each site. Forms and labels for each site will have preprinted Site ID and sample ID
numbers, so be careful to include the correct Form Packet in each Site Packet.
o When multiple sites are to be sampled, keep some extra blank Form Packets (e.g.,
several complete sets of NWCA and USA-RAM forms and labels without Site ID or
sample ID numbers) in the vehicle. Then, if it happens that a scheduled site is
unsampleable and must be dropped, you will have blank forms available to sample
another NWCA site if one is in the vicinity. Site and Sample IDs can be written in at
the appropriate places on the blank forms.
• Locate and review any special information resources (e.g., soil surveys, plant species
lists) that would be helpful to conducting sampling (See Section 2.2.2).
2-18
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Work with other Crew members to review the aerial photos provided in the site packet for
each site to gain an overview of the area in the vicinity of the POINT and to develop a
preliminary plan for the location, layout and establishment of the AA (See Chapter 3).
Preplanning is critical to maximize the actual onsite time available to collect data and
samples at the site. Once the AA establishment plan is developed place it in the site
packet and return the annotated aerial photos and any other materials you used to the
Site Packet.
Work with other Crew members to review aerial photos in the office to complete USA-
RAM Metrics 1 (Percent of AA having buffer) and 2 (Buffer Wdth) and to complete the
portion of Metric 5 (Patch Mosaic Complexity) that reviews NAIP or other imagery. See
USA-RAM Manual (USEPA in review). Return the completed USA-RAM forms to the
Form Packet in the Site Packet so they can be finalized during sampling.
Ensure the safety manual and emergency contact information is always with the Crew so
it is available if needed.
Important communications:
1) Inform the your local supervisors and personal emergency contacts of the field
schedule, the Site IDs for the sites to be sampled, and of where the Field Crew is
going each day and the expected time of return to the field lodging or camp. This is
critical for safety reasons so that the whereabouts of the Crew is known by some one
able to respond quickly should any problems arise.
2) Inform the Information Management Coordinator of the field schedule and the Site
IDs for the sites to be sampled. This allows the Information Management Team to
know what samples and data to expect to receive. The Information Management
Coordinator will to communicate the Field Crew's sampling schedule to the Field
Logistics Coordinator.
Contact the Information Management Coordinator about any issues related to NWCA
data or tracking forms, sample labels or tags, or USA-RAM data forms, e.g., the need
for additional site specific or blank Form Packets, questions about transmittal of
tracking forms.
Requests for supplies can also be made through the Information Management
Coordinator, who will communicate them to the Logistics Coordinator.
3) If needed, interact directly with the Field Logistics Coordinator who is available to
provide assistance to the Field Crews regarding needs for additional supplies or
shipping containers, etc.
4) Contact your Regional EPA Coordinator if you have technical questions regarding the
field protocols, design, or site replacement procedures. The Regional EPA
Coordinator will work with the EPA HQ Project Management Team to provide a
response directly to the Field Crew in a timely manner.
5) Contact any member of the EPA HQ Project Management team if you have a time
sensitive question and cannot get in contact with the Information Management Team,
Field Logistics Coordinator, or Regional EPA Coordinator.
2-19
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
6) Any changes in the itinerary during the week, such as canceling a sampling day or
collecting data at a site not on the original sampling schedule, must be relayed by
the Field Crew Leader to the Information Management Coordinator and to the
appropriate emergency contacts and local supervisors for the Field Crew as soon as
possible.
Planning for special circumstances:
o Tidal wetlands - Check tide tables for all tidal wetlands and schedule arrival and
departure from the site to maximize the time available for sampling. For example,
arrive on-site as the tide is going out so that you can begin work on the landward side
of the site and work toward the seaward side as the tide recedes. This allows work to
be continued until the tide begins coming in again and flooding lower areas. Note that
timing of flooding and exposure of areas within the AA may require some modification
of the normal sampling order to get everything done.
o Difficult soils - Review of information in the Site Packet may indicate that collection
of soil samples at particular site could be problematic. If difficult to sample soils are
anticipated, the local NRCS soil scientist may have useful advice or may be able to
lend you tools to aid in collection of soil samples.
o Difficult or complex sites - Sites that require long travel or hike-in distances,
particularly those with complex topography or high plant species diversity may take
more than one day to sample. Although, this may not happen often, when it does, the
Field Crew will need to plan for camping on site and to determine how to handle the
extra gear and food required. For sites that take more than one day to sample, but
which are located near to lodging or a developed campground, the Field Crew will
want to plan for what can be left in place (e.g., AA, Veg Plot, and Soil Pit markers) for
the next sampling day to expedite data and sample collection.
2.4.4 Field Instrument Checks and Calibration
Each Field Crew must test and calibrate field instruments prior to sampling. Field instruments
include a laser rangefinder, a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, a camera, and an
optional multi-probe unit for measuring temperature, dissolved oxygen, conductivity and pH, in
water. Ideally, Field Crews will have access to backup instruments in case any instruments fail
the manufacturer performance tests or calibrations prior to a field trip.
2.4.4.1 Laser Rangefinder
Follow the instructions in the user's manual for operating and maintaining your laser
rangefinder. Before traveling to the first field site, run through the procedures for operating the
rangefinder until you are comfortable with its operation. Throughout the field season, make any
recommended periodic maintenance checks suggested in the user's manual.
2-20
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.4.4.2 Global Positioning System
Turn on the GPS receiver and check the batteries prior to departure. Replace batteries
immediately if a battery warning is displayed. Ensure that extra batteries are carried in the field.
Complete any calibration requirements described in the GPS manual. GPS uses many
alternative mathematical models to describe the spherical shape of the earth and each is a
separate Datum. The NWCA standard Datum will be NAD83. GPS units should be
switched to this standard as part of their pre-field set up.
2.4.4.3 Camera Battery
Turn on digital camera and check the batteries prior to departure from the base location.
Replace batteries immediately if a battery warning is displayed. Carry extra batteries in the
field. For rechargeable batteries, make certain to keep a charged battery in the camera and
another battery in the charger. Ensure the camera memory card has sufficient space for the
photos to be captured during the week. If needed, carry an additional flash card or a camera
specific cable for downloading images. Keep a supply of lens paper or cloths and lens cleaning
solution in the camera case for easy access in the field. Refer to Appendix D for photography
guidelines and for a list of photos to take at the for each NWCA site.
2.4.4.4 Multi-probe Meter
Field collection of water quality data with multi-probe meters is optional. However, the following
text describes what must be done if Field Crews are asked to collect water quality data with a
multi-probe meter for their state or other employer.
Test and pre-calibrate the multi-probe meter prior to departure from the base on the day of each
site visit. A copy of the manufacturer's calibration and maintenance procedures should always
be kept with the instrument, and the multi-probe meter should be carefully calibrated according
to manufacturer specifications. If pH data is collected, perform a quality control (QC) check of
the pH meter calibration (and conductivity meter calibration). Table 2-3 contains a stock
solution for preparing a QC sample for pH and conductivity.
Calibration can be conducted prior to departure for the wetland site or at the wetland, with the
exception of dissolved oxygen calibration, which because of the potential influence of altitude
must to be performed only at the wetland site (Chapter 8).
2.4.5 Equipment and Supply Preparation
Field Crews must inventory supplies and equipment prior to departure for each trip using the
Master Equipment List provided in Section 2.9 to avoid forgetting anything that could preclude
collecting data at a field site. This task can be divided between the Veg and AB Teams, with
each focusing on the gear and supplies that their team requires. Pack equipment, supplies, and
any samples carried in the vehicle so that physical shock and vibration are minimized during
transport. Keep personal field gear, equipment, and samples in the same locations in the
vehicle for each trip, so that packing becomes routine and omissions are easier to spot. The
Crew Leader should confirm everything needed is present before departing for the field.
2-21
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
The Logistics Coordinator will provide some durable sampling equipment in the Base Kit at the
beginning of the field season, and will provide a Site Kit that contains some of consumable
supplies for each NWCA site. Other equipment and supplies are provided by your state, tribe,
or other organization. See the Master Equipment List and Section 2.2.3 for details.
You will use several solutions as part of the sampling or clean-up protocols for the NWCA,
including Lugol's solution (Chapter 9), magnesium chloride solution (Chapter 8), bleach solution
(Section 2.5.4.4), and if you are collecting optional water quality data with a multi-probe, a
solution for use as a calibration sample. Lugol's solution and magnesium chloride solution will
normally be part of the Base Kit provided by the Logistic Coordinator. You will need to prepare
bleach solution for cleaning gear and equipment. A QC calibration sample for the optional multi-
probe meter may be needed if you are collecting this optional data (Chapter 8). If necessary,
before going into the field, prepare stock preservation solutions as described in Table 2-3.
When preparing solutions, follow appropriate safety protocols, (e.g., see your state, tribe, or
other organization approved safety plan and procedures).
Table 2-3. Stock solutions, uses, and methods for preparation
Solution
Bleach (10%)
Use
Clean waders, shovels, dipper, and
other gear.
Preparation
Add 400mL laundry bleach to
3,600mL distilled water.
Lugol's
Preservative fortaxonomic algae
samples (See ChaperQ).
Dissolve 100g Kl in 1L of distilled
water. Dissolve 50g iodine
(crystalline) in 100ml glacial acetic
acid. Mix these two solutions.
Remove any precipitates. Store in
the dark in a dark container.
MgCO3 (Magnesium
Carbonate)
Calibration QC
Sample
For Optional Water
Quality Data
Buffer for Chlorophyll-a
QC sample for pH and conductivity
calibration check (See Chapter 8).
Dissolve 1g MgCO3 per 100ml
distilled water
Dissolve 3.4022g KH2PO4 and
3.5490g Na2HPO4 (analytical grade;
dried at 120°C for 3h and stored
desiccated) in 1000.0g (1.0018 L at
20 °C, 1.0029L at 25 °C) reagent
water.
Prepare a 1:100 dilution of standard
stock solution with reagent water for
a QC sample that has a theoretical
pH of 6.98 and a theoretical
conductivity = 75.3 uS/cm at 25C
2-22
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.4.6 Vehicle Maintenance
Each day prior to traveling into the field to sample ensure the vehicles are filled with gas or have
sufficient fuel for the day's activities. Further safety checks should include checking the tires for
sufficient air pressure. Occasional maintenance checks should include oil, washer fluid, and
radiator fluid. Follow your state, tribe, or other organization approved guidelines for maintaining
and operating your field vehicle.
In addition, it is important to clean the vehicle when traveling to different geographic areas (e.g.,
at the end of a sampling trip or at intervals during the sampling trip if traveling long distances
between sites) to remove propagules of invasive plant species or other non-native biotic
hitchhikers. For example, the vehicle might be routinely taken through a car wash at specified
intervals.
2.5 DAILY FIELD ACTIVITIES
Major sample and data collection tasks for the Veg and AB Teams are listed below in Table 2-4,
along with estimated times required for their completion at sites of varying complexity.
Table 2-4. Estimated time ranges for field activities depending on site complexity. It is anticipated that
most sites will fall in the middle of these ranges. Estimates do not include travel to and from the site.
Task
AA - Site verification/POINT &
CENTER Location/ AA
establishment
Vegetation - Plot layout, Data
and specimen collection
Buffer - Transect location and
data collection
Soil - Pit location, data and
sample collection
Hydrology - Data collection
Algae - Sample collection and
processing
Water Quality - Sample
collection
USA-RAM1
Sample/Specimen Handling
and Tracking
Sample Day Length = Total
Hours/Site
Veg Team - Hours to Complete
Number of
People
2 people
2 people
1-2 people
1-2 people
Range
Easy
Site
0.5
2.5
0.75
1
4.75
Highly
Complex
Site
1.5
8
1.5
2
13
AB Team - Hours to Complete
Number
of people
1-2 people
2 people
1 person
1 person
1 person
1-2 people
1-2 people
Range
Easy
Site
1
2
0.25
0.5
0.25
0.25
1
5.25
Highly
Complex
Site
2.5
6
1
1
0.5
0.5
1.5
13
Estimated Mean Sample Day Length2 = ~ 8 to 9 hrs
'USA-Rapid Assessment Method.
Estimated mean sample day length based on combined estimated minimum times for easy sites and maximum
times highly complex for tasks for each team.
2-23
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
This section presents an overview of the sampling activities that a four-person field crew
conducts during a typical 1-day visit to a site and details or protocols that pertain to the entire
sampling day or to multiple individual indicator protocols.
• To begin, safety and health considerations and guidelines related to field operations are
described in Section 2.5.1.
• Guidelines for recording data are presented in Section 2.5.2.
• An overview and flowchart (Reference Card OPS-2) describing how to structure the field day
to accomplish all sampling tasks is provided in Section 2.5.3.
• NWCA protocol tasks that apply to data collection for multiple wetland indicators are found in
Section 2.5.4, including gathering information on site and sample status, guidelines for GPS
use, post-sampling review of forms and samples, cleanup and final checks.
2.5.1 Health and Safety
Collection and analysis of samples can involve risks to personal safety and health, and the
safety of the Field Crew must always be the primary consideration during sampling. This
section describes general safety considerations, some safety equipment, and general safety
guidelines for field operations. Text in this section is adapted from USEPA (2007).
This section does not substitute for an official Health and Safety Plan. The Crew MUST
ALWAYS carefully follow the protocols in their Health and Safety Plan for the NWCA field
work that was approved by state, tribe, or other organization with which the Field Crew is
affiliated. A copy of this approved safety plan must be carried in the field.
Some important considerations related to field safety are presented in Table 2-5, however, it is
the responsibility of the group safety officer (state, tribe, or other organization) to ensure that the
necessary safety courses are taken by all field personnel and that all safety policies and
procedures are followed. Each state, tribe, or other organization must develop and have a
specific safety plan for the NWCA sites they are assigned to sample.
In addition, a communications plan to address safety and emergency situations is essential.
Field personnel should have a daily check-in procedure. An emergency communications plan
includes contacts for police, ambulance, fire departments, hospitals, and search and rescue
personnel. All personnel need to be fully aware of all lines of communication.
In wetlands, a potential hazard is water overlying soft sediments. Care should be taken in
situations where shallow water overlies deep soft sediments to avoid falling or becoming mired.
In these situations it is important for people to work in pairs so that one person can assist
someone who is stuck in the mud. For example, a long-handled shovel can be used to help pull
a person from the mud while a second person stays on firmer ground. This is also a case
where the plastic snow sled recommended in the soils protocol can be used as a platform to
distribute a person's weight and enable them to crawl out of a dangerous area. This is
particularly important in tidal situations. The NWCA recognizes these safety issues; a
sampleable wetland AA can have no more than 10% of its area with water greater than 1m deep
or a combination of water and soft sediment that may be hazardous.
2-24
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Table 2-5. Some basic health and safety considerations for field work.
Recommended Training:
• First aid
• Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)
• Vehicle safety (e.g., operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles)
• Boating and water safety (if boats are required to access sites)
• Field safety (weather, personal safety, orienteering, site reconnaissance prior to sampling)
• Equipment design, operation, and maintenance
• Handling of chemicals and other hazardous materials that might be encountered
Communications:
• Check-in schedule
• Sampling itinerary (vehicle used, description and license plate number, time of departure & return,
travel route)
• Contacts for police, ambulance, hospitals, fire departments, search and rescue personnel
• Emergency services available near each sampling site and base location
• Cell phone, if possible satellite phone
Personal Safety:
• Field clothing and other protective gear (including lifejackets for boat accessed sites) for all Crew
Members
• Medical and personal information (allergies, personal health conditions)
• Personal contacts (family, telephone numbers, etc.)
• Physical exams and immunizations
Any person allergic to bee stings, other insect bites, or plants (i.e., poison ivy, oak, sumac, etc.) must
take proper precautions and have any needed medications handy.
General Safety Guidelines for Field Operations:
• Two persons must be present during all sample collection activities; no one should be left alone
while in the field.
• Exposure to wetland water and sediments should be minimized. Use gloves if necessary, and clean
exposed body parts as soon as possible after contact.
• All electrical equipment must bear the approval seal of Underwriters Laboratories and must be
properly grounded to protect against electric shock.
• Use appropriate protective equipment (e.g., gloves, safety glasses) when handling and using any
chemicals.
• Handle and dispose of chemical wastes properly. Do not dispose any chemicals in the field.
• Persons working in areas where poisonous snakes or spiders may be encountered must check with
the local Drug and Poison Control Center for recommendations on what should be done in case of a
bite.
• Persons working in areas where large predatory animals such as bears, cougars, wolves, or
alligators are known to reside should be familiar with and take appropriate precautions to avoid
encounters that could lead to aggressive behavior or attacks from such wildlife.
• Field personnel should protect themselves against the bites of deer or wood ticks because of the
potential risk of acquiring pathogens that cause Rocky Mountain spotted fever and Lyme disease.
• Also, where mosquitoes or other biting insects are prevalent (particularly where they are known to
potentially transmit disease, e.g., West Nile virus), minimize exposure to bites by wearing long
sleeve shirts and long pants and, as appropriate, by wearing mosquito nets or using insect repellent.
• All field personnel should be familiar with the symptoms of hypothermia and know what to do in case
symptoms occur. Hypothermia can kill a person at temperatures much above freezing (up to 10°C or
50°F) if he or she is exposed to wind or becomes wet.
• Field personnel should be familiar with the symptoms of heat/sun stroke and be prepared to move a
suffering individual into cooler surroundings and hydrate immediately.
2-25
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Some hazards lie out of sight beneath the surface of wetland waters or their associated ponds,
rivers and streams. Broken glass or sharp pieces of metal embedded in the substrate can
cause serious injury if care is not exercised when walking or working with the hands in such
environments. Infectious agents and toxic substances that can be absorbed through the skin or
inhaled may also be present in the water or sediment. Personnel who may be exposed to water
known or suspected to contain human or animal wastes that may carry pathogens must be
immunized against tetanus, hepatitis, typhoid fever, and polio. Biological wastes can also be a
threat in the form of viruses, bacteria, rickettsia, fungi, or parasites.
If boats are used to access sampling sites (e.g., for tidally influenced sites or wetlands fringing
bodies of water), personnel must be trained in operating the type of boat in use, and must
consider and prepare for hazards associated with the operation of motor vehicles, boats,
winches, tools, and other incidental equipment. Boat operators should be familiar with U.S.
Coast Guard rules and regulations for safe boating contained in a pamphlet, Federal
Requirements for Recreational Boats, available from a local U.S. Coast Guard Director or
Auxiliary or State Boating Official and online (U.S. Coast Guard,
http://www.uscgboating.org/fedreqs/default.html). All boats with motors must have fire
extinguishers, boat horns, life jackets or flotation cushions, and flares or communication
devices.
Field Crew members using sampling equipment should be familiar with the hazards involved
and establish appropriate safety practices prior to using them. Make sure all equipment is in
safe working condition. Proper field clothing should be worn to prevent hypothermia, heat
exhaustion, sunstroke, or other dangers. For boat accessed sites, field personnel should be
able to swim, and personal flotation devices must be used. Chest waders made of rubberized
or neoprene material and suitable footwear must always be worn with a belt to prevent them
from filling with water in case of a fall.
Wetlands, and the surrounding landscape, can be home to various dangerous organisms. Field
Crews should take care to minimize contact with biting insects, bees, poisonous snakes and
dangerous animals. Insect repellent and protective clothing will help reduce the possibility that
Field Crew members will come in contact with biting insects. At the end of each field day
workers should inspect their bodies for ticks. Any person allergic to bee stings, other insect
bites, or plants (i.e., poison ivy, oak, sumac, etc.) should take proper precautions and have any
needed medications on hand. In addition, Field Crew members should always be aware of their
surrounding to protect themselves from dangerous animals, such as alligators, mountain lions,
bears, and wolves.
For some wetlands in Gulf Coast areas of the U.S. that have NWCA sites, it is possible that
there could be some oil contamination resulting from the 2010 BP oil spill. If this is likely in the
region where you are working, the approved health and safety plan of your state, tribe, or other
organization should have protocols for handling Field Crew safety and for equipment clean-up
after working in such locations. Appendix E, Example Oil Decontamination Procedures,
provides an example of one such protocol.
Appropriate safety apparel such as waders, gloves, safety glasses, etc. must be available and
used when necessary. First aid kits, fire extinguishers, and blankets must be readily available.
Cellular or satellite telephones and/or portable radios should be carried by Field Crews working
in remote areas for use in case of an emergency. Supplies must be available for cleaning of
exposed body parts that may have been contaminated by pollutants in the water such as anti-
bacterial soap and an adequate supply of clean water or ethyl alcohol.
2-26
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Personnel participating in field activities on a regular or infrequent basis should be in sound
physical condition and have a physical examination annually or in accordance with regional,
state, tribe, or organizational requirements. All surface waters and sediments should be
considered potential health hazards due to potential toxic substances or pathogens.
During the course of field research activities, it is possible that field crews may observe
violations of environmental regulations, may discover improperly disposed hazardous materials,
or may observe an accidental spill or release of hazardous materials. If this occurs, it is
important that the proper actions be taken and that field personnel do not expose themselves to
something harmful. The following guidelines should be applied:
1) First and foremost, protect the health and safety of all personnel. Take any necessary steps
to avoid injury or exposure to hazardous materials. If you have been trained to take action
such as cleaning up a minor fuel spill during fueling of a boat, do it. However, you should
always error on the side of personal safety.
2) Field personnel should never disturb or retrieve improperly disposed hazardous materials
from the field to bring back to a facility for "disposal". To do so may worsen the impact, may
incur personal liability or liability for the Crew Members and their respective organizations,
may cause personal injury, or may cause unbudgeted expenditure of time and money for
proper treatment and disposal of the material.
3) It is important not to ignore environmental incidents. Notify the proper authorities of any
incident involving hazardous materials so they can take the necessary actions to properly
respond. For most environmental incidents, the following emergency telephone numbers
should be provided to all Field Crews: state or tribal department of environmental quality or
protection, U.S. Coast Guard, and the USEPA regional office. If a Field Crew is unsure
about who to contact, they should call their Designated EPA Coordinator. In the event of a
major environmental incident, the National Response Center may need to be notified at 1-
800-424-8802.
2.5.2 Procedures for Recording Data
The NWCA data and tracking forms are formatted so that the data you record can be scanned
into a data entry system. Each completed NWCA Form Packet will result in a minimum of 3000
data points (ranging from a single character to a long species name or comment field). For the
NWCA, there will be over 4 million data fields entered, reviewed, assured, and stored in
perpetuity. The legacy of this study starts with the Information Management Team's ability to
capture what you are communicating on the scannable NWCA data forms. Thus, it is important
that field data and sample information are recorded accurately, consistently, and legibly.
Detailed instructions for filling out specific forms are provided in each protocol chapter of this
manual. Some important overall points for filling out all forms are discussed below and standard
guidelines that must be followed for recording field data are presented in Table 2-6. Figures 2-3
(below) and 5-3a-c, and 5-4 (in Chapter 5) illustrate examples of correctly filled out forms.
Figure 2-4 illustrates an incorrectly filled out form.
2-27
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Official Data Forms - The Information Management Team will provide all forms for use in the
NWCA. These forms will be provided in the Form Packet for each site. It is important to use
only these forms because they are formatted for to be read by the digital data scanners. Data
not recorded on the Official NWCA Data Forms are unusable.
Site Number, Date, and Page Numbers
1) The Site ID is preprinted on the forms, and, for many sample types, the sample id numbers
are preprinted on sample labels and tags. Thus, it is vital to ensure that you use the correct
set of forms, tags, and labels for the site being sampled. If using forms or labels without
preprinted site numbers, be sure to fill in the correct site and sample id information.
If the Site ID, Sample ID, sampling date, or page number is incorrect or omitted, it may be
impossible to connect data or samples to a particular site, resulting in lost data.
2) Be sure to record the date sampling is initiated wherever it is requested.
3) For forms that have multiple pages, be sure to fill in the page number for each page and the
total number of pages.
Form Instructions - Carefully follow all instructions on each data form. Consult the
appropriate protocol chapter, if you have questions not answered by the form instructions, about
how to record data for a particular form.
Confirmation Bubbles - Most NWCA forms have confirmation bubbles to indicate the meaning
of blank data fields or unfilled data bubbles. Read these statements carefully and fill in the
bubbles as requested to confirm exactly what empty data fields or unfilled data bubbles on a
particular form mean. Completing the confirmation bubbles is critical to note that a data element
was not observed at the site, rather than overlooked by the Field Crew.
Data Flags and Comments - There is space on all forms to flag data for which additional
information or explanation may be needed. See Table 2-6 and Figures 2-3, and 5-3a-c for
examples of how to correctly use flags for qualifying data.
2-28
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Table 2-6. Guidelines for recording field data and tracking information.
ACTIVITY
GUIDELINES
Recording
Information on
Data Forms and
Tracking Forms
Record observations and measurement values only on official NWCA data and
tracking forms (provided by the Information Management Team) that are
preprinted on water-resistant paper.
Use a writing instrument that leaves clear, dark text (e.g., a No. 2 pencil or a water
and smear proof fine-point indelible marker) to record information on all forms.
If you make an error when recording data and changes are required, it is best to
cross out the error and rewrite the correct information. Use a flag if there isn't
enough room in the data field and write the correct information in the
comments section.
Complete all header information and record all data and sample id information
requested on each form.
Use the formats specified on individual data forms for recording data.
Print legibly (and as large as possible). Clearly distinguish letters from numbers
(e.g., 0 versus O, 2 versus Z, 7 versus T, etc.), but do not use slashes, i.e.,
lines drawn through the character. Printing in capital letters enhances
legibility.
When recording plant species names on Forms V-2 and V-4, print clearly using
CAPITAL LETTERS.
For data that is recorded by filling a data bubble, be certain to keep markings inside
the circle while completely filling the bubble.
When using workspace areas provided for estimating cover or tallying counts of
trees on Vegetation Forms, keep all marks inside workspace area.
When recording comments, print legibly. Make notations in comments field only;
avoid marginal notes. Be concise, but avoid using abbreviations or
"shorthand" notations. If you run out of space, attach a sheet of paper with the
additional information, rather than trying to squeeze everything into the space.
Do not doodle on the forms, including the margins.
Data Qualifiers
(Flags)
Use only defined flag codes and record flag on data form in appropriate field.
K = No measurement or observation made.
U = Suspect measurement; re-measurement not possible.
E = End of plant species list (used only on some vegetation forms)
Fn = Miscellaneous flags (n = 1, 2, etc.) assigned by a Field Crew during a
particular sampling visit.
Explain reason for using K or U flags and define each Fn flag in the comments
section of the data form. Ensure the Fn numbers are unique on the data form and
matched to the flag definition.
2-29
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Table 2-6. Guidelines for recording field data and tracking information.
ACTIVITY
GUIDELINES
Sample Labels
and Tags
Use a writing instrument that leaves clear, dark text (e.g., a No. 2 pencil or a water
and smear proof fine-point indelible marker) to record information on all labels
and tags.
Use the sample-type appropriate adhesive labels or tags with preprinted Site ID and
Sample ID numbers for each sample. Be sure to fill in any requested
information about the sample on the sample label or tag, and affix it to the
outside of the sample container. Cover completed labels and tags with clear
tape.
Complete the requested information on the adhesive plant specimen sample tag
and affix it to the newsprint in which the specimen is pressed.
Completely fill out the detailed sample labels for soil chemistry and bulk density
samples or plant specimens. Attach the soil chemistry or bulk density sample
label to the correct soil sample bag. Place the plant specimen label inside the
newsprint holding the plant specimen.
Sample
Collection
Information
Record that each sample has been collected on the appropriate data form. Be sure
to record the Sample ID number from labels and tags in the appropriate fields
on the data forms using the format requested on each data form.
Before Leaving
Site: Review of
Data Forms and
Comparison of
Sample Labels,
Data Forms, and
Form T-1
Review all data forms for accuracy, completeness, and legibility.
Review all sample labels for accuracy, completeness, and legibility.
Verify that the information recorded on the sample labels and tags is consistent with
all Sample IDs listed on all data forms and on tracking Form T-1.
Confirm that the forms have been reviewed by recording your initials in the
"Reviewed by" field in the upper right corner of each form.
Before
Shipping Data
Packets and
Samples:
Review of Data
Packets, Sample
Labels, and
Tracking Forms
The Field Crew Leader must review the completed Data Packet before its transfer to
the Information Management Center to ensure it is complete and all data forms
are consistent, correct, and legible.
Complete all tracking forms required for all samples being shipped. Review tracking
forms for consistency, correctness, and legibility.
Compare labels and tags on samples with the Sample IDs recorded on the tracking
form for accuracy, completeness, and legibility before shipping samples and
transmitting the tracking forms to the Information Management Center.
2-30
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
FORM H-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA HYDROLOGY (Front)
NWCA11- Q41 8 °*.08./.1.2./.?.0.1.1
Thunderstorms. over 5' of rain.
Identify and Rank Water Sources / Stressors:
Rjrk the top 3 Water Sources (1 - most influential) Rank the top 3 Streswrs |1 - mc^t stress) by perceived infltw-- on th*
Srte/As&«sfnent Area Hvdrotoov.
Wata Sources - Natural
mi n tra tnSMt to ootmim tnvt •• mtttr KMTCVS w«« cunaioww. out only dWH
Fug
O»oD«c»iPr««wl
Flag
F1
F2
(em)
22
|cm)
D«ptni= 16
to*}
Comments
Large leaking water tank in assessmentarea.
Evidence of recent recreation (hikers).
S9116J9020
NWU
01/21/2911
Rll out header
completely
Note
requested
formate
Confirmation
Bubbles are
critical to
note that
element was
not observed,
rather than
missed in
assessment
{ Flags are
unique on
page, and
match
commen
As instructed,
only 3
staessors
ranked
Figure 2-3. Correctly filled out data form. See Figures 5-3a-c and 5-4 (Chapter 5) for other
examples of correctly filled forms.
2-31
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
0 FORM H-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA HYDROLOGY (Front) MM**** %
site ID NWCA11- UXHtClj-fWW* °*: / / 2 0 1 1
Tw« of Samplng {hh:m.
24hrcloctt,
A ~V\ rniivigrONA O'""™"!) (
JaUfpina Qincn Qnooa
vulMc MKnption: Day or umping
WMK prior to umpling
Identify and Rank Water Sources / Stressors:
Rank the top 3 Water Sources (1 = most influential). Rank the top 3 Stressors (1 = most stress) by perceived indue--' on the
Site/Assessment Area Hvdrolotrv
Watei Sources -Natural
O Fni in tnii Ducbt* to comm but in «tw nura* wm conttaxta. nut only MV>M prucnt *«« r»iu •
Strsinh':* "~<; r ,-,•:,
OurTo*
Springs ssetei
•
Pntipttition {rati. mow)
GrountfwMtr
Pretenf
0
0
0
0
o
0
rUnk Top 3 SouftH
rrom 1-5
0' O: O3
0' O2 O
0 i O: Os
0 i O ' 0 3
Ql O' O>
0> 0-' 0'
fM
Snow Melt
Ov8*lHF:ooo:ng
Eituiry Tlital cnsnnei
Pr«»nt
'Ti-' 1 1-3
D | L t O? Os
O ' O1 O2 O3
O
Tf4ilSurp* 1 O
Oflur louoiDe •tin r^g)
O
O1 O' O3
O' Oz 0'
Qi Q} §3
Fl«
>
I
NN^
5
Hydrologtc Stressors
0 fll In ttito buDbW to conflnn that HI nyaoiogtc itrnaon wm cork 1««fl. M only trow prwwit win mined
Dawning FttturH
DM
Berrs
Oars
Ftalr;M5M
Mod
Snjtlow Channels
Animal Tramping
VtMCBRitt
•vpmtoua SurtacOT
Roaat
Concrete
Aiffurt
Recent SMImsrrtatlon
X
Flag
*
Pnunt
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
Q
0
0
0
Rank Too 3
tlnMontroinl-3
0_ O: O_
0 ' O2 O3
0 ' Qs O'
Ftt,
Qi O: O^
0' o= o>
Oi o- 0^
0' Oi O>
C i O* O^
0 O - O
0 1 O : O J
Oi Oi Os
Pump.
imgxion
:V,vt-:-p:v
c-*-
f:«id T; ing
Eieavittor • crsagirg
MM
swwouiai
fcincw* outflow
Cu vsrti
CamigaMRpe
e ,
Men..
ir'o»n;
Oi.sto.hg
Ctrsr (dsscrlM with r 39)
PfMHt
0
o
0
"O
$
0
o
0
o
0
0
o
RwkTop]
llnuon from 1-9
o_ 02 o_
O' O-- 0^
O' Q! 0'
O ' $9 2 O 3
O1 O_ O3
Of O: Os
Oi O2 Os
Ql O2 O3
O' O2 0'
O1 Oi 0'
O' O2 O'
O' O2 Os
„, ^Ttrett MMonatZr! htp^' ""Sn * pns*«^ -^
C Ho Ditch Pitwnt
Comments
°^1= .»,
"*•"• m
^L
•
mg
— •
-
^
Stieam channel has animals in it — ^
^^~-
Expaln in nigc r oommtnt cwiler S&1163SD20 ^
N'.VCA Aiicsvriert Area H,tJfoJo*y 01/21/2011
Format? Is it
really early,
or late
afternoon?
Flag wtlh no
associated
/comment,
data lost
Squiggly
lines require
N^ deletion and
re-entry,
takes a lot of
extra fame
Light and
ambiguous
marks (checks
\ in bubbles);
more than one
marked as #2
stressor; data
lost
Incomplete
data, don't
know rF there
•;.j was not a
ditch present,
or it wasn't
measured.
Comment
without flag,
"~^ lost data,
and maybe
Inst animals
Figure 2-4. Incorrectly filled out data form, resulting in lost data and extra data processing
time.
2-32
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.5.3 Daily Sampling Scenario (suggested sampling routine)
Field methods for the NWCA are designed to be completed in one field day at a site. Depending
on the time needed for both the sampling and traveling for that day, an additional day may be
needed for pre-departure and post-sampling activities (e.g., cleaning equipment, repairing gear,
shipping samples, and traveling to the next site). Remote wetlands with lengthy or difficult
approaches may require extended time to gain access to the wetland, and Field Crews will need
to plan accordingly.
Details of all sampling protocols are described in Chapters 3 through 9 of this manual. Several
other sampling tasks that cross multiple chapters are detailed in Section 2.5.4. Most chapters
include reference cards that summarize key protocols required for sampling specific NWCA
indicators. These reference cards are also compiled together in the in the Quick Reference
Version of the Field Operations Manual (USEPA 2011c). The quick reference is intended as a
field tool to rapidly access key information; however, the full manual should always be available
so that it can be consulted whenever questions about specific sampling activities emerge.
A suggested daily field sampling scenario showing how the work load may be split between the
Field Crew members over the day is presented in Reference Card OPS-2. Side A of the
Reference Card outlines tasks for the Veg Team and Side B outlines tasks for the AB Team.
The entire Field Crew should be familiar with all the tasks that need to be completed in the
sampling day so that they can assist one another if one Team finishes earlier than the other.
To organize field activities efficiently, each Field Crew should define roles and responsibilities
for each Crew Member. Minor modifications to the sampling scenario may be made by crews;
however the general sequence of sampling events presented in Reference Card OPS-2, Side
A and Side B should not be changed because it is based on the need to protect some types of
samples from potential contamination and to minimize holding times once samples are
collected.
In the flowcharts on Reference Card OPS-2, the direction of the arrows indicates the order in
which work should be conducted. Note that in some instances the arrows are double headed to
indicate that work between the associated tasks may take place in either order, iteratively, or
simultaneously. Sometimes this depends on whether both members of a Team are working
together on one protocol or are working separately on different protocols. For example (See
Reference Card OPS-2, Side B), consider the following two scenarios:
At times it may be most efficient for the AB Team to work together collecting Buffer data, and
while they are doing this they might begin observations on hydrology at outer edges of the
AA. In this case, once the Buffer data is collected, one AB Team Member could collect the
Water Quality data and sample, while the other completes collection of the Hydrology data.
Which ever member completes their task first would then collect the Algae samples. Then
both AB Team members would proceed to collecting Soil data and samples.
In contrast, sometimes it may be more convenient for one AB Team Member to collect the
Buffer data, while the other AB Team Member begins work in the AA. The member working
in the AA would first collect the Water Quality data and sample, then the Hydrology data,
followed by the Algae data. Once each member has completed their separate tasks both AB
Team Members work together to collect Soil data and samples.
2-33
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Reference Card OPS-2, Side A. Vegetation Team Sampling Day Activities
Begin
Sample
Day at
Site
VEGETATION (VEG) Team (2 persons)
BE- Botanist/Ecologist
BA-Botanist Assistant
SITE VERIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT AREA (AA) ESTABLISHMENT
1) On site, verify office plan for AA establishment
2) Verify POINT and CENTER
3) Verify wetland sampleable and define AA (Form PV-1, RC AA-1, RC AA-2)
4) Set-up AA(RC AA-1)
5) Complete Form AA-1 and annotate aerial photo or make a sketch map of
AA and its components.
6) Characterize AA:
a) Determine FWS Status & Trends (S&T) classes (Form AA-2, RC AA-3A)
b) Determine HGM Type (Form AA-2, RC AA-3B)
VEGETATION PLOT LAYOUT
1) Select Veg Plot Layout configuration (RC V-2)
2) Establish five 100-m2 Veg Plots (RC V-2 and V-3A,
Form V-l)
PHOTOS (Appendix D)
1) Take photos of AA (overview, photos from AA CENTER
toward boundary along Veg Plot placement lines)
2) Other photos as needed (e.g., TES species, or unusual
conditions in the AA)
VEGETATION CHARACTERIZATION - EACH VEG PLOT
(NWCA-FOM, RC V-l)
1) Collect Plant Species Presence data (RC V-3B, Forms V-
2a, b)
2) Estimate % Cover for all Individual Vascular Plant
Species and identify the Primary Height Class in which
each species occurs (RC V-3B and V-4, Forms V-2a, b)
3) Collect unknown and QA Voucher plant specimens as
encountered
4) Determine predominant Status & Trends Wetland
Class ( Form V-3, Front)
5) Estimate % Cover of Vertical Vegetation Strata (Form
V-3, Front)
6) Estimate % Cover for Non-Vascular Groups
(bryophytes, lichens, and macroalgae) (Form V-3,
Front)
7) Collect data describing Ground Surface Attributes
(Form V-3, Back)
8) Collect Snag (counts) and Live Tree Species (cover and
counts) data (Forms V-4a, b)
T
Complete
Sample
Day
FINAL ON-SITE ACTIVITIES
1) Review field data forms
2) Clean up wetland site and organize gear,
equipment, and samples for transport to vehicle
3) Clean equipment & crew of plant or other
biological propagules
4) Crew Leader Final Check-off
USA RAM -ASSESSMENT AREA
(USA RAM Manual)
Condition Metrics
• Metric 4: Topographic Complexity
• Metric 5: Patch Mosaic Complexity
• Metric 6: Vertical Complexity
• Metric 7: Plant Community Complexity
Stressor Metrics
• Metric 8: Stressors to Water Quality
• Metric 9: Alterations to Hydroperiod
• Metric 10: Stress to Substrate
• Metric 11: Cover of Invasive Plant Species
• Metric 12: Stress to Vegetation
PLANT SPECIMEN COLLECTION AND HANDLING
At Site:
1) Ensure that all unknowns and QA Vouchers have
been collected
At Site, Vehicle, or Field Lodging on Sample Day:
2) Complete a Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen
Label for each plant specimen
3) Press plant specimens
4) Record number of plant specimens collected at the
site on Form T-l: Site and Sample Status/WRS
Tracking
On Subsequent Days (see Post-sampling tasks):
1) Dry specimens, change blotters in press as needed
2) Package, ship or deliver to designated herbarium or
laboratory, completing and enclosing the
appropriate plant specimen tracking information
(Form T-2 or T-3) in the shipping box
2-34
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Reference Card OPS-2, Side B. Assessment Area -Buffer (AB) Team Sampling Day Activities
Begin
Sample
Day at
Site
ASSESSMENT AREA/BUFFER (AB) Team (2 persons)
ABl-ABMemberl
AB2-AB Member 2
NATURAL COVER AND STRESSORS
FOM -12 Buffer Plots and AA CENTER Plot (Form B-l,
RC B-l, Appendix B) -- Plots are 100-m2 (lOXlOm) with
visually estimated boundaries.
A. In each of 3 Buffer Plots located along each of 4 (N,
W, E, S) 100m Buffer Transects, and in the AA Center
Plot, determine the presence and abundance of:
1) Natural Cover (Vegetation and Substrate)
2) Residential and Urban Stressors
3) Agriculture & Rural stressors
4) Industrial Development Stressors
5) Hydrology Stressors
6) 22 Targeted Alien Species (presence only, see
Appendix B)
B. Record GPS coordinates of 3rd plot on each
transect.
USA RAM Metric 3: Stress to the Buffer Area (USA
RAM Manual)
1) Verify office interpretation of Metrics 1 and 2;
make corrections based on field observations.
2) While walking the 4 FOM Buffer Transects (see
above), record the presence and severity of the
buffer zone stressors (listed on the USA RAM
Metric 3 Form) that occur anywhere along the
transects.
3) Walk any other areas of the buffer zone that aerial
photos suggest might have potential stressors. If
observed, add these stressors to USA RAM Metric
3 Form.
HYDROLOGY (Form H-l)
Identify Water Sources
Determine and Rank Hydrology
Stressors
Make Ditch Measurements
Determine Presence of
Hydrology Indicators (RC H-l)
WATER QUALITY (Form WQ-1)
1) Complete Surface Water
Characteristics Assessment
2) Collect Water Sample and record
associated data
3) If desired, conduct Optional
Water Quality Protocol with
multi-probe meter
4) Determine Maximum Depth and
Surface Water Extent /
b)
c)
d)
3)
ALGAE (Form ALG-1, RC ALG-1)
If any surface water is present, collect Chlorophyll-a sample after collecting
the Algal Toxins and Algae Taxonomic samples (see Steps 2-4)
If both water and aquatic or emergent vegetation are present:
a) Collect epiphytic algae from herbaceous vegetation
Collect phytoplankton from surface water
Composite a and b
Split this composite epiphyte-water subsample to form:
i) the Algal Toxins sample, and
ii) the Partial Algae Taxonomic sample
e) Collect substrate algae subsamples and combine with Partial Taxonomic
sample to complete Algae Taxonomic sample
If water without vegetation is present, collect phytoplankton (surface water)
sample for:
a) the Algal Toxins Sample, and
b) the Partial Algae Taxonomic sample
c) Collect substrate algae subsamples and combine with Partial Taxonomic
sample to complete Algae Taxonomic sample
If no water is present, collect Algae Taxonomic sample from substrate only
Complete preparation of each sample by filtering or preserving
Complete
Sample
Day
SOILS - PROFILE DESCRIPTION (RC S-1A)
1) Determine 4 Soil Pit locations (RC S-2A)
2) Use a separate Form S-l to record data for each pit
3) At each Soil Pit, excavate to 60cm and record location, depth,
and pit attribute information (Form S-l (Front))
4) Describe soil profile at each Soil Pit by delineating horizons
(RC S-2B) and by determining the following characteristics
for each horizon. Record profile data on Form S-l (Front):
a) H2S odor
b) Horizon Depth and Horizon Boundary Abruptness
c) Soil texture (RC S-4A)
d) % Rock Fragments and % Roots (RC S-3A, Plate 3)
e) Soil Matrix Color (RC S-4B)
f) Presence and type of Redoximorphic or Other Features
(RC S-3)
g) % Surface area of Distinct or Prominent Redox and
Other Features (RC S-4B)
h) Color of most evident Redox or Other Feature (RC S-4B)
5) Determine presence of Hydric Soil Indicators in the Soil
Profile (RC S-5) and record on Form S-l (Back)
6) Randomly select one Representative Soil Pit from the subset
of pits with the most similar soils
7) Excavate soil cores down to 125cm from the Representative
Pit. Describe the soil profile and determine presence of
Hydric Soil Indicators from 60cm down to 125 cm (Steps 3-6)
8) Photograph Soil Profile (Appendix D) at each Soil Pit as profile
descriptions are being conducted
2-35
SOILS-SAMPLE COLLECTION IN REPRESENTATIVE PIT (RC S-1B)
1) Once the Representative Pit has been identified, excavate as
needed to collect four kinds of soil samples. Carefully bag
and label each sample using prefilled labels and tags. Record
collection and label information on Form S-l
2) Collect the soil isotope (3 syringe cores) and the sediment
enzyme (6 syringe cores) sample from surface soil layers at
Representative Pit location
3) Collect a Bulk Density (3 can cores) and a Chemistry/PSDA
(1-2 liters) sample for each horizon > 8cm thick located in
the top 60cm of the Representative Pit
4) Collect the Chemistry/PSDA sample for each horizon > 8cm
thick located from 60 to 125cm deep in Representative Pit
SOILS - DEPTH TO WATER IN SOIL PITS (Form S-l (Back))
1) After all data and all samples have been gathered at all
four pits, collect water depth data at each pit.
2) Backfill all 4 Soil Pits
FINAL ON-SITE ACTIVITIES
1) Complete preparation of unfinished water quality, algae, or soil
samples
2) Record all sample types collected in the AA on Form T-l
3) Review data forms
4) Clean up site, gather equipment, and samples for transport to
vehicle
5) Clean equipment & crew of plant or other biological propagules
Conduct Crew Leader final check-off
V6)
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.5.4 Sampling Activities and Forms Applicable to Multiple Indicators or Tasks
Sampling activities that span multiple protocols are:
• Determining site and sample status (Section 2.5.4.1).
• Photography (Section 2.5.4.2, Appendix D).
• Use of GPS (Section 2.5.4.3).
• Post-sampling review of the Data Packet, samples, and Form T-1: Site and Sample
Status/WRS Tracking (See Reference Card OPS-2, Sides A and B, Table 2-6).
Aspects of Form T-1 are discussed in Sections 2.5.4.1 and 2.6.2 of this chapter and other
aspects are discussed in Chapters 5, 6, 8, and 9. Form T-5: NWCA Tracking-Batched
Samples is used to track both taxonomic algae samples (Chapter 9) and completed Data Packets
(Section 2.6.3).
Adhesive sample labels for several sample types are printed together on one label sheet for each
site (Section 2.9). Each sample label is preprinted with sample type, the Site ID, a Sample ID.
Specifics of these labels are discussed with their relevant sample types in other chapters.
2.5.4.1 Determining Site and Sample Status (completing Form T-1)
Form T-1: Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking must be filled out for every NWCA site that
is visited for sampling. It provides three key types of information:
1) Site status
2) Sample status
3) Tracking information for immediately shipped samples
One copy of this form is completed for each site, but to gather all of the required information it
is accessed multiple times during sampling by both the Veg and AB Teams. Particular
elements of the form that pertain to specific NWCA indicators are discussed in the relevant
chapter and elements related to shipping are discussed in Section 2.6.2.
Note that the hardcopy of Form T-1 with the preprinted Site ID from your Form Packet has
several elements that are completed in the field, while the shipping information is completed
when the immediately shipped (within 24hours of collection) samples are prepared for shipping.
This hardcopy is included with the samples when they are shipped. Form T-1 must also
simultaneously be submitted to the Information Management Team either as a fillable
electronic file submitted by email, or the completed hardcopy version can be faxed, or the
information on the form can be telephoned in (see Section 2.6.2.2, Appendix A and the bottom
of Form T-1 for how to transmit Form T-1 to the Information Management Team).
An overview of how to fill out the all the information for Form T-1 is presented here.
Header Section - Completely fill out the requested information.
Shipping Information Section - Complete this section when you are packing the immediately
shipped samples for shipping. Fill in the Sender and Sender Phone fields. Select and fill the
appropriate bubble to indicate the shipping carrier in the Shipped by field. Enter the
Airbill/Tracking Number and the Date Sent for the package.
2-36
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Site Status - Complete the Site Status section during the field verification of the AA
establishment plan (Chapter 3, Section 3.1.2). Answer the question "Is the Site Sampleable?"
If yes, fill in the Yes bubble and proceed to the Sample Status section of the form. If no, fill in
the No bubble and select and fill one reason from the Non-Sampled Status list. If the site is not
sampleable and further explanation is needed, provide notes in the Site Status Comments
section. Although this site status information is similar to information collected on Form PV-1,
it is also critical on Form T-1 because it reaches the Information Management Team quickly
and is used to track field crew progress and sample locations.
Sample Status - Answer the question "Were Samples Collected?" If yes, fill in the Yes
bubble. If no, fill the No bubble. If no samples were collected, or if only some samples were
collected, explain the reasons why in the Site Status Comments section. Indicate each sample
type collected (see relevant chapters). For plant QA vouchers and unknown specimens also
indicate the number of plants sampled (i.e., number of specimens collected).
WRS Sample Tracking - WRS refers to lab where the set of immediately shipped samples are
sent. Carefully fill in the Sample ID for each of the immediately shipped samples: water
chemistry (CHEM), water chemistry duplicate (if taken), chlorophyll-a (CHLA), soil isotope
(S/SO), algal toxins (ALGT), and sediment enzymes (SEDE). See the relevant chapter for
specific details on how to handle and pack these samples.
Note that the bottom of Form T-1 provides the email address or phone numbers for
transmitting the form to the Information Management Team. The contact information for the
WRS lab and for tracking related inquiries will typically be used by the lab and Information
Management Team, and will not often be needed by the Field Crew.
2.5.4.2 Photography
For the NWCA field work, a series of digital photographs will be taken to characterize the AA
(see Chapter 3), document the presence of any threatened, endangered, or sensitive (TES)
plant species (see Chapter 5), and illustrate soils profiles. In addition, if the Field Crew finds
something of interest that they believe should be documented, photos may be taken of these
situations. See Appendix D - Photography for details on how to take and frame the
photographs, how to label and track the photos, and how to upload and save the photos and
their location and identification information.
2.5.4.3 Guidelines for Global Positioning System (GPS) Use
A GPS unit is used to locate the POINT and to establish the AA at NWCA Sites (Chapter 3). It
is also used to determine the coordinates of a subset of the Buffer Plots (Chapter 4). Therefore,
it is imperative that the Field Crew understands how to operate their GPS unit.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses signals sent from multiple orbiting satellites to a
ground-based sensor in order to fix a position on the earth. Position accuracy depends on the
Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) which is a measure of the geometry of the satellite spread
over the location of the observer. Low PDOP values represent more advantageous satellite
geometry and give better positional accuracy (= wider spread of satellites for more definitive
triangulation). For NWCA a target PDOP < 10 is preferred.
2-37
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
GPS uses many alternative mathematical models to describe the spherical shape of the earth
and each is a separate Datum. Commonly used datums include NAD27 CONUS, NAD83, and
WGS84. Each represents a different interpretation of the shape of the earth. The NWCA
standard is NAD83. Thus, all GPS units should be switched to this standard as part of
their pre field-use set up. Crews should confirm that the NAD83 datum is being used when
the GPS is turned on prior to data collection. If the GPS is not set for NAD83 and the unit
cannot be changed readily, note the datum used on the data forms for later conversion.
GPS devices use a variety of units for position designation based on an imaginary latitude and
longitude coordinate grid system laid across the earth (degrees, minutes, seconds, or degrees
and decimal minutes, and UTMs (a metric system). The NWCA standard is decimal degrees for
reporting all GPS positions.
When using a hand held GPS, a position is captured by receiving signals from orbiting satellites.
A hit is a complete record of a position based input from > 3 satellites. A GPS position capture
generally takes about 1 second per hit. The PDOP is generally displayed on the unit while it is
averaging hits. For NWCA we will average > 50 hits for a position.
Refer to the GPS user's manual to provide specific instructions on setting the Datum, coordinate
system, and units to NWCA standards.
2.5.4.4 Site, Crew, and Equipment Check and Cleanup
Once all sampling is completed at a site, gather all equipment, remove all flagging, and return
the site to as close to its original condition as possible. If the site is a revisit site leave the
flagging marking the POINT and the AA CENTER if it is different from the POINT. Before
leaving the site, check that all equipment, gear, samples, and data are accounted for and ready
to carry back to the vehicle. Make a final sweep of the site to ensure nothing has been left
behind.
Zero Taxa Transport
Before leaving the site, implement the Zero Taxa Transport protocol. Increases in invasive and
noxious alien species are occurring throughout all regions of the U.S., with many deleterious
effects on ecosystem services. Thus, it is imperative that all NWCA Field Crews employ a
decontamination protocol with the goal of Zero Taxa Transport to new sites. The Site Packet or
other resources that you reviewed before traveling to the site may have information about areas
of the sample region known or suspected to be infested with aggressive non-indigenous
species. If any specific invasive species are known to occur in the sample area, take species
specific precautions against transporting them. However all sites should be treated with equal
caution to minimize the spread of invasive taxa. Stringent decontamination procedures will help
to prevent the spread organisms via NWCA field work.
The protocol for the Zero Taxa Transport Goal has two elements:
• Procedures conducted on site or at the field location of the vehicle (this section).
• Procedures to be conducted from the field lodgings or base location (See sections 2.4.6 and
2.6.1).
Every effort must be made to limit the potential for transport of mature and immature life stages
of invasive plant and animal species, and of pathogens that may affect native plants or animals.
2-38
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Take precautions to avoid transporting seeds or vegetative propagules, pollen, pathogens,
fungi, eggs, any small organisms, invertebrates, fish, or other animals.
While still onsite, before leaving to hike to the vehicle, conduct the following decontamination
measures to clean off personal clothing, gear, and field equipment:
• Remove visible plants, seeds, mud and animals from equipment, gear, clothing, raingear,
boots, and waders through brushing and shaking.
• Use a small scrub brush to clean the lace area and soles of boots.
• Rinse personal protective equipment including raingear, waders and wading boots if water is
available on the site to remove all visible dirt, mud, and plant seeds and fragments.
• In instances where mud is clinging to gear and equipment, but no standing water is present
in the AA; remove as much mud as possible.
• If a spray bottle with a 10% bleach solution (see Table 2-3) is available at the site, spray
down boots, waders, and soil sampling equipment before leaving the site.
• If a boat was used to access the site, prior to leaving, drain all bilge water in the boat.
At the staging area for the AA (where the vehicle is parked):
• Repeat the on-site protocol prior to departure for base location. The initial cleaning and
wipe-down at the field site by Crew Members before returning to the vehicle should minimize
the potential for the road edge becoming an invasives species loci or vector.
• Ideally, a hand pressurized sprayer filled with clean water or 10% bleach solution should be
kept in the vehicle and used to rinse all gear of water from the site and to finish rinsing mud
from gear.
• When site access has necessitated travel on an unimproved road, remove any vegetation
debris that may have accumulated on accessible areas of the vehicle with a whisk broom
before leaving the area.
• If the vehicle has collected packed mud and detritus in the wheel wells and undercarriage,
run the vehicle through a car wash at the earliest opportunity ,and if at all possible, before
visiting another site.
Special Equipment Clean-up Circumstances
In some situations along the U.S. Gulf Coast, an NWCA site may occur in a wetland that was
contaminated with oil during the 2010 BP oil spill. If so, special precautions and techniques for
decontaminating gear and equipment may need to be implemented. If you encounter this
situation, refer to your state, tribe, or other organization approved health and safety plan for
protocols on how to handle sampling and clean-up. Appendix E. Example Oil Decontamination
Procedures provides an example of one such protocol.
2-39
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.6 POST-FIELD SAMPLING BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES
This section describes activities that are completed after field sampling and back the base
location. These are the critical final elements to complete the NWCA sampling and data
collection and include:
• Post-Sampling Equipment Clean-up and Maintenance (Section 2.6.1)
• Sample Shipping and Tracking (Section 2.6.2)
• Data Packet Handling and Transmittal (Section 2.6.3)
No reference card summarizes these tasks as many of them are noted in other protocols,
reference cards, or checklists. However, information on sample shipping and tracking is
summarized on Reference Card ST-1, Side A. (NWCA Sample Packaging and Shipping
Flowchart for Different Sample Types) and Reference Card ST-1, Side B. (NWCA
Summary of Sample Handling, Shipping Procedures, and Shipping Permits) from Appendix
A.
2.6.1 Post Sampling Base Location Equipment Clean-Up and Maintenance
Once back at the base location (or at the field lodgings, if needed), complete the following
clean-up and maintenance tasks.
1) Inspect all equipment, vehicle and boat (if used) and clean off any plant propagules or
fragments and animal material that were missed in the on-site clean-up procedures (Section
2.5.4.5).
2) Disinfect all equipment, personal gear, and boat (if used) with 10% bleach solution or other
approved chemical agent to prevent spread of nonnative and invasive taxa.
3) If any equipment was exposed to oil, completely decontaminate using your state, tribe, or
other organization approved protocols. See Appendix E. for an example of an Oil
Decontamination protocol.
4) Rinse and dry equipment and gear prior to storage or repacking for the next sampling trip:
a) Rinse waders, boots, and other personal protective gear with tap water.
b) Rinse chlorophyll-a filtration chambers three times with distilled water after each use.
c) Rinse long handled dipper three times with distilled water after each use.
d) Rinse vegetation quadrat frames with tap water.
e) Rinse soil pit sampling gear (e.g., shovels, corers, augers) with tap water.
f) Rinse coolers with water to clean off any dirt or debris on the outside and inside.
5) Inventory equipment and supply needs and relay orders to the Field Logistics Coordinator or
to the Information Management Team.
6) Before moving to the next site, if a commercial car wash facility is available, wash vehicle
(and boat, and trailer if used for tidal wetland sites) and thoroughly clean with a hot water
pressurized rinse-no soap.
2-40
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.6.2 Sample Shipping and Tracking
All samples are processed following specific protocols described in each indicator chapter (see
Chapters 5, 6, 8, and 9). The Field Crew ships time-sensitive samples, known as immediately
shipped samples (water chemistry, chlorophyll-a, soil isotope, sediment enzymes, and algal
toxins), to the designated analytical laboratory within 24 hours of collection to ensure sample
quality and data integrity. Other samples, called batch samples (e.g., algae taxonomic id, plant
specimens, soil bulk density and chemistry) are held by the Field Crew for 1 or 2 weeks, then
shipped or delivered in batches to the appropriate laboratory (See Figure 2-5 and Appendix A).
All samples must be shipped with sample-type specific tracking forms, which include the site
where samples were collected and list for each sample: the sample ID, the sample type, and the
date of collection. In addition to the completed tracking form included in the shipping container,
a copy of each tracking form is transmitted to the Information Management Team at the same
time the sample package is shipped to its designated lab.
More detail on shipping and tracking is provided in Appendix A.
2.6.2.1 Tracking Forms
Tracking forms ensure that samples are always accounted for, and that their status and location
is always known by the Information Management Team. This is an important protection for the
valuable data that the NWCA samples represent.
1) All Tracking forms (Forms T-1 through T-5) have electronic versions as well as
the hardcopy versions with preprinted site numbers that will be included in the
Form Packet for each site.
2) Among the tracking forms, Form T-1 is the only one that is typically filled out in
the field (See Section 2.5.4.1). Forms T-2 through T-5 are usually completed at
the base location or field lodging when the samples are batched for shipment to
the specific lab for each sample type.
3) Typically three copies of each completed tracking form are needed, though one
of these may be an electronic file. One copy is enclosed in the shipping box with
the samples it tracks, one is transmitted to the Information Management Team,
and one is retained in the Field Crew's records.
4) Teams have the option to either handwrite the tracking data on the hardcopy
versions of Forms T-2 through T-5 from the Form Packet or record the tracking
data on the electronic version of the form. Specifically, the options are as
follows:
a) The completed electronic version of the tracking forms maybe emailed to the
Information Management Team at the email address listed on the bottom of
the each form.
OR
2-41
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
b) The completed hardcopy version of tracking forms may be faxed to the
Information Management Team at the Fax Number on the bottom of each
form.
OR for Form T-1 only
c) If it is difficult to access a computer or fax machine to return a completed
electronic Form T-1 for a particular NWCA site to the Information
Management Team within 24 hours of sample collection, the status and
tracking data from Form T-1 may be communicated by voice to the phone
number for the Voice Message Center (provided at the bottom of the form).
2.6.2.2 Immediately Shipped Samples
The soil isotopes, sediment enzymes, water chemistry, water chemistry duplicate (when taken),
algal toxins, and chlorophyll-a samples for each AA will be sent in an ice chest to the USEPA
Lab in Corvallis, Oregon, within 24 hours of collection.
The protocol below pertains to all of these immediately shipped samples. See the Sample and
Data Handling Section in the appropriate chapter for protocols on shipping that pertain to a
specific type of immediately shipped sample. See Appendix A for detailed protocols on packing,
tracking, and shipping samples and for shipping addresses.
1) Arrange for the NWCA shipping carrier to pickup the samples (See Appendix A for carrier
options).
2) Organize the samples for the site that are to be immediately shipped.
3) Review the information for the immediately shipped samples on Form T-1: NWCA Status
and Tracking to ensure that
• All the samples are present.
• The information on the form is correct.
• The site and sample numbers on the sample labels match those recorded on the form.
4) Place the completed Form T-1 (or a copy of it) in a zippered plastic bag.
5) Prepare the ice-chest for shipping (see Appendix A for specifics). Ice should be double
wrapped in plastic bags to avoid any leakage from the ice chest and to avoid any potential
contamination of samples.
6) Place samples into the ice chest with ice under and surrounding samples. Place the
zippered plastic bag containing Form T-1 on top of the samples and ice.
7) Seal the ice-chest package (See Appendix A).
8) Affix an APHIS Regulated Soils permit for the USEPA Corvallis Lab to the outside of the ice
chest (See Appendix A).
9) Fill out the shipping label (See Appendix A or Form T-1 for the shipping address).
2-42
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
10) Deliver the ice chest to the shipping company and retain all receipts and records of
shipping.
2.6.2.3 Batch Shipped Samples and Tracking Forms (Form 7-2 through T-5)
Several kinds of samples (soil chemistry, soil bulk density, algae taxonomic id, unknown plant
specimens, and plant QA vouchers) are collected and held for 1 or 2 weeks. These samples,
from one to several sites, are then shipped in batches by sample type to designated labs.
See Figure 2-5 and Appendix A for shipping destinations, addresses, and packing
specifications. Follow the procedures outlined in Section 2.6.2.1 for submitting tracking forms to
the Information Management Team and for including them in the shipping boxes with the
pertinent samples. Use one tracking form for each set of samples in each shipping container
shipped to a laboratory.
Details on how to fill out the tracking forms for individual sample types and additional guidelines
for packing samples are covered in the relevant indicator chapters:
• Form T-2: NWCA Unknown Plant Sample Tracking (Chapter 5, Section 5.2.5)
• Form T-3: NWCA QA Plant Sample Tracking (Chapter 5, Section 5.2.5)
• Form T-4: NWCA Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density Sample Tracking (Chapter 6, Section
6.2.2)
• Form T-5: NWCA Tracking - Batched Sample
o Used with Algae taxonomic ID samples (See Chapter 9, Section 9.2.2.2)
o Used for Data Packets (See Section 2.6.3)
2.6.3 Data Packets (Completed Data Forms) - Handling and Transmittal
Data Packets consist of the entire set of completed data forms for each NWCA site sampled.
Data Packets are batched and shipped to the Information Management Team within 2 weeks of
sampling, and are tracked like laboratory samples using Form T-5.
When completed the data forms are submitted within 2 weeks of sampling, the data entry team
has the ability to clear up any ambiguities with Field Crews, saving time, and increasing
confidence in the data. In addition, the timely return of the completed Data Packets can allow
initial data entry to be completed within weeks following the conclusion of the field effort
because of the scannable forms used in the NWCA.
The Field Crew leader is responsible for ensuring that all forms are correctly handled at all
times. Proper handling, tracking, and shipping of Data Packets include the following steps:
1) Review each form to ensure that all fields are correctly filled out and the Site IDs and
Sample IDs are correct.
2) Assemble the completed forms from a site into the Data Packet. Forms should be
sequentially ordered by protocol within the Data Packet to aid in determining that all forms
are present and to facilitate data entry once the Data Packet reaches the Information
Management Team.
2-43
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
Order forms in the Data Packet as follows:
Form PV-1: NWCA Point Verification Form
Form AA-1: NWCA Assessment Area Establishment
Form AA-2: NWCA Assessment Area Characterization
Form B-1: Buffer Sample Plots & Targeted Alien Species (5/site)
Form V-1: NWCA Vegetation Plot Establishment
Form V2a & b: NWCA Vascular Species Presence and Cover (multiple V-2b,
continuation pages likely)
Form V-3: NWCA Vegetation Types
Form V-4a & b: NWCA Snag and Tree Counts and Tree Cover (multiple V-4b,
continuation pages likely)
Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Data (4/site)
Form H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology
Form WQ-1: NWCA Assessment Area Water Quality
FormALG-1: NWCA Algae
Form USA-RAM 1: Buffer Perimeter and Buffer Mean
Form USA-RAM 2: Stressors in Buffer Area
Form USA-RAM 3: Topographic Complexity
Form USA-RAM 4: Patch Mosaic Complexity
Form USA-RAM 5: Vertical Complexity
Form USA-RAM 6: Plant Community Complexity
Form USA-RAM 7: Stressors to Water Quality in the AA
Form USA-RAM 8: Alterations to Hydroperiod in the AA
Form USA-RAM 9: Stressors to Substrate in the AA
Form USA-RAM 10: Cover of Invasive Plant Species in the AA
Form USA-RAM 11: Stress to Vegetation in the AA
3) While held until batch shipped, Data Packets must be neatly and securely stored in a
protected area. It is vital that no forms from the Data Packet are misplaced or damaged to
assure the quality of the NWCA data.
4) Prior to shipping, make a hard copy (or if you prefer a scanned copy) of all forms in each
Data Packet, and retain the copied Data Packets for your records. This is critical as it a)
prevents the possibility of data loss because of a lost package during shipment, and b)
allows you to view the completed forms in a Data Packet should you be contacted by the
Information Management Team to discuss a particular data item.
5) For the Data Packets that you are shipping to the Information Management Team,
complete Form T-5: NWCA 2011 TRACKING - BATCHED SAMPLES by filling out the
electronic or the hardcopy version of the form. Enter the information for each of the Data
Packets on Form T-5 by completing the following fields:
a) Site ID
b) Date Sample Collected (in this case, date data was collected)
c) Visit Number (1 = the visit when the sampling was done; 2 = scheduled revisit)
d) Sample ID from the label the sample (leave blank, does not apply)
e) Sample Type (in this case PACK)
f) # of containers (leave blank)
g) Comments, if needed
h) Ensure that the Site ID, Sample Date, Visit # recorded on Form T-5 matches that on the
forms in the Data Packet
i) Fill in the bubble for WED-Corvallis, OR in the Lab section of Form T-5.
2-44
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
6) Make two copies of Form T-5. Immediately, transmit the original to the Information
Management Team. See Section 2.6.2.1 and Appendix A for details on transmitting
forms to Information Management.
7) Pack the Data Packets in a sturdy box as indicated in Appendix A.
8) Place one copy of Form T-5 on top of the Data Packets in the shipping box.
9) Retain the second copy for your records.
10) See Appendix A for detailed information on shipping company, shipping labels, and
shipping addresses.
11) Deliver the package of samples to the shipping company and retain all receipts and
records of shipping.
2-45
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
CHLOR-a
WATER
CHEM
SOIL
ISOTOPE
ALGAL
TOXINS
SEDIMENT
ENZYMES
SOIL
PESTICIDES
(If Collected)
PRESERVE ON WET ICE
SHIP IMMEDIATELY ON WET ICE
(WITHIN 24 HOURS)
OVERNIGHT COURIER REQUIRED
Saturday Delivery OK
EPA Lab
Corvallis, OR
(Or State Lab As Applicable)
DATA
PACKET
SOIL
CHEMISTRY
&
BULK DENSITY
ALGAE
TAXONOMY
PLANT
QA VOUCHERS
& UKNOWN
SPECIES
PRESERVE
WITH
LUGOL'S
SOLUTION
PRESS AND
DRY
SPECIMENS
SHIP IN BATCHES
(1 -2 weeks)
GROUND
COURIER
No Saturday
Delivery
OVERNIGHT
COURIER
Saturday Delivery OK
EcoAnalyst Lab
(Or State Lab as Applicable)
Figure 2-5. NWCA sample packaging and shipping flowchart by sample type. See Appendix A for more details.
2-46
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.7 LITERATURE CITED:
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2007. National Rivers and Streams
Assessment: Field Operations Manual. EPA-841-B-07-009, Revision #1 -May 2008. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011a. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Quality Assurance Project Plan. EPA/843/R10/003. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011b. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Site Evaluation Guidelines. EPA/843/R10/004. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Field Operations Manual (Quick Reference Version). EPA-843-R-10-001.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Review. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: USA-RAM Field Operations Manual. EPA/XXX/R-XX/XXX. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
2-47
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2-48
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.8 OVERVIEW REFERENCE CARDS
Reference Card OPS-1. Preparation for Field Sampling of NWCA Sites
Reference Card OPS-2, Side A. Vegetation Team Sampling Day Activities
Reference Card OPS-2, Side B. Assessment Area-Buffer (AB) Team Sampling Day
Activities
2-49
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2-50
-------
Reference Card OPS-1. Preparation for Field Sampling of NWCA Sites
(Tasks are conducted by Field Crew unless otherwise indicated. Note other personnel listed may be the same
individuals as the field crew in some instances.)
Site Evaluation and Pre-Sampling Base Location Activities
Site Evaluation (see NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines)
Conducted by State, Tribe, or Other Organization Personnel, or if not, then by Field Crew
1) Desk Evaluation of each NWCA Site
2) Obtain permissions to access and sample site
3) On-Site Field Evaluation of individual NWCA Sites
Assemble Site Packet for Each Site
(Section 2.2.1)
Conducted by State, Tribe, or Other Organization Personnel,
or if not, then by Field Crew
Site Packet Components:
1) Form Packet
2) NWCA Site Maps, Aerial Photos, and Other Imagery
3) Soil Survey Information
4) Land ownership and requirements and permissions for
access
5) Permits for site access or for data or sample collection
6) Information for accessing the site
7) Driving and hiking routes to the site
8) Site Evaluation results
9) Preliminary plan for establishing AA
10) Any other site specific information useful to the Crew
Planning Field Itineraries and Preparing for a
Sampling Trip (Sections 2.4.3)
1) Determine which NWCA sites will be sampled
during the sampling trip
2) Organize and confirm lodging for trip
3) Ensure Site Packets, including the correct Form
Packet, for all sites to be sampled are complete
4) Review all pertinent information sources about
sites to be sampled (e.g., Site Evaluation results
soil surveys, maps, plant species lists)
5) Review aerial photos, maps, and other imagery and
develop a preliminary plan for AA establishment
for each site to be sampled
6) Complete the office evaluation segment of USA-
RAM metrics 1, 2, and 5
7) Address logistical issues (determine best
navigation routes to sites, contact landowners, and
arrange any needed meetings with landowners,
individual with keys to gates, soil scientist, etc.)
8) Ensure safety manual and emergency contact
information is always with Crew
9) Take care of all important communications
informing Logistics Coordinator, Information
Management Coordinator, and local supervisors of
your sampling schedule
10) Develop a plan for sites with special conditions
(e.g., tidal, difficult soils, complex sites)
Sampling Index Period and Recommended
Approach for Determining Site Sampling Order
(Sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.2)
Completed by State, Tribe, or Other Organization Personnel,
or if not, then by Field Crew
1)
2)
3)
4)
Determine the best sampling index period for each
NWCA Site (e.g., two revisit sites, all sampleable base
sites, and alternate sites identified to replace base
sites dropped during Site Evaluation)
Develop a schedule for the sampling order of the
NWCA sites that incorporates index period and
geographic proximity of the individual sites. Be sure
to schedule to two site visits for the two revisit sites
for your state
Once in the field, if a site must be dropped because it
is unsampleable (Chapter 3), follow the instructions in
Section 2.4.2 (and the Site Evaluation Guidelines) to
obtain an alternate site to replace the dropped site
Important: Confirm that the alternate site is
the correct one and determine when to sample
it with your Designated EPA Contact for your
Field Crew (EPA Regional Coordinator or the
EPA HQ Team (Tables 2-1 and 2-2))
Field Instrument Checks and Calibration
(Section 2.4.4)
1) Laser Rangefinder check
2) GPS battery check
3) Camera battery and supply check
4) Multi-probe meter performance test
Equipment and Supply Preparation (Section 2.4.5)
Vehicle Maintenance (Section 2.4.6)
Refer to the indicated Sections of the 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual and to the 2011 NWCA Site Evaluation
Guidelines for more detail on the protocols summarized on this card.
-------
-------
Reference Card OPS-2, Side A. Vegetation Team Sampling Day Activities
Begin
Sample
Day at
Site
VEGETATION (VEG) Team (2 persons)
BE- Botanist/Ecologist
BA-Botanist Assistant
SITE VERIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT AREA (AA) ESTABLISHMENT
1) On site, verify office plan for AA establishment
2) Verify POINT and CENTER
3) Verify wetland sampleable and define AA (Form PV-1, RC AA-1, RC AA-2)
4) Set-up AA (RC AA-1)
5) Complete Form AA-1 and annotate aerial photo or make a sketch map of
AA and its components.
6) Characterize AA:
a) Determine FWS Status & Trends (S&T) classes (Form AA-2, RC AA-3A)
b) Determine HGM Type (Form AA-2, RC AA-3B)
VEGETATION PLOT LAYOUT
1) Select Veg Plot Layout configuration (RC V-2)
2) Establish five 100-m2 Veg Plots (RC V-2 and V-3A,
Form V-l)
PHOTOS (Appendix D)
1) Take photos of AA (overview, photos from AA CENTER
toward boundary along Veg Plot placement lines)
2) Other photos as needed (e.g., TES species, or unusual
conditions in the AA)
VEGETATION CHARACTERIZATION - EACH VEG PLOT
(NWCA-FOM, RC V-l)
1) Collect Plant Species Presence data (RC V-3B, Forms V-
2a, b)
2) Estimate % Cover for all Individual Vascular Plant
Species and identify the Primary Height Class in which
each species occurs (RC V-3B and V-4, Forms V-2a, b)
3) Collect unknown and QA Voucher plant specimens as
encountered
4) Determine predominant Status & Trends Wetland
Class ( FormV-3, Front)
5) Estimate % Cover of Vertical Vegetation Strata (Form
V-3, Front)
6) Estimate % Cover for Non-Vascular Groups
(bryophytes, lichens, and macroalgae) (Form V-3,
Front)
7) Collect data describing Ground Surface Attributes
(Form V-3, Back)
8) Collect Snag (counts) and Live Tree Species (cover and
counts) data (Forms V-4a, b)
Complete
Sample
Day
FINAL ON-SITE ACTIVITIES
1) Review field data forms
2) Clean up wetland site and organize gear,
equipment, and samples for transport to vehicle
3) Clean equipment & crew of plant or other
biological propagules
4) Crew Leader Final Check-off
USA RAM -ASSESSMENT AREA
(USA RAM Manual)
Condition Metrics
• Metric 4: Topographic Complexity
• Metric 5: Patch Mosaic Complexity
• Metric 6: Vertical Complexity
• Metric 7: Plant Community Complexity
Stressor Metrics
• MetricS: Stressors to Water Quality
• Metric 9: Alterations to Hydroperiod
• Metric 10: Stress to Substrate
• Metric 11: Cover of Invasive Plant Species
• Metric 12: Stress to Vegetation
PLANT SPECIMEN COLLECTION AND HANDLING
At Site:
1) Ensure that all unknowns and QA Vouchers have
been collected
At Site, Vehicle, or Field Lodging on Sample Day:
2) Complete a Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen
Label for each plant specimen
3) Press plant specimens
4) Record number of plant specimens collected at the
site on Form T-l: Site and Sample Status/WRS
Tracking
On Subsequent Days (see Post-sampling tasks):
1) Dry specimens, change blotters in press as needed
Package, ship or deliver to designated herbarium or
laboratory, completing and enclosing the
appropriate plant specimen tracking information
(Form T-2 or T-3) in the shipping box
2)
Refer to the 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual for more detail on the protocols summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card OPS-2, Side B. Assessment Area -Buffer (AB) Team Sampling Day Activities
Begin
Sample
Day at
Site
ASSESSMENT AREA/BUFFER (AB) Team (2 persons)
AB1-AB Member 1
AB2-AB Member 2
NATURAL COVER AND STRESSORS
FOM -12 Buffer Plots and AA CENTER Plot (Form B-l,
RC B-l, Appendix B) - Plots are 100-m2(10X10m) with
visually estimated boundaries.
A. In each of 3 Buffer Plots located along each of 4 (N,
W, E, S) 100m Buffer Transects, and in the AA Center
Plot, determine the presence and abundance of:
1) Natural Cover (Vegetation and Substrate)
2) Residential and Urban Stressors
3) Agriculture & Rural stressors
4) Industrial Development Stressors
5) Hydrology Stressors
6) 22 Targeted Alien Species (presence only, see
Appendix B)
B. Record GPS coordinates of 3rd plot on each
transect.
USA RAM Metrics 1, 2, and 3: Stress to the Buffer
Area (USA RAM Manual)
1) Verify office interpretation of Metrics 1 and 2;
make corrections based on field observations.
2) While walking the 4 FOM Buffer Transects (see
above), record the presence and severity of the
buffer zone stressors (listed on the USA RAM
Metric 3 Form) that occur anywhere along the
transects.
3) Walk any other areas of the buffer zone that aerial
photos suggest might have potential stressors. If
observed, add these stressors to USA RAM Metric
3 Form.
HYDROLOGY (Form H-l)
Identify Water Sources
Determine and Rank Hydrology
Stressors
Make Ditch Measurements
Determine Presence of
Hydrology Indicators (RC H-l)
WATER QUALITY (Form WQ-1)
1) Complete Surface Water
Characteristics Assessment
2) Collect Water Sample and record
associated data
3) If desired, conduct Optional
Water Quality Protocol with
multi-probe meter
4) Determine Maximum Depth and
Surface Water Extent
2)
3)
ALGAE (Form ALG-1, RC ALG-1)
If any surface water is present, collect Chlorophyll-a sample after collecting
the Algal Toxins and Algae Taxonomic samples (see Steps 2-4)
If both water and aquatic or emergent vegetation are present:
a) Collect epiphytic algae from herbaceous vegetation
b) Collect phytoplankton from surface water
c) Composite a and b
d) Split this composite epiphyte-water subsample to form:
i) the Algal Toxins sample, and
ii) the Partial Algae Taxonomic sample
e) Collect substrate algae subsamples and combine with Partial Taxonomic
sample to complete Algae Taxonomic sample
If water without vegetation is present, collect phytoplankton (surface water)
sample for:
a) the Algal Toxins Sample, and
b) the Partial Algae Taxonomic sample
c) Collect substrate algae subsamples and combine with Partial Taxonomic
sample to complete Algae Taxonomic sample
If no water is present, collect Algae Taxonomic sample from substrate only
Complete preparation of each sample by filtering or preserving
Complete
Sample
Day
SOILS - PROFILE DESCRIPTION (RC S-1A)
1) Determine 4 Soil Pit locations (RC S-2A)
2) Use a separate Form S-l to record data for each pit
3) At each Soil Pit, excavate to 60cm and record location,
depth, and pit attribute information (Form S-l (Front))
4) Describe soil profile at each Soil Pit by delineating horizons
(RC S-2B) and by determining the following characteristics
for each horizon. Record profile data on Form S-l (Front):
a) H2S odor
b) Horizon Depth and Horizon Boundary Abruptness
c) Soil texture (RC S-4A)
d) % Rock Fragments and % Roots (RC S-3A, Plate 3)
e) Soil Matrix Color (RC S-4B)
f) Presence and type of Redoximorphic or Other Features
(RC S-3)
g) % Surface area of Distinct or Prominent Redox and
Other Features (RC S-4B)
h) Color of most evident Redox or Other Feature (RC S-4B)
5) Determine presence of Hydric Soil Indicators in the Soil
Profile (RC S-5) and record on Form S-l (Back)
6) Randomly select one Representative Soil Pit from the subset
of pits with the most similar soils
7) Excavate soil cores down to 125cm from the Representative
Pit. Describe the soil profile and determine presence of
Hydric Soil Indicators from 60cm down to 125 cm (Steps 3-6)
8) Photograph Soil Profile (Appendix D) at each Soil Pit as
profile descriptions are being conducted
SOILS-SAMPLE COLLECTION IN REPRESENTATIVE PIT (RC S-1B)
1) Once the Representative Pit has been identified, excavate as
needed to collect four kinds of soil samples. Carefully bag
and label each sample using prefilled labels and tags. Record
collection and label information on Form S-l
2) Collect the soil isotope (3 syringe cores) and the sediment
enzyme (6 syringe cores) sample from surface soil layers at
Representative Pit location
3) Collect a Bulk Density (3 can cores) and a Chemistry/PSDA
(1-2 liters) sample for each horizon > 8cm thick located in
the top 60cm of the Representative Pit
4) Collect the Chemistry/PSDA sample for each horizon > 8cm
thick located from 60 to 125cm deep in Representative Pit
SOILS - DEPTH TO WATER IN SOIL PITS (Form S-l (Back))
1) After all data and all samples have been gathered at all
four pits, collect water depth data at each pit.
2) Backfill all 4 Soil Pits
FINAL ON-SITE ACTIVITIES
1) Complete preparation of unfinished water quality, algae, or soil
samples
2) Record all sample types collected in the AA on Form T-l
3) Review data forms
4) Clean up site, gather equipment, and samples for transport to
vehicle
5) Clean equipment & crew of plant or other biological propagules
\6) Conduct Crew Leader final check-off /
Refer to the 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual for more detail on the protocols summarized on this card.
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2.9 MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST, TRACKING FORMS, SAMPLE LABELS
Master Equipment Checklist
Tracking Forms Used for Multiple Indicators
Form T-1: NWCA 2011 Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking
Form T-5: NWCA Tracking - Batched Samples
Sample Label Sheet with Labels for Multiple Indicators
2-55
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 2. Base Location Activities and Summary of Field Operations
2-56
-------
2011 NWCA - MASTER EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
Page 1
BASE KIT - Durable Supplies and Equipment (Supplied by USEPA)
Protocols, References and Reference Cards
64 MB USB drive with:
• Field Operations Manual
• Quick Reference Guide
. Schoeneberger, P.J., D.A. Wysocki, E.G. Benham, and
WD. Broderson. 2002. Field Book for Describing and
Sampling Soils, Version 2.0. Natural Resources
Conservation Service, National Soil Survey Center,
Lincoln, Nebraska, USA.
• Regional Hydric Soils Indicators Table
. Site Information Table (excel spreadsheet)
• Electronic versions of Tracking Forms
Munsell Color X-Rite. 2009. MunselI Soil Color
Charts. Grand Rapids, Ml.
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural
Resources Conservation Service. 2010. Field
Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States,
Version 7.0. LM. Vasilas, G.W. Hurt, and C.V. Noble
(eds.). USDA, NRCS, in cooperation with the National
Technical Committee for Hydric Soils.
Laminated Quick Reference Guide that includes:
• Equipment Checklists - protocol specific
• Reference Card OPS-1—Preparation for Sampling
• Reference Card OPS-2a and OPS-2b—Vegetation Team and
Assessment Area- Buffer (AB) Team Sampling Day Activities
• Reference Card SH-1—Sample Packaging and Shipping
Flowchart and Handling, Shipping and Permit Table
• Reference Card AA-1—Assessment Area Establishment
• Reference Card AA-2a and AA-2b—Criteria for sampleable
area and examples of hydrogeomorphic boundaries and human
altered types
• Reference Card AA-3a and AA-3b—FWS Status and Trends
Classes included in the NWCA and key to hydrogeomorphic
classes
• Reference Card B-1a and 1b—Buffer Sample Plot Layouts and
Completing Form B-1
• Reference Card V-1—Flowchart of Vegetation Protocol Tasks
• Reference Card V-2a and V-2b—Key for veg plot placement
and examples of plot layout configurations
• Reference Card V-3a and V-3b—Vegetation Plot Establishment
and Configuration, Data Collection Summary
• Reference Card V-4a and V-4b—Cover Estimation Procedures
and Assigning Pseudonyms for Unknown Plant Species
• Reference Card S-1a and S-1b—NWCA Soil Protocol
Flowchart
• Reference Card S-2a and S-2b—Soil Pit Placement and
Characteristics of Soil Horizon Types and Distinguishing Soil
Horizons
• Reference Card S-3a and S-3b—Soil Structure, Coats and
Films, Guidelines for Cover Estimation and Examples of Some
Redox and Other Soil Features
• Reference Card S-4a and S-4b—Determining Soil Texture and
Soil Color
• Reference Cards S-5a and S-5b—USDA Land Resource
Regions (LRRs) and Hydric Soil Indicators by LRR, Evaluating
Hydric Soil Indicators
• Reference Card H-1—NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology
• Reference Card ALG-1—Flowchart of Algae Sampling
Activities
Sampling Equipment and Supplies
Cargo Box (containing base kit supplies)
Frame backpack
2, 100-m tapes
2, Compasses
Laser rangefinder
Sharpie® or similar fine-point, permanent, silver marker
Surveyor's flagging tape (2 rolls red, 2 rolls blue)
100 Pin flags (50 red, 50 blue)
2, 10X hand lenses
6-inch ruler for measuring plant parts during field keying
Diameter measuring tape (cm)
20 U-shaped pins/stakes
6.32-m rope for inside edges of 10-m2 quadrat
2, 1-m PVC poles with 90° coupler for 1-m2 quadrat
Trowel for obtaining plant specimens with intact roots
Pruners
2 large plant presses with blotters, cardboard ventilators,
newsprint, compression straps, and small envelopes for
loose plant parts
Twist-ties and tyvec tags for marking unknown plant
specimens
White garbage bag for consolidating collection bags
Metal flashing 10" tall for supporting/sealing earthen
coffer dam built from Soil Pit spoils for inundated soils
Hand water pump
Small scoop for bailing water from pit
Four, 6 mil thick, ~1.5m2 black plastic sheets for laying
out soil slabs/cores at each Soil Pit
20 Golf tees for marking soil horizons
Spray bottle for water
Heavy-duty sample bag stapler
Soil bulk density corer
4 meter Telescoping surveyor's rod (aka: stadia rod)
1 meter stick
Small, soft-sided cooler
Collapsible 1-liter cubitainer for duplicate water sample
6' Long-handled plastic dipper
11/2 inch stiff putty knife (to shear off excess soil from
bulk density core when sampling)
Squirt bottle for surface water
Squirt bottle for Dl water
2.5 gal carboy
Electrician's tape for sealing sample caps
Small funnel (243mL)
Lugol's solution with 2mL pipette and bulb
SOOmL Sidearm filter flask
Tygon tubing (for connecting vacuum pump to filter flask)
Silicone stopper with hole to attach filter funnel to flask
Adapter for filter funnel to stopper
Whatman GF/F 0.7 urn glass fiber filter (47-mm diam.)
Graduated cylinder (250-mL)
500-mL plastic amber bottle (for Chlorophyll-a)
Hand-operated vacuum pump
Magnesium Carbonate (MgCO3) saturated solution -
dropper bottle
Aluminum foil squares (wrap Chlorophyll-a sample vial)
Clear tape strip packs for covering labels
1 package of 100 nitrile gloves
-------
2011 NWCA - MASTER EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST
Page 2
SITE KITS (one per site)
Consumable Sampling Supplies (Supplied by USEPA)
Gallon size zipper plastic bags
Quart-size zipper plastic bags
Cooler Liner Bags (one per cooler)
2 Ice chests
8 mil plastic soil sample bags for bulk density and chemistry soil samples
Collapsible 1-liter cubitainer for surface water sample
1, 250-mL plastic bottle (for Algae Taxonomic ID sample)
1, 125-mL plastic bottle with screw lid (Algal Toxins bottle)
2, 60-mL syringe core samplers with beveled edge (for taking substrate subsample for algal taxonomy)
2 x 60-mL syringe core sampler (soil isotope and enzyme samples)
30-mL syringe (for sucking up algae off hard substrate)
Soft bristled toothbrush (to be used at one site only)
1, 50-mL Centrifuge tube with screw cap type (for Chlorophyll-a filter)
2, Disposable flat forceps
Nitrile gloves, disposable
250mL Filter funnel for chlorophyll-a
Whirl-Pak and Ziploc bag for chlorophyll-a sample
1, Plant specimen folder
Shipping supplies (fed ex shipping airbills, plastic pouches, zip ties, fedex envelope)
FORM PACKET (one per site) - Supplied by Information Management Team
NWCA Forms on Waterproof Paper:
Form PV-1: NWCA Point Verification Form
Form AA-1: NWCA Assessment Area Establishment
Form AA-2: NWCA Assessment Area Characterization
Form B-1: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots and Targeted Alien Species
Form V-1: Vegetation Plot Establishment
Form V-2a and V-2b: Vascular Species Presence and Cover
Form V-3: Vegetation Types and Ground Surface Attributes
Form V-4a and V-4b: Snag and Tree Counts and Tree Cover
Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Data
Form H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology
Form WQ-1: NWCA Assessment Area Water Quality
Form ALG-1: NWCA Algae
Form T-1: NWCA 2011 Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking
Form T-2 (Unknown) and T-3 (QA): Plant Sample Tracking
Form T-4: NWCA Bulk Density & Chemistry Soil Sample Tracking
Form T-5: NWCA 2011 Tracking - Batched Samples
NWCA Sample Tags and Labels:
Plant Specimen Label
Plant Sample Tags
Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample
Label
Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample
Tag
Sediment Enzymes Tag
Soil Isotope Tag
Soil Pesticides Sample Tag
Soil Pesticides Rinsate Blank Tag
Soil Pesticides Field Blank Tag
Algae Taxonomic ID Tag
Chlorophyll-a Tag
Cholorphyll-a Outer Bag Tag
Algal Toxins Tag
__Water Chemistry Tag
Duplicate Water Chemistry Tag
USA-RAM Forms
Data Forms on waterproof paper:
Form USA-RAM 1: Buffer Perimeter and Buffer Mean Width
Form USA-RAM 2: Stressors in Buffer Area
: Topographic Complexity
Patch Mosaic Complexity
: Vertical Complexity
Plant Community Complexity
Stressors to Water Quality in the AA
: Alterations to Hydroperiod in the AA
Stressors to Substrate in the AA
Form USA-RAM 10: Cover of Invasive Plant Species in the AA
Form USA-RAM 11: Stress to Vegetation in the AA
_Form USA-RAM 3:
_Form USA-RAM 4:
_Form USA-RAM 5:
_Form USA-RAM 6:
_Form USA-RAM 7:
_Form USA-RAM 8:
Form USA-RAM 9:
-------
2011 NWCA - MASTER EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY LIST Page 3
OTHER EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES NEEDED BY FIELD CREWS
(NOT SUPPLIED BY USEPA)
Waterproof boots (waders, hip boots, or knee boots as site conditions dictate)
2-way hand-held radios (with extra batteries or charger)
Digital camera with batteries and memory card
Extra batteries for range finder
Field clip boards
GPS loaded with coordinates for the POINT, manual, extra battery pack
Blue ice to fit soft sided cooler
De-ionized Water
Indelible markers to write on flagging
Pencils
Site packet with maps with POINT marked, directions to the POINT, access information
Binoculars
Available plant species lists pertinent to the site and/or region (wetland species, alien species, threatened
and endangered species)
Waterproof field notebook
Regional floras
Paper towels
Reflector for sighting rangefinder
Dissecting tools (e.g., single edge razor blades, forceps, and dissecting needles)
Tiling or Sharpshooter style shovel
Bucket auger with interchangeable extension handles and appropriate head(s) for anticipated soil
conditions (regular, mud, sand, dutch, etc). A ratchet handle crossbar may often be useful.
King tube soil extractor for saturated/inundated conditions, particularly in sandy soils - if needed
Sharp knife shaving soil slices to expose fresh surface, for cutting out bulk density samples in difficult soils
(e.g., peat, or saturated soils extracted with the King tub extractor method).
Small flashlight for viewing in situ soil profile in Representative Soil Pit
Metal shears for cutting cofferdam flashing material
OPTIONAL - Mudders Boots (for walking in mud)
OPTIONAL - Metric tape measure (e.g., a fiberglass seamstress's measuring tape with lead weight (e.g.,
fishing weight) attached to the bottom)
OPTIONAL - Two 20-m or four 10-m lengths of strong, durable cord/rope1
OPTIONAL- Field vest to carry tools and small equipment
OPTIONAL- Field meter calibration kit (contained in a good quality, plastic box, e.g. tackle box) with:
Calibration cup with removable cove, DO membranes, backup probes and spare parts (o-rings, etc).
pH buffers
Thermometer
Squeeze bottle
Appropriate size leak-proof, screw-cap containers (e.g., nalgene) for additional calibration solutions
Basic tools (assorted screwdrivers, Allen wrenches)
OPTIONAL- Multi-Probe Field Meter (Dissolved Oxygen, pH, Conductivity, Temperature)
1 Durable cord (e.g., nylon)/rope in 10 or 20m lengths-with 5m points with blue tape, 10m points with red tape (for
marking the edges of vegetation plots).
-------
-------
£ FORM T-1: NWCA 2011 SITE AND SAMPLE STATUS/WRS TRACKING £
Site ID: NWCA11- Visit #: O 1 O 2 Date Collected: / / 2 0 1 1
Sender:
State of Site
Location: Crew:
Sender Phone: _ _
Shipped by: O FedEx O UPS O Hand Delivery O Other:
Airbill/Tracking Number:
Date Sent: / / 2 0 1 1
Site Status - Is Site Sampleable?
O Yes - Proceed to Sample Status O No - Select ONE reason from Non-Sampled Status below:
NON-SAMPLEABLE - TEMPORARY
O Temporarily Non-Sampleable
NON-SAMPLEABLE - NO ACCESS
O Access permission denied
O Permanently inaccessible
O Temporarily inaccessible
NON-SAMPLEABLE - NON TARGET
O Map Error O Strictly used for an industrial/agriculturai/aquacultural purpose
O Non target wetland type O Inundated by water > 1 m in depth (over 90% of 60m around pt)
O Active crop production during index period O Other (describe in comments)
NON-SAMPLEABLE - AA CAN'T BE ESTABLISHED
O Sampleable area too small
O Unsampleable area greater than 10%
O Sampleable area crosses hydrogeomorphic (HGM) boundary
Sample Status - Were Samples Collected?
O Yes - Mark each sample type collected during this visit. O No Samples Collected
O Chemistry (CHEM)
O Chemistry Duplicate (CHEM)
O Chlorophyll-a (CHLA)
O Soil Isotope (SISO)
O Algal Toxins (ALGT) O Soil Pesticides (SOIL)
O Sediment Enzymes (SEDE) O Plant Vouchers & Unknowns (VEGE)
O Algae Taxonomic ID (ALGA) # of P|ants sampled:
O Soil Chemistry/bulk Density (SCBU)
Site Status Comments:
Sample ID
i i i i i i i
i i i i i i t
i i i i i i i.
Sample Type
CHEM
i i i i i
CHEM
CHLA
a i i i i
SISO
A L G T
S E D E
i i i i i
WRS Lab Contact Information
Attn: Phil Menace
c/o U.S. EPA
1350 SEGoodnig
Corvallis, OR 973
Phone:541-754-4
Email: monaco.ph
^P NWCA Tracking -
), Dynamac
ht Ave
33
720
WRS SAMPLE TRACKING
Comments
Duplicate
Send completed forms to: Tracking Related Inquiries:
Date Received: EMA||_. Marlys Cappaert
/ / sampletracking@epa.gov Phone:541-754-4467
Received by: fft^ 541-754-4637 Michelle Cover
Dhr.no- S/11 --7C.A-A-7Q1
il@epamail.epa.gov VOICE MESSAGE
CENTER: 541 -754-4663 ^
WRS 01/21/2011 1047551586 ^J
-------
-------
Y FORM T-5: NWCA TRACKING - BATCHED SAMPLES ^
Sentbv Sender State°f Crew
Phone: Site Location: ...
Shipped o FedEx O UPS O Hand Delivery
By: Date Shipped
i 1 —
Airbill/Tracking Number:
O Held at address:
Site ID
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
^
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
Lab
^) Eco Analysts
O WED - CORVALLIS, OR
O OTHER:
Date Sample Collected
MM/DD/YYYY
^ A
Visit
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
cr
O-
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
O1
O2
Completed by lab:
Date Received:
/ /
Received
Sample ID
O-
xCr
/Vy
>
Sample Types
ALGA - Algae
PACK - Data Packet
Sample Type
i i i
i i i
*
\ \ 1
&y
i i i
• i i
i i i
#of
Containers
/ / 2 0 1 1
Comments
ASy
N^
^S
^
Send completed forms to: Tracking Inquiries:
EMAIL: Marlys Cappaert
sampletracking@epa.gov Phone: 541-754-4467
FAX: 541-754-4637 Michelle Cover
Phone:541-754-4793
VOICE MESSAGE
CENTER: 541-754-4663
^ NWCA Tracking - Batch 01/21/2011 7630487465 ^
-------
-------
WATER CHEMISTRY - NOT FILTERED
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ 72011
999981
CHLOROPHYLL-a - OUTER BAG
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ 72011
Volume Filtered: ml_
999982
ALGAL TOXINS
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ 72011
999984
ALGAE TAXONOMIC ID
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
7 72011
999986
CHLOROPHYLL-a
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
7 72011
Volume Filtered: ml_
999982
SOIL ISOTOPE
NWCA11-7771 Visits: 1
7 72011
999983
SEDIMENT ENZYMES
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
7 72011
999985
DUPLICATE WATER CHEMISTRY - NOT FILTERED
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
7 72011
999987
Example Adhesive Labels for NWCA Water Chemistry, Chlorophyll-a, Algal Toxins,
Algae Taxonomic ID, Soil Isotope and Sediment Enzymes
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
CHAPTER 3. ESTABLISHING THE ASSESSMENT AREA
Introduction 3-3
3.1 DEVELOP A PLAN FOR AA ESTABLISHMENT 3-3
3.1.1 Develop a Plan in the Office 3-4
3.1.2 Verify Plan in the Field 3-5
3.2 ESTABLISH THE AA 3-10
3.2.1 Standard AA Layouts 3-10
3.2.1.1 Standard Circular AA 3-11
3.2.1.2 Standard Circular AA-Shifted 3-11
3.2.2 Alternate AA Layouts 3-12
3.2.2.1 Polygon AA 3-12
3.2.2.2 Wetland Boundary AA 3-13
3.3 CHARACTERIZE THE AA 3-14
3.4 DATA HANDLING 3-14
3.5 LITERATURE CITED 3-15
3.6 REFERENCE CARDS 3-17
Reference Card AA-1, Sides A and B. Assessment Area Establishment
Reference Card AA-2, Side A. Criteria for Sampleable Area
Reference Card AA-2, Side B. Hydrogeomorphic Boundaries and Human
Altered Types
Reference Card AA-3, Side A. FWS Status and Trends Classes
Reference Card AA-3, Side B. Key to Hydrogeomorphic Classes
3.7 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DATA FORMS 3-25
Equipment and Supplies
Data Forms 3-29
Form PV-1: NWCA POINT Verification Form
Form AA-1: NWCA Assessment Area Establishment
Form AA-2: NWCA Assessment Area Characterization
3-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
CHAPTER 3. ESTABLISHING THE ASSESSMENT AREA
The Assessment Area (AA) represents the POINT. The POINT is the location defined by the
coordinates generated by the NWCA sample draw. Proper placement of the AA is crucial
because it defines the area where most of the data collection for the NWCA occurs. The
principles guiding AA establishment are:
1) The NWCA sampling protocols are designed to produce an assessment of the ecological
condition of wetland area at the POINT. This approach assumes that condition can
change spatially, especially in a large wetland.
2) The area sampled is large enough to accurately characterize the wetland area at the
POINT using rapid (Level 2) or comprehensive (Level 3) assessment methods (e.g., see
Wardrop et al. 2007a, b) but is small enough to be sampled in one day (Kentula and
Cline 2004, Fennessy et al. 2008).
3) The POINT has been evaluated according to the procedures in the NWCA Site
Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011) and was determined sampleable.
4) The boundaries of the AA encompass the POINT.
The Vegetation Team (Veg Team) establishes the AA and, therefore,
plays a major part in all aspects of the following protocol.
3.1 DEVELOP A PLAN FOR AA ESTABLISHMENT
A Desktop Evaluation as described in the NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011) will
be conducted for all POINTS to begin the process of determining if they are sampleable. The
process of determining if the AA is sampleable starts with the analysis in the office and is
completed in the field.
For each sampleable POINT, a plan for AA establishment (Section 3.1.1) is developed in the
office. At the same time, metrics for the USA-RAM (USEPA in review) that require use of site
imagery are completed.
The protocol for verifying the plan for AA establishment (Section 3.1.2) is completed as part of
Field Evaluation described in the Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011) or, if that is not
possible, as part of the AA establishment as described in this protocol. The details of the plan
for AA establishment, including any information on the site obtained during Field Evaluation
(e.g., the copy of Form PV-1 completed during reconnaissance), are added to the materials in
the Site Packet.
3-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3.1.1 Develop Plan in the Office
Develop a plan for AA establishment using the aerial photos in the Site Packet, other supporting
information, and the general procedures below. See the detailed protocol in Section 3.2 for
specific information to gather for the AA layout being considered.
1) Search the materials in the Site Packet to determine whether a field reconnaissance was
conducted and directions to the POINT developed and recorded on a copy of Form PV-1. If
a field reconnaissance was not conducted, use the materials in the Site Packet to develop
directions and record them in the Directions to POINT field on the front of Form PV-1.
If the site is tidally influenced, consider stage of tide in scheduling sampling of the POINT.
The best way to maximize time in the field is to plan to arrive at the site at or slightly before
the time that it is exposed at low tide.
2) Select the aerial photo that best depicts the setting at the POINT to annotate with the details
of the plan for AA establishment. Other photos and supporting material (e.g., wetland maps)
may be needed to confirm details depicted on the aerial photo chosen.
3) Use the key on Reference Card AA-1 to determine which AA layout is appropriate. Use the
text in Section 3.2 that describes the AA layout chosen to determine how it will likely fit at
the POINT and for information that will be helpful to laying out the AA in the field. See
examples of the possible AA types on Reference Card AA-1 and in Figures 3-1 to 3-4.
4) Determine if the AA is sampleable. See Reference Card AA-2, Side A for the criteria for
what is sampleable and Reference Card AA-2, Side B for examples of hydrogeomorphic
boundaries and mixes of types to avoid. The process of determining if the AA is sampleable
starts with the analysis in the office then is completed or verified in the field.
5) Annotate the aerial photo to clearly indicate the following:
• POINT
• AA CENTER
• AA boundaries
• Bearings and estimates of important distances, e.g., from the POINT or AA CENTER to
locations on the AA boundary
• North
• Likely Status and Trends (S&T) class(es) and hydrogeomorphic (HGM) class as
interpreted from the photo (see Reference Card AA-3,for information on the classes).
• Other information useful for establishing the AA, e.g., features that can be used to guide
AA set up.
See examples of the possible AA types and annotations of the photos in Figures 3-1 to 3-4.
In our experience, a Sharpie® fine-point, permanent, silver marker that can be purchased at
many retail stores works well to annotate the photo. If it is difficult to clearly mark the photo,
use the back of Form AA-1 to sketch the AA and note the information listed above.
6) Complete the analysis for metrics 1, 2, and 5 for the USA-RAM (USEPA in review).
7) Indicate if a photo was annotated by filling in the bubble on the back of Form AA-1 and
place all materials in the Site Packet.
3-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3.1.2 Verify Plan in the Field
The plan for AA establishment developed prior to the date of sampling (Section 3.1) is checked
in the field to assure that it fits the situation on-the-ground. Ideally, plan verification is done as
part of the Field Evaluation as described in the NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA
2011). Although this protocol is written for the Field Crew verifying the AA layout plan on the
day of sampling, the same approach is used during Field Evaluation.
1) Prior to sampling, the Veg Team reviews the plan for AA establishment (Section 3.1.1).
2) After travelling to the vicinity of the POINT, the Field Crew should wait outside the likely
boundaries of the AA while one member of the Veg Team obtains Forms PV-1 and AA-1
and uses a GPS to navigate to the POINT and marks it with flagging labeled "POINT."
If there are obstacles to getting to the POINT (e.g., deep water), place flagging labeled with
its location, e.g., 5m, 120°, as close to the POINT as possible.
3) The member of the Veg Team at the POINT:
• Completes the header on Forms PV-1 and AA-1. The date on both forms is the first day
of sampling no matter how many days sampling takes.
• Fills in the bubble on both forms to indicate the Visit. Visit #1 is when initial sampling is
done; Visit #2 is a scheduled revisit.
• Completes the Field Crew Personnel field on the front of Form AA-1.
• Completes the POINT Location and Accessibility field on the front of Form PV-1.
4) The Field Crew should use their respective vantage points (the vicinity of the POINT and
outside the likely AA boundary) and work together to complete the Predominant Wetland
Type at the POINT field on the front of Form PV-1. Note that this includes the Special
Conditions field if either PUBPAB of Pf is marked.
• If the predominant wetland type is excluded from the NWCA target population, do not
sample the site. Instead, follow the procedures in the NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines
(USEPA 2011) for selecting an alternate POINT (i.e., an alternate NWCA site).
• If the predominant wetland type at the POINT is part of the target population, the Field
Crew should use their respective vantage points (the vicinity of the POINT and outside
the likely AA boundary) to decide whether the AA can be established as planned or if
adjustments to the plan are needed.
o Refer to the protocol in Section 3.1.1 for details of the planning process and to
Reference Card AA-2, Side A for the criteria for a sampleable AA.
o Confirm the AA Layout in the plan is appropriate for the site using the key on
Reference Card AA-1, Side A.
3-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
KEY: X POINT
X AA CENTER
Wetland
boundary •
Standard
, Cirrular
AA boundary
Standard Buffer
Evaluation
boundary
Figure 3-1. The Standard Circular AA layout with the standard boundary for
buffer evaluation is depicted on an example aerial photo as would be found in
the site packet (see Section 3.2.1.1). The POINT and the AA CENTER are at
the same location.
3-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
r\c i .
^
K KUIINII
fa AA CENTER
boundary
Standard Circular
AA boundary
Standard Circular AA
Shifted boundary •"
Standard Buffer
boundary
Shifted Buffer
boundary
Figure 3-2. Example of a Standard Circular AA-Shifted layout (see Section
3.2.1.2) depicted on an example aerial photo as would be found in the site packet.
Distance and bearing from the POINT to the AA CENTER are indicated. The
Standard Circular AA layout and the Standard Buffer evaluation boundary are
shown for comparison.
3-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
S&T Classes: Palustrine Forested (PFO),
Scrub-Shrub (PSS), Emergent (PEM)
HGM Class: Riverine Upper Perennr1
m
Ditch with ci
site to pond-stressor; not a
hydrogeomorphic boundary
Traffic 11 More... ' \ Map Satellite Earth
,ote stream different from
one in AA-Do not cross
this hydrogeomorhphic
boundary/
10m, 180$
2nd order stream runs throu
Iftralvr
Average width is about 30m. 0.5ha = 5000m*
5000m2/30m = 167m for the AA leni
167m/2 = 89m on either side(gfHrc CENT
Area west of CENTER = 30m X 89m = 2670m2
east of CENTER = 30m X 60m = 1800m2
^CENTER = 9m X 60m = 540m2
^ TOTAL = 501 Om2
KEY:
W POINT
*fc AA CENTER
Wetland
boundary
Standard
« rir"iihr AA ^M
boundary
Approximate
^^ Polygon AA
boundary
Figure 3-3. Example of a Polygon AA layout (see Section 3.2.2.1) depicted on an aerial
photo as would be found in the site packet. Distance and bearing from the POINT to the
AA CENTER and notes on likely dimensions of the AA are shown. A hydrogeomorphic
boundary (a tributary stream), a stressor (ditch with culvert), and a stream in the vicinity of
the POINT are illustrated to show features that should be considered in determining AA
layout and in conducting the assessment. A Standard Circular AA is shown for comparison.
Note that this AA contains three of the S&T categories that are part of the NWCA target
population. The AA is predominantly palustrine forested and has elements of palustrine
scrub-shrub and palustrine emergent.
3-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
KEY: & POINT
M AA CENTER
Wetland
Standard
t circular
AA boundary
Standard Buffer
Evaluation
boundary
Figure 3-4. Example of a Wetland Boundary AA layout (see Section 3.2.2.2)
depicted on an example aerial photo as would be found in the site packet.
Distance and bearing from the POINT to the AA CENTER are indicated. The
Standard Circular AA layout and the Standard Buffer Evaluation boundary are
shown for comparison.
3-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
5) Record whether an AA that contains the original POINT could be established at the site by
filling in the appropriate data bubble in the Can an AA that Contains the Original POINT be
Established field on the front of Form AA-1 and by completing the Is POINT Sampleable
field on the back of Form PV-1.
• If an AA containing the original POINT cannot be established, document the reasons in
the Comments field on the front of Form AA-1. Then, follow the procedures in the
NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011) for either relocating the POINT at the
current site, or for selecting an alternate POINT (i.e., an alternate NWCA site).
• If the POINT can be relocated at the current site, follow the procedures in the NWCA
Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2011) and complete the Documentation for
Relocated POINT field on the back of Form PV-1. Proceed with Step 6 below.
6) Record the decisions on AA establishment by annotating the aerial photo of the site and/or
the sketch of the AA plan on the back of Form AA-1. There may be cases where a
combination of the photo and sketch are needed to adequately document the AA layout. In
our experience, a Sharpie® fine-point, permanent, silver marker that can be purchased at
many retail stores works well for annotating photos.
7) Proceed with establishing the AA (Section 3.2) and completing the AA Layout Used and
Location ofAA CENTER fields on the front of Form AA-1.
3.2 ESTABLISH THE AA
The Veg Team follows the appropriate protocol below to direct the layout of the AA and notifies
the AB Team when the first cardinal direction is marked so that they can begin sampling the first
buffer transect.
In many cases, using a GPS while walking the AA boundary will be the most efficient way to
establish the AA and calculate its area. Alternative strategies may be required depending on
site conditions and satellite availability. A laser rangefinder, meter tapes, and ropes of
appropriate lengths may be useful. For example, it may easier to use a rangefinder or meter
tape than a GPS for an open wetland with low vegetation, especially for a Standard Circular AA.
Two-way radios would facilitate communication between the people setting up the AA.
The Field Crew should minimize trampling of the AA, especially prior to sampling vegetation.
This can be accomplished by avoiding the area in which the AA is likely to be located until the
Vegetation Plots are marked and by maneuvering around patches of vegetation (as feasible)
and walking in single file on the same path.
3.2.1 Standard AA Layouts
There are two standard AA layouts—a circular AA and a circular AA that is shifted to fit the site.
3-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3.2.1.1 Standard Circular AA
The Standard Circular AA is a circular plot with a 40-m radius (80-m diameter) centered on the
POINT (Figure 3.1 and Reference Card AA-1, Plate 1).
No specific preparations are needed for this layout prior to going to the site. In the field, for sites
that are fairly open, it may be easiest to use a laser rangefinder or tape to set up the AA. For
example, the Veg Team member at the POINT locates the AA boundary by using the
rangefinder to determine a distance of 40m by sighting on a metal clipboard or reflector carried
by the Veg Team member walking the AA boundary. This Veg Team member flags the
boundary as often as site conditions warrant and works with the person at the POINT to place
labeled flags where the cardinal compass directions from the POINT cross the AA boundary.
Complete the AA Layout Used field on the front of Form AA-1 by filling in the Standard Circular
AA bubble for layout type and by entering the area of the AA to the nearest 0.1 ha.
Complete the Location ofAA CENTER field on the front of Form AA-1 by filling in the bubble
indicating that the POINT is the CENTER and record the GPS accuracy information.
A Veg Team member notifies the AB Team when the first cardinal direction is marked so that
they can begin sampling the first buffer transect.
3.2.1.2 Standard Circular AA-Shifted
The Standard Circular AA-Shifted is used when a 1/4-ha circular plot with a 40-m radius (80-m
diameter) can be established but the POINT is not the AA CENTER (Figure 3.2 and Reference
Card AA-1, Plate 1). Use this layout at sites with a 1/4-ha or more of sampleable area in the
vicinity of a POINT located close to the wetland boundary or other unsampleable area, e.g.,
deep water or upland.
Prior to going to the site:
• Select the aerial photo from the Site Packet that best depicts the setting at the POINT and
determine the distance and bearing from the POINT to the location of the AA CENTER.
Note this information on the photo (see Figure 3-2) or make a sketch of the AA on the back
of Form AA-1.
• The distance from the POINT to the AA CENTER should not exceed 40m. If the distance
exceeds 40m, do not continue planning the AA layout. Use the NWCA Site Evaluation
Guidelines (USEPA 2010) to determine whether the POINT can be relocated or an alternate
POINT is needed.
In the field on the sampling day:
Verify and modify the AA establishment plan as ground conditions dictate.
• The Veg Team member at the POINT uses bearing and distance information from the AA
layout plan to navigate to the location of the CENTER of the AA, places a labeled flag at the
CENTER. If there are obstacles to getting to the CENTER (e.g., deep water), place flagging
labeled with its location, e.g., 5m, 120°, as close as possible to the CENTER.
3-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
Record the GPS coordinates and accuracy information in the Location of the AA CENTER
field of Form AA-1 and fill in the bubble indicating that the POINT is not the CENTER.
The Veg Team proceeds with the AA establishment. For sites that are fairly open, it may be
easiest to use a laser rangefinder or tape to set up the AA. For example, the Veg Team
member at the CENTER uses a laser rangefinder to locate the AA boundary (a distance of
40m) by sighting on a metal clipboard or reflector carried by the second member of the Veg
Team walking the AA boundary. This Veg Team member flags the AA boundary as often as
site conditions warrant and works with the person at the CENTER to place labeled flags
where the cardinal compass directions cross the AA boundary.
Complete the AA Layout Used field on the front of Form AA-1 by filling in the appropriate
bubble for layout type and entering the area of the AA to the nearest 0.1 ha.
A Veg Team member notifies the AB Team when the first cardinal direction is marked so
that they can begin sampling the first buffer transect.
3.2.2 Alternate AA Layouts
An Alternate Layout is used in situations where a 1/4-ha circular AA encompassing the POINT
will not fit the sampleable area. The Polygon AA layout is used when a non-circular, 1/4-ha AA is
possible at the POINT; the Wetland Boundary layout applies when the AA would be <0.5ha but
at least 0.1 ha in size.
3.2.2.1 Polygon AA
The Polygon AA is used to establish a 0.5-ha AA at sites where the wetland is >0.5ha, but has
dimensions <80m in at least one direction. The AA CENTER is as close to the POINT as
possible (Reference Card AA-1, Side B, Plate 2).
Prior to going to the site:
• Select the aerial photo from the Site Packet that best depicts the setting at the POINT and
determine the distance and bearing from the POINT to the location of the AA CENTER.
Note this information on the photo (see Figure 3-3) or on a sketch of the AA on the back of
Form AA-1.
• Use a planimeter, if one is available, to approximate the boundary of the AA. Alternatively,
use the scale of the photo to estimate the average width of the area and use it to estimate
the length needed to get 0.5ha (see calculations in Figure 3-3).
• In cases where the site has bends or is oddly shaped, break the AA into sections and
estimate the area for each (see Figure 3-3).
In the field on the sampling day:
Verify and modify the AA establishment plan as ground conditions dictate.
3-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
Locate the AA CENTER using the information on the annotated photo or the sketch of the
AA on the back of Form AA-1. Fill in the bubble indicating whether the CENTER is the
POINT and the GPS accuracy information in the Location of the AA CENTER field of Form
AA-1. If the AA CENTER is not the POINT, record its GPS coordinates.
In most situations in the field, using a GPS will be the most efficient way to establish the AA
boundary and calculate the AA area. Turn on the "Area Calculation" function on the GPS
and walk the perimeter of the AA, using the vegetation and other indicators to identify the
wetland boundary (see Reference Card AA-2, Side A).
At open sites with mostly low vegetation one could effectively use a rangefinder or meter
tape to lay out a rectangular AA. For example, if the wetland in Figure 3-3 had been
dominated by emergent vegetation, one could set up a rectangular AA (30m X 167m)
centered on the AA CENTER by sighting on the Veg Team member walking the AA
boundary (see second example on Reference Card AA-1, Plate 2).
Complete the AA Layout Used field on the front of Form AA-1 by filling in the Polygon AA
bubble and entering the area of the AA to the nearest 0.1 ha. If the area of the AA as initially
bounded is too small or too large, area can be added or subtracted from either end of the
AA to equal 0.5ha.
3.2.2.2 Wetland Boundary AA
The Wetland Boundary AA is used when the sampleable area at the POINT is smaller than
0.5ha, but is at least 0.1 ha, and is at least 20m wide so that vegetation plots can be established
(see Chapter 5). In this case the AA boundary coincides with the wetland boundary, i.e., the
entire area of the wetland will be sampled (Figure 3.4, Reference Card AA-1, Plate 3).
Prior to going to the site:
• Use an aerial photo from the Site Packet to identify the likely AA boundary. Sketch the AA
boundary on the aerial photo and/or on the back of Form AA-1. Determine the bearing
and distance from the POINT to the CENTER and add this information to the sketch
(Figure 3.4). Place the form and photo in the Site Packet.
In the field on the sampling day:
Verify and modify the AA establishment plan as ground conditions dictate.
• Locate the AA CENTER using the information on the annotated photo or the sketch of the
AA on the back of Form AA-1. Fill in the bubble indicating whether the CENTER is the
POINT and the GPS accuracy information in the Location of the AA CENTER field of Form
AA-1. If the AA CENTER is not the POINT, record its GPS coordinates.
• The preferred method for establishing the AA is to use a GPS to determine the boundary
and calculate the area. Turn on the "Area Calculation" function on the GPS and walk the
perimeter of the AA, using the vegetation and other indicators to identify the wetland
boundary (see Reference Card AA-2, Side A).
3-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
Complete the AA Layout Used field on the front of Form AA-1 by filling in the Wetland
Boundary AA bubble and entering the area of the AA to the nearest 0.1 ha.
3.3 CHARACTERIZE THE AA
The Veg Team identifies the S&T and HGM types found in the AA by completing Form AA-2,
referring to Reference Card AA-3 as needed. The Veg Team also completes metrics 4-13 of
the USA-RAM (USEPA in review).
The AB Team completes Form B-1 to characterize stressors and targeted alien species at the
AA CENTER in the same manner as is in the buffer (see Chapter 4, Section 4.1.2).
To complete the AA characterization, the Veg Team takes the following digital photos after
establishing the Veg Plots (Chapter 5):
• Overview of the setting around the POINT,
• Overview of the setting around the CENTER, if in a different location than the POINT,
• View from the CENTER along each of the plot placement lines for vegetation sampling (if
possible, capture flagging for Veg Plots in the photo), and
• Important features the Crew feels must be recorded, e.g., threatened and endangered
species.
The protocol for photography is found in Appendix D. Be sure to include location information in
the photo descriptions, e.g., the direction of the plot placement lines.
3.4 DATA HANDLING
See Chapter 2 for protocols on copying and shipping completed data forms to the Information
Management Team. See Appendix D for information on transmitting the image files of the
photos taken.
3-14
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3.5 LITERATURE CITED
Brooks, R.P., M.M. Brinson, K.J. Havens, C.S. Hershner, R.D. Rheinhardt, D.H. Wardrop, D.F.
Whigham, A.D. Jacobs, and J.M. Rubbo. In Press. Proposed hydrogeomorphic classification
for wetlands of the Mid-Atlantic Region, USA. Wetlands.
Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet, and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of Wetlands and
Deepwater Habitats of the United States. FWS/OBS-79/31. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service,
Washington, DC.
Dahl, I.E. 2006. Status and Trends of Wetlands in the Conterminous United States 1998 to
2004. U.S. Department of the Interior; Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington, DC.
Dahl, T.E. and M.T. Bergeson. 2009. Technical Procedures for Conducting Status and Trends
of the Nation's Wetlands. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Division of Habitat and Resource
Conservation, Washington, DC.
Fennessy, M.S., A. Jacobs, M.E. Kentula, J. Sifneos, and A. Rokosch. 2008. Field Testing
Rapid Assessment Methods for Use in Wetland Monitoring Programs. Report to U.S. EPA for
Grant X7-83158301-0. Kenyon College, Gambier, OH.
Kentula, M.E., and S.P. Cline. 2004. Riparian Investigations in the John Day and Lower
Deschutes Basins of Eastern Oregon: Amendment to Quality Assurance Project Plan. Internal
Report, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Health and Environmental Effects
Research Laboratory, Western Ecology Division, Corvallis, OR.
Smith, R., A. Ammann, C. Bartoldus, and M.M. Brinson. (1995). An Approach for Assessing
Wetland Functions Using Hydrogeomorphic Classification, Reference Wetlands, and Functional
Indices. Technical Report WRP-DE-9. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Waterways Experiment
Station, Vicksburg, MS.
USEPA (U. S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Site Evaluation Guidelines. EPA/843/R10/004. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Washington DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Review. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: USA-RAM Field Operations Manual. EPA/XXX/R-XX/XXX. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Wardrop, D. H., M.E. Kentula, S.F. Jensen, D.L. Stevens, Jr., and R.P. Brooks. 2007a.
Assessment of wetlands in the Upper Juniata watershed in Pennsylvania, USA, using the
hydrogeomorphic approach. Wetlands 27:432-445.
Wardrop, D.H., M.E. Kentula, D.L. Stevens, Jr., S.F. Jensen, and R.P. Brooks. 2007b.
Assessment of wetland condition: an example from the Upper Juniata Watershed in
Pennsylvania, USA. Wetlands 27:416-430.
3-15
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3-16
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3.6 REFERENCE CARDS
Reference Card AA-1. Sides A and B: Assessment Area Establishment
Reference Card AA-2, Side A: Criteria for Sampleable Area
Reference Card AA-2, Side B: Hydrogeomorphic Boundaries and Human Altered Types
Reference Card AA-3, Side A: FWS Status and Trends Classes
Reference Card AA-3, Side B: Key to Hydrogeomorphic Classes
3-17
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3-18
-------
Reference Card AA-1. Assessment Area Establishment - Side A
Key to Assessment Area (AA) Layouts
1a Sampleable area1 contains POINT and is > 1/2ha 2
2a Sampleable area1 can contain a circular plot with a diameter of 80m 3
3a POINT is at the center of sampleable area1 Standard Circular AA
3b POINT is not at the center of sampleable area1 Standard Circular AA-Shifted
2b Sampleable area1 contains POINT but ranges from minimum width 20m (length 250m) and
maximum width of 79.5m (length 63m) Polygon AA
1 b Sampleable area1 contains POI NT and is < YJna but > 0.1 ha Wetland Boundary AA
1 Sampleable Area: <10% of the area of the AA contains water >1 m deep; has standing water or soft substrate that is
unsafe or impossible to sample effectively; and/or is upland. If the criteria for sampleable area can not be met, see the
NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines and determine whether POINT relocation or selection of an alternate POINT is
appropriate.
POINT
\ AA CENTER
Cardinal Compass Directions
O ^
AA boundary
C?
Wetland
boundary
Upland (not sampleable)
Shallow water
Deep water
(not sampleable)
Bi
Labeled flags are placed at the POINT, AA CENTER, and where the cardinal directions cross the AA boundary.
.fc
Plate 1. Standard Layouts
14 hectacre area
Standard Circular AA
Standard Circular AA-Shifted
Refer to NWCA Field Operations Manual Section 3.2 - Selecting the Appropriate AA Layout for the details of the protocol summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card AA-1 Assessment Area Establishment - Side B - More Examples of Layout Configurations
Plate 2. Polygon AA Layouts — AA = Y2 hectacre
AA CENTER is as close to the POINT as possible give site conditions.
In this example, the wetland is narrow and curved. AA
follows wetland edge. The POINT is the AA CENTER.
N
167m
In this example, the wetland has mostly low vegetation and
sampleable area to accommodate a rectangular AA.
t*
250m
Plate 3. Wetland Boundary AA Layouts - AA (0.5ha to <0.1 ha) = wetland boundary
Example AA = 0.14ha
\&
I
N
40m
Example AA ~ 0.20ha
Example AA ~ 0.22ha
Refer to NWCA Field Operations Manual Section 3.2 - Selecting the Appropriate AA Layout for the details of the protocol summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card AA-2, Side A. Criteria for Sampleable Area
The AA is sampleable if ALL of the following criteria are met:
• The AA contains the POINT and ranges in size from 0.1 haa to O.Sha.
a 0.1 ha is the lower limit of detection of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service's Wetland Status and Trends
project (Dahl and Bergeson 2009). It is also the smallest AA that will accommodate the vegetation plots.
• The AA will be at least 20-m wide to accommodate the vegetation plots (see Chapter 5).
• Less than 10%bof the area of the AA is unsampleable due to:
(a) water >1m deepc
(b) standing water or soft substrate that is unsafe or impossible to sample effectively; and/or
(c) upland, i.e., area not wetland (see definition of wetland below).
b The 10% limit is based on the criteria used by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service's Wetland Status and
Trends project (Dahl and Bergeson 2009).
c One meter is the minimum water depth sampled in the National Lakes Assessment and, thus sets the
boundary between open water and fringing wetlands used in the National Aquatic Resource Surveys.
• The sampleable area contains one or more of the Status and Trends (S&T) categories
representing the NWCA target population. See the Predominant Wetland Type at the POINT
field on Form PV-1 for a list of target S&T categories. See Figure 3-3 for an example of an AA
with multiple S&T types.
The NWCA Target Population is defined as: Tidal and nontidal wetlands of the conterminous
U.S., including certain farmed wetlands not currently in crop production. The wetlands have
rooted vegetation and, when present, open water less than 1 meter deep.
An ecologic (not jurisdictional) definition of wetland is used in establishing the AA.
However, experience in wetland delineation for regulatory purposes and the related indicators will
be helpful in determining wetland boundaries.
The definition of wetlands used by the S&T and NWCA is as follows:
Wetlands are lands transitional between terrestrial and aquatic systems
where the water table is usually at or near the surface or the land is
covered by shallow water. Wetlands must have one or more of the
following three attributes:
1) at least periodically, the land supports predominantly hydrophytes;
2) the substrate is predominantly undrained hydric soil, and
3) the substrate is non-soil and is saturated with water or covered by
shallow water at some time during the growing season of each
year (Dahl 2006).
Examples of characteristics that could be used in the field to identify whether the AA
is wetland include:
o predominance of hydrophytic vegetation;
o presence of plants with morphological or structural adaptations for growing in wetland
soils, e.g., buttressed tree trunks, multiple trunks, pneumataphores, adventitious roots,
hypertrophied lenticels, polymorphic leaves;
o visual observation of soil saturation and/or inundation;
o presence of undrained hydric soil;
o presence of indicators of wetland hydrology, e.g., drift lines, watermarks, sediment
deposits; and
o geomorphic boundaries such as the active floodplain or flood-prone width.
• The AA does not cross any hydrogeomorphic boundaries (see Side B).
-------
Reference Card AA-2, Side B. Hydrogeomorphic Boundaries and Human Altered Types
Examples of Hydrogeomorphic Boundaries or Mixes of Types to Avoid in Establishing the AA
The AA should not include:
• A mix of tidal and nontidal wetlands,
• A tributary to the river or stream associated with the POINT, or
• A combination of lacustrine fringe or riverine wetlands and the seeps or springs (i.e., slope wetlands)
upslope from them, in other words, the hydrogeomorphic (HGM) types are distinct (excluding any transition
zone).
Alternatively, an AA can include a mosaic of HGM types (see Riverine Complex on Reference Card 3, Side B)
or drainage channels typical in tidal and lacustrine fringing wetlands.
Examples of Human Altered Hydrogeomorphic Types
It is often difficult to determine the hydrogeomorphic (HGM) class of a site that has been altered because the
alteration has changed the class or created a hybrid. To avoid these problems and for consistency, the site
should be placed in the "human" class associated with the original HGM type (see Reference Card AA-3, Side
B).
Riverine — Human Altered
Riverine - Human Altered
Excavation edge
Open water *~ •*
-vO '''
Slope - Human Altered
Berm
Excavation
-------
Reference Card AA-3, Side A. FWS Status and Trends Classes1
CATEGORIES INCLUDED IN NWCA
Code Subcode Full Name Common Description Technical Description1
E2EM
E2SS
PEM
PSS
Estuarine Intertidal Emergent
Estuarine Intertidal Scrub
Shrub / Forested
Palustrine Emergent
Palustrine Scrub Shrub
Salt marsh
Mangroves
Other estuarine shrubs
Inland marshes
Wet meadows
Shrub wetlands
Emergent wetlands in estuarine systems
characterized by erect, rooted, herbaceous
hydrophytes, excluding mosses and lichens.
This vegetation is present for most of the
growing season in most years. These wetlands
are usually dominated by perennial plants.
Shrub wetlands in estuarine systems that are
dominated by woody vegetation less than 20
feet (6 meters) tall. The species include true
shrubs, young trees, and trees or shrubs that
are small or stunted because of environmental
conditions. Forested wetlands are characterized
by woody vegetation that is 6 meters tall or
taller.
Emergent wetlands in palustrine systems
characterized by erect, rooted, herbaceous
hydrophytes, excluding mosses and lichens.
This vegetation is present for most of the
growing season in most years. These wetlands
are usually dominated by perennial plants.
Shrub wetlands in palustrine systems that are
dominated by woody vegetation less than 6
meters (20 feet) tall. The species include true
shrubs, young trees, and trees or shrubs that
are small or stunted because of environmental
conditions.
PFO Palustrine Forested Forested swamps Forested wetlands in palustrine systems that are
characterized by woody vegetation that is 6
meters (20 feet) tall or taller.
Pf
PUBPAB
PAB
PUBf
PUBn
PUBu
Palustrine Farmed
Palustrine Unconsolidated
Bottom / Aquatic Bed
Palustrine Aquatic Bed
Pond - Agriculture
Pond - Natural
Pond - Urban
Farmed wetland
Ponds, aquatic beds
Intertidal freshwater
seagrass beds
Pondweeds
Farm ponds
Drainage water ponds
Bog lakes
Vernal pools
Kettles
Beaver ponds
Alligator holes
Aesthetic ponds
Recreation ponds
Golf course ponds
Residential lakes
Water retention ponds
Farmed wetlands are wetlands that meet the
Cowardin et al. definition where the soil surface
has been mechanically or physically altered for
production of crops, but where hydrophytes will
become reestablished if farming is discontinued.
Aquatic beds are dominated by plants that grow
principally on or below the surface of the water
for most of the growing season in most years.
Examples include seagrass beds, pondweeds
(Potamogeton spp.), wild celery (Vallisneria
americana), waterweed (Elodea spp.), and
duckweed (Lemna spp.).
Unconsolidated bottom includes all wetlands
with at least 25 percent cover of particles
smaller than stones, and a vegetative cover less
than 30 percent. Examples of Unconsolidated
substrates are: sand, mud, organic material,
cobble gravel.
The wetlands must also have the following four
characteristics: (1 ) area less than 20 acres (8
ha); (2) active wave formed or bedrock shoreline
features are lacking; (3) water depth in the
deepest part of a basin less than 6.6 feet (2
meters) at low water; and (4) salinity due to
ocean derived salts less than 0.5 parts per
thousand.
1 Descriptions are from Dahl, I.E. 2006. Status and Trends of Wetlands in the Conterminous United States 1998 to
2004. U.S. Department of the Interior; Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington, DC.
-------
Reference Card AA-3, Side B. Key to Hydrogeomorphic Classes3
1. Wetland is naturally under the influence of tides 2
1. Wetland is not naturally under the influence of tides 4
1. Wetland would be under the influence of tides if not for human actions, e.g., diked Tidal - Human Altered b
2. Salinity greater than 0.5 parts per thousand (ppt) Tidal Fringe
2. Salinity less than 0.5 parts per thousand (ppt) Riverine Tidal
4. Wetland is topographically flat and precipitation is a dominant source of water 5
4. Wetland is not topographically flat and precipitation is not a dominant source of water 6
5. Wetland has a mineral soil Flats Mineral Soil
5. Wetland has an organic soil Flats Organic Soil
5. Either of the above with hydrology altered by human actions, e.g., ditching Flats - Human Altered b
6. Wetland is associated with a nontidal stream channel, floodplain, or terrace 7
6. Wetland is not associated with a nontidal stream channel, floodplain, orterrace 9
7. Stream is 1st or 2nd order Riverine Upper Perennial
7. Stream is 3rd order or higher Riverine Lower Perennial
7. Wetland is part of a mosaic of small streams, floodplain features (former channels, depressions) and/or
slope wetlands (supported by groundwater) Riverine Complex
7. Wadable stream channel has been impounded by beaver activity Riverine - Beaver Impounded
7. Wadable stream channel has been excavated and deepened, the active floodplain has been excavated
and/or isolated from overbank flows from the channel Riverine - Human Altered b
7. Stream is constrained by a graminoid-dominated wetland supported primarily by groundwater 12
9. Wetland is fringing a lake or reservoir 10
9. Wetland is not fringing a lake or reservoir 11
10. Wetland inundation controlled by relatively natural hydroperiod Lacustrine Fringe
10. Wetland inundation controlled by dam releases Lacustrine Artificially Flooded
11. Wetland is primarily supported by ground water 12
11. Wetland is associated with a topographic depression 13
12. Water source is ground water discharged to the surface on the side of a hill due to a geologic feature,
e.g., a confining layer Slope Stratographic
12. Water source is ground water discharged at the toe-of-slope Slope Topographic
12. Slope wetland has been excavated to increase depth and amount of surface water....Slope - Human
Altered b
13. Topographic depression without surface water inlets, outlets or other connections 14
13. Topographic depression with surface water inlets, outlets, or other connections 15
14. Wetland is a naturally occurring feature of the landscape Depression Closed
14. Closed Depression is impounded by beaver activities Depression - Closed Beaver Impounded
14. Closed Depression is impounded by human activities Depression - Closed Human Impounded
14. Closed Depression is excavated by human activities Depression - Closed Human Excavated
14. Closed Depression is excavated and impounded by human activities Depression - Closed Human
Excavated and Impounded
15. Wetland is a naturally occurring feature of the landscape Depression Open
15. Open Depression is impounded by beaver activities Depression - Open Beaver Impounded
15. Open Depression is impounded by human activities Depression - Open Human Impounded
15. Open Depression is excavated by human activities Depression - Open Human Excavated
15. Open Depression is excavated and impounded by human activities Depression - Open Human
Excavated and Impounded
3 Adapted from Smith et al. (1995), Brooks et al. (in press), and the personal experience of M.E. Kentula, USEPA.
b For examples of human altered hydrogeomorphic types see Reference Card AA-2, Side B.
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3.7 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DATA FORMS
3-25
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3-26
-------
EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
50-m or 100-m measuring tape with reel and/or other measuring devices for situations
where GPS or rangefinder does not work
2-way hand-held radios
Compass
Data forms and reference cards
Digital camera with batteries and memory card
Field clip board
GPS loaded with coordinates for the POINT, manual, extra battery pack
Indelible markers to write on flagging
Laser rangefinder with extra batteries (optional)
Sharpie® or comparable fine-point, permanent, silver marker
Site packet with maps with POINT marked, directions to the POINT, access information
Surveyor's flagging tape to mark the AA boundary
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
DATA FORMS
FORM PV-1, Front and Back: NWCA Point Verification Form
FORM AA-1, Front and Back: NWCA Assessment Area Establishment
FORM AA-2: NWCA Assessment Area Characterization
3-29
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 3. Establishing the Assessment Area
3-30
-------
• FORM PV-1: NWCA POINT VERIFICATION FORM (Front) Reviewed bv nnman: •
x ' •
SITE ID: NWCA11- VISIT: OREGON Q1 O2 DATE: / / 2 0 1 1
EVALUATOR: AFFILIATION:
POINT LOCATION AND ACCESSIBILITY
Directions to POINT:
>^S
Provide GPS coordinates at the location
evaluation took place (use NAD83); identify Latitude Longitude
where below:
O POINT O Nearest practicable Decimal Degrees
•
VN
ii i ^ i i i
POINT verified by (fill in all that apply): O Aerial Photo O Topo Map O Other (describe): A.^^^^
Is the POINT accessible? O YES O NO
If it is not accessible, note the reason, whether this is permanent or
temporary, and provide any relevant comments below.
O Permission to access site denied
O Physically inaccessible (crew saftey, barriers, high water)
O Temporary
O Permanent
Note any difficulties ac<.^sbing site
O Dense Vegetation O Steep/Unstable terrain
O Deep Water O Livestock
O Other (describe .
SptMal At less Requirements
O Lock^ J jates O Special Permits
Additional Access Comments:
>o
PREDOMINANT V^TLAND TYPE AT THE POINT (MARK ONE)
Status & Trend Categories INCLUDED in targ'^ H %oula.:on
O E2EM - Estuarine Intertidal Emergent
O E2SS - Estuarine Shrub/Forested
O PEM - Palustrine Emergent
O PSS - Palustrine Scrub/Shrub
O PFO - Palustrine Forested
O PUBPAB - Palustrine Uncr ,solida,xd Bottom/Aquatic Bed (see conditions)
O Pf- Palustrine Farmed (t^e Conditions)
Status & Trend Categories EXCLUDED from target population
O Estuarine/Marine Intertidal Aquatic Bed (SAV)
O Estuarine Intertidal Unconsolidated Shore (mudflats)
O Estuarine/Marine Subtidal (deep water)
O Palustrine Unconsolidated Shore (non-tidal mudflats)
O Lacustrine/Riverine (deep water)
O Other (upland, developed, etc)
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
If either PUnnAb 'A Pf are marked above then indicate the presence of any feature(s) that exclude the POINT from sampling in the
appropriate section below.
Palustrine Farmed (Mark all that apply)
O Presence of row or close grown crops (list type in comments)
O Terraced Land
O Recent evidence land has been mechanically tilled
O Confirmation from land owner
O Other evidence (describe)
Predominant wetland type if it were not in crop production
(Mark One)
O E2EM O E2SS O PEM O PSS O PFO O PUBPAB
NWCA Point Verification Form 01/21/2011
Palustrine Unconsolidated Bottom (Mark all that apply)
O Strictly used to treat waste
O Strictly used for industrial, agricultural, or aquacultural purposes
O Lined wholly with concrete or other manufactured non-vegetative barrier
O Inundated by water greater than 1 m depth covering most of the area
within a 60m radius of POINT
Provide any additional information in the comments section on
the back of this form
2733231641 |
-------
Site ID:
FORM PV-1 : NWCA POINT VERIFICATION FORM (Back)
NWCA11- DATE: /
/ 2 0 1 1
IS POINT SAMPLEABLE
O YES O original POINT is sampleable (fill in category below)
O POINT can be relocated (fill in category below
AND enter documentation for relocated point)
SAMPLEABLE CATEGORIES
O E2EM - Estuarine Intertidal Emergent
O E2SS - Estuarine Scrub Shrub/Forest
O PEM - Palustrine Emergent
O PSS - Palustrine Scrub Shrub
O PFO - Palustrine Forested
O PUBPAB - Palustrine Unconsolidated Bottom/Aquatic Bed. Ponds
that are not used solely for waste treatment or for other strictly
industrial, aquacultural, or agricultural purposes.
O Pf- Palustrine Farmed. Farmed wetlands that are not currently
being intensively managed for crop (row and close ground crops,
rice, horticulture) production.
O NO (fill in category below)
NON-SAMPLEABLE -TEMPORARY CATEGORIES
O Temporarily Non-Sampleable
NON-SAMPLEABLE - NO ACCESS CATEGORIES
O Access permission denied
O Permanently inaccessible
O Temporarily inaccessible
NON-SAMPLEABLE - NON TARGET C* TF jOPItS
O Map Error
O Non target wetland type
O Active crop production during n^ex peril
O Strictly used for an industrial/agricultural/aquacultural purpose
O Inundated by water > 1m in depth (over 90% of 60m around pt)
O Other (describe)
NON-SAMPLEABLE - AA CAN'T BE ESTABLISHED
O Sampleable area too small
O Unsample. bit area greater than 10%
O Sampleable area crosses hydrogeomorphic (HGM) boundary
DOCUMENTATION FQr RF^OCATED POINT
Provide GPS coordinates for the
relocated point (use NAD83)
Decimal Degrees
Lati+ude
Longitude
Basis for Wetland Determination
(fill in all that apply):
O Hydrophytic vegetation predominant
O Hydric soil predominant
O Wetland hydrology is present
If at least one of the above is filled in
the POINT is a wetland for the purposes
of this survey.
Hydrophytir Vegetation Indicators (describe):
H>*1ricSoil Indicators:
O High organic content
O Reducing conditions
Soil Map Unit:
O Histosol O Concretions
O Sulfidic odor O Gleyed
O Aquic moisture regime
O Histic epipedon
O Organic streaking
Listed as hydric? O Yes O No
Wetland Hydrology Indicators: O Standing water O Water marks
O Buttressed trunks O Water stained leaves O Water carried debris O Bare areas
O Saturated Soils O Oxidized rhizospheres O Shallow roots O Floating Mat
O Other
COMMENTS
7893231643
NWCA Point Verification Form 01/21/2011
-------
FORM AA-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA ESTABLISHMENT (Front)
Reviewed by (initial):.
Site ID:
NWCA11-
Date:
VISIT: O 1 O2
Instructions: Fill in the Date above. The date is always the first day of sampling no matter how many days taken for
sampling. Visit # 1 is when the sampling was done. Visit # 2 is a scheduled revisit. Complete the table below by providing the
person's name for each position on the crew and filling in the bubble indicating the protocol(s) completed by the person.
Refer to Reference Card AA-1 for information on establishing the Assessment Area.
Field Crew Personnel:
Tasks:
AA VEG BUFFER SOIL HYD WQ ALG USARAM
Crew Leader:
Vegetation Team
Botanist/Ecologist:
Botanist Assistant:
0
o
0
o
0
o
0
o
o
O
AB Team
AB 1:
AB2:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o o X
o
o
o
o
ASSESSMENT AREA ESTABLISHMENT
Can an AA that contains the original POINT be established?
O Yes Proceed to "AA Layout Used".
O No Document the reasons in the Comment section. Follow the procedures in the NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines for relocating the POINT at this site
or for selecting an alternate POINT (i.e., alternate NWCA site). If the POINT can ^e relc ;ated at this site, complete the documentation required in
the Site Evaluation Guidelines and proceed to "AA Layout Used".
AA Layout Used (Mark one):
O Standard Circular AA O Standard Circular AA-Shifted O P°lY9 >n AA O Wetland Boundary AA
Area of the AA: 0.
ha (1 ha is 10,000m2)
Location of AA CENTER (Mark one):
O The POINT is the AA CENTER
O The POINT is not the AA CENTER; the cooi 'mates of the CENTER are:
LAT
LONG
NAD 83
Record GPS accuracy below ')y noti. T the number of satellites traced for the LAT/LONG reading above and the variance (in meters) associated with the
coordinate measurement.
Number of satellites:
Distance variance:
COMMENTS AND NOTES
NWCA Assessment Area Establishment 01/26/2011
4567552925
-------
FORM AA-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA ESTABLISHMENT (Back)
Reviewed by (initial):.
Site ID:
NWCA11-
Date:
/ 2 0 1 1
SKETCH MAP
Annotate an aerial photo and/or make a sketch below to document the plan for establishing the AA and any changes made
during actual AA establishment. A fine-point, silver Sharpie® or similar pen works well for marking photos. At minimum,
include the information below in the documentation.
Draw the AA boundary and indicate the position of the POINT and AA CENTER, the AA boundaries, bearings and estimates
of important distances (e.g., segments of the AA boundary), a north-arrow, and other information that might be useful for AA
establishment. On the day of sampling, update the plan to reflect what was actually done.
* Add the approximate locations and boundaries of the vegetation plots with a square with the plot number inside.
* Add the approximate locations of the soil pits with their letter designation, e.g., A, B, C, D.
* Note the nature and direction of environmental gradients, water bodies, major vegetation patches, and other
prominent features of the site and the surrounding area.
If a photo was annotated, place it in the Site Packet with the completed FORM AA-1 and
O Annotated photo included in the Site Packet
2324552924
-------
FORM AA-2: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA CHARACTERIZATION
Reviewed by (initial):.
Site ID: NWCA11-
Date:
/ / 2 0 1 1
FWS Status and Trends Class
Mark predominant class. If classes are equally abundant in a complex, mark the target class from the survey design or, if the target class is
not present, mark the class nearest the POINT. Refer to Reference Card AA-3, Side A for descriptions of the classes.
O Estuarine Intertidal Emergent (E2EM)
O Palustrine Emergent (PEM)
O Palustrine Forested (PFO)
O Palustrine Farmed (not currently in crop production) (Pi)*
O Palustrine Unconsolidated Bottom/Aquatic Bed (PUBPAB)
* See NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines for criteria for inclusion.
O Estuarine Intertidal Shrub/Forested (E2SS)
O Palustrine Scrub Shrub (PSS)
_
Hydrogeomorphic Type
Mark the class (one) and, if possible, the subclass (one). Refer to Reference Card AA-3, Side B for a key to the classes.
Class
Subclass
^
O Depression
O Closed
O Closed Beaver Impounded
O Closed Human Impounded**
O Closed Human Excavated**
O Closed Human Excavated and Impounded*
O Open
O Open Beaver Impounded
O Open Human Impounded**
O Open Human Excavated**
O Open Human Excavated and Impounded*
O .4uman
O Flats
O Mineral Soil
O Organic Soil
Altered*
^
O Lacustrine Fringe
O Naturally occurring
©
O Artificially Flooded
O Riverine
O Tidal
O Upper Perennial (1st and 2nd order)
O Lower Perennial (3rd and 'ilgher
O Complex
O Beaver Impounded
O Human Altered**
O Slope
O Stratographic
O Topographic
O Human Altered*
O Tidal Fringe
O Naturally occ
\
urring
O Human Altered**
Refer to Reference Card AA-2, Side b for examples of human altered hydrogeomorphic types.
Other Wetland Classification Systems
If other wetland classification ~vstem(s), e.g., a state system, is/are used in the area, list the system and the predominant class below.
Wetland Class:
Wetland Class:
Wetland Class:
COMMENTS
4933080782
NWCA Assessment Area Characterization 01/21/2011
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
CHAPTER 4. CHARACTERIZING THE BUFFER
Introduction 4-3
4.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURE 4-3
4.1.1 Buffer Sample Plot Layout- Standard AAs 4-3
4.1.2 Buffer Sample Plot Layout - Alternate AAs 4-6
4.1.3 Recording Data on the Buffer Field Form 4-8
4.1.3.1 Buffer Natural Cover Strata 4-8
4.1.3.2 Buffer Stressors 4-10
4.1.3.3 Targeted Alien Species 4-11
4.1.4 Data Handling 4-11
4.2 LITERATURE CITED 4-12
4.3 PROTOCOL CHECKLIST AND REFERENCE CARD 4-13
Buffer Protocol Checklist
Reference Card B-1: Buffer Sample Plot Layouts (Side A)
Reference Card B-1: Completing Form B-1 (Side B)
4.4 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DATA FORMS 4-19
Buffer Protocol Equipment Checklist
Form B-1: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots (Front)
Form B-1: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots - Targeted Alien Species (Back)
See also APPENDIX B. TARGET INVASIVE ALIEN SPECIES
4-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
CHAPTER 4. CHARACTERIZING THE BUFFER
Buffer is often defined as an area of natural vegetation surrounding the perimeter of a
wetland that is not directly affected by human activities and that can provide some
protection to the wetland from stressors and neighboring land uses. An alternative use
of the term buffer \s simply as a prescribed measurement area or discrete zone (e.g.,
riparian buffer or GIS buffer). For the Level 3 Assessment in NWCA, the buffer
surrounding the Assessment Area (AA) serves both functions. Because we are
characterizing the POINT and associated AA rather than the whole wetland, Buffer
Sample Plots may encompass wetland or upland, natural vegetation cover or human
land uses. The natural cover attributes recorded within the Buffer Sample Plots quantify
the buffer's protective or mitigating role, if any, and record the number and extent of
stressors influencing the AA. Both types of information are necessary for an
assessment of wetland condition to place the AA on a gradient of disturbance relative to
a reference standard.
Another objective of this portion of the field effort is to maximize the information to be
gleaned from the buffer area that is consistent with the comprehensive nature of the
study (Level 3 Assessment). In other words, the data collected in the buffer at Level 3
are expected to be more detailed and more quantitative than data recorded in either the
Rapid Assessment (Level 2, USA RAM USEPA in review) or Landscape Assessment
(Level 1). For detailed information on the rationale for the buffer indicator, see
"Ecological Indicators for the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment" (USEPA in
preparation).
The stressor lists compiled for the buffer field form (Form B-1) contain elements from
multiple sources, including (in alphabetical order by senior author) the California Rapid
Assessment Method (CRAM) for Wetlands and Riparian Areas (Collins et al. 2006), Gulf
of Mexico Coastal Wetlands Condition Assessment (Heitmuller 2008), Delaware
Comprehensive Assessment Procedure (Jacobs et al. 2008), Delaware Rapid
Assessment Procedure (Jacobs 2007), USEPA Environmental Monitoring and
Assessment Program Stream Survey (Kaufmann et al. 1999, Peck et al. 2006), and Ohio
Rapid Assessment Method for Wetlands (Mack 2001).
The Assessment Area and Buffer Team (AB Team) is responsible for recording natural
cover, stressor information, and targeted alien species information at the center of the
AA (AA CENTER) and in the buffer area surrounding the AA. The AB Team also
completes Buffer Metric 3 (Stress to the Buffer) from the USA RAM protocol (USEPA in
review) in the buffer area.
4.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURE
4.1.1 Buffer Sample Plot Layout - Standard AAs
The AB Team records buffer natural cover and stressors at twelve 100-m2 Buffer Sample
Plots laid out along four cardinal transects (marked N, S, E, and W in figures) and at a
plot at the AA CENTER. The Buffer Sample Plots are arranged so that they may be
4-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
given weights for proximity analysis. Follow the instructions for locating Buffer Sample
Plots given below and, as needed, refer to the description of the Standard AA layouts,
circular and shifted, in Chapter 3. The buffer protocol is also summarized on Reference
Card B-1, Side A.
Figure 4-1 shows a Standard Circular AA layout where the CENTER and the POINT
coincide and three Buffer Sample Plots are evenly spaced along each 140-m cardinal
transect. The transects do not have to be sampled in any particular order as long as the
sample plots are identified correctly. Buffer Sample Plots N1, E1, S1, and W1 are
placed at the outer boundary of the AA to sample natural cover and stressors that are in
closest proximity to the AA.
1) Assist the Vegetation Team (Veg Team) in locating the POINT and/or the AA
CENTER. It is the Veg Team's responsibility to establish and flag the AA (as
described in Chapter 3). Once the intersection of the AA boundary and the first
cardinal transect has been located, the AB Team may begin locating Buffer Sample
Plots along that transect.
2) Use a GPS or a rangefinder and compass to measure the distance to the center of
the first Buffer Sample Plot on the transect at 45m from the CENTER. Number the
plot as shown in Figure 4-1.
3) Stand in the center of the Buffer Sample Plot and estimate 5m in each direction (i.e.,
identify a 100-m2 area).
4) Record data on the front of Form B-1 for the buffer natural cover strata and stressor
information visible within the surrounding 100-m2 plot (as explained in Section 4.1.3
Recording Data on the Buffer Field Form).
5) Record targeted alien species presence (back of Form B-1)(see Appendix B for
identification characteristics). It may be helpful to place a temporary flag in the
center of the plot while roaming the plot to search for target species.
6) Complete Metric 3 for the USA-RAM (USEPA in review).
7) Repeat steps 2-6 traveling another 45m along the cardinal transect to the second
Buffer Sample Plot at 90m from the CENTER. Fill out Form B-1 at the second
Sample Plot; proceed another 45m from the second sample plot to reach the third
plot at 135m from the AA CENTER and record the data on Form B-1. At the third
Buffer Sample Plot (farthest from the CENTER, i.e., plot N3, E3, S3, or W3), record
the geographic coordinates in the appropriate space on the back of Form B-1.
8) Proceed to the remaining three transects and repeat steps 2-7 Use a separate
Form B-1 for each Buffer Transect and the plot at the AA CENTER.
9) After completing the cardinal transects, return to the AA CENTER and repeat steps
3-5 to record natural cover, stressor, and alien species information there. Record
the geographic coordinates of the CENTER in the appropriate space on the back of
Form B-1.
4-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
Note: In open country, it may be possible for one person on the AB Team to sample the
12 Buffer Sample Plots and the AA CENTER while the second AB Team member goes
on to another sampling activity.
w 0-
W3
POINT, CENTER
Wetland
Buffer Transects
AA
Figure 4-1. Buffer Sample Plots placed relative to a Standard Circular AA Layout. Note
that in Figure 4-1 all the Buffer Sample Plots on the N transect and plots E1, SI, and W1
fall within the wetland, and the remaining plots occur in upland locations surrounding the
wetland.
4-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4.1.2 Buffer Sample Plot Layout - Alternate AAs
If a wetland is not large enough to accommodate a 40m-radius circle, an alternate AA
layout is used. Chapter 3 presents instructions for laying out alternate AAs and marking
the locations at which the cardinal transects cross the sides of the polygon. Once the
first of these locations has been identified, the field crew can begin to establish and
sample the Buffer Sample Plots.
The distances between Buffer Sample Plots along the cardinal transects may vary
depending on the location of the CENTER and the shape and orientation of the AA
(Figure 4-2). The procedure for locating Buffer Sample Plots on transects of varying
lengths appears below and are summarized on Reference Card B-1, Side A..
This Buffer Sample Plot layout may also be used for small wetlands (< 1/4 ha) where the
AA covers the entire wetland, e.g., the Wetland Boundary Layout described in Chapter
3. For wetlands smaller than 1/4 ha, the centers of Buffer Sample Plots N1, E1, S1, and
W1 are located 5m from the edge of the wetland on the cardinal transects.
1) Work with the Veg Team to locate the POINT and CENTER of the AA.
2) If the wetland will not accommodate a standard 40-m radius circle, work with the Veg
Team to determine the size and orientation of an Alternate AA relative to the
CENTER. Once any of the cardinal transects has been located and where it crosses
the edge of the AA marked, the AB Team may begin sampling the three Buffer
Sample Plots on that transect.
3) To locate the center of the first Buffer Sample Plot on the cardinal transect, add 5m
to the distance from the CENTER to the edge of the AA (or to the edge of the
wetland for a Wetland Boundary Layout).
4) The center of the farthest Buffer Sample Plot on a transect is 135m from the
CENTER. [(135m) minus (distance from the CENTER to plot #1)] + 2 = the
distance from plot #1 to plot #2 (and plot #2 to plot #3).
5) Stand in the center of the Buffer Sample Plot and estimate 5m in each direction from
the center of the plot (i.e., identify a 100-m2 area).
6) Record data on the front of Form B-1 for the buffer natural cover strata and stressor
information visible within the surrounding 100-m2 plot (as explained in Section 4.1.3
Recording Data on the Buffer Field Form). Record targeted alien species presence
(back of Form B-1)(see Appendix B for identification characteristics). It may be
helpful to place a temporary flag in the center of the plot while roaming the plot to
search for target species.
7) Follow the procedure above for locating and sampling the rest of the sample plots on
the other three transects. Use a separate Form B-1 for each Buffer Transect and
the plot at the AA CENTER.
4-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
NOTE: If a narrow AA (like in a riparian area) is aligned directly along the E-W or N-S
transects, it may be necessary to extend the length of the transects to accommodate
three Buffer Sample Plots. That is, if a transect length is too short, such that the
distance measured between sample plots is <10m, the transect may be extended to
allow the plots to be at least 10m apart.
w 0
W3
POINT
CENTER
Wetland
Buffer Transects
AA
Figure 4-2. Polygon AA with an area of 1/4 ha. The shape and orientation of the AA
determines the distance of plots N1, E1, S1, and W1 from the CENTER as well as the
distance between Buffer Sample Plots on each transect.
4-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4.1.3 Recording Data on the Buffer Field Form
Form B-1: Buffer Sample Plots, is used to record natural cover, stressor, and targeted
alien species data for each Buffer Transect and the plot at the AA CENTER. A separate
Form B-1 is used for each transect. In the Location field at the top of Form B-1, record
whether the data collected applies to the AA CENTER or the N, S, E, or W Transect by
filling in the appropriate bubble.
Record data by filling in the appropriate bubble in the Buffer Natural Cover Strata field
and the fields for the five categories of buffer stressors on Form B-1: Buffer Sample
Plots (Front). Report on the presence or absence of 22 targeted alien invasive species
(see Appendix B for identification characteristics) by filling in the appropriate bubbles on
Form B-1: Buffer Sample Plots -Targeted Alien Species (Back).
4.1.3.1 Buffer Natural Cover Strata
The Buffer Natural Cover Strata field at the top of Form B-1 (Front) documents the
canopy type and the natural vegetative cover in each of the 12 Buffer Sample Plots and
the AA CENTER plot, to recognize the layers of vegetation and other natural cover that
are important to a diverse habitat structure within the buffer area. The information
recorded here gives an indication of the mitigating influence of natural cover surrounding
the AA that may reduce the impact of stressors.
The list of vegetation types listed under Natural Cover Strata is loosely organized into
three sections:
• Canopy (> 5m high) including Big Trees (>0.3m DBH) and Small Trees (< 0.3m
DBH;
• Understory (0.5 to 5m high) including Woody Shrubs, Saplings (0.5-5m high)
• Ground cover (<0.5m high) including Woody Shrubs, Saplings and Herbs, Forbs,
and Grasses (<0.5m high).
The presence and abundance of a vegetation type within each 100-m2 sample plot is
recorded by cover class:
• 0=Absent
• 1=Sparse(<10%)
• 2=Moderate (10-40%)
• 3=Heavy (40-75%)
• 4 =Very Heavy (>75%).
Other natural cover types include:
• Bare dirt
• Litter, duff
• Rock
• Water
• Submerged vegetation
4-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
For each Buffer Plot and the AA CENTER, record data for Buffer Natural Cover Strata
using the following steps:
1) Find the section for Natural Cover Strata on the front of Form B-1. Fill in the bubble
at the top of the page identifying the location as either a transect or the AA CENTER.
2) On Form B-1, the various buffer sample plots are listed as Buffer Plot 1, 2, and 3.
These columns correspond to plots located along the transect progressively farther
from the CENTER (with Buffer Plot 1 placed just outside the AA boundary nearest
the CENTER). When completing the form for AA CENTER, the column labeled Plot
1 is the only one completed and the columns for Plots 2 and 3 are left blank.
3) Fill in the appropriate bubbles for Canopy Type:
• Absent bubble if no tree canopy is present.
• If tree canopy is present, fill in a bubble for both canopy type and leaf type:
o D or E for deciduous or evergreen
o B or N for leaf type—broadleaf or needle leaf
4) Under the next section of Form B-1, indicate the strata for the vegetation and natural
cover types present:
• Fill in the bubble corresponding to the appropriate number (0-4) representing the
percent cover of big trees (> 0.3m [or 1 foot] Diameter Breast Height [DBH]) and
small trees (< 0.3m DBH) for each of the three Buffer Plots on each transect and
the AA CENTER. Estimate the area covered by each tree category as the
amount of shade cast (imagined as noon or midday shade) by a particular tree
(or shrub) type.
• Fill in the bubble corresponding to the appropriate percent cover of woody shrubs
0.5m-5m high and <0.5m high for each of the sample plots.
• Do the same for non-woody vegetation (i.e., herbs, grasses, and forbs), bare dirt,
litter or duff, rock, water, and submerged vegetation.
NOTE: Because of the use of cover classes and because the vegetation strata
overlap each other, the total vegetative cover in a plot may exceed 100%.
5) Repeat steps 2-4 for the other three transects and the AA CENTER. Use a separate
Form B-1 for each Buffer Transect and the plot at the AA CENTER.
NOTE: If AB Team members are not able to stand at the center of a Buffer Sample
Plot due to open water, thick brush, fencing, or some other impediment, approach
as close to the center of the plot as possible and visually estimate or use
binoculars to view and record what is within the sample plot. If this occurs and a
Buffer Sample Plot is estimated from afar, mark F1, F2, etc. in the Flag box and describe
the situation in the Flag Comments field on the back of the form. If the plot is
inaccessible and its visibility is impaired, fill in U (suspect measurement) or K (no
measurement made) in the Flag box and explain in the Flag comment section. The
aerial photograph can also be used to corroborate natural cover and stressor estimates
if a Buffer Sample Plot is inaccessible.
4-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4.1.3.2 Buffer Stressors
In the Buffer Stressors portion of Form B-1, the stressors are listed in five classes:
Hydrology, Habitat/Vegetation, Agricultural and Rural, Residential and Urban, and
Industrial Development.
Hydrology Stressors are attributes that may affect the water flow or water quality of a
wetland and buffer area. For the Dike/Dam/Road/RR Bed field, mark the bubble if you
consider a road to be a hydrology stressor because it is impeding water flow and
causing an impoundment. Note that road appears three more times (Road - gravel,
Road - two lane, Road - four lane) as a direct stressor in the Residential and Urban
Stressors section of Form B-1.
Habitat/Vegetation Stressors are changes made to the natural vegetation cover. Most
of the attributes record human disturbances; however, there are natural stressors listed,
such as tree canopy insect herbivory or recent fire (forest canopy or grassland). Tree
Canopy Herbivory refers to tree canopy insect damage, such as that from pine bark
beetle or gypsy moth. Highly Grazed Grasses refers to animal grazing (cattle, horse,
goat, deer, elk, or bison) within the various Buffer Sample Plots. Highly-grazed is
defined as grasses within the sample plot uniformly grazed to <7.6cm (<3in) high
(Cortland County Soil and Water Conservation District 2010, Rayburn 2000, Washington
State University Extension Service 2010). Shrub browsing is recognized by nipped-off
branches and a dominance of new twigs.
Land Use Activities that may have a negative influence on AA condition are listed
under Agricultural and Rural Stressors, Residential and Urban Stressors, and Industrial
Development stressors.
To document the stressors in each Buffer Plot on the cardinal transects and at the AA
CENTER:
1) Find the section for stressors on the front of Form B-1. On Form B-1, the various
Buffer Sample Plots are listed as Buffer Plot 1, 2, and 3. These columns correspond
to plots located along a transect progressively farther from the CENTER (e.g., N1,
N2, or N3, see Figures 4-1 and 4-2).
NOTE: When completing the form for the plot at the AA CENTER, the column labeled
Plot 1 is the only one completed and the columns for Plots 2 and 3 are left blank.
2) From the center of each plot, systematically search for each attribute in the five
stressor sections of Form B-1. Darken the bubble if a stressor is present.
There likely will be many unfilled bubbles on the page. Note the box at the top of the
stressor section marked Stressor Presence/Absence. It reads, "Confirm that a filled
data bubble indicates presence and an unfilled bubble indicates absence by filling
this bubble." Fill in this "super bubble" so that the Information Management Team
knows that unmarked bubbles were consciously left that way.
NOTE: The stressors portion of the form has several boxes labeled Otherwhere
stressors of any type not listed may be entered.
4-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
3) If any entry presents a problem or merits a comment, mark F1, F2, etc. in the Flag
box and write out the comment in the Flag Comments field on the back of the form.
4) As a last step before finishing each cardinal transect, use the GPS to mark the plot
coordinates (latitude and longitude in decimal degrees) for the center of the Buffer
Sample Plot at the far end of each transect (N3, E3, S3, or W3) and for the AA
CENTER. Record the location coordinates in the appropriate boxes in the Plot
Coordinates field on the back of Form B-1. If delayed by lack of satellite coverage,
record other data while the GPS seeks coordinates.
4.1.3.3 Targeted A lien Species
Invasive alien plant species may irreversibly alter native plant communities. Both natural
and human disturbances create opportunities for the establishment of alien plant
species. The Veg Team documents the occurrence and cover of all alien species as
they are detected in the Veg Plots. In the buffer and at the AA CENTER, the AB Team
records the presence or absence of targeted alien plant species listed on the back of
Form B-1. The twenty-two alien species were selected for their widespread distribution,
their importance and ecological impact, and their ease of identification for non-botanists
(see Appendix B).
To document the presence of the targeted alien species:
1) Find the Targeted Alien Species section on the back of Form B-1. The various
Buffer Sample Plots are listed as Plot 1, 2, and 3. These columns correspond to
plots located along each transect progressively farther from the CENTER.
NOTE: When completing the form for AA CENTER, the column labeled Plot 1 is the
only one completed and the columns for Plots 2 and 3 are left blank.
2) Search the Plot for the targeted alien species while standing at the center of the Plot
or place a temporary flag at the center and roam the Plot.
3) If a target alien species appears in a Plot, fill in the bubble to indicate presence for
the Plot. Bubbles will remain unfilled for species that were not encountered. Note
that the heading for each transect has a statement saying, "Confirm that a filled data
bubble indicates presence and an unfilled bubble indicates absence by filling in this
bubble." Filling in this "super bubble" indicates to the Information Management Team
that unmarked bubbles were consciously left that way.
4) Review both sides of Form B-1 to check that all sections have been completed and
super bubbles marked as appropriate. Review the form for Metric 3 of USA-RAM
(USEPA in review) for completeness.
4.1.4 Data Handling
See Chapter 2 for protocols on copying and shipping completed data forms to the
Information Management Team.
4-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4.2 LITERATURE CITED
Collins, J.N., E.D. Stein, M. Sutula, R. Clark, A.E. Fetscher, L. Grenier, C. Grosso, and
A. Wiskind. 2006. California Rapid Assessment Method (CRAM) for Wetlands and
Riparian Areas. Version 5.0.2, 151 pp.
Cortland County Soil and Water Conservation District. 2010. Prescribed grazing
management, www.cortlandswcd.org . Accessed 4/2010.
Heitmuller, T. 2008. Gulf of Mexico Coastal Wetlands Condition Assessment-Pilot
Survey. Quality Assurance Project Plan, U. S. Geological Survey, Gulf Breeze Project
Office, Gulf Breeze, FL 317 pp.
Jacobs, A.D. 2007. Delaware Rapid Assessment Procedure, Version 4.1. Delaware
Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control, Dover, DE. 34pp.
Jacobs, A.D., D.F. Whigham, D.Fillis, E. Rehm, and A. Howard. 2008. Delaware
Comprehensive Assessment Procedure Version 5.1. Delaware Department of Natural
Resources and Environmental Control, Dover, DE. 74pp.
Kaufmann, P.R., P. Levine, E.G. Robison, C. Seeliger, and D.V. Peck. 1999.
Quantifying Physical Habitat in Wadable Streams. EPA/620/R_99/003. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Mack, J.J. 2001. Ohio Rapid Assessment Method for Wetlands, Manual for Using
Version 5.0. Ohio EPA Technical Bulletin Wetland/2001-1-1. Ohio Environmental
Protection Agency, Division of Surface Water, 401 Wetland Ecology Unit, Columbus,
OH.
Peck, D.V., AT. Herlihy, B.H. Hill, R.M. Hughes, P.R. Kaufmann, D.J. Klemm, J.M.
Lazorchak, F.H. McCormick, S.A. Peterson, P.L. Ringold, T. Magee, and M. Cappaert.
2006. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program - Surface Waters Western
Pilot Study: Field Operations Manual for Wadable Streams. EPA/620/R-06/003. Office
of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Rayburn, E. 2000. Overgrazing can hurt environment, your pocketbook. West Virginia
Extension Service, West Virginia Farm Bureau News.
www.wvu.edu/~agexten/forglvst/overgraz.htm . Accessed 4/2010.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Review. National Wetland
Condition Assessment: USA-RAM Field Operations Manual. EPA/XXX/R-XX/XXX.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Preparation. Ecological Indicators
for the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment. EPA-XXX-YY-0000. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Washington State University Extension Service. 2010. How green is your grass? Five
steps to better pasture and grazing management. Extension service bulletin, Clark
County, Brush Prairie, Washington, http://clark.wsu.edu. Accessed 4/2010.
4-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4.3 PROTOCOL CHECKLIST AND REFERENCE CARD
Buffer Protocol Checklist
Reference Card B-1,. Buffer Sample Plot Layouts (Side A)
Reference Card B-1, Completing Form B-1 (Side B)
4-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4-14
-------
Buffer Protocol Checklist
_Check equipment and supplies.
_Use GPS, or range finder and 50-m tape if necessary to measure the location of
each Buffer Sample Plot as described in Sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.
_Record natural cover strata information, stressor data, and targeted alien species
presence on Form B-1 at each sample plot and at the AA CENTER.
.Complete Metric 3 for the USA-RAM (USEPA in review).
_When all Buffer Sample Plots are completed, review field forms for accuracy.
-------
-------
Reference Card B-1, Side A. Buffer Sample Plot Layouts
•V POINT, CENTER
__ Wetland
Buffer Transects
AA
B
Standard Layout - Circular and Shifted (A): Overview: Once
one of the cardinal directions has been located and the place
where it crosses the AA boundary is marked, use a GPS or
rangefinder and compass to locate three Buffer Sample Plots
equidistant along the transect extending beyond the
boundary of the AA. Do the same for the other cardinal
directions to establish a total of four transects oriented in the
four cardinal directions from the AA CENTER.
Number each Buffer Sample Plot as shown in Figure A. The
transects do not have to be sampled in any particular order
as long as the sample plots are identified correctly.
1. On each transect, measure the distance to the center of
the first Buffer Sample Plot at 45m from the AA CENTER.
2. Stand in the center of the Buffer Sample Plot and estimate
5m in each direction from the Plot center to locate stressors
and fill out Form B-1.
3. Travel another 45m along the transect to the second
Buffer Sample Plot at 90m.
4. Travel another 45m from that plot to reach the third plot
at 135m from the AA CENTER.
5. At the farthest Sample Plot on each transect (e.g., N3),
record the geographic coordinates of the center of the plot
on the back of Form B-1. Proceed to the other transects and
repeat layout and data entry.
Alternate Layout Overview (B): In the cases where a
Standard AA can not be established, work with the Veg
Team to determine the size and orientation of an Alternate
AA. Once one of the cardinal directions has been located
and the place where it crosses the AA boundary is marked,
use a GPS or rangefinder and compass to locate three
Buffer Sample Plots equidistant along the transect
extending beyond the boundary of the AA. Do the same for
the other cardinal directions to establish a total of four
transects oriented in the four cardinal directions from the
AA CENTER.
Number each Buffer Sample Plot as shown in Figure B. The
transects do not have to be sampled in any particular order
as long as the sample plots are identified correctly.
1. To locate the center of the first Buffer Sample Plot on
the transect, add 5m to the distance from the CENTER to
the AA edge.
2. The center of the farthest Plot on a transect is typically
135m from the CENTER: [(135m) minus (distance from the
CENTER to plot #1)] * 2 = the distance from plot #1 to plot
#2 (and plot #2 to plot #3).
3. Proceed as described in Step 2 above for a Standard
Layout to fill out forms from center of each Plot.
4. Follow the same procedure for locating Buffer Sample
Plots on the other transects.
NOTE: If a narrow riparian rectangle is aligned directly
along the E-W or N-S transects, it may be necessary to
extend the length of the transects beyond 135m to
accommodate three Buffer Sample Plots in each cardinal
direction. Distance between sample plots should be S 10m.
-------
Reference Card B-1, Side B. Completing Form B-1
Buffer Natural Cover Strata Section of Form B-1
1. Complete a separate form for each transect and the AA CENTER. Fill in the bubble at the top
of the page identifying the location as either a cardinal transect or the AA CENTER. On Form B-
1, the various Buffer Sample Plots are listed as Buffer Plot 1, 2, and 3 (e.g., N1, N2, or N3).
When completing the form for AA CENTER, the column labeled Plot 1 is the only one completed
and the sections for Plots 2 and 3 are left blank.
2. For each sample plot, fill in the appropriate bubbles for Canopy Type: D or E for deciduous or
evergreen; B or N for leaf type—broadleaf or needle leaf; or Absent if no tree canopy is present.
If tree canopy is present, make sure to fill in a bubble for both canopy type and leaf type.
3. Under Strata, fill in the bubble corresponding to the appropriate number (0-4) representing the
percent cover of big trees (> 0.3m [or 1 foot] Diameter Breast Height [DBH]) and small trees
(< 0.3m DBH). Estimate the area covered by each tree category as the amount of shade cast
(imagined as noon or midday shade) by a particular tree (or shrub) type.
4. Fill in the bubble corresponding to the appropriate number representing the percent cover of
woody shrubs 0.5m-5m high and <0.5m high for each of the Buffer Sample Plots.
5. Do the same for the remaining entries in the Natural Cover Strata section: non-woody plants
(i.e., herbs, grasses, and forbs), bare dirt, litter or duff, rock, water, and submerged vegetation.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 for the other 3 cardinal transects and the AA CENTER.
NOTE: Because of the use of cover classes and because the vegetation strata overlap each
other, the total vegetative cover in a plot may exceed 100%.
NOTE: If AB Team members are not able to stand at the center of a Buffer Sample Plot
due to open water, thick brush, fencing, or some other impediment, approach as close to
the center of the plot as possible and visually estimate or use binoculars to view and
record what is within the sample plot. If this occurs and a Buffer Sample Plot is estimated
from afar, mark F1, F2, etc. in the Flag box and write out a comment in the Flag Comment
section on the back of the form. The aerial photograph can also be used to corroborate natural
cover and stressor estimates in the buffer if a Buffer Sample Plot is inaccessible.
Buffer Stressors Section of Form B-1
1. From the center of each Buffer Sample Plot, systematically search for each attribute in the five
stressor sections of Form B-1. Darken the bubble if a stressor is present. There will be many
unfilled bubbles on the page. Fill in the "super bubble" at the top of the stressor section, so that
Information Management knows that unmarked bubbles were consciously left that way.
NOTE: The stressors portion of the form has several fields labeled Other where stressors of any
type not listed may be entered.
3. If any entry presents a problem or merits a comment, mark F1, F2, etc. in the Flag box and
write out the comment in the Flag Comments section on the back of the form.
4. As a last step before finishing each cardinal transect, use the GPS to mark the plot
coordinates (latitude and longitude in decimal degrees) for the center of the Buffer Sample Plot at
the far end of each transect (N3, E3, S3, or W3) and the AA CENTER. Record the coordinates in
the appropriate fields in the middle of the back side of Form B-1, and fill in the bubble identifying
the location as a cardinal transect or AA CENTER.
Targeted Alien Species Section of Form B-1
1. Standing in the center of each of the Buffer Sample Plots (or at the AA CENTER), scan the
plot for any of the targeted alien species that may be found in your region. You may also place a
temporary flag at the center of the Buffer Sample Plot and roam the plot searching for any
targeted alien species.
2. If a listed species appears in a Buffer Sample Plot, fill in the bubble to indicate presence of that
species for the appropriate number plot (Plot 1, Plot 2 etc.). Bubbles will remain unfilled for
species that were not encountered. Fill in the "super bubble" at the top of the section that
indicates to Information Management that unmarked bubbles were consciously left that way.
3. Review both sides of Form B-1 to check that all sections have been completed.
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4.4 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DATA FORM
Buffer Equipment List
Form B-1: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots (Front)
Form B-1: NWCA Buffer Sample Plots - Targeted Alien Species (Back)
4-19
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 4. Characterizing the Buffer
4-20
-------
Buffer Equipment Checklist
_50-Meter tape
_Aerial photo for each site from the site packet
_Binoculars
_Clipboard
_Compass to locate cardinal directions
_Field forms and
~_GPS
_Laser Rangefinder (optional)
_Pin flags for occasional use
-------
-------
Site ID:
NWCA11-
FORM B-1: NWCA BUFFER SAMPLE PLOTS (Front)
DATE:
Location
OAA
Center O N
OS OE Ow
Reviewed by (initial
/ / 2
:
0
1 1
Buffer Natural Cover Strata Fill one bubble for each type:
Canopy Type: D = Deciduous; E = Evergreen. Leaf Type: B = Broadleaf; N = Needle Leaf. If no tree canopy, fill in Absent
Strata: Fill in bubble for each plot. 0 = Absent; 1 = Sparse(<10%); 2=Moderate(10-40%); 3 = Heavy (40-75%); 4 = Very Heavy (>75%)
Buffer
Plotl
Big Trees (>
Canopy Type: ^) ^)
Leaf Type: © ©
0.3m DBH)
Small Trees (<0.3m DBH)
Woody Shrubs, Saplings
(0.5m-5mHIGH)
Woody Shrubs, Saplings
(<0.5m HIGH)
Herbs, Forbs and
Grasses
Bare dirt
Litter, duff
Rock
Water
Submerged
Vegetation
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
O
o
0
o
o
0
o
o
0
o
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
Absent: ©
Flag
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
O
©
0
©
©
0
o
o
0
©
Buffer
Plot 2
Big Trees (>
Small Trees (
Canopy Type: © ©
Leaf Type: ^) ^)
0.3m DBH)
<0.3m DBH)
Woody Shrubs, Saplings
(0.5m-5mHIGH)
Woody Shrubs, Saplings
(<0.5m HIGH)
Herbs, Forbs and
Grasses
Bare dirt
Litter, duff
Rock
Water
Submerged
Vegetation
Stressor Presence/Absence - Confirm that a filled data
Residential
and
Urban Stressors
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Road - gravel
Road - two lane
Road - four lane
Parking Lot/Pavement
Golf Course
Lawn/Park
Suburban
Residential
Urban/Multifamily
Landfill
Dumping
Trash
Other:
Other:
1
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
2
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
3
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
Flag
Industrial Development Stressors
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Oil Drilling
Gas Wells
Mine (surface)
Mine (underground)
Military
Other:
Other:
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flag
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
0
o
o
o
0
o
0
0
o
o
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
Absent: ©
Flag
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
bubble indicates presence
0
©
o
©
0
©
0
0
o
0
Buffer
Plot3
Canopy Type: © ©
Leaf Type: ^^ ^y
Big Trees (>0.3m DBH)
Small Trees (<0.3m DBH)
Woody Shrubs, Saplings
(0.5m-5m HIGH)
Woody Shrubs, Saplings
(<0.5m HIGH)
Herbs
Forbs and
Grasses
Bare dirt
Litter, duff
Rock
Water
Submerged
Vegetation
©
©
©
0
0
0
©
©
©
©
0
©
o
©
0
o
0
0
o
o
0
©
0
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
Absent: ©
Flag
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
and an unfilled bubble indicates absence by filling this
Hydrology Stressors
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Ditches, Channelization
Dike/Dam/Road/RR
(IMPEDE FLOW)
Bed
Water Level Control Structure
Excavation, Dredging
Fill/Spoil Banks
Freshly Deposited Sediment
(UNVEGETATED)
Soil Loss/Root Exposure
Wall/Riprap
Inlets, Outlets
Point Source/Pipe
(EFFLUENT OR STORMWATER)
Impervious surface
(SHEETFLOW)
nput
Other:
Other:
1
O
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
2
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
3
O
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
Flag
0
©
o
©
0
©
0
0
o
©
bubble. O
Agricultural & Rural Stressors
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Pasture/Hay
Range
Row Crops
Fallow Field (RECENT-RESTING
ROW CROP FIELD)
Fallow Field (OLD -GRASS,
SHRUBS. TREES)
Nursery
Dairy
Orchard
Confined Animal Feeding
Rural Residential
Gravel Pit
Irrigation
Other:
1
O
O
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
2
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
3
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
0
Flag
Habitat/Vegetation Stressors
Fill bubble
if present - Plot
Forest Clear Cut
Forest Selective Cut
Tree Plantation
Tree Canopy Herbivory
(INSECT)
Shrub Layer Browsed
(WILD OR DOMESTIC)
Highly Grazed Grasses
(OVERALL <3' HIGH)
Recently Burned Forest
Canopy
Recently Burned Grassland
(BLACKENED)
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flag
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Herbicide Use
Mowing/Shrub Cutting
Trails
Soil Compaction
(ANIMAL OR HUMAN)
Offroad vehicle damage
Soil erosion (FROM WIND, WATER,
OR OVERUSE)
Other:
Other:
NWCA Buffer Sample Plots 01/27/2011
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flag
8621005046 £
-------
FORM B-1: NWCA BUFFER SAMPLE PLOTS - TARGETED ALIEN SPECIES (Back)
Reviewed by (initial):
Site ID: NWCA11-
DATE:
/ 2 0 1 1
O Confirm a filled data bubble indicates presence and an unfilled bubble indicates absence by filling in this bubble
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Flag
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Flag
Fill bubble if present - Plot
Flag
Eurasian Watermilfoil
Purple Loosestrife
Johnson Grass
Water hyacinth
Knotweed
Kudzu
O
O
Yellow Floating Heart
Japanese Knotweed
Multiflora Rose
o
Giant Salvinia
Perennial Pepperweed
Common Buckthorn
o
Garlic Mustard
Giant Reed
Himalayan Blackberry
O
Poison Hemlock
Cheatgrass
Tamarisk
Mile-A-Minute Weed
Reed Canary Grass
Other:
Birdsfoot Trefoil
Common Reed
Other:
Location: OAA CENTER O N3 O S3 O E3 O W3
Center of Plot 3 or
AA CENTER
(Decimal Degrees)
PLOT COORDINATES
Latitude North
Longitude West
Flag
Comments
7568341903
NWCA Buffer Sample Points - Targeted Alien Species 01/21/2011
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
Chapters. Vegetation
Introduction 5-3
5.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES 5-5
5.1.1 Placement of the Vegetation Plots 5-5
5.1.1.1 Key Concepts For All Veg Plot Layout Configurations 5-6
5.112 Standard Veg Plot Layout 5-6
5.11.3 Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout 5-7
5.11.4 Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout 5-10
5.115 Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout 5-10
5.116 Obstacle Veg Plot Layout 5-11
5.1.2 Establishing the Vegetation Plots 5-11
5.1.3 Vegetation Data Collection 5-15
5.1.3.1 Activities Key to Veg Data Collection 5-16
5.1.3.2 Collecting Vascular Plant Species Presence Data and Creating Species List 5-19
5.13.3 General Cover Estimation Procedures 5-25
5.1.3.4 Vascular Plant Species Height and Cover Data 5-27
5.13.5 Predominant Status and Trends Wetland Class 5-29
5.13.6 Vertical Strata Data for Vascular Vegetation 5-29
5.13.7 Non-Vascular Taxonomic Group Data 5-29
5.13.8 Ground Surface Attribute Data 5-30
5.13.9 Snag Count and Tree Species Count and Cover Data 5-31
5.1.4 Field Day Wrap-Up Activities 5-34
5.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION AND PROCESSING AND DATA HANDLING 5-35
5.2.1 Collecting Plant Specimens 5-36
5.2.2 Pressing Plant Specimens 5-38
5.2.3 Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen Label 5-40
5.2.4 Drying Plant Specimens 5-42
5.2.5 Shipping or Transporting Plant Specimens 5-43
5.2.6 Data Handling 5-45
5.3 LITERATURE CITED 5-45
5.4 VEGETATION PROTOCOL CHECKLISTS AND REFERENCE CARDS 5-49
Vegetation Protocol Task Checklist
Reference Card V-1. Flow Chart of Vegetation Protocol Tasks
Reference Card V-2, Side A. Key for Veg Plot Placement and Example
Plot Layout Configurations
Reference Card V-2, Side B. Veg Plot Layout Configuration Continued
Reference Card V-3, Side A. Vegetation Plot Establishment
Reference Card V-3, Side B. Veg Plot Configuration and Data Collection Summary
Reference Card V-4, Side A. Cover Estimation Procedures.
Reference Card V-4, Side B. Assigning Pseudonyms for Unknown Plant Species
5.5 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORMS, SPECIMEN LABELS 5-61
Vegetation Equipment and Supply Checklist
Form V-1 (front and back): NWCA Vegetation Plot Establishment
Form V-2a (front and back), Form V-2b (continued): NWCA Vascular Species
Presence and Cover
Form V-3 (front): NWCA Vegetation Types
Form V-3 (back): NWCA Ground Surface
Form V-4a (front and back), Form V-4b (continued): NWCA Snag and
Tree Counts and Tree Cover
Plant Sample Tags
Plant Specimen Label
Form T-2: NWCA Unknown Plant Sample Tracking
Form T-3: NWCA QA Plant Sample Tracking
See also APPENDIX C. VEGETATION SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIAL - LISTS OF FLORISTIC
RESOURCES
5-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
CHAPTERS. VEGETATION
Wetland plant species 1) represent diverse adaptations, ecological tolerances, and life
history strategies, and 2) effectively integrate environmental conditions, species
interactions, and human-caused disturbance. Data describing plant species composition
and abundance and vegetation structure are powerful, robust, and relatively easy to
gather. In addition, they can be used to derive myriad metrics or indicators that are useful
descriptors of ecological integrity or stress (e.g., Lopez and Fennessy 2002, USEPA 2002,
Pino et al. 2005, Bourdaghs et al. 2006, Quetier et al. 2007, Magee et al. 2008, Magee et
al. 2010, Mack and Kentula 2010). For more detailed information about the rationale for
indicator selection see "Ecological Indicators for the 2011 National Wetland Condition
Assessment" (USEPA in prep.). Examples of the types of data to be collected are:
• Species composition and abundance
- Native species
- Alien species
- Floristic quality
- Guild composition
- Community composition
• Vegetation structure
The NWCA vegetation sampling methods were designed to address NWCA objectives,
while meeting logistics constraints of the study. Vegetation protocols were informed by
evaluating numerous existing sampling approaches and through discussions with many
wetland scientists. Several existing applications of flexible-plot methods in wetland and
upland vegetation types, as well as other wetland sampling approaches, were particularly
useful in developing the NWCA vegetation methods, and we gratefully acknowledge these
efforts (Magee et al. 1993, Peet et al. 1998, Mack 2007, Rocchio 2007, FGDC 2008,
Jennings et al. 2008, Lee et al. 2008).
Protocols in this chapter document the methods for vegetation sampling (Section 5.1
Sampling Procedures) for the National Wetland Condition Assessment (NWCA). A
Vegetation Team (Veg Team) comprised of a Botanist/Ecologist and a Botanist Assistant
collects the vegetation data. Field sampling for the NWCA takes place during peak
growing season when most vegetation is in flower or fruit to optimize plant species
identification and characterization of species abundance (see Chapter 2 for regional
sampling index periods). Vegetation data collection in each Assessment Area (AA) is
typically completed in one day. Collection and pressing of plant specimens is also usually
conducted during the sampling day for each AA. Other activities such as plant specimen
tracking, keying and identification of unknown species, drying plant specimens, and
shipping specimens to appropriate herbaria may be initiated during the field sampling day,
but will often be continued and completed as non-field day (Section 5.2 Sample Handling
and Processing) or laboratory activities (USEPA 2011 a).
The Vegetation Protocols are outlined in the flowchart in Reference Card V-1 (next page)
and summarized in other Reference Cards and the Vegetation Protocol Checklist.
Reference Cards illustrate major protocol steps for Vegetation sampling. They are
gathered together in Section 5.4 for easy access, but are also presented near the text for
the applicable protocol. The Vegetation Equipment List, example Data Forms, and Plant
Sample Tags and Labels are in Section 5.5. It will be useful to consult these materials
when reading the protocols.
5-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Reference Card V-1. Flowchart of Vegetation Protocol Tasks
Collecting Vegetation Data in the AA
Select Veg Plot Layout configuration appropriate
for the AA (Reference Card V-2).
Establish five 100-m (lOXlOm) Veg Plots at the
locations designated for the selected Veg Plot Layout
(Reference Cards V-2 and V-3, Side A; Form V-1).
Once all five Veg Plots are established, collect the
following data for each Veg Plot.
1. Plant species presence in nested 1-m2 and 10-m2
quadrats in the SW and NE corners of the 100-m2 Veg
Plot, and across the 100-m2 Veg Plot (Reference Card V-
3, Side B; Forms V-2a, b).
X N
2. Percent cover estimates for all individual
3. Predominant Status STrends Wetland Class
for the 100-m2 Veg Plot (Form V-3 (Front)).
vascular plant species across the entire 100-m
Veg Plot and identification of the primary height
class in which each species occurs (Reference
Cards V-3, Side B and V-4; Forms V-2a, b).
J
4. Percent cover estimates across the 100-m Veg Plot
for Vascular Vegetation Strata: a) submerged aquatic
vegetation, b) floating aquatic vegetation, c), lianas,
vines and epiphytes, d) all other vascular vegetation
by height class (Form V-3 (Front)).
5. Percent cover estimates across the 100-m Veg
Plot for non-vascular groups (ground bryophytes,
ground lichens, arboreal bryophytes and lichens,
filamentous or mat forming algae, and
macroalgae) (Form V-3 (Front)).
6. Data describing ground surface
attributes across the 100-m2 Veg
Plot (Form V-3 (Back)).
7. Across the 100-m Veg Plot (Forms V-4a, b):
• Percent cover estimates of live tree species by height class.
• Counts of live trees by species and diameter class.
• Counts of standing dead trees and snags by diameter class.
Plant Specimen Collection, Processing, and Shipping
Collect specimens for all unknown
plant species.
Randomly select and collect five known plant
species for each AA for Quality Assurance check.
Complete Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen Label for each plant sample; then press specimen.
Record number of plant samples collected at the site on Form T-l: Site and Sample Status/WRS
Tracking.
Dry specimens; then ship or deliver to designated herbarium or laboratory, enclosing the appropriate
plant specimen tracking information (Form T-2 or T-3) in the shipping box.
5-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES
Vegetation is characterized by collecting data describing vegetation structure, and
individual plant species presence and percent cover in five 100-m2 Vegetation (Veg) Plots
that are placed systematically in the AA. In addition, cover of various biotic and abiotic
surface materials are collected in each Veg Plot. Detailed protocols for collecting each
kind of data and instructions for filling out data forms are found in this section (5.1).
Protocols for plant specimen collection and processing are in Section 5.2.
Prior to beginning field work for the day, compile data forms and organize the equipment
needed for vegetation data collection activities (See Chapter 2). The vegetation
equipment checklist, examples of data forms, plant specimen labels, plant sample tags,
and tracking forms are provided in Section 5.5. Forms and labels with preprinted NWCA
site numbers will be provided for each site prior to sampling.
5.1.1 Placement of the Vegetation Plots
The Veg Team identifies locations for the five 100-m2 Veg Plots within the AA using
guidelines for plot placement provided in this Section and summarized on Reference
Card V-2, Sides A and B.
Begin by identifying the appropriate Veg Plot Layout configuration for the AA being
sampled using the key below.
Key for Selecting Veg Plot Layout Configuration within the Assessment Area (AA)
1a AAtype, any; no obstacles to Veg Plot placement 2
2a AA is a 1/4-ha circle Standard Veg Plot Layout - Circular AA (Veg Plots on Two Axes)
Section 5.1.1.2; Reference Card V-2, Plate 1
2b AA is not a circle or is < 1/4ha Alternate Veg Plot Layouts go to 3
3a AA is a 1/4-ha polygon 4
4a AA width and length > 30m Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Veg Plots on Two Axes)
Section 5.1.1.3; Reference Card V-2, Plate 2
4b AA is < 30m wide Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Veg Plots on One Axis)
Section 5.1.1.4; Reference Card V-2, Plate 3
3b AA < 1/2 ha, but > 0.1 ha; a polygon equaling wetland boundary
Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout (Veg Plots Distributed)
Section 5.1.1.5; Reference Card V-2, Plate 4
1b AAtype, any; obstacles (deep water; wide, deep channels; cliffs; other physical barriers; etc.) to Veg
Plot placement Obstacle Veg Plot Layout (Veg Plots Distributed)
Section 5.1.1.6; Reference Card V-2, Plate 5
Note that all Veg Plot Layout configurations are designed to provide an unbiased
characterization of the vegetation of the AA surrounding the POINT in a manner that can
consistently be applied by numerous field crews across the country.
5-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
• Locations of the Vegetation (Veg) Plots within circular 0.5-ha Standard AAs are
systematically determined using the Standard Veg Plot Layout.
• Veg Plot locations for Alternate AA Layouts are identified using the Veg Plot Layout
key above to select the appropriate Alternate Veg Plot Layout configurations.
Alternate Veg Plot Layouts are used only when the Standard Veg Layout will not fit
into the AA.
• The Obstacle Veg Plot Layout is applied only when there are obstacles preventing the
placement of a Veg Plot in its designated location within any particular Veg Plot Layout
type.
5.1.1.1 Key Concepts for All Veg Plot Layout Configurations
Wetlands can be fragile ecosystems. Minimize foot traffic to limit crushing vegetation and
compacting soils and to avoid trampling the AA prior to sampling.
• Before beginning Veg Plot establishment, make a plan for limiting the number of
traverses across the AA as work is conducted.
• The AA CENTER is a focal location for Veg Plot Layout so some trampling at the
CENTER is unavoidable; however, limit the disturbance radius as much as possible.
• In most AAs, Veg Plots are placed at specified distances along plot placement lines
extending outward from the CENTER of the AA (see illustrations on Reference Card
V-2). These plot placement lines are represented by imaginary lines extending from
the CENTER of the AA outward.
• The plot placement lines will receive considerable foot traffic during Veg Plot set-up
and sampling. Veg Plots are typically placed immediately to the left side of plot
placement lines (when facing the AA boundary from the CENTER) to avoid walking in
the Veg Plots prior to sampling.
5.1.1.2 Standard Veg Plot Layout- Veg Plots on Two Axes in a %-ha Circular AA
In the Standard AA five 100-m2 Veg Plots are distributed as depicted in the Standard Veg
Plot Layout (see Reference Card V-2, Plate 1). Position Veg Plots along the four cardinal
(north, east, south, west) directions from the CENTER of the AA. Number the Veg Plots in
clockwise order from Veg Plot 1 near the AA CENTER to Veg Plot 5 along the eastern plot
placement line.
• To avoid the trampled area at the AA CENTER, place Veg Plot 1 approximately 2m
from the AA CENTER as indicated in Reference Card V-2, Plate 1.
• Place Veg Plot 2 to the east side (e.g., to the left when facing outward from the AA
CENTER) of the south plot placement line with its northern edge 10m from the
southern edge of Veg Plot 1.
5-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
• Place Veg Plot 3 to the south side of the west plot placement line 15m from the AA
CENTER.
• Place Veg Plot 4 to the west side of the north plot placement line 15m from the AA
CENTER.
• Place Veg Plot 5 to the north side of the east plot placement line 20m from the AA
CENTER.
5.1.1.3 Wide Polygon A A Veg Plot Layout- Veg Plots on Two Axes in 1A-ha Polygon
AA with Width and Length > 30m
If the wetland in which the POINT occurs is greater than or equal to 0.5ha, but has
dimensions < 80m in at least one direction, the AA will be configured as a polygon. Recall
that the Polygon AA may be a rectangle, may have more than four sides, or may have
sinuous edges paralleling the wetland boundary depending on conditions at the study site
(see Chapter 3).
If the Polygon AA is greater than 30m in width and length, use the Wide Polygon AA Veg
Plot Layout to determine Veg Plot locations (see Reference Card V-2, Plate 2) along plot
placement lines that are oriented on the compass bearings of the long and short axes of
the AA and intersecting the AA CENTER.
Polygon AA > 40m wide (see Reference Card V-2, Plate 2 - Example A) -
• Place the Veg Plots in a configuration matching as closely as possible the Standard
Veg Plot Layout, while distributing plots evenly along plot placement lines. Note
distances from the AA CENTER to each Veg Plot may have to be lengthened or
contracted compared to the Standard Veg Plot Layout based on the distance from the
AA CENTER to its edge.
• Locate each Veg Plot to the left side of the plot placement line when looking from the
AA center to the AA edge. Number Veg Plots in clockwise order with Veg Plot 1
nearest the AA center.
Polygon AA < 40m, but > 30m wide (see Reference Card V-2, Plate 2 - Example B) -
• Place one Veg Plot along one of the plot placement lines making up the short axis of
the AA so that the plot is mid-way between the CENTER and the AA boundary.
Locate the Veg Plot on the left side of the plot placement line, when looking from the
AA CENTER to its edge.
• Evenly distribute the other four Veg Plots along the long axis of the AA, placing plots to
left side of the plot placement lines when looking from the AA CENTER to its edge.
• Number Veg Plots consecutively from one end of the long axis of the AA to the other.
5-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Reference Card V-2, Side A. Key for Veg Plot Placement and Examples of Plot Layout Configurations.
Examples of Additional Layout Configurations on Side B. Note scales vary among example diagrams.
Key for Selecting Veg Plot Layout Configuration within the Assessment Area (AA)
la AA type, any; no obstacles to Veg Plot placement
2a AA is 1/2-ha circle Standard Veg Plot Layout - Circular AA (Plate 1)
2b AA is not a circle or is< Yi ha Alternate Veg Plot Layouts go to 3
3a AA is a Yi ha polygon 4
4a AA has width and length > 30m Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Plate 2)
4b AAis < 30m wide Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Plate 3)
3b AA < Yi ha, but>0.1ha; a polygon equaling wetland boundary Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout (Plate 4)
Ib AA type, any; obstacles (deep water; wide, deep channels; cliffs, other physical barriers, etc.) to Veg Plot placement
Obstacle Veg Plot Layout (Plate 5)
LE] AA Center
Plot placement line
O
C?
AA boundaries
Shallow water
Deep water (not sampleable)
Patterns = Community types
Plate 1. Standard Veg Plot Layout -
Circular AA ("H> hectare)
40m
Place Veg Plots at specified locations on plot placement
lines oriented through the AA CENTER on cardinal
directions. Veg Plot 1 is placed 2m from the CENTER.
Plate 2. Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout -AA=1A hectare polygon, width
and length > 30m.
Example A
Example B
40m
82m
Place Veg Plots along plot placement lines originating from CENTER
and defined by long and short axes of AA.
Example A - Wide Polygon AAs with width > 40 m: Place Veg Plots in a
configuration matching the Standard Veg Plot Layout as closely as possible,
while distributing Veg Plots relatively evenly along plot placement lines.
Example B - Wide Polygon AAs with width 30 to 40 m: Place 1 Veg Plot
mid-way between the CENTER and AA boundary along only one placement
line of the short axis, and 4 Veg Plots at uniform distances along long axis.
5-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Reference Card V-2, Side B. Plot Layout Configuration continued
Plate 3. Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout - AA is a 1A-ha polygon < 30 wide
Example A:
165m
For Polygon AAs 25 to 30m
wide, alternate Veg plots
along one plot placement
line oriented on the long
axis of the AA.
Example B
For Polygon AAs 20
to 25m wide, center
Veg plots along one
plot placement line
oriented on the long
axis of the AA.
Plate 4. Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout-AA (0.1ha to <
0.5ha) = wetland boundary
Example A: AA = 0.14ha
Example B: AA = 0.20ha
Example C: AA = 0.22ha
Distribute the 5 Veg Plots using the most
efficient arrangement to fit them in and
cover the AA. Where possible arrange
Veg Plots to conform with Standard or
Polygon Layout configurations.
Orient Veg Plots on cardinal directions
when possible, but if space is limiting
orient individual Veg Plots to bearings
allowing them to fit in the AA.
Plate 5. Obstacle Veg Plot Layout - AA any type
Obstacles prohibit placement of Veg Plots at designated
locations for the appropriate Veg Layout configuration.
Distribute Veg Plots as closely as possible to locations
designated in the Veg Layout Configuration appropriate to AA
type, while avoiding obstacles and aiming for at least 10m
between Veg Plots.
40m
Example A: Standard Circular AA = O.Sha
60m
Example B: Wetland Boundary AA = 0.4ha
5-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.1.1.4 Narrow Polygon A A Veg Plot Layout - Veg Plots on One Axis in 1A-ha
Polygon AA < 30m wide
The Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Reference Card V-2, Plate 3) is used for 1/4-
ha Polygon AAs that are < 30m wide. AAs of this type might occur in long narrow
riparian areas bordering small streams or along lake or pond shorelines. AAs < 20m
wide are not sampleable (Chapter 3).
All Polygon AAs < 30m wide
• The plot placement line is oriented on the long axis of the AA and passes through the
AA CENTER. The plot placement line may be:
o A straight line, as in the case of a narrow rectangle (see Reference Card V-2,
Plate 3 - Example A).
o A sinuous line that parallels the shape of an AA with its width defined by a
wetland edge (see Reference Card V-2, Plate 3 - Example B).
• Evenly distribute Veg Plots along the plot placement line and number them in
sequence along the long axis of the AA.
Polygon AA width 25 to 30m
• Place Veg Plots alternately on opposite sides of the plot placement line (see
Reference Card V-2, Plate 3 - Example A).
Polygon AA width > 20 up to 25m -
• Center Veg Plots on the plot placement line (see Reference Card V-2, Plate 3 -
Example B). Take care to avoid trampling in the middle of the plots while moving
around the AA.
5.1.1.5 Wetland Boundary A A Veg Plot Layout-Veg Plots Distributed Across a
Wetland Boundary A A (< 0.5ha but > 0.1 ha)
When the wetland in which the POINT occurs is smaller than 0.5ha but greater than or
equal to 0.1 ha, the AA equals the wetland boundary. Wetlands that are smaller than
0.1 ha or less than 20m wide are not sampleable (Chapter 3).
Use the Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout (Reference Card V-2, Plate 4) to
distribute Veg Plots over small (< 1/4ha) Wetland Boundary AAs.
• Distribute the 5 Veg Plots using the most efficient arrangement to fit them within the
AA and evenly cover the AA area.
• Wherever feasible, arrange Veg Plots so they mirror as closely as possible the plot
placement patterns used in the Standard or Polygon Veg Plot Layout configurations.
• When possible, orient individual Veg Plots on cardinal directions or along the
bearings for long and short axis of the AA. However, if the configuration of the AA
prevents this, orient individual Veg Plots along bearings that allow them to fit in the
AA.
5-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.1.1.6 Obstacle Veg Plot Layout - Veg Plots distributed around obstacles in any
AA type
Occasionally a Veg Plot cannot be placed at its designated location for a particular Veg
Plot Layout configuration because of the presence of an obstacle creating unsafe or
unsampleable conditions. In such situations, use the Obstacle Veg Plot Layout (see
Reference Card V-2, Plate 5) to select a new location for the plot. The Obstacle Veg
Plot Layout can be applied to any AA type; however, Veg Plots should be relocated only
when absolutely necessary, and should be done in a way that aims for at least 10m
between plots.
If a Veg Plot cannot be sampled because more than 10% of the space in which it would
fall is obstructed by unsafe or unsampleable conditions, then the plot may be moved. If
a Veg Plot is relocated, position it as closely to the original location designated by the AA
appropriate Veg Plot Layout as possible.
An individual Veg Plot may be moved to an alternate location to:
• Avoid areas of deep (> 1m) water, water < 1m deep but underlain by soft sediments
posing safety hazards, water < 1m deep but moving rapidly enough to pose safety
hazards, or water likely to have widely varying depths during the sample period such
as wide, deep tide channels.
• Avoid large patches of upland in the AA. However, the plot should not be moved
when there are microtopographic upland inclusions (e.g., hummocks or mounds).
• Avoid other obstacles such as very large boulders (e.g., glacial erratics), cliffs, or
other physical barriers that would occupy a large portion of the Veg Plot.
5.1.2 Establishing the Vegetation Plots
Establish the Veg Plots in the AA as closely as possible to their designated locations in
the selected Veg Plot Layout configuration (Section 5.1.1, Reference Card V-2). Lay
out all five 100-m2 Veg Plots before vegetation sampling begins so the Assessment
Area-Buffer (AB) Team can find soil pit locations and avoid trampling the Veg Plots as
they work. To set up the Veg Plots for an AA:
1) Double check header information on the front and back of Form V-1: Vegetation
Plot Establishment to ensure the preprinted site number matches the site being
sampled and fill in the sampling date.
2) Document which Veg Plot Layout configuration is used for sampling the AA by filling
in the appropriate bubble in the Vegetation Plot Layout section of Form V-1.
3) Establish Veg plots in whatever order is most convenient and causes the least
disturbance to the AA. Take care to avoid walking in the interior of a plot.
4) Number Veg Plots, 1 through 5, using conventions on Reference Card V-2. Place a
flag with the Veg Plot number in the SE corner of the four plots furthest from the
CENTER to facilitate Soil Pit placement by the AB Team.
5-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5) Complete the Plot Locations in Relation to the AA CENTER section of Form V-1.
Measure (e.g., using a meter tape or rangefinder) or if necessary (due to dense
vegetation) estimate (e.g., by pacing) the distance of each Veg Plot from the AA
CENTER along the pertinent plot placement line. Record this distance in the
Estimated Distance field, and record the bearing from the AA Center along the plot
placement line to the closest corner of the Veg Plot in the Bearing field of the form.
6) Set-up each Veg Plot as illustrated and described on Reference Card V-3, Side A.
Note, a variety of approaches may be used to demarcate the edges of the Veg Plot:
• Often the easiest method is to use four 10-m lengths of durable (e.g., nylon) rope
or cord on which the 5-m point is marked with brightly colored, waterproof tape.
This method offers high flexibility for use in open to dense vegetation types and
the rope is compact and lightweight for carrying into the field.
• Only one set of four 10-m ropes or cords need be carried in the field. Use the four
ropes to measure the boundaries of each plot and then clearly mark boundaries
with flagging. If desired, for sites near a road and with open vegetation, five sets
of the four 10-m cord lengths can be carried in the field so the rope can be left in
place at Veg Plot to clearly demarcate its edges during sampling.
• Other alternatives that some field crews prefer are using two 20-m lengths of rope
or one 40-m length with the 5 and 10-m points marked, or a 50-m tape. Note that
ropes are more durable and easier to handle than a meter tape.
7) If an obstacle to Veg Plot placement occurs and one or more Veg Plots must be
moved from their normally designated locations in the selected Veg Plot Layout
configuration, also fill in the Obstacle Veg Plot Layout bubble on Form V-1.
• For example, in the situation where a Standard Veg Plot Layout is used and an
obstacle necessitates moving a Veg Plot, fill the bubbles for both Standard Veg
Plot Layout and the Obstacle Veg Plot Layout.
• Provide an explanation in the Notes section on the back of Form V-1 and
highlight the obstacle on the sketch map on the back of Form AA-1 or on the
aerial photo used to document AA establishment.
8) Once all Veg Plots are established:
• Draw the plot placement lines and Veg Plot locations on the aerial photo
(examples: Figures 5-1 and 5-2) annotated during AA establishment (Chapter 3).
A Sharpie® (or similar) fine-point, permanent, silver marker works well for
annotating the photo. If an aerial photo is unavailable or if too little space is
available on the photo, draw Veg Plot locations on a sketch map on Form AA-1.
• Note any environmental gradients (e.g., slope, water depth) in the Notes section
(Form V-1, Back) and the gradient direction on the sketch map or aerial photo.
9) Once the AB Team has designated the Soil Pit names (A, B, C, D) and flagged their
locations, record and label the pit positions on the aerial photo or sketch map.
5-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Reference Card V-3. Side A - Vegetation Plot Establishment
MW ^k /^ ^k
r ^NE
<
100-m2Plot
A
N
>
sw A /\ A
W V ^ SE
10m
Dursbls ^ord or Pops with msrks 3t 5 m lntsr'3ls'
Corner Flagging: A Mid-Point Edge Flagging:/\
Setting up the Veg Plot
• On Form V-1 , record the Veg Plot location in relation to the AA
center in the Estimated Distance field. In the Bearing field record the
bearing from the AA Center along the plot placement line to the
closest corner the Veg Plot.
• Use a compass and measuring device to delineate the outside
edges of each Veg Plot. A convenient way to do this is with four 1 0-
m lengths of durable (e.g., nylon) rope or cord on which the 5-m
interval is marked with brightly colored waterproof tape.
• If leaving the ropes in
place to bound the Veg Plot, pin them using
U-shaped pins, tent stakes, or surveyor's arrows (also called
chaining pins).
• When stretching tapes or lines along a compass bearing, there will
occasionally be some drift related to obstacles and slope. Some drift
is acceptable, but try to keep the Veg Plot relatively square and
constant in area. The following steps can help align the square when
laying out the sides of the plot :
1) Mark out one 10-m edge.
2) Mark out one perpendicular edge, 90 degrees from the first.
3) Return to first edge and mark opposing perpendicular edge.
4) Check square by laying fourth rope between the far ends of the
perpendicular edges.
~
OJ
_c
O3
5
Mark this line last
§
3!
_c
j£
O3
^
Mark this line first
Mark corners and mid-points of each side of the plot with different
colored flagging or pin flags, e.g., fluorescent pink or red for
corners, blue for mid-points of the plot edges.
• If removing the rope lines (e.g., only one set of ropes is available for
measuring all plots), use additional flagging as needed to ensure
Veg Plot boundaries are easily visible during sampling, particularly
where vegetation is dense with shrubs or trees.
5-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
KEY
1
& POINT
fa AA CENTER
Wetland
Standard
t circular
AA boundary
Standard Buffer
Evaluation
boundary
Figure 5-1. Aerial photo from the site packet illustrating a Standard AA Layout
annotated to show Veg Plot (white squares) locations and plot placement lines
(dashed white arrows) for a Standard Veg Plot Layout.
5-14
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
KEY:
ft POINT
ft AA CENTER
Wetland
boundary
Standard
Circular AA
boundary
Approximate
Polygon AA
boundary
Figure 5-2. Aerial photo from the site packet annotated to show Veg Plots (white
squares) locations and plot placement lines (dashed white arrows) for a Wide
Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout. Note the boundary of the Standard AA Layout (red)
and the actual Polygon AA (blue).
5.1.3 Vegetation Data Collection
Several kinds of data (e.g., presence, percent cover, or counts) describing vegetation (for
individual vascular species, vascular vegetation strata, non-vascular groups, and
predominant Status &Trends wetland class) and data describing ground surface attributes
are collected over the 100-m2 area of each Veg Plot (Forms V-2 through V-4). Additional
presence data by plant species are collected in nested quadrats located at the SW and NE
most corners of each Veg Plot and established in each Veg Plot as it is sampled.
Reference Cards V-3, Side B and V-4 illustrate the configuration of the 100-m2 Veg Plot
and its nested quadrats and summarize vegetation data collection activities.
5-15
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
Often an efficient approach to collecting vegetation data is for the Botanist Assistant to
record data as the Botanist/Ecologist makes observations.
At other times, it will be more efficient for the Botanist/Ecologist and Botanist Assistant to
collect different kinds of data. For example:
• Botanist/Ecologist collects all data that require identification or cover estimation of
individual plant species.
• Botanist Assistant collects data on cover of vegetation strata, ground surface
attributes, groups of non-vascular taxa, and count data for trees and snags.
5.1.3.1 Activities Key to Vegetation Data Collection
Several kinds of data are recorded, sampling activities conducted, and resources are
consulted throughout the sampling day, which are essential to data quality.
Site Number, Date, and Page Numbers - Note that in most cases the Site Number is
preprinted on the forms (e.g., see Figure 5-3a-c), plant sample tags and plant specimen
labels, so ensure that you use the correct set of forms, tags, and labels for the site being
sampled. Be sure to record the date sampling is initiated wherever it is requested. If
using forms or labels without preprinted site numbers, be sure to fill in the correct site
number. If this information is incorrect or omitted, it may be impossible to connect data or
plant specimens to a particular site, resulting in data loss. For forms that have multiple
pages (Forms V-2 and V-4) be sure to fill in the page number for each page and the total
number of pages (Figure 5-3a-c). Note the back of Form V-2a is unnumbered.
Form Instructions and Using Capital Letters - Carefully follow all instructions on each
data form. Use capital letters to neatly record species names on forms (see Figure 5-3a).
Confirmation Bubbles (appear near top of some data forms) - Several forms have
bubbles to fill to confirm aspects of how data are recorded. Read these statements
carefully and fill in the bubbles as requested to confirm what empty data fields or unfilled
data bubbles on a particular form mean. For example:
• On forms where cover data or counts (Forms V-2, V-3, and V-4) are recorded, one
kind of confirmation bubble indicates that empty data cells equal zero.
• On forms where presence/absence data or categorical data (Forms V-2 and V-3) are
recorded, one kind of confirmation bubble indicates that filled bubbles denote presence
and unfilled bubbles denote absence.
Data Flags and Comments - There is space on all Forms V-2, V-3, and V-4 to flag data
for which additional information or explanation may be needed.
• Standard flag types are predefined at the bottom of each form (e.g., E = end of
species list, K = no measurement, U = suspect measurement). For predefined flags,
write the code for the flag in the Flag column in the appropriate data row. If necessary
provide more information about the reason for the flag in the Flag and Comments
section at the bottom or on the back side of each data form.
• Additional flag codes may need to be created to describe other situations. For each
unique situation, create a flag code (e.g., F1, F2, F3...) and define the code in the Flag
5-16
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
and Comments section on the form. Flag codes are numbered consecutively,
beginning with F1, on each set of V-2, V-3, or V-4 forms for the site.
• Examples of how to use vegetation data flags are illustrated in Figure 5-3a-c, which
depicts imaginary data for pages of a set of Form V-2 for one AA. V-2 Forms are
used for illustration because they are the most complex of the vegetation forms. One
set of Form V-2: Vascular Species Presence and Cover pages is used to record
data for vascular species presence, height, and cover for each AA.
o Form V-2a includes data collection instructions and several rows for recording plant
species data on the front, and provides space on the back for defining flags that
might be associated with data on front of the form, as well as overflow space, if
needed, for defining flags from the continuing Form V-2b pages. Form V2-b
provides space for both species data and defining flags associated with the data.
o In Figure 5-3a, two species, Corydalis aquae-gelidae and Kalmiopsis fragrans,
recorded on Form V-2a (front) are flagged (F1 and F2, respectively) to indicate
there is additional information regarding these taxa. These flags are defined on the
back of Form V-2a (Figure 5-3b). The explanation for the F2 flag for Kalmiopsis
fragrans occupies two lines, so the flag code (F2) is repeated on both lines.
o Note that flags defined on the Form V-2a (back) may refer to species data on Form
V-2a (front), page 1 of the V-2 set, or to flags from various pages of Form V-2b
(continued). Consequently, flags on Form V-2a (back) should include, in the
comment field, the page number (e.g., P1, P4 as illustrated in Figure 5-3b) to which
the flag code refers. However, typically there should be enough room for most
needed data flags at the bottom of each Form V-2b page (Figure 5-3c).
Nomenclatural Sources Use the nomenclature in the USDA PLANTS database (USDA,
NRCS 2010, http://plants.usda.gov/), hereafter PLANTS, when recording plant species
names on Forms V-2: Vascular Species Presence and Cover and V-4: Snag and Tree
Counts and Tree Cover. It is important to use the PLANTS nomenclature at each site so
species names are based on a common taxonomic standard across all NWCA sites.
In the Plant Species Nomenclature section of Form V-1:
1) Confirm that you have reconciled the names for the plant species observed at the site
to PLANTS nomenclature by filling in the USDA-PLANTS bubble.
2) Record the citations for the flora(s), field guides, or databases you used in identifying
plant species at the site. Include author(s), publication date, title, and publisher. If the
reference you are using is listed in the Regional Floras and Botanical Field Guides
section of Appendix C (Supplementary Vegetation Material), you need only record the
author(s) and publication date for the floristic source.
3) Occasionally a species might occur for which there is no name or synonym in
PLANTS; e.g., a recently described species or an occurrence of a newly introduced
species. For a species with no synonym in PLANTS do one of the following:
a) Flag the data recorded for this species on Form V-2 or V-4 and record the
botanical authority for the species (e.g., Figure 5-3a, b, Kalmia fragrans Meinke &
Kaye, sp. nov., (Meinke and Kaye 2007)).
5-17
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
b) Make a note next to the citation on Form V-1 for the flora, field guide, or database
used to identify the species. Include a flag next to where the species is listed on
Form V-2 or V-4, (e.g., F1 - species name is from source #1 listed on Form V-1).
Regional or Site Specific Species Lists - When identifying plant species, it can be
helpful to consult existing plant species lists for similar habitats in the region of the AA you
are sampling. If such lists are available, include them in the Site Packet for the AA (see
Chapter 2) or carry them in the vehicle with your other floristic resources.
Other Floristic Resources -A range of useful floristic resources are listed in Appendix C.
Tree and Shrub Species Identification - The Botanist Assistant may often collect tree
cover and count data in each Veg Plot (Section 5.1.3.9), so it will be useful to keep a list of
the scientific names or pseudonyms for tree species observed in the Veg Plots on his or
her clipboard. If needed, the Botanist/Ecologist can convey key distinguishing
characteristics for tree species to the Botanist Assistant.
Plant Specimen Collection -Specimens of all unknown plant species and a voucher
specimen for one randomly selected species of known identity occurring in each Veg Plot
is collected for later identification or taxonomic verification. Unknown plant specimens are
typically collected over the entire sampling day as they are encountered. One randomly
selected species of known identity is collected from each Veg Plot (i.e., 5 specimens/AA)
for quality assurance checks. Section 5.2 details plant specimen collection and handling
procedures. An overview is outlined here:
1) For each species that needs to be collected, fill in the appropriate bubble to designate
the sample as an unknown species or as a QA sample (see Section 5.2) under the
Complete if Collecting section of Form V-2: Vascular Species Presence and Cover
(Figure 5-3a, c). Once the plant sample is collected, assign it a collection number and
record in the Collect # field of Form V-2. Collection numbers are assigned beginning
with 1 and continued consecutively in order of observation or collection.
2) For each species collected, place enough fresh plant material for a complete specimen
(see Section 5.2) into a plastic bag (e.g., 1 gallon zipper-lock or larger bag, if
necessary). Write the Site Number and the Collection Number for the specimen on the
outside of the bag with a water proof marker or on a slip of water proof paper placed
inside the bag. Bagging plants individually can help keep plant parts together and
prevent mixing different species.
However, if it is easier, multiple species can be placed into larger bags. If more than
one specimen is included in a single bag, be sure they can be easily distinguished
from one another and related to their collection numbers from Form V-2. For
example, tag individual species by bundling plant material by the stems with masking
tape or a strip of flagging and labeling with the collection number.
3) Keep specimen collection bags out of the sun and cool during the sampling day.
4) Press plant specimens as soon as possible. When specimens are pressed (usually at
the end of the sampling day, Sections 5.1.4 and 5.2.2) a completed Plant Specimen
Label is included with each specimen inside its newsprint folder, and an adhesive
Plant Sample ID Tag affixed to the outside of the newsprint (Section 5.2.3).
5-18
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
Sensitive Plant Species - Avoid collecting plant species that are listed as
THREATENED, ENDANGERED, or SENSTIVE (TES), or are easily destroyed if collected
(e.g., many orchid species). Become familiar with national and state TES species lists
relevant to the state in which you are working and with wetland TES species in particular.
Photograph TES species using the guidance in Appendix D: Photography. Add a flag to
the data recorded for this species on Form V-2 or V-4 (e.g., F1 - Threatened in Oregon,
photo taken; see example on Figure 5-3a,b).
5.1.3.2 Collecting Vascular Plant Species Presence Data and Creating Species List
One set of Forms V-2: Vascular Species Presence and Cover (V-2a (Front) V-2a
(Back), and V-2b (Continued)) is used to record data for vascular species presence (this
section), height, and cover for each AA (Sections 5.1.3.3 - 5.1.3.4). On these forms, a
row represents data for an individual plant species; columns represent data elements for
each Veg Plot. Several V2-b pages may be required for each AA depending on how many
species are present.
Species presence data are collected from nested quadrats located in the SW and NE most
corners of each 100-m2 Veg Plot (Reference Card V-3, Side B). Presence data are
collected first to begin building the species list for the Veg Plot and to prevent trampling of
the quadrats before the presence data is obtained.
Collect species presence data in both the 1-m2 and 10-m2 quadrats of one nest, then
move to the other corner nest and repeat the procedure using the steps below.
1) Establish Quadrat Nests - Each nest is comprised of a 1-m2 and a 10-m2 quadrat
and can be set-up in a variety of ways. For example:
• Outside edges of the 1-m2 and 10-m2 quadrats are formed by the edges of the 100-
m2 Veg Plot demarcated by during plot establishment.
• Interior sides of the 1-m2 quadrat may be defined using (a) two 1m PVC poles, (b)
two 1m long wooden slats, or (c) a 2m length of rope with the mid-point marked.
• The interiors of the 10-m2 quadrat can be set-up using (a) two 3.16m segmented
PVC poles, or (b) a 6.32m length of rope with the mid-point marked.
• Any of the items used for the inside quadrat edges can be placed on the ground in
open or herbaceous vegetation, or threaded through or over the top of shrubby
vegetation. If obstacles prevent leaving these materials in place, measure the
distance to the quadrat corners and mark quadrat edges with flagging.
2) Create the Plant Species List - As each species is observed during sampling (See 4,
below), enter its name in the Species Name or Pseudonym column on Form V-2
(Figure 5-3).
• Initiate a species list for Form V-2 by recording the names of all species
encountered in the first nested corner sampled.
• If the species identity is known, record the/w// binary genus and species name.
• If the species identity is unknown, give it a descriptive pseudonym (See 3, next).
5-19
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
• Continue adding species to Form V-2 as they are encountered during collection of
species presence in the second nested corner.
• Once both corner nests have been searched, examine the entire 100-m2 Veg Plot
for additional species. Add these species to Form V-2.
3) Assign Pseudonyms for Unknown Plant Species (Reference Card V-4, Side B) -
The Botanist/Ecologist makes pseudonym assignments for unknown plant species
using the following rules:
• If the genus name is known, but the species name is not, then a number and short
description of identifying characteristics is substituted for the species epithet (e.g.,
Carex 1 - winged stem, Carex 2 - tussock, Carex 3 - bidentate perigynia, Carex 4
- striped scale, Sa//x 1 - acuminate leaf, Sa//x 2 - hairy under-leaf). Numbers
indicate how many unknowns occur in a single genus and should be included even
if there is only one unknown species in the genus.
• Where neither genus nor species names are known, devise a descriptive name
reflecting growth habit, microhabitat, or some distinctive morphological feature
(e.g., bunchgrass 1, pinnate-lf. aquatic herb, low shrub linear If.).
• It is often useful to carry examples of unknown plants, in small individual 'tagged
bouquets', to keep pseudonyms straight; particularly when there are several
unknown species in a single genus.
4) Collect Species Presence Data - For the NWCA, a plant \spresent if it is rooted in or
overhangs the sample unit (quadrat or Veg Plot). Make sure to look up when working
in nested corners, as species overhanging the plot may be above your head.
• Presence for a given species in smaller sample units implicitly includes its
presence in larger sample units (e.g., if a species is present in the 1-m2 quadrat it is
also present in the10-m2quadrat and the100-m2 Veg Plot).
• For each species encountered in either the SW or NE quadrat nest of a plot, record
the smallest quadrat size (S = 1-m2 or M = 10-m2) in which a plant species is
observed by filling in the appropriate data bubble (S or M) in the field for the SI/I/or
NE nest on Form V-2 (Figure 5-3a, c).
• If a species does not occur in a particular nest, but occurs in the 100-m2 Veg Plot,
fill the L (large plot = 100-m2) bubble for that nest (Figure 5-3a, c).
5) Correcting Plant Species Names on Forms During Data Collection - It is likely that
(a) some taxa not initially recognized will later be identified, or (b) a species initially
misidentified, will be later corrected. To make updates or corrections to names
recorded on Form V-2 (or Form V-4) use a single line to strike out the pseudonym or
erroneous name, then write the correct name above the lined-out name (Figure 5-3a).
If there is not enough room to fit the correction in the species name field, add a flag to
the species row and record the corrected name in the Flag and Comments section of
the form (e.g., see Figure 5-3b, c).
5-20
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
1 FORM V-2a: NWCA VASCULAR SPECIES PRESENCE AND COVER (Front)
Site ID: NWCA11- 9999 Date: o ': 1 r> g> 1 2 0 1 1
Page 1
|
1
Instructions:
1. General: Print using ALL CAPITAL LETTERS. Write 35 neatly 35 possible, keeping all marks within data fields or workspace areas.
2. Species Name: List binomial name or pseudonym for each plant species observed in the Veg Plots (See the NWCA FOM for Pseudonym assignment ru es).
3. Presence Data: For each species occurring in a quadrat nest (SW or NE corners of Veg Plot), record the smallest quadrat/plot s ze n which it occurs by filling in the appropriate bubble {S (small) = 1-ni' quadrat,
M {medium) = 10-m' quadrat.) If a species does not occur fn a particu ar nest, but occurs In the 10Q-mZ Veg Plot, fill in the L (large) bubble for that nest.
4. Predominant Height Class: For each species observed, note its predominant height across each 100-m2 Veg Plot by recording the appropriate he ght class code (defined belowj.
5. Cover Data: Estimate cover across each 100-m7 Veg Plot (0 to 100%; See NWCA-FOM) for each species observed and record in the Cover data field. If necessary, use the gray worksp3ce to make preliminary cover
estimates for each species in each of the lour quarters of the Veg Plot, and then combine preliminary estimates to obtain total cover for the spec es in the Veg Plot and record in the Cover data field.
6. Collect Specimens and Assign Collection Numbers: For each Unknown Species (U) or designated Quality Assurance (QA) specimen collected fill in the appropriate bubble in the Complete if Collecting column. Once
collected, assign collection numbers, beginning with 1, consecutively in order of observation or collection.
O Fill bubble to confirm empty data fields for a species in a particular plot mean 1 } for presence or height class, species not present, or 2) for %Cover fields, cover = Ozcro.
Complete
if
Collecting
U
QA
O
©
©
©
©
o
©
0
©
0
©
©
©
©
©
©
Coll
ft
1
; j
2
3
Height Classes (except E, which may occur in any vertical stratum):
1 = 0.5-2m, 3 = >2-5m, 4= »5-15m, 5 = >15-30m, 6 = >30m, and E = liana, vine or epiphyte species
Species Name or Pseudonym
M.i*,/j wcaa^rm
^V^'tTX I ~~ 3 ^TVSp^i
Ti«* CMtptMAtfKIU
C^YDAi-IS A/av*AE-
§
o
©
0
Ht.
Class
2-
I
'*
\
\
Cover
<•
a
Ao
1
'
Cover
Work
Space
1- 2
^
PlotS
SW
1
o
1
i
6
1
1
i
o
U
U
NE
1
8
©
1
i
8
8
6
1
0
O
Ht.
Class
lo
Cover
25"
So
Work
Space
K Z5
I
lag
,
f.
Flag codes: E= End of species list, no more species observed (place in row following last recorded species on last page of Form V-2), K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement.
F1.F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comment section on back side of form.
1795292803 |
12/15/2010 NWCA Vascular Plant Species Presence and Cover (Front)
Figure 5-3a. Example of Completed Form V-2a (Front). All data depicted on Figures 5-3a -5-3b are fictitious and for illustration only.
5-21
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
FORM V-2a: NWCA VASCULAR SPECIES PRESENCE AND COVER (Back) *»"£S»
•
Site ID: NWCA11- 9999 Date:
Flag Comments
f\
£0.
E£
F«
F1
?\ — TP-£ rtfp-6-TA-
•
' / ; / 2.0.1 .1 .
Flag Comments
W 1870298140 A
12/1S/2010 NWCA Vascular Plant Species Presence and Cover (Back)
Figure 5-3b. Example of Completed Form V-2a (Back). Note, flags defined on this form refer to data on the V-2a or V-2b pages noted in
the comment field, e.g., F1 refers to data on P1 = page 1 (Figure 5-3a), F8 refers to data on P4 = page 4 (not shown).
5-22
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
FORM V-2b: NWCA VASCULAR SPECIES PRESENCE AND COVER (Continued)
Site ID: NWCA11- 9999 Date: o -; / o # / 2 ° 1 1
Page 2 Of A/
O Fill bubble to confirm empty data fields fora species in a particular plot mean 1) for presence or height class, species not present, or 2) for %Cover fields, cover = 0 zero.
Complete
if
Collecting
Height Classes (except E, w
1 = <0.5m, 2 = >0.5-2m, 3 = >2-5m, 4= >5-15m, 5
hich may occur in any vertical stratum):
= >15-30m, 6 = >30m, and E = liana, vine or epiphyte species
CM
Species Name or Pseudonym
Plotl
Ht.
Work
Space
Plot. 2
Ht.
Work
Space
Plots
HI.
Class
Work
Space
°lot 4
Ht.
Cover
Work
Space
Plot 5
Ht,
Work
Space
lag
U
20
I?
0
0
S£
S
oo
©0
00
O
20
13
|O |
(0 1
00
Cfrfi <~V (AT fi i
§
O
IS
0
|o
o
U
/o
©
7-
©
25
M
/r
S
l!Sfl_
Comments
_Flag_
Comments
Flag codes: E= End of species list, no more species observed (place in row following last recorded species on last page of Form V-2), K » No measurement made,
U = Suspect measurement, F1.F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags In comment section, continuing as needed on Form V 2n(B,ick).
12/15/1010 M WCA Vascular Plant Species Presence and Cover (Continued)
,
orm V-Za(Back). 2909441751
Figure 5-3c. Example of Completed Form V-2b (Continued). Note, the space for flags available at bottom of this form.
5-23
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Reference Card V-3, Side B - Veg Plot Configuration and Data Collection Summary
100-m2VegPlot
1m2
10m2
NE Quadrat Nest
10m2
1m2
\
SW Quadrat Nest
10m
3.16m
1.00m
Establishing Quadrat Nests:
1.
2.
3.
Outside edges of quadrats: Formed by a meter tape, marked cords,
or flagging defining boundary of the 100-m2 Veg Plot.
Inside edges of 10-m2 quadrat: Formed using 6.32m length of
brightly colored rope/cord with the mid-point marked to define
inside corner, or two 3.16m PVC poles (poles may break down to
shorter lengths for easy of carrying).
Inside edges of 1-m2 quadrat frame: Formed by two 1-m wooden
slats, a 2m length of cord with midpoint marked, or two 1-m PVC
poles (poles can be joined with an elbow joint in the field).
Species Presence Data
1. For each species present in the SW or NE Nest (rooted in or
overhanging), record its name/pseudonym and the smallest quadrat in
which it occurs ( S = 1-m2 or M = 10-m2 quadrat); Form V-2: Vascular
Plant Species Presence and Cover.
2. Complete one quadrat nest, then sample the nest in the other corner.
3. Once both corner nests have been searched, examine the entire 100-m2
Veg Plot for additional species. Record these species on Form V-2.
4. If a species does not occur in a particular nest, but occurs in the 100-m2
Veg Plot, record L (large plot) for that nest.
Data to Collect in 100-m2 Veg Plot
1. All individual vascular plant species; Form V-2
• Estimate cover (0-100%) for each species observed in the 100-m2
Veg Plot
• Record the primary height class in which it occurs: 1 = < 0.5m, 2 =
>0.5-2m, 3 = >2-5m, 4 = >5-15m, 5 = >15-30m, 6 = >30m, E = liana,
vine, or epiphyte species (may occur in any height class).
2. Vertical strata for vascular vegetation - Estimate cover for the following
vegetation strata; Form V-3: NWCA Vegetation Types (Front).
• Submerged aquatic vegetation (0-100%)
• Floating aquatic vegetation (0-100%)
• Lianas, vines, and epiphytes (0-100%)
• All other vascular vegetation by height class : >30m, >15-30m , >5-
15m, >2-5m, >0.5-2m, < 0.5m (0-100% for each class).
3. Non-vascular vegetation groups - Estimate cover of and collect
categorical data for ground bryophytes, ground lichens, arboreal
bryophytes and lichens, filamentous mat forming algae, and macroalgae;
Form V-3 (Front).
4. Ground surface attributes - Collect data on water cover, water depth,
bareground, litter, and dead woody material; Form V-3: Ground Surface
Attributes (Back).
5. Tree species cover and counts-For all tree species, estimate cover by
height classes and count stems > 5cm diameter breast height (DBH) by
DBH class (5-10, 11-25, 26-50, 51-75, 76-100, 101-200, and > 200cm) by
species; Form V-4: Snag and Tree Counts and Tree Cover.
6. Standing dead trees and snags (angle of incline > 45°) - Count stems >
5cm DBH by DBH class (5-10, 11-25, 26-50, 51-75, 76-100, 101-200, and
> 200cm); Form V-4.
5-24
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.1.3.3 General Cover Estimation Procedures
The abundances of individual vascular plant species (Section 5.1.3.4, Form V-2:
Vascular Species Presence and Cover), vertical strata of vascular vegetation (Section
5.1.3.6, Form V-3 (Front): Vegetation Types), and non-vascular taxonomic groups
(Section 5.1.3.7, Form V-3 (Front)) are assessed as cover within each 100-m2Veg Plot.
Cover data are also collected for some ground surface attributes (Section 5.1.3.8, Form
V-3 (Back): Ground Surface Attributes).
Cover estimates for individual plant species, vegetation height strata, and non-vascular
groups are made for organisms rooted-in or over-hanging a Veg Plot using the concept
of canopy cover. Canopy cover (hereafter, cover) is defined as:
The percentage of the ground area in a sampling unit overlain by the canopy
(e.g., leaves, stems, etc.) of an individual plant species (whether herbaceous or
woody), a taxonomic group, or a specific vegetation layer.
Cover estimation protocols that apply to individual species, vascular vegetation strata
and non-vascular groups are detailed below and summarized in Reference Card V-4,
Side A.
1) Estimating Percent Cover Cover is estimated directly as the percentage (0 to
100%) of the plot area covered by the species or vegetation group under
consideration. Use the continuous range of values from 0 to 100% when estimating
cover for a species or other entity within the 100-m2 Veg Plot. For values < 1%,
record 0.1%.
Cover determinations for a particular entity of interest (species, taxonomic group, or
vegetation layer) are made by estimating the percentage of ground space in the 100-
m2 Veg Plot overlain by the outline of the canopies of all individuals or patches of that
entity. The space over which a plant exerts influence is approximated by the area of
its undisturbed canopy, since the plant's root system typically spreads at least as
extensively in the horizontal direction as does its canopy. Thus, small gaps in the
canopy created by spaces among leaves of taxa are ignored and are not subtracted
from the cover estimate.
2) Recognizing the Limits of Estimate Precision Note when making cover value
assignments, do not deliberate extensively over values for cover estimates (e.g., for
small values choosing between 1 or 3%, for higher values choosing between 77% or
85%).
Remember your assessments of cover are estimates and it is not appropriate to
agonize over small differences because this precision would exceed the accuracy of
our ability to detect cover differences over the area of the Veg Plot.
3) Viewing Veg Plot to Make Cover Estimations View the Veg Plot from several
vantage points to be sure that all patches of each entity have been detected, while
taking care to limit trampling of the vegetation as much as possible.
5-25
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Reference Card V-4, Side A. Cover Estimation Procedures
Estimating Cover in 100-m2 Veg Plots
1. Cover estimates for various entities (individual plant
species, vegetation height strata, non-vascular
taxonomic groups, and ground surface attributes) are
made in all five 100-m2 Veg Plots in an AA. Cover data
are recorded on Forms V-2a,b, Forms V-3a,b, and Forms
V-4a,b.
2. Cover estimates for individual plant species, vegetation
height strata, and non-vascular groups are made for
organisms rooted-in or over-hanging a Veg Plot.
3. Cover determinations for a particular entity of interest
are made by estimating the percentage of ground space
in a 100-m2 Veg Plot overlain by the canopies of all
individuals or patches of that entity.
4. Cover values may range from 0 to 100% for a particular
individual species or entity. Because species or other
entities often overlie one another vertically, the
combined cover for all species or entities may often
exceed 100%.
5. Estimate cover directly as the percentage (0 to 100%) of
the plot area covered by the species or entity under
consideration. Cover may be estimated in 1%
increments, however, do not deliberate excessively over
values for cover estimates. For values < 1%, record 0.1%.
6. The figure to the right illustrates some examples of
different levels of percent cover across 100-m2 Veg Plots.
Record as 0.1%
35%
45%
55%
65%
75%
85%
95%
100%
Examples of Percent Cover Estimates. Each large square = a 100-m2 Veg Plot,
grid squares = 1m2 = 1% cover in a Veg Plot, shaded areas represent cover of an
individual species, a vegetation stratum, or of a non-vascular species group.
5-26
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
4) Noting Horizontal and Vertical Distribution of Cover Across Veg Plot When
estimating cover, remember the pattern of distribution of particular species or entity might be
aggregated or dispersed across a 100-m2 Veg plot (Reference Card V-4, Side A). Take
care to detect low cover, widely dispersed taxa. Similarly, plant species or vegetation strata
vary in height, and it is common for the canopies of species or vegetation layers to be
distributed vertically, but overlie the same horizontal space.
5) Assigning cover values It is helpful to visualize percent cover in terms of spatial areas
within the 100-m2 Veg Plot, and to use this information to guide cover estimations for a
particular species or entity. In a 10x1 Om Veg Plot, 1m2 is equivalent to 1% cover, a 3x3m
block equals 9% cover, and a 5x5m block represents 25% of the area of the Veg Plot.
Reference Card V-4, Side A provides examples of cover estimates reflecting different
distributions and abundances for an individual entity (e.g., a species, a vegetation layer, or a
taxonomic group) within a 100-m2 Veg Plot.
5.1.3.4 Vascular Plant Species Height and Cover Data
Data collected for each vascular plant species occurring in a 100-m2 Veg Plot include its identity,
the primary height class in which it occurs, and an estimate of its cover (See Reference Cards
V-3, Side B and V-4, Side A). For each species, height and cover data can be collected
concurrently.
1) Species Identity - Recall that during collection of species presence data (Section 5.1.3.2),
you recorded, on the set of V-2: Species Presence and Cover forms for the AA, the
names/pseudonyms of all species observed in the 100-m2 Veg Plot (Figure 5-3a-c). As you
collect data on height class and estimate cover for each species in the Veg Plot, add any
newly detected taxa you encounter to the Species Name or Pseudonym field of Form V-2.
2) Species Height Class - Estimate the predominant height class in which each species
occurs across the Veg Plot. Record the height class number in the Height Class (Ht. Class)
field on Form V-2 for the Veg Plot under consideration (Figure 5-3a, c). Height classes are
defined below. Note that E class is a life form class that encompasses all vascular liana,
vine, or epiphyte species, and which may occur in any height class.
Height Classes (except E, which may
occur in any vertical stratum)
1 <0.5m
2 >0.5 to 2m
3 >2 to 5m
4 >5 to 15m
5 >15 to 30m
6 >30m
E Liana, vine, or epiphyte species
5-27
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
3) Species Cover - Estimate percent cover for each species observed in the Veg Plot and
record this data in the % Coverfield of the appropriate plot on Form V-2 (Figure 5-3a,c).
Use the following general guidelines, based on the complexity of the vegetation, to estimate
cover for the plant species occurring in the 100-m2 Veg Plot.
• Cover for any individual plant species observed in a Veg Plot can range from 0 to 100%.
However, because of vertical stratification of plant species within communities, the sum
of the covers of all observed species often substantially exceeds 100%.
• View and search the Veg Plot from several vantage points (e.g., from several points
outside the plot and from the plot center) to detect and make cover estimates for all
species that are present.
• When estimating cover of tall species (i.e., tall shrubs and trees) care should be taken to
try to visually project the Veg Plot boundaries upwards to frame the vertical sample area
and identify the edges of the Veg Plot.
• Where species diversity is high, vegetation is patchy, or species are widely distributed
across the Veg Plot, it will likely be helpful, to make preliminary estimates of cover for
different patches of a particular species in different parts of the Veg Plot (e.g., Species 1
may occur in patches of the following sizes: 1m2 = 1%, 7m2 = 7%, 25m2 = 25%). To
keep track of these preliminary estimates while moving around the Veg Plot, record them
in the Work Space field associated with the species of interest on Form V-2 (Figure 5-
3a,c). Once all patches of the species in the Veg Plot are observed, the preliminary
estimates can be combined to obtain the total percent cover for the species (e.g.,
continuing with the example above, Species 1 = 33%), which is then recorded in the %
Cover field.
• If a Veg Plot is particularly complex or diverse, necessitating preliminary cover estimates
for many species in a plot, it may be useful to employ a systematic procedure to do this.
A recommended approach follows:
o Visually divide the 100-m2 Veg Plot into four 25m2 quarters. In each quarter of the
Veg Plot, search for all species occurring in that quarter.
o Estimate the approximate percent area of the Veg Plot (remember 1m2 = 1%)
occupied by each plant species present in the quarter (25% if the entire quarter is
covered by a particular species since 25m2 = 25% of the entire 100-m2 Veg Plot).
Record the percent area of the Veg Plot covered by each species in each quarter in
the Work Space field for that species (see examples in Figure 5-3a,c).
o Once preliminary cover estimates for all four quarters of the Veg Plot are completed,
sum the preliminary estimates for each species to obtain the total percent cover of
that species in the Veg Plot. This final percent cover value is then recorded in the %
Cover field for the species.
5-28
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.1.3.5 Predominant Status and Trends Wetland Class
On Form V-3: NWCA Vegetation Types (Front), record the predominant Status and Trends
(S&T) Wetland Class comprising each Veg Plot. See Reference Card AA-3, Side A and
Chapter 3 for S&T class definitions.
1) If the Veg Plot S&T class is Pf - Palustrine Farmed (not currently in production), fill in the Pf
bubble in the Predominant S&T Class section of Form V-3 (front). Then select and fill the
bubble indicating the predominant S&T class of the Veg Plot if it were never cropped.
Recall, currently cropped Pf wetlands are not sampleable (Chapter 3 and USEPA2011c).
2) If the S&T class of the Veg Plot is not Pf (not currently farmed), leave the Pf bubble unfilled.
Indicate the predominant S&T class by filling the appropriate S&T class bubble for the plot.
5.1.3.6 Vertical Strata Data for Vascular Vegetation
One of the ways the NWCA assesses the vertical structure of wetland vegetation is to estimate
the cover of nine vertical vegetation strata, defined in part by life form type and in part by height
classes (Form V-3: NWCA Vegetation Types (Front), Reference Card V-3, Side B). Cover of
all the species making up a particular vegetation stratum are estimated collectively and the total
cover for an individual stratum can range between 0 and 100 percent. Because vegetation
strata may overlie one another the combined cover for all vegetation strata may substantially
exceed 100 percent.
Estimate cover for each of the following strata across each Veg Plot:
1) Submerged aquatic vegetation (cover 0-100%) - rooted in sediment, most plant cover
submerged or floating on water.
2) Floating aquatic vegetation (cover 0-100%) - not rooted in sediment, floating on water.
3) Cover of all lianas, vines, and epiphytes (cover 0-100%).
4) Cover of all other vascular vegetation by height class:
a) > 30m tall (0-100%): e.g., very tall trees
b) >15 to 30m tall (0-100%): e.g., tall trees
c) > 5 to 15m tall (0-100%): e.g., very tall shrubs, short to mid-sized trees
d) > 2 to 5m tall (0-100%): e.g., tall shrubs; tree saplings
e) 0.5m to 2m (0-100%): e.g., medium height shrubs; tree seedlings and samplings; tall
emergent/terrestrial herbaceous species
f) < 0.5 m tall (0-100%): e.g., low emergent/terrestrial herbaceous species; low shrubs,
tree seedlings
Record cover estimates for each vegetation stratum in the appropriate Veg Plot column in the %
Cover Vascular Vegetation Strata section of Form V-3: NWCA Vegetation Types (Front).
5.1.3.7 Non-Vascular Taxonomic Group Data
Bryophytes (mosses and liverworts) growing on ground-level surfaces, ground lichens, arboreal
epiphytic bryophytes and lichens, filamentous or mat forming algae, and macroalgae can be
5-29
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
important components of many wetlands. Data for non-vascular taxonomic groups are collected
in each 100-m2 Veg Plot and recorded in the % Cover and Categorical Data for Non-Vascular
Taxa section on Form V-3 (Front): Vegetation Types (see also Reference Card V-3, Side B).
Cover for each of these groups can range from 0-100%.
Bryophytes - Estimate the collective cover of mosses, and leafy and thalloid liverworts that are
growing on ground surfaces, logs, rocks, etc. If the bryophyte layer is dominated by Sphagnum
or other peat forming mosses, fill in the peat mosses bubble under the Bryophyte data row.
Ground Lichens - Estimate the collective cover of all lichens growing on the ground or other
ground layer substrate (e.g., boulders, fallen logs). Do not include arboreal lichens that have
fallen from trees in this estimate.
Arboreal Epiphytic Bryophytes and Lichens - If arboreal (living on shrubs and trees)
bryophytes and lichens are present, estimate the amount of branch, twig, stem, or trunk surface
area of woody vegetation in the Veg Plot that this group occupies. Make this estimate rapidly as
you scan the available arboreal surface area. It is intended to give a gross indication of the
amount of arboreal bryophytes and lichens present.
Filamentous Or Mat Forming Algae - Estimate the collective cover of all unicellular or small
algae that form visible and often extensive filaments or mats.
Macroalgae - Estimate the collective cover of macroalgae. Macroalgae are found in freshwater
(e.g., Chara) or tidal settings (seaweeds), and may occur in a wetland both as living, attached
material or as wrack (algae that is broken free and/or washed into the wetland). Where
macroalgae is present, indicate whether it is wrack, living material, or is of unknown status by
filling-in the appropriate data bubbles for each Veg Plot.
5.1.3.8 Ground Surface Attribute Data
Data describing surface attributes (water, bare ground, vegetative litter, and woody debris) of
each 100-m2 Veg Plot are collected by the Veg Team (see also Reference Card V-3, Side B).
Metrics describing these indicators include percent of the plot area covered by an attribute, and
where appropriate, the type and depth of the attribute.
Collect and record the following data on Form V-3 (Back): Ground Surface Attributes in the
appropriate fields:
Water - Estimate the area of the Veg Plot covered by water and measure water depth.
1) Water Cover- Estimate total percent of the Veg Plot area covered by water, then estimate
cover for three categories of water. The sum of the covers for water categories (a-c) should
equal total water cover (e.g., total water cover across Veg Plot = 50% = 30% of Veg Plot
with water and floating/submerged aquatic vegetation + 20% of Veg Plot with water and
emergent vegetation).
Total Water Cover- percent of Veg Plot area with water.
a) % Veg Plot area with water and no vegetation.
b) % Veg Plot area with water and floating/submerged aquatic vegetation.
c) % Veg Plot area with water and emergent vegetation.
5-30
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
Where floating/submerged and emergent vegetation occur together, classify water type
based on vegetation type with greatest cover. If cover of vegetation types is equal, then
classify as water and emergent vegetation.
2) Water Depth - Measure water depth from 3 locations that represent the range of water
levels observed (minimum, predominant, maximum). Make depth measurements within 10
minutes of one another. Record the time, using a 24 hour scale, in the Time of Day field in
the Water Depth section of the Form V-3 (Back). Depths may be measured using a ruler,
meter stick, or a 1-m PVC pole with decimeter marks.
Bare Ground Estimate the percent of the Veg Plot area occupied by each of the following:
1) Exposed Soil/Sediment.
2) Exposed Gravel/Cobble (~ 2mm to 25cm in diameter).
3) Exposed Rock (>25cm in diameter).
The sum of these three elements of bare ground should not exceed 100%.
Vegetative Litter - Litter may be overlain by other vegetation layers, but does not typically
overlap with water or bare ground. Collect the following data:
1) Total Cover of Vegetative Litter, which may range from 0 to 100%.
2) Identify Predominant Litter Type(s) (all types having > 25% cover), or if total litter cover is <
25% indicate Primary Litter Type):
T= thatch (dead graminoid (e.g., grass, sedge, rush) leaves, rhizomes, or other material)
F = forb
C = coniferous tree
£ = broadleaf evergreen tree
D = deciduous tree
N = none
3) Measure litter depth in the center of the 1-m2 quadrat at the NE and the SW Veg Plot
corners and record measurements in the appropriate Litter Depth (cm) field.
Woody Debris - Downed woody debris occurs at an angle of incline < 45°. Estimate the
percent of the of Veg Plot area covered by:
1) Downed Coarse Woody Debris (> 5cm diameter)
2) Downed Fine Woody Debris (< 5 cm diameter)
Woody debris may overlay other vegetation or ground surface layers, so dead woody material in
either category may range from 0 to 100%.
5.1.3.9 Snag Count and Tree Species Count and Cover Data
Several structural attributes of woody vegetation are evaluated in the NWCA (see also
Reference Card V-3, Side B), including:
• Counts of standing dead trees or snags (angle of incline > 45°) that are > 5cm diameter
breast height (DBH) by DBH classes.
• Counts of trees (> 5cm DBH) by species in estimated DBH classes.
• Cover for trees species by estimated height classes.
Early in the field season or during training the Veg Team will be calibrated to estimate DBH
classes by using a diameter tape to measure a series of trees of different sizes to develop a
5-31
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
search image for each DBH class. Height class estimation will also be practiced during training.
Once calibrated, the Veg Team will be able to rapidly visually estimate whether a tree belongs in
a particular DBH or height class.
This snag and tree data for all five Veg Plots is recorded on Form V-4: Snag and Tree Counts
and Tree Cover pages. Form V-4a (Front) (see Figure 5-4 for filled out example) is the first
page of the set of V-4 forms. If the number of tree species exceeds the space provided on
Form V-4a (Front and Back), use as many Form 4-Vb (Continued) pages as needed.
1) Presence of Trees or Snags - If live trees or snags are absent from a Veg Plot, indicate by
filling in the appropriate box in the Trees or Snags Absence section of Form V-4a (Front). If
live trees or snags are present collect the required count and cover data for the Veg Plot.
2) Standing Dead Tree and Snags Counts Count the number of dead trees/snags that
have angle of incline > 45° (< 45° = downed woody debris, see Section 5.1.3.8) by DBH
class (5-10, 11-25, 26-50, 51-75, 76-100,101-200 and > 200 cm), and record the values in
the appropriate DBH columns of the Standing Dead Tree/Snag section on Form V-4a. If
needed, while counting dead trees and snags, a running tally* can be kept in the gray
workspace for each diameter class. Record the total number for each DBH class in the
white data field.
*Tallying method- If needed, use the compact tallying method shown below to aid in
counting snags or live trees. Each dot or line equals one snag or tree.
u
3) Live Tree Species Names/Pseudonyms and Plot Numbers - Record species names or
pseudonyms for live trees occurring in each Veg Plot in the designated rows on Form V-4.
a) If a pseudonym (Section 5.1.3.2, Reference Card V-4, Side B) is needed, use the same
pseudonym for a particular unknown as recorded on Form V-2.
b) When recording data for tree cover and counts in height classes, indicate the number of
the Veg Plot under consideration by filling in the appropriate bubble in the Plot # field
next to the species name. If the same tree species occurs in multiple Veg Plots, you must
write its name on a separate row on the form for each plot in which it occurs (i.e., each
row represents one tree species in one plot).
c) If a new tree species is detected, i.e., one not observed when data for individual
species (Form V-2) were collected, estimate its total cover and record this value and its
species name or pseudonym on Form V-2. If the newly observed tree species is an
unknown, collect a specimen and record its collection number on Form V-2.
4) Cover of Live Trees in Height Classes - Record the percent cover (0-100%) for each tree
species in each height classes (< 0.5m, >0.5-2m, >2-5m, >5-15m, >15-30m, and >30m).
5) Live Tree Counts For each tree species in the Veg Plot, count individual trees by DBH
classes (5-10, 11-25, 26-50, 51-75, 76-100, 101-200 and > 200 cm). If needed, keep a
running tally of trees for each species in the gray shaded workspace area for each DBH
class. Record the total number for each species in each DBH class in the white data field.
5-32
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
g FORM V-4a: NWCA
Site ID: NWCA11-4055"
instructions for Recording Data:
1. Fill out Header Information.
2. If Live Trees or Snags are Absent from a Veg Plot, fill in the appropi
Absence field.
3. If either Live Trees or Snags are Present in a Veg Plot, collect data
each Veg Plot.
4. Standing Dead Trees and Snags (angle of incline > 45°): Count sn
and record the total number of snags for each DBH class in the white
Veg Plot.
5. For Each Live Tree Species: Use one row for each plot in wh ch eac
indicate the Veg Plot number in the Plot # column next to each specie
6. Cover of trees in height classes: Record species names or pseudoi
Ensure pseudonyms match those used on Form V-2. Record the perc
species for each of the following height classes: < 0.5m 0.5 to 2m, > ;
>30m.
7. Live Trees: Count trees > 5cm DBH in each Veg Plot by species in C
number of trees for each diameter class in the white data column.
a. Counting Trees or Snags: If needed, for smaller DBH classes when
a running tally* of the numbers of all snags, or for each tree species, i
recorded in the gray shaded workspace in the DBH columns. Once al
tallied for a plot, record the total number for each species in each DBr
each DBH column.
Tally
format'
Plot*
01 O4
O2 OS
O3
01 CM
O2 OS
O3
§1 O4
2 OS
03
O1 O4
S!05
O 1 O4
O 2 O 5
O 1 O4
O 2 O 5
•1
* 2 1 * 3
• * 4
*~* 5
r:6 r
Live Tree Species Name/Pseudonym
FKA-Xi»H»i L^Tipot-tA
r\UU.'^ tf^Aa/V
Twvofl- rue ATA
?MJKK£ C^A-AfiiKI/--'-
Ai.
5&i
4^? flU A
atJAP uv
T \Ffel
*
SNAG AND TREE COUNTS AND TREE COVER (Front)
iate bubble in the Tree or Snag
across the entire 100-m?area of
ags > 5cm DBH by diameter class
data column for the appropriate
h tree species is found. Be sure to
s name.
>yms for each tree species.
ent cover (0-1 00%) for each tree
>to5m,> 5 to 15m, >15to3Cm,
)BH classes and record the total
many trees or snags are present,
n each DBH class can be
the snags or tree species are
1 class in the white data field for
tr
&'
*J* 10
Tree Cover by Height Class
<0.5m
S
2m
*]
3
>2-5m
/o
lo
/£
15m
-,
f
5
30m
(cP
>30m
Rov
O P
Ewed by (Initial):
age 1 of
O Fill in bubble to confirm that empty data cells equal zero.
TREES OR SNAGS ABSENCE: Fitl in all that apply:
LTA=Live Trees Absent, DTA=Dead Trees/Snags Absent
Plot 1 Plot 2
O LTA O LTA
O DTA ® DTA
Standing DC
(White ta
Plot S to 10cm 11 to 25cm
1 A+
2
3
4
5 n
r *
r: t n
Plots
O LTA C
€> DTA 4
•arJTr
ee/Sn
l Held, G
25 to 50cm
/
ag Cot
Plot 4
> LTA
$ DTA
Plots
• LTA
ODTA
juts by DBH Class
(ally workspace)
n to
51 to 75cm 100cm
/
101*0
200cm F|43
Tree Counts by DBH Class
(White box = data field. Gray box - tally workspace) (DBH - diameter breast height)
S to 10cm 11 to 25cm 26 to 50cm
.0
3
/"]
£>
z
t
« t
4 V
n
i
/
/
51 to 75cm
76 to 101to >200
100cm 200cm cm Fl'9
I
Flag codes: K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1, F2, etc = misc.f lags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comment section on back side of form.
• ^MB
NWCA Snag & Tree Counts (Front) 01/21/2011
Figure 5-4. Example of completed Form V-4a (Front). All data depicted on this figure are fictitious and for illustration only.
5-33
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.1.4 Field Day Wrap-Up Activities
After completing the sampling of the five Veg Plots (this chapter) and the AA portion (Metrics 4-
12) of from the USA-RAM (USEPA in review), the Veg Team conducts field day wrap-up
activities.
At the AA:
1) Complete collection of unknown and QA voucher specimens (Section 5.2.1):
2) Review all Vegetation Data Forms:
• Botanist/Ecologist - Review Forms V-2 and V-4 for errors in species names and
missing data. Make any needed corrections.
• Botanist Assistant - Review Forms V-1 and V-3 for missing data.
• Veg Team - If needed, return to Veg Plots and collect any missing information.
3) Time permitting, begin plant identification and specimen pressing:
• Botanist/Ecologist use any time available after vegetation sampling and plant specimen
collection are completed to key out unknown plant species. For unknowns confidently
keyed to species, update pseudonyms to scientific names on Forms V-2 and V-4.
• If a plant press is available at the AA, Veg Team presses plant specimens.
However, the AA will often be far enough from the vehicle to make carrying a press to
the AA infeasible, so pressing plants will most often be conducted back at the vehicle
(see the At the Vehicle heading below).
4) Collect and organize Veg equipment and samples for transport back to the vehicle.
5) Remove all flagging and markers, unless the site will receive a repeat sampling visit (for
quality assurance sampling, other researchers collecting data, etc). For repeat visit sites,
labeled flagging should be left at the AA CENTER and POINT.
6) Once all Veg tasks at the AA are complete, assist the AB Team if they are still working.
Alternatively, if there are numerous plant specimens to process, return to the vehicle and
begin pressing plants.
• Before leaving the AA to return the vehicle make a final check to ensure no equipment,
data, or samples are left behind. If leaving for the vehicle prior to the AB Team, carry
selected AB Team equipment and samples to the vehicle.
• To prevent spread of potentially harmful organisms and invasive species between
research sites, employ ZERO TAXA TRANSPORT protocols (Chapter 2).
Decontaminate equipment, shoes, clothing and person as thoroughly as possible before
leaving the site.
At the Vehicle:
1) Press plant specimens (see Section 5.2.2):
• Plant specimens are pressed at the vehicle whenever possible. If this is not feasible due
to safety issues of parking location or weather, then plants may be pressed upon arrival
at the field lodging location at the end of the day.
5-34
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
• Pressing specimens might be facilitated by forming an assembly line of all four Crew
members (Veg + AB Team). Be sure to affix a completed Plant Sample Tag to the
newsprint for each specimen and include a completed Plant Specimen Label inside the
newsprint folder with each specimen (see Sections 5.2.2 and 5.2.3). Normally one
specimen is pressed for each unknown or QA species. If more than one specimen is
collected for a particular species use the same collection number (from Form V-2) on
the Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen Label for that species.
Note the field day is not finished until all the plants from an AA are pressed. If
necessary, the entire Field Crew works together to complete this task.
• On Form T-1: Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking (Chapter 2), fill the bubble in the
Sample Status section indicating Plant Vouchers & Unknowns were collected and record
the total number of plant species collected for the AA (e.g., the highest collection number
from the Collect # field on the set of Forms V-2) in the # of Plants Sampled field.
2) Arrange the completed vegetation data forms in order and place into the Data Packet for the
AA (see Chapter 2).
3) Repeat decontamination of equipment, shoes, clothing and person, if the vehicle is located a
long distance from the AA, to prevent spread of potentially harmful organisms and invasive
species that may have been picked up between the AA and the vehicle. Employ ZERO
TAXA TRANSPORT protocols (Chapter 2).
4) Return all vegetation equipment and supplies to their standard locations in the vehicle.
5.2 SAMPLE COLLECTION AND PROCESSING AND DATA HANDLING
Several existing protocols for plant specimen collection, pressing, and handling (Magee et al.
1993, Mack 2007, WIPP 2008, University of Florida Herbarium 2009) and helpful reviews from
several wetland ecologists were useful in developing the NWCA protocols for plant sample
collection and processing presented in this section.
Specimens of all unknown plant species and voucher specimens for five known taxa are
collected across the five Veg Plots. Specimen collection, labeling, and plant pressing are
completed during the field day (Sections 5.2.1 through 5.2.3). Activities for specimen
preservation (drying) and shipping or delivering dried specimens to a designated office or
herbarium carry over to subsequent field or travel days, or may sometimes be completed at the
base location or lodging (Section 5.2.4 and 5.2.5).
Other specimen management and identification tasks are conducted from the office or
designated herbarium. Protocols for these tasks are outside the purview of this document and
are detailed in the NWCA - Laboratory Operations Manual (NWCA-LOM) (USEPA 2011 a), and
include: identification of unknown pressed specimens, updating data forms or spreadsheets with
scientific species names, and shipping QA specimens and a percentage of the unknowns after
initial identification to regional botanical experts for verification.
5-35
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.2.1 Collecting Plant Specimens
Plant specimen collection is typically conducted throughout the sampling day as unknown
species are encountered. This is particularly important for less common unknown species as
they may be difficult to find again if collection is delayed.
A plant specimen is a pressed and dried plant sample. An integral part of each plant specimen
is written data describing the location and date of collection and other information, which is
recorded on the Plant Sample Tag and the Plant Specimen Label that accompany each
specimen from pressing through identification (Section 5.2.3).
The plant specimens collected in the NWCA are critical data, which are used: 1) to identify
unknown plant species encountered in the Veg Plots and 2) for quality assurance (QA)
assessment of the overall taxonomic accuracy of the vegetation data (see NWCA-QAPP;
USEPA2011b).
Unknown Plant Specimens Whenever the Botanist/Ecologist does not recognize or is
uncertain of the identity of a plant species occurring in a Veg Plot, collect a specimen for later
identification in the office or lab.
QA Plant Specimens - Randomly select five known species that the Botanist/Ecologist has
identified, one from each Veg Plot, to collect for QA verification.
• Use a random numbers table or random numbers generator on a calculator to select one
species identified by the botanist from each plot.
• Count the first known species listed on Form V-2: Vascular Species Presence and Cover
for a particular Veg Plot as number 1.
• Do not count unknown species in the random selection process.
• If a species has been selected as a QA specimen, it cannot be selected as a QA specimen
from another Veg Plot in the same AA.
Do Not Collect Threatened, Endangered and Sensitive Species (TES) - If TES species are
encountered document their presence by photographing them and recording data photo data as
described in Appendix D.
Collecting Material for Plant Specimens
1) For each species to be collected, select one or more healthy plants typical of its population
within the Vegetation Plot. Collect enough plant material for species identification and to fill
a standard herbarium sheet (29x42cm) when pressed.
2) Whenever possible, material for each specimen should consist of a stem with attached
leaves, flowers, fruits, and, if possible, roots. Flowers and fruit are particularly important as
they are generally needed to determine species identity.
• If the plant is small enough, collect the entire plant including the roots.
5-36
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
• If the plant is too large to fit in the plant press, collect 1) sufficient leaves and stems to
illustrate leaf shape and size, opposite or alternate branching, and buds, 2) some of the
root or rhizome, and 3) the inflorescence (flowering stem). In the case of trees, shrubs,
or vines, material should be selected to illustrate the overall characteristics of the plant
and the range of variation in flowers, leaves, and other structures.
• For grasses and grass-like plants, try to include roots or rhizomes. If possible, include
mature fruit for Carex (sedge) species, which are important for their identification.
• If the species has separate male plants and female plants (e.g., Sa//x sp. (willows)) or
male and female flowers on the same plant, collect specimens from both sexes
whenever possible.
• If the species is immature or senescent, collect a sample that illustrates as many key
diagnostic parts of the plant as possible.
3) Place the fresh plant material collected for each individual species into its own plastic bag
(e.g., 1 species/ bag) to contain the specimen until it can be pressed. Using a permanent
marker write the Plant Sample ID Number (NWCA site number-collection number) on the
outside of the bag.
• Gallon zipper-lock bags are appropriately sized for many species.
• For species too large to fit into a gallon sized bag, e.g., shrubs, tall grasses or sedges, a
kitchen trash bag may be used to store the specimen.
• Use clear or white plastic bags as collection bags. Dark colored plastic bags will absorb
too much heat during the day.
Alternatively, if it is more convenient multiple species can be placed into larger bags. If
more than one specimen is included in the same bag, make sure they can be easily
distinguished from one another and related to their collection numbers from Form V-2. For
example, tag individual species by bundling plant material by the stems with masking tape
or a strip of flagging labeled with the collection number from Form V-2.
Storing Plant Specimens During the Sampling Day -
1) Place the smaller plastic bags with one or more plant species into a large heavy-duty, light
colored plastic bag. Double bagging keeps specimens fresher in warm weather and keeps
fragile plant parts together by species.
2) Plants will normally and ideally be pressed upon arriving back at the vehicle at the end of
the sample day. If weather or road conditions where the vehicle is parked make pressing at
this location infeasible or unsafe, place the bags of collected plant material into an ice chest
until the Crew has returned to field lodging, then press the plants immediately.
Ensuring All Unknown and QA Specimens Have Been Gathered -
1) Before leaving the site at the end of the day, double check the Complete if Collecting field of
Form V-2 (See Section 5.1.3.1) to make certain every species indicated for collection (i.e.,
the U = unknown species or the QA= quality assurance specimen bubble is filled) has been
obtained.
5-37
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
2) Ensure that each specimen has been assigned a collection number and that this number is
recorded as part of the Plant Sample ID number on the Plant Sample Tag and Plant
Specimen Label (Section 5.2.3) when pressing the specimen (Section 5.2.2).
5.2.2 Pressing Plant Specimens
It is important to process the plant material as soon after collection as practicable to preserve
the morphological features of the specimens. Processing the specimens immediately helps
prevent data loss that can result from degraded or lost specimens; consequently, specimens are
normally pressed and labeled at the end of the sampling day.
Plant specimens are pressed and dried in a standard plant press (30 X 45 cm, 12X18 inches,
Figure 5-5) composed of a breathable wooden frame, corrugated cardboard ventilators, blotters,
folded newsprint, and a set of adjustable straps.
• The wooden frame and straps bound the press.
• Newsprint specimen folders, each containing plant material, are sandwiched between two
moisture-absorbing blotters.
• The "blotter-newsprint sandwiches" are placed between corrugated cardboards.
• The corrugations of the cardboard should run parallel to the shorter dimension (30 cm) of
the press for best air circulation. Bulky specimens may require extra blotters and
cardboard.
Figure 5-5. Plant Press. Photo from http://www.flmnh.ufl.edu/herbarium/voucher.htm, and
used by permission from Kent D. Perkins, University of Florida Herbarium.
5-38
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
Protocol for Pressing Plant Specimens:
1) To begin pressing a specimen, place a cardboard on the bottom wooden frame of the press,
then add a blotter.
2) Lay a newsprint folder on top of the blotter. To the outside of the newsprint folder, affix a
completed Plant Sample Tag with the Plant Sample ID Number (see Section 5.2.3) for the
specimen you are pressing.
3) Open the newsprint folder and place a filled-out Plant Specimen Label (see Section 5.2.3)
inside the folded newsprint.
4) Clean as much dirt as possible off the plant material before placing it in the newsprint folder.
Place the plant material inside the sheet of folded newsprint so that it lies entirely within the
dimensions of the plant press and is positioned inside the folded newsprint and on top of the
Plant Specimen Label.
Figure 5-6. Assembling the plant press. Photo from
http://www.flmnh.ufl.edu/herbarium/voucher.htm, and used by permission from Kent D.
Perkins, University of Florida Herbarium.
5) Carefully arrange the plant material (Figure 5-6), to display diagnostic features.
a) Lay the specimen flat and avoid overlapping plant parts.
b) Spread leaves, flowers, and fruits so they can be easily observed from different
perspectives.
c) Show upper and lower surfaces of leaves and flowers.
d) If possible arrange material so some flowers have the blossom open, and some flowers
and fruits appear in longitudinal and transverse views.
5-39
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
e) Multiples of smaller plants of the same species should be pressed together on one
sheet.
f) For large specimens, bend stems sharply into a V or N shape so they fit within the press
frame. Avoid curving or twisting stems.
g) Thick stems, large fruits, or bulbs may be trimmed to reduce bulk by cutting them in half
lengthwise.
6) Examples of small, loose plant parts (i.e., seeds, Carex perigynia) should be placed in a
small paper packet or envelope inside of the newspaper.
7) Once the plant material is arranged, fold the newsprint closed.
8) Add another blotter, then a cardboard on top of the newsprint folder.
9) To begin pressing the next specimen, place a blotter over the top cardboard in the stack.
Repeat steps 2 - 8 until the press is full or all specimens are included.
10) Use two adjustable straps to tighten and firmly compress the plant press and its contents
(Figure 5-5).
5.2.3 Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen Label
Plant Sample Tags and Specimen Labels are important field data and their absence can
result in loss of data represented by the plant specimen, so it is critical that tag and label
information is complete and accurate. Note that the Site Number will often be preprinted on the
tags and labels in your site packet, so ensure that you have the correct set of tags and labels for
the site you are sampling. For each plant specimen:
1) Complete a Plant Sample Tag -
The Plant Sample Tag is an adhesive tag used to track a plant specimen. A sample tag is
completed and affixed to the outside of the newsprint in which each specimen is pressed
(Section 5.2.2). An example of a completed tag is illustrated here.
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCAll-^W- 7
(Site*) (Collection**)
Date: 077^5/2011 Visit #:•! OZ
* - fill in circle if QA specimen
a) Plant Sample ID Number is the Site Number (in the case above: Site NWCA11-9999)
and the collection number (on the plant sample tag above: the specimen with collection
number 7 as recorded on Form V-2, see Figure 5-3c).
b) The specimen in this example is a QA sample, so the bubble for QA specimen is filled.
c) Date refers to the date the site was sampled.
5-40
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
d) Visit Number indicates whether the visit is the primary sampling event (1) or the QA
revisit (2) to the site. For more information about the QA revisit see the NWCA QAPP
(USEPA2011b).
2) Complete a Plant Specimen Label (Figure 5-7) -
The Plant Specimen Label provides key descriptive information that can aid identifying an
unknown plant sample when it is reviewed at the lab or herbarium.
a) Complete the label header information
• Complete the Plant Sample ID Number ensuring it matches the Plant Sample Tag
and the Collection Number from Form V-2.
• Record the Sampling Date.
• Indicate the Visit Number.
b) For a QA Specimen: Fill the QA specimen bubble, but do not include the genus and
species name of the specimen on the label, as a blind verification will be used to confirm
the identity of QA species at the lab/herbarium.
c) For an Unknown Species: Provide the Pseudonym that was used to describe it on Form
V-2 (see Section 5.1.3.2).
d) Record the Collector(s) Name(s).
e) Abundance of Plant - Indicate whether the species is dominant, common, sparse, or
uncommon, i.e., occurs only as a few individuals in the Veg Plot in which it occurs.
f) Habitat Description - Describe the plant community or immediate setting where the plant
is growing.
g) Plant Habit - Describe key features of the plant such as growth form (tree, shrub, vine,
herb), approximate height, longevity (annual, biennial, perennial), clonal, rhizomatous,
tussock-forming, etc. List any characteristics of the plant which may be lost upon drying,
such as flower/fruit color and fragrance, leaf orientation and aroma.
PLANT SPECIMEN LABEL (enclose in newsprint with sample)
For Unknown species, record pseudonym from Form V-2:
faHiT£ Fi~Qf HB^T^F-
Collector(s) Name(s):
_3>c/< L. ?/#£
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- ? ? ? ? - /^/
(Sitett) (Collection #)
Date: Oil 08/2011 Visit #:•! O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Abundance of Plant (fill appropriate circle):
ODominant, •Common, OSparse, OUncommon
Habitat:
^ov/A/6 itJ Aicisr p^rci-fcs <=>P So JO/TH
JH-W-LOU Mfr?$Qv(j /?/^6{i-£T_5.
PlantHabit: o^^i^d? ;// <^UM p$ o% P#r6/-J-£S, /£^l/££ &6STLY 8 frSfiL,
Ur£ftfT Dfi kri£A/ey SHAPED. VISITS fio^ee^ \wuftuy 2 6$ttfik>st>ST£jf&,
Figure 5-7. Example of completed Plant Specimen Label.
5-41
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
5.2.4 Drying Plant Specimens
Pressed plant specimens should be thoroughly dried before removing them from the presses.
Once dry, remove specimens from the presses and ship or transport them to designated lab or
herbarium for identification.
• To encourage drying, keep full presses in a warm, dry, well-ventilated location in the vehicle
during the day and in a well-ventilated warm location in the lodging at night.
• As the specimens dry they will loose volume, so periodically tighten the straps on the press
to maintain pressure on the specimens and minimize shrinkage and wrinkling.
• Rapid and thorough drying is enhanced by low humidity and ample airflow around and
through the presses. The best preservation of color and morphology is obtained with rapid
drying over low heat. Also, dry air circulating through the press may kill many insects and
insect eggs, potentially protecting the specimens from damage.
• The easiest way to achieve these conditions is by using an electric plant dryer that provides
steady bottom heat (95°F to 113°F), where plants usually dry in 12 to 48 hours. Plant dryers
(e.g., Figure 5-8) are typically constructed as a simple box with a heat source (often
incandescent light bulbs) and a fan for air circulation, on which plant presses can be placed
to accelerate drying.
Figure 5-8. Plant Dryer. Photo from Mack (2007). Reproduced
with permission from the Wetland Ecology Group, Division of
Surface Water, Ohio Environmental Protection Agency.
Protocol for drying specimens
1) Ideally, full plant presses will be returned to the base location after a few field days and
placed on a plant dryer to dry.
2) If plant dryer is not available keep the full presses in a warm, dry, well-ventilated location.
Check the press every couple of days and replace wet blotters to speed drying.
5-42
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
3) Periodically, tighten the straps on the press as the specimens dry and shrink to maintain
pressure on the press.
4) Once plant specimens are dry, remove them from the presses with individual specimens
kept in their newsprint folders with their Plant Specimen Labels.
5) Organize the plant specimens for transport or shipping to the designated location for
identification or verification (Section 5.2.5, Chapter 2, Appendix A)
5.2.5 Shipping or Transporting Plant Specimens
Careful management of the dried plant specimens and specimen tracking information, and
prompt shipment or transport of specimens to the herbarium, lab, or office where they will be
identified, is critical to data quality and timeliness of data acquisition. Develop a regular weekly
schedule for completing these activities (See Chapter 2 and Appendix A).
1) Specimens from several sites may be batched together to ship or transport to the office, lab,
or herbarium for identification. Unknown specimens and QA plant samples may need to be
packed in separate boxes as they may be shipped to different destinations (see Figure 5-9).
2) For each batch of unknown specimens shipped or transported, group the specimens by
NWCA Site, ordered by collection number, into herbarium folders labeled with the Site ID(s)
written on the outside of the folders. Put only as many specimens into each herbarium
folder as will comfortably fit. If needed, use separate folders for each site. If multiple folders
are needed for one site, clearly mark this on the outside of the folder by recording: Site ID-
folder 1, Site ID-folder 2, etc.
3) For each batch of QA specimens shipped or transported, group the QA specimens by
NWCA Site, ordered by collection number, in herbarium folders labeled with the Site ID(s).
Use photocopies of the site appropriate Form V-1 to separate the specimens from different
sites, placing the V-1 form on top of the set of specimens for a particular site. Form V-1 lists
the flora and field guides used in plant identification at the site and this information may be
useful to the QA botanists. Make 2 copies of the completed Form V-1 for each site
represented for which specimens are present. Include one copy with the QA specimens for
the site, send the original to the Information Management Team with the completed site
Data Packet, and retain one for your records (see Chapter 2).
4) Fill out a Form T-2: Unknown Plant Sample Tracking and/or a Form T-3: Form QA Plant
Sample Tracking for the specimens being shipped, transported, or stored for later
identification.
a) Fill out all contact, shipping, and custody information at the top of the form.
b) For each row in the body of the form fill in the Site ID, Visit Number, and Collection Date
(Sample Date) for each site from which specimens originate, and then list the collection
numbers for the specimens associated with each site.
c) Ensure that all information recorded on these forms corresponds to the information on
the Plant Specimen Tags and Plant Specimen Labels accompanying the specimens.
5-43
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
5) Carefully pack the assembled specimen folders into shipping boxes. Place cardboard
dividers between groups of specimen folders to provide extra protection. Make sure the box
is full or padded so no space is available for specimens to shift around and get damaged.
6) Make 2 copies of each of the completed tracking forms. Place a copy of the completed
Form T-2 on top of the specimens in the box in which the unknown specimens are shipped
or stored, and ensure that the form will be easily visible to the person unpacking the box
upon its arrival at the designated office, lab, or herbarium. Similarly, place a copy of the
completed Form T-3 on top of the specimens in the box in which the QA voucher specimens
are shipped or stored. When the batched specimens are shipped, immediately transmit the
original T-2 and T-3 Forms to the Information Management Team. Retain a copy for your
records. See Chapter 2 for details of copying and handling tracking forms.
7) Ship or transport the boxes to the designated office or herbarium for identification (Figure 5-
9). Note that in some cases the Botanist/Ecologist or a State Botanist may be conducting
some of the identification of unknowns. In other cases, the specimens will be shipped
directly to a designated plant lab or herbarium.
8) The NWCA-LOM (USEPA 2011 a) provides procedures for 1) identification of unknown
specimens, 2) verification of species identities for a subset of the unknowns identified by the
lab or herbarium, 3) specimen tracking during the identification/verification process, and 4)
data entry for linking pseudonyms for unknown species with their scientific names once they
have been identified, 5) identification of QA voucher specimens, and 6) reconciliation of
nomenclature to the USDA PLANTS database.
la)-Field Crew
Botanist/Ecologist, or Other
State Botanist or Herbarium
selected by State to identify
unknowns
2a) - Quality Assurance Species
(5 randomly selected species of known
identity for QA verification, 1
species/Veg Plot)
Ib) - EcoAnalysts Plant Lab
3) - Independent Botanist
•For specimens from 2a - not the person
who collected the QA specimens in the field
•For specimens from 2b: - not the person
who identified these species
2b) -10% of species identified in steps la or
Ib, randomly selected for QA verification
Figure 5-9. Plant specimen destinations for identification and verification (see
Chapter 2, Appendix A, and NWCA-LOM (USEPA 2011 a) for details).
5-44
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.2.6 Data Handling
At the end of the sampling day, after you have reviewed the vegetation data forms arrange the
completed forms in order and place them in the Data Packet for the AA. See Chapter 2 for
protocols on copying and shipping the completed data forms to the Information Management
Team and Appendix D for transmitting any photos of plants or vegetation that may have been
taken.
5.3 LITERATURE CITED
Bourdaghs, M., C.A. Johnston, and R.R. Regal. 2006. Properties and performance of the
floristic quality index in Great Lakes coastal wetlands. Wetlands 26:718-735.
FGDC (Federal Geographic Data Committee). 2008. National Vegetation Classification
Standard, Version 2. FGDC-STD-005-2008. http://www.fgdc.gov/standards/proiects/FGDC-
standards-proiects/vegetation/fgdc-endorse-NVCS-V2. Vegetation Subcommittee, Federal
Geographic Data Committee.
Jennings, M.D., D. Faber-Langendoen, R.K. Peet, O.L. Loucks, D.C. Glenn-Lewin, A. Damman,
M.G. Barbour, R. Pfister, D. Grossman, D.H. Roberts, D. Tart, M. Walker, S.S. Talbot, J.
Walker, G.S. Hartshorn, G. Waggoner, M.D. Abrams, A. Hill, and M. Rejmanek. 2008.
Description, Documentation, and Evaluation of Associations and Alliances of The U.S. National
Vegetation Classification. Version 5.2.
(http://esa.org/vegweb/docFiles/ESA Guidelines Version 5.2.pdf,
http://esa.org/vegweb/docFiles/ESA Guidelines Version 5.2 Appendices.pdf). Ecological
Society of America Panel on Vegetation Classification.
Lee, M.T., R.K. Peet, S.D. Roberts, and T.R. Wentworth. 2008. CVS-EEP Protocol for
Recording Vegetation: All Levels of Plot Sampling. Version 2008. The Carolina Vegetation
Survey (CVS, http://cvs.bio.unc.edu) and the North Carolina Ecosystem Enhancement Program
(EEP, http://www.nceep.net).
Lopez, R.D., and M.S. Fennessy. 2002. Testing the floristic quality assessment index as an
indicator of wetland condition. Ecological Applications 12:487-497.
Mack, J.J. 2007. Integrated Wetland Assessment Program. Part 9: Field Manual for the
Vegetation Index of Biotic Integrity for Wetlands ver. 1.4. Ohio EPA Technical Report
WET/2004-9. Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Wetland Ecology Group, Division of
Surface Water, Columbus, OH.
Mack, J.J. and M.E. Kentula. 2010. Metric similarity in vegetation-based wetland assessment
methods. EPA/600/R-10/140. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and
Development, Washington, DC.
Magee, T.K., S.E. Gwin, R.G. Gibson, C.C. Holland, J.E. Honea, P.W. Shaffer, J.C. Sifneos,
and M.E. Kentula. 1993. Research Plan and Methods Manual for the Oregon Wetlands Study.
EPA/600/R-93/072. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Research
Laboratory, Corvallis, OR.
5-45
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
Magee, T.K., P.L. Ringold, and M.A. Bollman. 2008. Alien species importance in native
vegetation along wadeable streams, John Day River basin, Oregon, USA. Plant Ecology
195:287-307.
Magee, T.K., P.L. Ringold, M.A. Bollman, andT.L. Ernst. 2010. Index of Alien Impact: A
method for evaluating ecological impact of alien plant species. Environmental Management
45:75-778.
Meinke, R.J. andT.N. Kaye. 2007. Kalmiopsis fragrans (Ericaceae), a new distylous species
from the southern Cascade Mountains of Oregon. Journal of Botanical Research Institute of
Texas 1:9-19.
Peet, R.K., T.R. Wentworth, and P.S. White. 1998. A flexible, multipurpose method for
recording vegetation composition and structure. Castena 63:262-274.
Pino, J., X. Font, J. Carbo, M. Jove, and L. Pallares. 2005. Large-scale correlates of alien plant
invasion in Catalonia (NE of Spain). Biological Conservation 122:339-350.
Quetier, F., S. Lavorel, W. Thuiller, and I. Davies. 2007. Plant-trait-based modeling
assessment of ecosystem-service sensitivity to land-use change. Ecological Applications
17:2377-2386.
Rocchio, J. 2007. Assessing ecological condition of headwater wetlands in the Southern Rocky
Mountains using a vegetation index of biotic integrity (Version 1.0). Colorado State University,
Colorado Natural Heritage Program, Fort Collins, Colorado.
University of Florida Herbarium. 2009. Preparation of Plant Specimens for Deposit as
Herbarium Vouchers, http://www.flmnh.ufl.edu/herbarium/voucher.htm,
(http://www.flmnh.ufl.edu/herbarium/gifs/plantpress1.ipg,
http://www.flmnh.ufl.edu/herbarium/gifs/PressedPlant1.ipg, Accessed June 12, 2009.
USDA, NRCS (U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service).
2010. The PLANTS Database (http://plants.usda.gov, 27 December 2010). National Plant Data
Center, Baton Rouge, LA 70874-4490 USA.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2002. Methods for Evaluating Wetland
Condition: #10 Using Vegetation to Assess Environmental Conditions in Wetlands. EPA-822-
R-02-020, Office of Water, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011 a. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Laboratory Operations Manual. EPA/843/R10/002. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011b. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Quality Assurance Project Plan. EPA/843/R10/003. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011c. National Wetland Condition
Assesssment: Site Evaluation Guidelines EPA/843/R10/004. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Washington, D.C.
5-46
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Preparation. Ecological Indicators for the
2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment. EPA-XXX-YY-0000. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Review. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: USA-RAM Field Operations Manual. EPA/XXX/R-XX/XXX. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
WIPP (Wisconsin Invasive Plants Project). 2008.
http://www.ipaw.org/mapping/voucherhandout.pdf. Accessed December 2008.
5-47
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5-48
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5.4 VEGETATION PROTOCOL CHECKLISTS AND REFERENCE CARDS
Brief summaries of the major tasks to be completed for the Vegetation Sampling Protocols are
provided in this section.
Vegetation Protocol Checklist
The Vegetation Protocol Task Checklist is for use during field sampling to aid in directing the
order of work, to ensure all data and specimens have been collected, and all tasks are
completed.
Reference Cards Summarizing Vegetation Protocols
These paired figures are intended to be printed, and laminated if desired, on the front (side A)
and back (side B) of durable card stock, so that they can be carried for easy reference when
conducting field work.
Reference Card V-1: Flowchart of Vegetation Protocol Tasks
Reference Card V-2, Side A and Side B: Key for Veg Plot Placement and Examples of Plot
Layout Configurations
Reference Card V-3, Side A: Vegetation Plot Establishment
Reference Card V-3, Side B: Veg Plot Configuration and Data Collection Summary
Reference Card V-4, Side A: Cover Estimation Procedures
Reference Card V-4, Side B: Assigning Pseudonyms for Unknown Plant Species
5-49
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5-50
-------
NWCA 2011 Vegetation Protocol Task Checklist Page 1
Pre-sampling and Plot Establishment Activities
1) Organize data forms and assemble vegetation sampling equipment.
2) Determine the Vegetation Plot Layout configuration and plot locations within the AA
(Section 5.1.1, Reference Card V-2).
3) Establish the five Vegetation Plots (Section 5.1.2, Reference Card V-3, Side A).
Activities Key to all Veg Data Collection (Section 5.1.3.1)
1) Botanist/Ecologist and Botanist Assistant determine approach to sampling
• Often it will be efficient for the Botanist/Ecologist and Botanist Assistant to work
together with the Botanist Assistant recording data as the Botanist/Ecologist makes
observations.
• At other times, it may be more convenient for the Botanist/Ecologist to make all
observations that require identification or cover estimation of individual plant species,
while the Botanist Assistant collects data on cover of vegetation strata, ground
surface types, groups of non-vascular taxa, and count data for trees and snags.
2) If needed the Botanist Assistant compiles a list of the scientific names or pseudonyms
for shrub and tree species on his/her clipboard for use in collecting tree count data
(Form V-4).
3) Fill out all header information on all data forms and plant specimen labels during
sampling.
4) List floras used field identification (Form V-1) at the Site being sampled.
5) Follow procedures on Reference Card V-4, Side B for assigning pseudonyms for
unknown plant species.
6) Collect specimens for unknown plant species and five QA vouchers for known species,
making certain to assign Plant Sample ID Numbers and ensuring all tracking information
always remains with the specimens (Section 5.1.3.1 and Section 5.2).
Major Data Collection Activities for each Veg Plot (Sections 5.1.3.2-5.1.3.9, Reference
Cards V-3, Side B and V-4)
1) Collect the USA-RAM (Metrics 4-12) data in the AA.
2) Make presence observations for all vascular species occurring within the two corner
quadrat nests (Section 5.1.3.2, Form V-2).
3) Complete species list for the 100-m2 Veg Plot.
4) Make cover estimates, and note the vertical height class for all individual vascular plant
species in each 100-m2 Veg Plot (Section 5.1.3.4, Form V-2).
5) Determine predominant S&T class (Section 5.1.3.5, Form V-3 (Front)).
6) Make cover estimates for vascular vegetation strata (Section 5.1.3.6, Form V-3 (Front)).
7) Make cover estimates and collect associated occurrence data for non-vascular
taxonomic groups (Sections 5.1.3.7, Form V-3 (Front)).
8) Collect data on ground surface attributes (Section 5.1.3.8, Form V-3 (Back)).
9) Count snags (> 5cm DBH) by estimated diameter class; count trees (> 5cm DBH) by
species and estimated diameter class; estimate cover of trees by species by height class
(Section 5.1.3.9, Form V-4).
10) If needed take photos of threatened, endangered, or sensitive plant species.
-------
NWCA 2011 Vegetation Protocol Task Checklist Page 2
Field Day Wrap-Up Activities - At the Site
1) Double check that all unknown and QA voucher specimens have been collected
(Section 5.2.1).
2) Review all Vegetation Data Forms:
Botanist/Ecologist - Review Forms V-2 and V-4 for errors in species names and
missing data. Make any needed corrections.
Botanist Assistant - Review Forms V-1 and V-3 for missing data.
Veg Team - If needed, return to Veg Plots of AA and collect any missing information.
3) Collect and organize Veg equipment and samples for transport back to the vehicle.
4) Time permitting, Botanist/Ecologist key out unknown plant species. For unknowns
confidently keyed to species, update pseudonyms to scientific names on Forms V-2, V-
4.
5) Botanist Assistant remove all flagging and markers, unless the site will receive a repeat
sampling visit.
6) Veg Team assist the AB (if they are still working), or, if numerous plant specimens have
been collected return to the vehicle to begin pressing plants.
a) Before leaving the AA make a final check to ensure no equipment, data, or samples
are left behind. If leaving for the vehicle prior to the AB Team, carry selected AB
Team equipment and samples to the vehicle.
b) To prevent spread of potentially harmful organisms and invasive species between
research sites; employ ZERO TAXA TRANSPORT protocols (Chapter 2).
Decontaminate equipment, shoes, clothing and person as thoroughly as possible
before leaving the site.
Field Day Wrap-Up Activities - At the Vehicle
1) Press plant specimens (see Section 5.2.2):
a) Plant specimens are pressed at the vehicle whenever possible. If this is not feasible
due to safety issues of parking location or weather, then plants may be pressed upon
arrival at the field lodging location at the end of the day.
b) Pressing specimens might be facilitated by forming an assembly line of all four crew
members (Veg + AB Team). Be sure to affix a completed Plant Sample Tag on the
newsprint for each specimen and place the Plant Specimen Label inside the
newsprint with each specimen (see Sections 5.2.2 and 5.2.3).
c) Record the number of plant specimens collected at the site on Form T-1.
2) Organize the completed forms into the Data Packet for the AA.
3) If the vehicle is some distance from the AA, again decontaminate equipment, shoes,
clothing and person at the vehicle to prevent spread of potentially harmful organisms
and invasive species between research sites. Employ ZERO TAXA TRANSPORT
protocols (Chapter 2).
4) Return all vegetation equipment and supplies to their standard locations in the vehicle.
Plant Specimen Drying and Shipping (Sections 5.2.4 and 5.2.5)
1) Deliver the full presses to the home base where they can be completely dried. Pick up
empty presses for next field trip.
2) Once plant specimens are dry, carefully pack them, being certain to include the
appropriate tracking forms, then ship or deliver to the designated office/lab/herbarium.
3) If Botanist/Ecologist is involved during non-field days or post-field season in plant
specimen identification and data form or spreadsheet update with correcting
pseudonyms to scientific names, follow the procedures outlined in the NWCA-LOM
(USEPA2011a).
-------
Reference Card V-1. Flowchart of Vegetation Protocol Tasks
Collecting Vegetation Data in the AA
Select Veg Plot Layout configuration appropriate
for the AA (Reference Card V-2).
Establish five 100-m (lOXlOm) Veg Plots at the
locations designated for the selected Veg Plot Layout
(Reference Cards V-2 and V-3, Side A; Form V-1).
Once all five Veg Plots are established, collect the
following data for each Veg Plot.
1. Plant species presence in nested 1-m2 and 10-m2
quadrats in the SW and NE corners of the 100-m2 Veg
Plot, and across the 100-m2 Veg Plot (Reference Card V-
3, Side B; Forms V-2a,b).
/" >
2. Percent cover estimates for all individual
3. Predominant Status &Trends Wetland Class
for the 100-m2 Veg Plot (Form V-3 (Front)).
vascular plant species across the entire 100-m
Veg Plot and identification of the primary height
class in which each species occurs (Reference
Cards V-3, Side B and V-4; Forms V-2a, b).
J
4. Percent cover estimates across the 100-m2 Veg Plot
for Vascular Vegetation Strata: a) submerged aquatic
vegetation, b) floating aquatic vegetation, c), lianas,
vines and epiphytes, d) all other vascular vegetation
by height class (Form V-3 (Front)).
5. Percent cover estimates across the 100-m2 Veg
Plot for non-vascular groups (ground bryophytes,
ground lichens, arboreal bryophytes and lichens,
filamentous or mat forming algae, and
macroalgae) (Form V-3 (Front)).
6. Data describing ground surface
attributes across the 100-m2 Veg
Plot (Form V-3 (Back)).
7. Across the 100-m Veg Plot (Forms V-4a, b):
• Percent cover estimates of live tree species by height class.
• Counts of live trees by species and diameter class.
• Counts of standing dead trees and snags by diameter class.
Plant Specimen Collection, Processing, and Shipping
Collect specimens for all unknown
plant species.
Randomly select and collect five known plant
species for each AA for Quality Assurance check.
Complete Plant Sample Tag and Plant Specimen Label for each plant sample; then press specimen.
Record number of plant samples collected at the site on Form T-l: Site and Sample Status/WRS
Tracking.
Dry specimens; then ship or deliver to designated herbarium or laboratory, enclosing the appropriate
plant specimen tracking information (Form T-2 or T-3) in the shipping box.
Refer to 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual - Chapter 5 for detail on protocols summarized on this card.
-------
-------
Reference Card V-2, Side A. Key for Veg Plot Placement and Examples of Plot Layout Configurations.
Examples of Additional Layout Configurations on Side B. Note scales vary among example diagrams.
Key for Selecting Veg Plot Layout Configuration within the Assessment Area (AA)
la AA type, any; no obstacles to Veg Plot placement
2a AA is %-ha circle Standard Veg Plot Layout - Circular AA (Plate 1)
2b AA is not a circle or is < % ha Alternate Veg Plot Layouts go to 3
3a AA is a % ha polygon 4
4a AA has width and length > 30m Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Plate 2)
4b AA is < 30m wide Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout (Plate 3)
3b AA< % ha, but >0.1ha; a polygon equaling wetland boundary Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout (Plate 4)
Ib AA type, any; obstacles (deep water; wide, deep channels; cliffs, other physical barriers, etc.) to Veg Plot placement
ObstacleMeg Plot Layout (Plate 5)
[X] AA Center
Plot placement line
O
AA boundaries
Shallow water
Deep water (not sampleable)
Patterns = Community types
Plate 1. Standard Veg Plot Layout -
Circular AA (1A hectare)
40m
Place Veg Plots at specified locations on plot placement
lines oriented through the AA CENTER on cardinal
directions. Veg Plot 1 is placed 2m from the CENTER.
Plate 2. Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout -AA=1A hectare polygon, width
and length > 30m.
E
5
Example A
Example B
40m
82m
Place Veg Plots along plot placement lines originating from CENTER
and defined by long and short axes of AA.
Example A - Wide Polygon AAs with width > 40 m: Place Veg Plots in a
configuration matching the Standard Veg Plot Layout as closely as possible,
while distributing Veg Plots relatively evenly along plot placement lines.
Example B - Wide Polygon AAs with width 30 to 40 m: Place 1 Veg Plot
mid-way between the CENTER and AA boundary along only one placement
line of the short axis, and 4 Veg Plots at uniform distances along long axis.
Refer to 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 5. Vegetation, Section 5.1.1 - Placement of the Vegetation Plots) for more detail on protocols summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card V-2, Side B. Plot Layout Configuration continued
Plate 3. Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout - AA is a 1A-ha polygon < 30 wide
Example A:
165m
For Polygon AAs 25 to 30m
wide, alternate Veg plots
along one plot placement
line oriented on the long
axis of the AA.
Example B
For Polygon AAs 20
to 25m wide, center
Veg plots along one
plot placement line
oriented on the long
axis of the AA.
Plate 4. Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout - AA (0.1ha to <
0.5ha) = wetland boundary
Example A: AA = 0.14ha
40m
Example B: AA = 0.20ha
Example C: AA = 0.22ha
Distribute the 5 Veg Plots using the most
efficient arrangement to fit them in and
cover the AA. Where possible arrange
Veg Plots to conform with Standard or
Polygon Layout configurations.
Orient Veg Plots on cardinal directions
when possible, but if space is limiting
orient individual Veg Plots to bearings
allowing them to fit in the AA.
Plate 5. Obstacle Veg Plot Layout - AA any type
Obstacles prohibit placement of Veg Plots at designated
locations for the appropriate Veg Layout configuration.
Distribute Veg Plots as closely as possible to locations
designated in the Veg Layout Configuration appropriate to AA
type, while avoiding obstacles and aiming for at least 10m
between Veg Plots.
40m
Example A: Standard Circular AA = 0.5ha
60m
Example B: Wetland Boundary AA = 0.4ha
Refer to 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 5. Vegetation, Section 5.1.1 - Placement of the Vegetation Plots) for more detail on protocols summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card V-3. Side A - Vegetation Plot Establishment
NW
'NE
100-m2Plot
N
sw
SE
10m
Durable Cord or Rope with marks at 5-m Intervals: —
Corner Flagging: Q Mid-Point Edge Flagging:/S
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 5. Vegetation, Section 5.1.2
Establishing the Vegetation Plots) for more detail on protocols summarized on this card.
Setting up the Veg Plot
• On Form V-1, record the Veg Plot location in relation to the AA
center in the Estimated Distance field. In the Bearing field record the
bearing from the AA Center along the plot placement line to the
closest corner the Veg Plot.
• Use a compass and measuring device to delineate the outside
edges of each Veg Plot. A convenient way to do this is with four 10-
m lengths of durable (e.g., nylon) rope or cord on which the 5-m
interval is marked with brightly colored waterproof tape.
• If leaving the ropes in place to bound the Veg Plot, pin them using
U-shaped pins, tent stakes, or surveyor's arrows (also called
chaining pins).
• When stretching tapes or lines along a compass bearing, there will
occasionally be some drift related to obstacles and slope. Some drift
is acceptable, but try to keep the Veg Plot relatively square and
constant in area. The following steps can help align the square when
laying out the sides of the plot:
1) Mark out one 10-m edge.
2) Mark out one perpendicular edge, 90 degrees from the first.
3) Return to first edge and mark opposing perpendicular edge.
4) Check square by laying fourth rope between the far ends of the
perpendicular edges.
Mark this line last
Mark this line first
Mark corners and mid-points of each side of the plot with different
colored flagging or pin flags, e.g., fluorescent pink or red for
corners, blue for mid-points of the plot edges.
If removing the rope lines (e.g., only one set of ropes is available for
measuring all plots), use additional flagging as needed to ensure
Veg Plot boundaries are easily visible during sampling, particularly
where vegetation is dense with shrubs or trees.
-------
Reference Card V-3, Side B - Veg Plot Configuration and Data Collection Summary
100-m2VegPlot
1m2
10m2
NE Quadrat Nest
10m2
1m2
SW Quadrat Nest
10m
3.16m
1.00m
Establishing Quadrat Nests:
1. Outside edges of quadrats: Formed by a meter tape, marked cords,
or flagging defining boundary of the 100-m2 Veg Plot.
2. Inside edges of 10-m2 quadrat: Formed using 6.32m length of
brightly colored rope/cord with the mid-point marked to define
inside corner, or two 3.16m PVC poles (poles may break down to
shorter lengths for easy of carrying).
3. Inside edges of 1-m2 quadrat frame: Formed by two 1-m wooden
slats, a 2m length of cord with midpoint marked, or two 1-m PVC
poles (poles can be joined with an elbow joint in the field).
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 5. Vegetation - Section 5.1.3
Vegetation Data Collection ) for more detail on protocols summarized on this card.
Species Presence Data
1. For each species present in the SW or NE Nest (rooted in or
overhanging), record its name/pseudonym and the smallest quadrat in
which it occurs (S = 1-m2 or M = 10-m2 quadrat); Form V-2: Vascular
Plant Species Presence and Cover.
2. Complete one quadrat nest, then sample the nest in the other corner.
3. Once both corner nests have been searched, examine the entire 100-m2
Veg Plot for additional species. Record these species on Form V-2.
4. If a species does not occur in a particular nest, but occurs in the 100-m2
Veg Plot, record L (large plot) for that nest.
Data to Collect in 100-m2 Veg Plot
1. All individual vascular plant species; Form V-2
• Estimate cover (0-100%) for each species observed in the 100-m2
Veg Plot
• Record the primary height class in which it occurs: 1= <0.5m, 2 =
>0.5-2m, 3 = >2-5m, 4 = >5-15m, 5 = >15-30m, 6 = >30m, E = liana,
vine, or epiphyte species (may occur in any height class).
2. Vertical strata for vascular vegetation - Estimate cover for the following
vegetation strata; Form V-3: NWCA Vegetation Types (Front).
• Submerged aquatic vegetation (0-100%)
• Floating aquatic vegetation (0-100%)
• Lianas, vines, and epiphytes (0-100%)
• All other vascular vegetation by height class : >30m, >15-30m , >5-
15m, >2-5m, >0.5-2m, < 0.5m (0-100% for each class).
3. Non-vascular vegetation groups - Estimate cover of and collect
categorical data for ground bryophytes, ground lichens, arboreal
bryophytes and lichens, filamentous mat forming algae, and macroalgae;
Form V-3 (Front).
4. Ground surface attributes - Collect data on water cover, water depth,
bareground, litter, and dead woody material; Form V-3: Ground Surface
Attributes (Back).
5. Tree species cover and counts - For all tree species, estimate cover by
height classes and count stems > 5cm diameter breast height (DBH) by
DBH class (5-10, 11-25, 26-50, 51-75, 76-100, 101-200, and > 200cm) by
species; Form V-4: Snag and Tree Counts and Tree Cover.
6. Standing dead trees and snags (angle of incline > 45°) - Count stems >
5cm DBH by DBH class (5-10,11-25, 26-50, 51-75, 76-100, 101-200, and
> 200cm); Form V-4.
-------
Reference Card V-4, Side A. Cover Estimation Procedures
Estimating Cover in 100-m2 Veg Plots
1. Cover estimates for various entities (individual plant
species, vegetation height strata, non-vascular
taxonomic groups, and ground surface attributes) are
made in all five 100-m2 Veg Plots in an AA. Cover data
are recorded on Forms V-2a,b, Forms V-3a,b, and Forms
V-4a,b.
2. Cover estimates for individual plant species, vegetation
height strata, and non-vascular groups are made for
organisms rooted-in or over-hanging a Veg Plot.
3. Cover determinations for a particular entity of interest
are made by estimating the percentage of ground space
in a 100-m2 Veg Plot overlain by the canopies of all
individuals or patches of that entity.
4. Cover values may range from 0 to 100% for a particular
individual species or entity. Because species or other
entities often overlie one another vertically, the
combined cover for all species or entities may often
exceed 100%.
5. Estimate cover directly as the percentage (0 to 100%) of
the plot area covered by the species or entity under
consideration. Cover may be estimated in 1%
increments, however, do not deliberate excessively over
values for cover estimates. For values < 1%, record 0.1%.
6. The figure to the right illustrates some examples of
different levels of percent cover across 100-m2 Veg Plots.
Refer to 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 5. Vegetation -
Section 5.1.3 Vegetation Data Collection ) for more detail on protocols
summarized on this card.
< 1%,
Record as 0.1%
1%
2%
4%
35%
45%
55%
65%
75%
85%
95%
100%
Examples of Percent Cover Estimates. Each large square = a 100-m2 Veg Plot,
grid squares = 1m2 = 1% cover in a Veg Plot, shaded areas represent cover of an
individual species, a vegetation stratum, or of a non-vascular species group.
-------
Reference Card V-4, Side B. Assigning Pseudonyms for Unknown Plant Species
Assigning Pseudonyms for Unknown Plant Species-
The Botanist/Ecologist makes pseudonym assignments for unknown plant species using the
following rules:
»Mf the genus name is known, but the species name is not, then a number and short description
of identifying characteristics is substituted for the species epithet. For example:
• Carex 1 - winged stem
• Carex 2 -tussock
• Carex 3 - bidentate perigynia
• Carex 4 - striped scale
• Salix 1 - acuminate leaf
• Salix 2 - hairy under-leaf.
• Numbers indicate how many unknowns occur in a single genus at a site and should be
included even if there is only one unknown in the genus.
»»»Where neither the genus nor species names are known, devise a descriptive name that reflects
growth habit, microhabitat, or some distinctive morphological feature. For example:
• bunchgrass 1
• pinnate-lf. aquatic herb
• decid. low shrub simple lin. If.
»»»Where numerous unknown taxa occur, it may be useful to carry examples of the plants, in small
individual 'tagged bouquets', to keep pseudonyms straight. This is especially relevant if a single
genus has several unknown representatives on the site.
Refer to 2011 NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 5. Vegetation - Section 5.1.3 Vegetation
Data Collection) for more detail on protocols summarized on this card.
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 5. Vegetation
5.5 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORMS, SPECIMEN LABELS
The equipment lists, data forms, specimen labels, and vegetation checklist needed for
Vegetation sampling are summarized in the table below. Individual forms are presented on the
pages following this table.
Vegetation Equipment Checklist,
Forms and Labels
Vegetation Equipment and Supply Checklist
Form V-1 - Vegetation Plot Establishment
Form V-2 (a and b) - Vascular Species
Presence and Cover
Form V-3 (front) - Vegetation Types
Form V-3 (back) - Ground Surface Attributes
Form V-4 (a and b ) Snag and Tree Counts
and Tree Cover
Plant Sample Tag
Plant Specimen Label
Form T-2 - Unknown Plant Sample Tracking
Form T-3 -QA Plant Sample Tracking
Number Needed Per AA
1 checklist
1 form
1 set per Veg Plot (number of V-2b pages
depends on number of species present)
1 form
1 set per Veg Plot (number of V-4b pages
depends on number of tree species)
1 sample per specimen collected -
adhesive tags, number/AA varies based
on number of plant specimens collected
1 label per plant specimen, number/AA
varies based on number of plant
specimens collected
Form included with batched plant samples
for shipping
Form included with batched plant samples
for shipping
Note: Form T-1 - Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking is found in Chapter 2.
5-61
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapters. Vegetation
5-62
-------
NWCA 2011 VEGETATION EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY CHECKLIST
Protocols, forms, checklists, supplies
This equipment checklist
Vegetation protocol checklist
Reference Cards V-1, V-2, V3, and V-4
Available plant species lists pertinent to the
site and/or region (wetland species, alien
species, threatened and endangered
species)
Data Forms on waterproof paper:
Form V-1 -Vegetation Plot Establishment
Form V-2a and V-2b - Vascular Species
Presence and Cover
Form V-3 - Vegetation Types and Ground
Surface Attributes
Form V-4a and V-4b - Snag and Tree Counts
and Tree Cover
Form T2 (Unknown) and T-3 (QA) - Plant
Specimen Tracking
Waterproof field notebook
2 covered clip boards, with storage for
completed forms
Sharpies or similar marker (one silver for
annotating aerial photos, regular pencils,
mechanical pencils, extra leads)
Plant identification in the field or vehicle
Regional floras
2 10X hand lenses
Dissecting tools (e.g., single edge razor
blades, forceps, and dissecting needles)
6-cm ruler for measuring plant parts during
field keying
Plot establishment and data collection
(Note a variety of different supplies can be used
for plot set-up, select appropriate gear)
1 set of 2-way radios
Compass
GPS unit
Laser rangefinder
Reflector for sighting rangefinder
Diameter measuring tape (cm) to calibrate
investigators to make tree DBH estimates
(carry until calibrated, then leave in vehicle)
50-m tape
Two 20-m or four 10-m lengths of strong,
durable cord/rope1; carry 1 to 4 sets of one or
the other lengths of cord depending on site
distance from road.
Plot establishment and data collection
continued
As needed: tent stakes, U-shaped pins, or
surveyors' arrows for securing meter tapes
and/or ropes to demarcate plots
40 to 50 pin flags (recommend two bright
colors with 1/2 of pins in each color) and pouch
for carrying
Bright colored flagging in 2 colors
Inside edges of 10-m2 quadrat: two 3.16-m
PVC poles with decimeter points marked in
red2 (poles may break down to two shorter
lengths for easy of carrying, one segment/pole
= 1 m), or one 6.32-m rope
Inside edges of 1-m2 quadrat frame: two 1 -
m PVC poles (1m lengths from 3.16m
segmented pole) that can be connected with
an elbow joint in the field, or two 1 -m wooden
slats
Plant specimen collection, processing,
and shipping
Trowel for obtaining plant specimens with
intact roots
Clippers/pruners
Twist-tie tags or flagging for marking unknown
species that may be carried in small 'bouquets'
for reference during sampling
Gallon size zipper plastic bags and kitchen
size white trash bags for collecting plant
specimens
White garbage bag for consolidating collection
bags
Ice chest (kept in vehicle)
At least 2 large plant presses (kept in vehicle)
loaded with blotters, cardboard ventilators, and
newsprint, compression straps, small
envelopes for loose plant parts
At least 2 extra complete plant presses (kept
at base location to exchange for full presses)
Plant Specimen Tracking Tags
Plant Specimen Labels
At base location, plant specimen folders and
shipping boxes for shipping plant specimens to
herbaria for identification
Durable cord (e.g., nylon)/rope in 10 or 20m lengths
- with 5m points with blue tape, 10m points with red
tape.
PVC poles with decimeter marks can also be used as
measuring sticks
-------
-------
FORM V-1: NWCA VEGETATION PLOT ESTABLISHMENT (Front) Reviewed byimmai):
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
Vegetation Plot Layout - Fill in the bubble for the Vegetation Plot Layout configuration used in this AA (see Reference
Card V-1 for descriptions of plot layout configurations).
O Standard Veg Plot Layout -1/2 ha Circular AA (Veg Plots on 2 Axes, cardinal directions from AA Center)
Alternate Veg Plot Layouts
Q Wide Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout -1/2 ha Polygon AAwith width and length >30m (Veg Plots on 2 axes)
Q Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout - 1/2-ha Polygon AA < 30m wide (Veg Plots on 1 axis)
O Wetland Boundary AA Veg Plot Layout - AA <1/2-ha polygon equal to wetland boundary (Veg Plots distr juted)
If obstacles prevent placement of plot(s) in the locations designated by the Veg Plot Layout se.^cu d a'>ove, a/so fill in
the bubble for Obstacle Veg Plot Layout below
^) Obstacle Veg Plot Layout (Describe obstacles in Notes section on the back of this form)
Plot locations in Relation to AA Center
Plot
Plotl
Plot 2
Plot3
Plot 4
Plots
Estimated Distance (m)1
Bearing2
M OT
3asea ~*n
Mpjnetic or
True North
OM OT
OM OT
1 Estimated distance from
AA Center to the closest
plot corner (e.g., determine
with meter tape, rangefinder,
or by pacing)
2Bearing from the AA Center
along plot placement line to
the closest plot corner.
Add the locations of the Veg Plots and Soil Pits to the aerial phot < annotated during AA establishment, or if no photo is available to AA sketch
map on Form AA-1. Number Veg Plots 1 through 5 using r uidelines on Reference Card V-1. Label Soil Pits, A-D, as determined by the AB Team. If
appropriate, record the nature and direction of environ.ner, ~\\ gradients (e.g., slope, water depth, etc.), water bodies, and major vegetation
patches in the notes section on the back of this forr..
Plant Species Nomenclature: Plant spt-if5 na nes must be based on USDA-PLANTS (http://plants.usda.gov/)
O USDA-PLANTS - Fill to indicate names for plant species observed at this site have been reconciled to USDA-PLANTS.
Record citations for Flora?'Field ouides/Databases used for plant identification
1.
3.
4.
5.
NWCA Vegetation Plot Establishment 01/21/2011
5049429474
-------
FORM V-1: NWCA VEGETATION PLOT ESTABLISHMENT (Back) Reviewedbyonmai,: |
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
NOTES:
If needed elaborate on reasons for plot layout selection and make notes about unique features of vegetation or environment.
5400429475
NWCA Vegetation Plot Establishment 01/21/2011
-------
g FORM V-2a: NWCA VASCULAR SPECIES PRESENCE AND COVER (Front) Reviewed byimmai): |
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1 Page 1 Of
Instructions:
1. General: Print using ALL CAPITAL LETTERS. Write as neatly as possible, keeping all marks within data fields or workspace areas.
2. Species Name: List binomial name or pseudonym for each plant species observed in the Veg Plots (See the NWCA FOM for Pseudonym assignment rules).
3. Presence Data: For each species occurring in a quadrat nest (SW or NE corners of Veg Plot) , record the smallest quadrat/plot size in which t occurs by filling in the appropriate bubble (S (small) = 1-m2 quadrat,
M (medium) = 10-m2 quadrat.) If a species does not occur in a particular nest, but occurs in the 100-m2 Veg Plot, fill in the L (large) bubble for that nest.
4. Predominant Height Class: For each species observed, note its predominant height across each 100-m2 Veg Plot by recording the appropriate height class code (defined below).
5. Cover Data: Estimate cover across each 100-m2 Veg Plot (0 to 100%; See NWCA-FOM) for each species observed and record in the Cover data field. If necessary, use the gray workspace to make preliminary cover
estimates for each species in each of the four quarters of the Veg Plot, and then combine preliminary estimates to obtain total cover for the species in the Veg Plot and record in the Cover data field.
6. Collect Specimens and Assign Collection Numbers: For each Unknown Species (U) or designated Quality Assurance (QA) specimen collected fill in the appropriate bubble in the Complete if Collecting column. Once
collected, assign collection numbers, beginning with 1, consecutively in order of observation or collection.
O Fill bubble to confirm empty data fields for a species in a particular plot mean 1) for presence or height class, -pt'ies not present, or 2) for %Cover fields, cover = 0 zero.
Complete
if
Collecting
U
QA
I
I
©
©
©
I
©
©
©
©
Coll
#
Height Classes (except E, which may occur in any verbal stratum):
1 = <0.5m, 2 = >0.5-2m, 3 = >2-5m, 4= >5-15m, 5 = >15-30m, 6 = >30m, and E = liana, vine or epiphyte species
Species Name or Pseudonym
Plotl
SW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NE
|
1
1
|
|
|
1
1
|
|
Ht.
Class
%
Cover
Work
Space
Plot 2
SW
1
g
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NE
§
o
o
§
§
§
§
§
§
1
Ht.
Class
%
Cover
Work
b, ice
JW
|
o
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
1
Plots
NE
|
1
1
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
Ht.
Class
%
Cover
Work
Space
Plot 4
SW
1
o
§
§
§
§
§
§
§
1
NE
§
|
1
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
Ht.
Class
%
Cover
Work
Space
Plots
SW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NE
|
1
1
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
Ht.
Class
%
Cover
Work
Space
Flag
Flag codes: E= End of species lisx, no more species observed (place in row following last recorded species on last page of Form V-2), K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement.
F1,F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comment section on back side of form.
1795292803 1
NWCA Vascular Plant Species Presence and Cover (Front) 01/21/2011
-------
FORM V-2a: NWCA VASCULAR SPECIES PRESENCE AND COVER (Back)
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
Reviewed by (initial):
Flag Comments
Flag Comments
NWCA Vascular Plant Species Presence and Cover (Back) 01/21/2011
1870298140
-------
•
I FORM V-2b: NWCA VASC
Site ID: NWCA11-
ULAR SPECIES PRESI
[
ENCE AND COVEI
)ate: /
R (Continued)
/ 2 0 1 1
Review
Page
ed bv (initial):
2 or
1
O Fill bubble to confirm empty data fields for a species in a particular plot mean 1) for presence or height class, species not present, or ' ) for V Cover fields, cover = 0 zero.
Complete
if
Collecting
U
QA
I
1
I
1
1
I
1
I
1
1
I
1
I
Coll
Flag
Height Classes (except E, which may occur in any vertical stratum):
1 = <0.5m, 2 = >0.5-2m, 3 = >2-5m, 4= >5-15m, 5 = >15-30m, 6 = >30m, and E = liana, vine or eKphvte -p .cies
Species Name or Pseudonym
Plotl
sw
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NE
1
1
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
Ht.
Class
Cover
Work
Space
Plot 2
sw
1
1
1
1
1
1
b
1
1
1
1
1
1
NE
1
1
1
|
|
c
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ht.
Class
Comments
Cover
Work
Space
Flag
Plots
sw
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NE
1
1
IL
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
Ht.
Class
Cover
Work
Spat
-
SW
1
1
1
|
|
1
|
|
|
1
|
|
|
NE
|
1
1
|
|
1
|
|
|
1
|
|
|
P',t4
Ht.
Class
Cover
Work
Space
Plots
sw
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
NE
|
1
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
1
1
1
|
Ht.
Class
Cover
Work
Space
Flag
Comments
Flag codes: E= End of species list, no more species observed (place in row following last recorded species on last page of Form V-2), K = No measurement made,
U = Suspect measurement, F1,F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comment section, continuing as needed on Form V-2a (Back). 2909441751
NWCA Vascular Plant Species Presence and Cover (Continued) 01/21/201 1
-------
-------
£ FORM V-3: NWCA VEGETATION TYPES (Front)
Site ID: NWCA11-
Date: / ,
Reviewed by (initial): ^^
Instructions:
1. Estimate the cover for each Vascular Vegetation Stratum.
2. Estimate cover and collect categorical data for Non-Vascular Taxonomic Groups.
3. Cover can range from 0 - 100% for each of the following groups: submerged aquatic vegetation, floating aquatic vegetation, lianas, vines, and
epiphytes, each height class of other vascular vegetation and each Non-Vascular Group.
COVER DATA CELLS:
O Confirm that empty cells equal zero by filling in this bubble
Predominant S & T Class
If plot is Pf - Palustrine Farmed (not currently in production) fill Pf bubble AND indicate
predominant S & T class each plot would be if never cropped.
If not Pf - Palustrine Fanned select the predominant S & T class for each plot.
E2EM - Estuarine Intertidal Emergent PSS - Palustrine Scrub Shrub
E2SS - Estuarine Intertidal Scrub/Shrub/Forested PFO - Palustrine Forested
PEM - Palustrine Emergent PUBPAB - Palustrine
(see Reference Card AA-3, Side A for definitions) UnconsolidatedBottom/Aquatic Bed
% Cover Vascular Vegetation Strata
COVER OF SUBMERGED AQUATIC VEGETATION (rooted in sediment, most
plant cover submerged or floating on water) (0 - 100%)
COVER OF FLOATING AQUATIC VEGETATION (not rooted in sediment) (0 - 100%)
COVER OF LIANAS, VINES AND EPIPHYTES IN ANY HEIGHT CLASS (0 - 100%)
COVER FOR ALL OTHER VASCULAR VEGETATION FOR EACH OF THE
FOLLOWING HEIGHT CLASSES:
>30m tall: e.g., very tall trees (0 - 100%)
>15 to 30m tall: e.g., tall trees (0 - 100%)
>5 to 15m tall: e.g., very tall shrubs; short to mid-sized trees (0 - 100%)
>2 to 5m tall: e.g., tall shrubs; tree saplings (0 - 100%)
0.5 to 2m tall: e.g., medium height shrubs; tree seedlings .. id r jplings; tall
emergent/terrestrial herbaceous species (0 - 100%)
< 0.5m tall: e.g., low emergent/terrestrial; herbaceo1 . species; low shrubs;
tree seedlings (0 - 100%)
% Cover and Categorical Data for Non-Vr scuk r Taxa
COVER OF BRYOPHYTES (mosses and liverwo/s) ..'ow'.ig on ground
surfaces, logs, rocks, etc.) (0 - 100%)
Fill bubble if Bryophytes are dominate., by Sphagnum or other
peat-forming mosses
COVER OF LICHENS growing on Around surfaces, logs, rocks, etc. (0 - 100%)
COVER OF ARBOREAL EPIP'SYTIC BRYOPHYTES AND LICHENS (see NWCA-
FOM for cover estimation ' loc^dures for this group) (0 - 100%)
COVER OF FILAMENTOUS OR MAT FORMING ALGAE (0 - 100%)
COVER OF MACROALGAE (freshwater species/seaweeds) (0 - 100%):
When Mi"-roa.
-------
A FORM V-3: NWCA GROUND SURFACE ATTRIBUTES (Back) Reviewed by
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
Instructions: For each around surface attribute carefully record the requested data.
(initial): |
• w
1 . Water Cover - Estimate total percent of Veg Plot area covered by water, then estimate cover for each subcategory of water. The sum of covers for water
subcategories should equal the total water cover. Where floating/submerged and emergent vegetation occur together, classify water type based on vegetation type
with greatest cover; if cover is equal classify as water and emergent vegetation.
2. Water Depth - Measure water depth with marked 1-m PVC pole or ruler at 3 locations representing the water level range across the plot.
3. Litter - Estimate total cover of litter, identify predominant types (all types with ^25% cover), or if total litter is < 25% cover indicate primary litter type, measure litter
depth in SWand NE most corners of Veg Plot in center of 1-m2 quadrat.
4. Bareground - Estimate cover for exposed a) soil/sediment, b) gravel/cobble, c) rock. (The sum of a+b+c fl 00%).
5. Dead Woody Material Cover - Estimate cover (0 to 1 00%) for each category of dead woody material.
COVER DATA CELLS:
O Confirm that empty cells equal zero by filling in this bubble
CATEGORICAL DATA:
O Confirm a filled data bubble indicates preSv nee an 1 an
unfilled bubble indicates absence by filling ii. *his jubble
Water Cover Plot 1
1) Total Cover of Water (percent of Veg Plot area with water = a+b+c < 100%)
a) % Veg Plot area with water and no vegetation
b) % Veg Plot area with water and floating/submerged aquatic vegetation
c) % Veg Plot area with water and emergent vegetation
Water Depth (make 3 depth measurements in a Veg Plot within
a 10 minute period)
Minimum Depth (cm)
Predominant Depth (cm)
Maximum Depth (cm)
Time of Day (24 hour clock)
Cover of Bareground = a+b+c <100%
a) Exposed soil/sediment
b) Exposed gravel/cobble (~2mm to 25cm)
c) Exposed rock (>25cm)
Plotl
Plotl
Vegetative Litter Plot 1
Total Cover Vegetative Litter (0-100%)
Predominant (>25% cover) or Primary Littei *vpe(», (see Instructions) (Fill in all
that apply): T = Thatch (dead graminoid (e.g., gras. --s, sedges, rushes), leaves, rhizomes,
or other material) F = Forb
D = Deciduous Tree E = Broadleaf Evergreen Tree
C = Coniferous Tree N = None
Litter Depth (cm) in center of 1-m2 q :adrat at SW Veg Plot corner
Litter Depth (cm) in r-**\ter i/ 1-m2 quadrat at NE Veg Plot corner
Cover of Do- 5cm diameter) (0-100%)
Cover o. lown d Fine Woody debris (<5cm diameter) (0-100%)
OTQF
OEQD
O cQ N
Plotl
Plot 2
Plot 3
1
Plot 2
Plot 2
Plot 2
OTQE
OFQD
OcQ N
Plot 2
Plot 3
Plot 3
Plot 3
OTQE
OFQD
O cQ N
Plot 3
Plot 4
Plot 4
Plot 4
Plot 4
OTQE
OFQD
O cQ N
Plot 4
P'jtS
>
Plots
Plots
Plots
OTQE
OFQD
QcQ N
Plots
Flag
Flag
Flag
Flag
Flag
Flag Comments
Flag codes: K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement., F1 ,F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew.
^^ Explain all flags in comment section. 1184195537 ^ft
NWCA Ground Surface Attributes 01/21/2011
-------
FORM V-4a: NWCA SNAG AND TREE COUNTS AND TREE COVER (Front)
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
Reviewed by (initial):.
Page 1 of
in the appropriate bubble in the Tree or Snag
Instructions for Recording Data:
1. Fill out Header Information.
2. If Live Trees or Snags are Absent from a Veg Plot,
Absence field.
3. If either Live Trees or Snags are Present in a Veg Plot, collect data across the entire 100-m2area of
each Veg Plot.
4. Standing Dead Trees and Snags (angle of incline > 45°): Count snags > 5cm DBH by diameter class
and record the total number of snags for each DBH class in the white data column for the appropriate
Veg Plot.
5. For Each Live Tree Species: Use one row for each plot in which each tree species is found. Be sure to
indicate the Veg Plot number in the Plot # column next to each species name.
6. Cover of trees in height classes: Record species names or pseudonyms for each tree species.
Ensure pseudonyms match those used on Form V-2. Record the percent cover (0-100%) for each tree
species for each of the following height classes: < 0.5m, 0.5 to 2m, > 2 to 5m, > 5 to 15m, >15 to 30m,
>30m.
7. Live Trees: Count trees > 5cm DBH in each Veg Plot by species in DBH classes and record the total
number of trees for each diameter class in the white data column.
8. Counting Trees or Snags: If needed, for smaller DBH classes when many trees or snags are
a running tally* of the numbers of all snags, or for each tree species, in each DBH class can b'
recorded in the gray shaded workspace in the DBH columns. Once all the snags or tree speci
tallied for a plot, record the total number for each species in each DBH class in the white uaic.
each DBH column.
Tally
format*
rr tr t
O Fill in bubble to confine that empty data cells equal zero.
TREES OR Si
LTA=Live TrPDS .^
ABSENCE: Fill in all that apply:
DTA=Dead Trees/Snags Absent
Plotl
OLTA
O DTA
Plo,
OLTA
O
PlotS
O LTA
O DTA
Plot 4
OLTA
O DTA
Plots
OLTA
ODTA
Plot
landing Dead Tree/Snag Counts by DBH Class
(White box = data field, Gray box = tally workspace)
StolOcn
11 to 25cm
26 to 50cm
51 to 75cm
76 to
100cm
101 to
200cm
Flag
Tree Cover \^ . 'eight Class
Plot#
Live Tree Species Name/Pseudonym
Tree Counts by DBH Class
(White box = data field, Gray box = tally workspace) (DBH = diameter breast height)
<0.5m
O1 O4
8§05
2n,
>2-5m |
- , -m
, I _
15m
30m
>30m
5 to 10cm
11 to 25cm
26 to 50cm
51 to 75cm
76 to
100cm
101 to
200cm
>200
cm
Flag
8^85
O3
O 1 O4
8ios
i 1 O 4
i 2 O 5
i 3
8^85
O3
O1 O4
8§05
Flag codes:K= No measuremenc made, U = Suspect measurement, F1, F2, etc = misc.flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comment section on back side of form.
NWCA Snag & Tree Counts (Front) 01/21/2011
-------
g FORM V-4a: NWCA SNAG AND TREE COUNTS AND TREE COVER (Back)
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
Plot#
O1 O4
8§05
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
O 1 O4
O2 Q5
O3
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
8285
O3
O 1 O4
O2 Q5
O3
O1 O4
8§05
8285
O3
O 1 O4
O2 Q5
O3
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
8285
O3
O 1 O4
8i05
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
8285
O3
O 1 O4
8§05
Flag
Live Tree Species Name/Pseudonym
Tree Cover by Height Class
<0.5m
>0.5-
2m
>2-5m
>5-
15m
>15-
30m
>30m
Comment
Reviewed by (initial):
Page of
Tree Counts by 7>B' < Class
(White box = data fieM, c -vj box - tally workspace)
5 to 1 0cm
Flag
1 1 to 25cm
26 to 5.. -r 51 to 75cm
76 to
100cm
101 to
200cm
>200
cm
Flag
Comment
• Flag codes:K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1, F2, etc = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. __.. ^^fi?4l 4
NWCA Snag & Tree Counts (Back) 01/21/201 1 Explain all flags in comment section.
-------
g FORM V-4a: NWCA SNAG AND TREE COUNTS AND TREE COVER (Continued) Reviewed by(inmai):_ |
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1 Page Of
Plot#
O1 O4
8§05
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
O 1 O4
O2 Q5
O3
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
8285
O3
O 1 O4
O2 Q5
O3
O1 O4
8§05
8285
O3
O 1 O4
O2 Q5
O3
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
8285
O3
O 1 O4
8i05
O 1 O 4
O 2 O 5
8285
O3
O 1 O4
8§05
Flag
Live Tree Species Name/Pseudonym
Tree Cover by Height Class
<0.5m
>0.5-
2m
>2-5m
>5-
15m
>15-
30m
>30m
Comment
Tree Counts by 7>B' < Class
(White box = data fieM, c -vj box - tally workspace)
5 to 1 0cm
Flag
1 1 to 25cm
26 to 5.. -r 51 to 75cm
76 to
100cm
101 to
200cm
>200
cm
Flag
Comment
• Flag codes:K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1, F2, etc = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. __.. ^^fi?4l 4
NWCA Snag & Tree Counts (Continued) 01/21/201 1 Explain all flags in comment section.
-------
-------
[Example of Plant Sample Adhesive Tags
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Sitett)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit ft Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -_ .
(Site**) (Collections)
Date: __/ 72011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Sitett) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit ft Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site*t> (Collection**)
Date: _J /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collections)
Date: / /2011 Visit ft Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- .-
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / /2011 Visit #: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
-------
-------
PLANT SPECIMEN LABEL (enclose in newsprint with sample)
For Unknown species, record pseudonym from Form V-2
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -_
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit **:Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Collector(s) Name(s):
Abundance of Plant (fill appropriate circle):
O Dominant O Common O Sparse O Uncommon
Habitat:
Plant Habitat:
PLANT SPECIMEN LABEL (enclose in newsprint with sample)
For Unknown species, record pseudonym from Form V-2 Plant Sample ID Number:
Collector(s) Name(s):
(Site**) (Collection**)
Date: / J2011 Visit **: Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Abundance of Plant (fill appropriate circle):
O Dominant O Common O Sparse O Uncommon
Habitat:
Plant Habitat:
PLANT SPECIMEN LABEL (enclose in newsprint with sample)
For Unknown species, record pseudonym from Form V-2
Plant Sample ID Number:
NWCA11- -_
(Site**)
Date: /
(Collection**)
/2011 Visit **:Ol O2
O - fill in circle if QA specimen
Collectors) Name(s):
Abundance of Plant (fill appropriate circle):
O Dominant O Common O Sparse O Uncommon
Habitat:
Plant Habitat:
-------
-------
A FORM T-2: NWCA UNKNOWN PLANT SAMPLE TRACKING
Reviewed bv (initial): 4
1
Sent By: Sender Phone: State Where Sites are Located:
Shipped Using: O FedEx O Other:
Airbill/Tracking Number:
Retained for Identification By:
OR
Phone Number:
Date Shipped: / / 2 0 1 1 Date: /
/ 2 0 1 1
Instructions:
1. Complete all header and shipping information above.
2. Fill out the body of the form with Site ID, Visit Number, date collected. List the plant samples for unknown specie: by collection
number (listed on Form V-2, and on Plant Sample Tags and Labels) or by ranges of collection numbers (e.g., 1- '_>, 5-t, 8-"1 ±, 13, 15-
19). If needed, more than one row can be used for a site. Be sure to record the Site ID for each line.
3. For shipped plant samples, place photocopy of this form in shipping package. For retained plant samples, place copy of this form in
folder or box in which they are stored.
4. Send original form to the Information Management Team as soon as the plant samples are shipped to t. ? designated Lab or
transferred for storage by the State Plant Lab for later identification.
2011 Collection
Site ID Visit # Date (MM/DD) Plant Sample Collection Numbers
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- £2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA-i- §2
NWCA11- §2
NWCA11- §2
.../..
.../..
.../..
.../..
.../..
.../.. ,
.../.. ,
.../..
i
.-' . ,
.../.. ,
.../..
.../.. ,
.../.. ,
.../..
.../..
.../.. ,
.../.. ,
Chain of Custody Send Completed Forms to:
O EcoAnalyst Plant Lab: Q
1420 S.BIaine St., Suite 14
Moscow, ID 83843
EMAIL: sampletracking@epa.gov
FAX: 541-754-4637
VOICE MESSAGE CENTER:
SA1-7SA-4RR5
NWCA Tracking - UNK Plant Sample 01/21/201 1
ZIP CODE
Tracking Assistance:
Marlys Cappaert
ph: 541-754-4467
Michelle Cover
ph: 541 -754-4793
9884386613 £
-------
£ FORM T-2: NWCA UNKNOWN PLANT SAMPLE TRACKING Reviewed byimmai): A
2011 Collection
Site ID Visit # Date (MM/DD)
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
i i i i
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
C?
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
/
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../,..
/
,.,/,,.
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
/
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
Plant Sample Collection Numbers
^ NWCA Tracking - UNK Plant Sample 01/21/2011 5702386618 ^
-------
A FORM T-3: NWCA QA PLANT SAMPLE TRACKING
Reviewed bv (initial): |
1
Sent By: Sender Phone: State Where Sites are Located:
Shipped Using: O FedEx O Other:
Airbill/Tracking Number:
Retained for Identification By:
OR
Phone Number:
Date Shipped: / / 2 0 1 1 Date: /
Instructions:
1. Complete all header and shipping information above
2. Fill out the body of the form with Site ID, Visit Numb
field and/or the QA samples for plant species identif
Tags and Labels). Collection numbers can be listed it
than one row can be used for a site.
3. For shipped plant samples, place photocopy of this f
in folder or box in which they are stored.
4. Send original form to the Information Management
transferred for storage by the State Plant Lab for lat
i
er and date collected. List the QA plant samples for s
ied in the Lab by collection number (listed on Form V
idividually (e.g., 4, 6, 10) or as ranges (7-12) if appro]
orm in shipping package. For retained plant samp'^s,
Team as soon as the plant samples are shipped to th
sr identification to allow proper tracking of pi. nt sarr
/ 2 0 1 1
pecies identified in the
r-2 ar d c •> Plart Sample
Driate. If needed, more
place copy of this form
e designated Lab or
iples.
2011 Collection
Site ID Visit # Date (MM/DD) Plant Sample Collection Numbers
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
i i i i
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
i i i i i
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
i i i i i
NWCA11-
NWCA" i-
NWCA11-
i i i i i
NWCA11-
i i i i i
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
C 1
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
/
.../...
.../...
/
.../...
.../...
.../...
/
i
.'" . .
.../...
.../...
/
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
Chain of Custody Send Completed Forms to:
O EcoAnalyst Plant Lab:
1420 S. Blaine St., Suite 14
Moscow, ID 83843
O EMAIL: sampletracking@epa.gov
FAX: 541-754-4637
VOICE MESSAGE CENTER:
SAI.TSA^CCI
• .
NWCA Tracking - QA Plant Sample 01/21/201 1
Tracking Assistance:
Marlys Cappaert
ph: 541-754-4467
Michelle Cover
ph: 541-754-4793
0731469718 £
-------
• FORM T-3: NWCA QA PLANT SAMPLE TRACKING BMta»^ by(ini,ia,,: A
1 2011 Collection
Site ID Visit # Date (MM/DD)
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
NWCA11-
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
O"1
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
01
02
.../...
/
.../...
.../...
/
.../...
/
/
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
/
.../...
/
.../...
.../...
.../.,.
. . ./ .
.,.',.
../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
.../...
w
Plant Sample Collection Numbers
^ NWCA Tracking - QA Plant Sample01/21/2011 8517469718 ^
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
CHAPTERS. SOILS
Introduction 6-3
6.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES 6-6
6.1.1 Identifying Soil Pit Locations 6-6
6.1.1.1 Standard Locations for Soil Pits 6-7
6.1.1.2 Alternate Locations - Moving Soil Pits to Avoid Obstacles 6-8
6.1.2 Description of Soil Profiles 6-8
Overview of Soil Profile Description Activities 6-9
6.1.2.1 Excavating Soil Pits for Profile Description 6-10
Easy to Sample Soils 6-10
Difficult to Sample Soils 6-12
6.12.2 Initial Color for Saturated Soils and Detection of Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Odor. 6-14
6.12.3 Delineating Soil Horizons 6-15
6.12.4 Describing Soil Texture 6-17
6.12.5 Estimating Percent Rock and Roots 6-19
6.12.6 Describing Soil Color and Identifying Redoximorphic and Other Soil Features 6-19
6.1.2.7 Identifying Hydric Soil Indicators 6-22
6.1.3 Soil Sample Collection 6-24
6.1.3.1 Collecting Soil Samples for Isotope and Enzyme Analysis 6-24
6.13.2 Collecting Bulk Density and Chemistry Samples 6-28
Preparing Labels and Sample Collection Bags 6-28
Expanding the Representative Pit and Collecting Soil Samples 6-32
6.1.4 Water Depth In Pit After Equilibration 6-38
6.1.5 Backfilling the Soil Pit 6-39
6.1.6 Soil Tool Decontamination and Maintenance 6-39
6.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING 6-40
6.2.1 At the Site 6-40
6.2.2 At Field Lodging or Office 6-40
6.2.4 Data Forms, Tracking Forms, and Shipping Records 6-42
6.3 LITERATURE CITED 6-42
6.4 SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIAL 6-43
6.4.1 List of Soil Resources to be Carried in Field or Vehicle 6-43
6.4.2 Other Useful Soil Resources 6-43
6.4.3 Glossary of Soil Terminology 6-43
6.5 REFERENCE CARDS 6-47
Reference Card S-1, Sides A and B. Soil Protocol Flowchart
Reference Card S-2, Side A. Soil Pit Placement and Characteristics of Soil Horizon Types
Reference Card S-2, Side B. Distinguishing Soil Horizons
Reference Card S-3, Side A. Soil Structure, Coats, and Films; Guidelines for Cover Estimation . .
Reference Card S-3, Side B. Examples of Some Redox and Other Soil Features
Reference Card S-4, Side A. Determining Soil Texture
Reference Card S-4, Side B. Soil Color Determinations
Reference Card S-5, Side A. USDA Land Resource Regions (LRRs)
Reference Card S-5, Side B. Hydric Soil Indicators by Land Resource Region, Evaluating Hydric
Soil Indicators.
6.6 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORMS, AND SAMPLE LABELS 6-59
Equipment and Supply Checklist
Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Data
Example Labels for Soil Isotope and Sediment Enzyme Samples
Soil Bulk Density or Chemistry Sample Tag
Soil Bulk Density or Chemistry Sample Label
Form T-4: NWCA Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density Sample Tracking
6-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
CHAPTERS. SOILS
The presence of hydric soil is a defining characteristic of wetland ecosystems. Soils influence
surface and ground water movement in wetlands and provide a matrix for biogeochemical
processes that affect wetland vegetation and other wetland ecosystem components, which
reflect ecological condition (Tiner 1999, Mitsch and Gosselink 2007). The types of data to be
collected as part of the NWCA are:
• Soil profile and physical characteristics
• Hydric soil field indicators
• Soil chemistry and bulk density
• Soil isotopes and enzymes.
For more detailed information on the rationale for the soil indicator, see "Ecological Indicators
for the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment" (USEPA in prep.).
This chapter provides detailed protocols and methods for sampling the NWCA Soil Indicator.
The Assessment Area and Buffer (AB) Team collects all soils data at each NWCA site. Soil
sampling is conducted at four Soil Pits within each Assessment Area (AA), and includes 1) on-
site description of the soil profile at 4 soil pits and 2) collection of four types of soil samples
(chemistry, bulk density, isotope, and enzyme) for laboratory analysis (one pit only). A brief
overview of sampling tasks is provided in the flowcharts on Reference Card S-1 (on the
following two pages and in Section 6.5).
While reading the protocols in this chapter it will be useful to refer to the flowcharts on
Reference Card S-1, to several other Reference Cards that summarize key protocols or provide
key information (Section 6.5), and to the soils data forms and equipment checklist (Section 6.6).
Reference Cards may be laminated for easy access and use in the field.
In addition to this chapter, two other field references are required to complete the soil protocols.
They are:
Munsell Color X-Rite. 2009. Munsell Soil Color Charts. Grand Rapids, Ml.
USDA, NRCS (United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation
Service). 2010. Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States, Version 7.0. L.M.
Vasilas, G.W. Hurt, and C.V. Noble (eds.). USDA, NRCS, in cooperation with the National
Technical Committee for Hydric Soils, http://soils.usda.gov/use/hydric/ or
ftp://ftp-fc.sc.egov.usda.gov/NSSC/Hydric Soils/Fieldlndicators v7.pdf
Another useful reference, which should be carried in the vehicle or as needed into the field is:
Schoeneberger, P.J., D.A. Wysocki, E.G. Benham, and W.D. Broderson. 2002. Field Book
for Describing and Sampling Soils, Version 2.0. Natural Resources Conservation Service,
National Soil Survey Center, Lincoln, Nebraska, USA.
ftp://ftp-fc.sc.egov.usda.gov/NSSC/Field Book/FieldBookVer2.pdf
A list of additional reference material and a glossary of important soil terminology are provided
in Section 6.4.
6-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Reference Card S-1, Side A. NWCA Soil Protocol Flowchart
A. Soil Pit Location and Excavation to 60cm (See Section 6.1.1)
Identify standard locations for Soil
Pits (i.e., outside the SE corner of
designated Veg Plot).
Are standing water or obstacles present at the standard
Soil Pit Location?
•
.
YES
^
Place Soil Pit just outside SE corner of
designated Veg Plot. Record pit location
on Form S-1.
If water and soft sediment
< 0.25m deep, locate soil pit just
outside SE corner of Veg Plot.
Record pit location on Form S-1.
I
If water or mud a 0.25m deep or other
obstacle (e.g., TES species, large rock,
tree, woody debris) is present, move pit
to an alternate location as close to SE
corner of Veg Plot as possible. Record
pit location on Form S-1.
1) Place a lettered flag (A, B, C, or D) at the Soil Pit location to identify it.
2) Excavate one Soil Pit to 60cm deep and extract a slab for soil profile using appropriate tools and methods for soil
conditions.
• Record pit depth, time of excavation, and lighting conditions on Form S-1.
• If an impenetrable layer prevents excavation and pit cannot be moved, record pit depth and type of impenetrable layer
on Form S-1.
3) Collect all soil profile data (see below) in this pit, then dig the next Soil Pit to 60cm and describe its soil profile.
4) Repeat until all four pits have been excavated and described to 60cm. Choose the Representative Pit.
5) Do not refill any pit until all pits have been examined, all samples have been collected from the Representative Pit, and water
depth data have been collected in all four pits.
B. Soil Profile Description at Each Soil Pit (See Section 6.1.2)
Does soil have an inundated or saturated layer?
Immediately upon excavation, record initial soil
matrix color and determine whether H2S odor (rotten
egg) is detected (Form S-1).
Delineate soil horizons and for each
horizon observed at each Soil Pit,
determine and record on Form S-1
(Front):
1) Horizon depth
2) Horizon boundary abruptness
3) Soil texture
4) % Rock fragments
5) % Roots
6) Soil matrix color
7) Presence and type of
redoximorphic or other features
8) % Horizon composed of distinct
or prominent redox and other
features
9) Color of most evident redox or
other feature
Determine presence of Hydric Soil Indicators in the Soil Profile:
1) Use Reference Card S-5 to determine the Land Resource
Region (LRR) in which the AA occurs.
2) Evaluate the soil for the presence of Hydric Soil Indicators for the
selected LRR and record on Form S-1 (Back).
Photograph the Soil Profile (Appendix D) either after horizon delineation or
after the profile description is completed, as convenient.
7
Randomly select one Representative Soil Pit from the subset of pits that most
represent the soils conditions of the AA.
Excavate soil, using an auger, to 125cm from the Representative Pit, or if easier dig
pit to125 cm, and describe the soil profile from 60cm down to 125 cm. Complete
photography of the soil profile for this pit.
Continue to Soil Sample Collection flowchart (Reference Card S-1, Side B).
6-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Reference Card S-1, Side B. Soil Protocol Flowchart
C. Soil Sample Collection (See Section 6.1.3)
Once the Representative Pit has been identified, collect four kinds of soil samples
Soil Isotope and Sediment Enzyme
Samples
Collect soil isotope sample and sediment
enzyme sample before expanding the
Representative Pit for bulk density and
chemistry sample collection. Collect 3 cores for
the isotope sample and 6 for the enzyme
sample. The same procedure is used for
collecting both kinds of samples.
1) Fill out the appropriate sample tag and
sample label. Affix tag to outside of bag.
2) Use the syringe-corer to extract the
required number of 10-cm long soil cores
from evenly spaced undisturbed locations
within 1-m area surrounding the 60-cm pit.
3) Place all cores for the sample into the
prepared sample bag. Properly fold the
sample label into the top edge of the bag
with the soil cores and carefully seal and
staple the bag.
4) Place sealed bag of soil into a plastic food
storage box, and place box in a small ice
chest to keep it cool during the sampling
day.
Select tools appropriate to site conditions and expand the
Representative Soil Pit and collect Bulk Density and Chemistry Soil
Samples.
Bulk Density Samples
1) For each horizon > 8cm thick
located in the top 60cm of the
soil profile, prepare one bulk
density sample bag, with
completed sample tag and
sample label.
2) Collect 3 soil cores using a
small can, or if this is not
feasible, a known volume of soil
using another method, e.g., cut
out a block of soil.
3) Place all 3 cores, or the soil
blocks, into the sample bag.
4) Record the volume or
dimensions of each of the cores
or soil blocks making up the
sample on the Sample Label.
Chemistry/PSDA
Samples
1) For each horizon > 8cm
thick located down to
125cm, prepare one
chemistry sample bag,
with completed Sample
Tag and Sample Label.
2) Collect 1 to 2.5 liters of soil
(depending on rock and
root content) for each
sample.
D. Soil Pit Water Depth (Section 6.1.4), Back-filling Soil Pits (Section 6.1.5),
and Soil Tool Decontamination and Maintenance (Section 6.1.6)
1) Carefully remove air from
sample bag.
2) Properly fold sample label
into the top edge of the
bag and staple bag shut.
3) Keep samples in a cool
location during the day.
1) After all data and all samples have
been gathered at all four pits, collect
water depth data at each pit.
2) For each pit, record water depth values
in the appropriate fields of the Soil Pit
Water Depth section of its Form S-1:
NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
1) Ensure all data and
samples have been
collected from all soil pits.
2) Backfill each pit and replace
vegetation cap.
1) Clean and decontaminate soils
equipment.
2) Maintain soils equipment weekly
by routinely lubricating all
threads for connecting joints.
F. Soil Sample Handling and Processing (See Section 6.2, Chapter 2, Appendix A)
While at the Site:
1) Keep bulk density and chemistry samples as cool as possible
by placing them in a shaded location whenever possible, and
place isotope and sediment enzyme samples on ice.
2) At the end of the sample day, double check that all samples
have been collected.
3) Complete Form T-1: NWCA 2011 Site and Sample Status
and Tracking.
a) In the Sample Status section of Form T-1, indicate the soil
isotope, the sediment enzyme, and the soil chemistry and
bulk density samples have been collected.
b) Record sample id numbers on the labels for the soil isotope
and sediment enzyme samples on Form T-1 in the WRS
Sample Tracking section.
At Field Lodging or Office
1) Submit Form T-1 to Information Management Team; pack isotope
and enzyme samples in the ice-chest for immediately (within 24
hours) shipped samples to be sent to the EPA Lab, Corvallis, OR.
2) Ship batched bulk density and chemistry samples every two weeks
to the NRCS Lab with completed Form T-4: Bulk Density and
Chemistry Soil Sample Tracking.
3) When packing soil samples for shipping, include a copy of the
pertinent tracking forms in the package and send any required
copies to the Information Management Team.
4) Carefully seal the package, fill out shipping labels and affix to
package, affix required labels for regulated soils, and deliver
package to shipping company.
6-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES
Protocols for NWCA soil sampling include several major elements (see Reference Card S-1),
which are described in detail in this section:
1) Identifying Soil Pit location (Section 6.1.1)
2) Excavating pit (Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3)
3) Soil profile description (Section 6.1.2)
4) Soil sample collection (Section 6.1.3)
5) Water depth measurements (6.1.4)
Prior to the sampling season, it will be helpful if you can consult with your local National
Resource Conservation Service (NRCS) soil scientist for advice about likely soil conditions and
the best methods for sampling soils at particular NWCA sites. Assistance with soils from the
local NRCS office can be arranged through your Regional Monitoring Coordinator for the
NWCA. This assistance could include: 1) obtaining preliminary site-specific information on soils
for the site packet and 2) office or field meetings with the soil scientist for advice on specific
issues concerning sampling soils on-site.
Before going to each NWCA site, review the soil survey, maps, and photo information in the Site
Packet (See Chapter 2). Use the Site Packet review and any discussions with the soil scientist
to select the tools best suited to the anticipated soil conditions for the site to carry into the
Assessment Area (AA) (see also Equipment List (Section 6.6) and Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3).
Note that the NRCS soil scientist may also have specialized equipment to lend you for specific
conditions in your area.
Every effort should be made to obtain soils data and samples at each Soil Pit to the depth
specified in the protocols (e.g., 60cm or 125cm). However, occasionally, due to inundation,
cemented soils, or other major obstacles, it may not be possible to excavate the soil to the
specified depth (even using excavation and sampling techniques appropriate to the site
conditions (see Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3)). In such instances, describe soils and collect
samples to the greatest depth feasible, and, if at all possible, to at least 30cm deep.
6.1.1 Identifying Soil Pit Locations
The AB Team identifies the locations for soil sampling in the AA once the Vegetation (Veg)
Team has established the Veg Plots to avoid disturbing plant communities prior to vegetation
sampling.
Prior to digging, clear proposed Soil Pit locations with the Botanist/Ecologist to ensure no
threatened, endangered, or sensitive (TES) plant species are present. If any TES species are
observed, move the proposed Soil Pit to an alternate location without TES species.
• Soil observations are made at four Soil Pits labeled with the letters, A, B, C, or D.
Designation of the pits as A, B, C, or D is at the convenience of the AB Team. A flag with
the letter name for each Soil Pit is placed near its excavation site, so the Veg Team can
easily note the locations of the Soil Pits on the sketch map or on an annotated aerial photo.
• Soil Pits are typically placed at Standard Locations, but may be placed in Alternate
Locations to avoid certain obstacles (see below for details).
6-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Data for each Soil Pit are recorded on a separate Form S-1: Soil Profile Data and the Soil
Pit name (letter designation) is recorded in the header.
6.1.1.1 Standard Locations for Soil Pits
Standard Soil Pit locations are just outside the southeast (SE) corners of the four Veg Plots
furthest from the AA CENTER (Figure 6-1, Reference Card S-2, Side A). The standard
location is used unless a combination of water depth and soft substrate > 0.25m deep, or large
wood or rock prevents soil access. If such an impediment to Soil Pit placement occurs, follow
the procedures in Section 6.1.1.2 to select an Alternate Soil Pit Location.
Standard AAs - For the Standard-Circular or Standard Circular-Shifted AA Layout, five 100-m2
Veg Plots are positioned at prescribed distances from the AA CENTER along cardinal bearings
(See Chapter 5; Reference Card V-1). Locate each Soil Pit immediately outside the southeast
corner of a Veg Plot as illustrated in Figure 6-1A.
Alternate AAs - The location of Veg Plots vary with the shape and size of the Alternate AA
(Reference Card AA-1) and the associated Veg Plot Layout (See Chapter 5; Reference Card
V-1), but the Soil Pits are still located just outside the SE corner (or the corner closest to SE) of
each of the four Veg Plots furthest from the AA CENTER (Figure 6-1B). The Veg Team will
have designated the Veg Plots numbers on flags in the SE most corners of the plots.
Recording Soil Pit Locations - Record the number of the Veg Plot with which each Soil Pit is
associated on its Form S-1 in the So/7 Pit Location field and fill in the bubble for Standard
location outside SE corner of Veg Plot.
Soil Pit locations
25rr
40m
Figure 6-1. Standard Soil Pit Locations. A. Standard Circular AA Layout with five Veg Plots and
four Soil Pits. B. Narrow Polygon AA Veg Plot Layout with Soil Pits.
6-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.1.1.2 Alternate Locations - Moving Soil Pits to Avoid Obstacles
If a combination of water depth and soft substrate > 0.25m deep, the presence of TES plant
species, large wood, or rock prevent soil access at the standard Soil Pit location, move the pit
so it is outside of and as close as possible to the SE corner of the Veg Plot.
Moving the Soil Pit - Place the Soil Pit so it is at least 2m away from an upland edge or other
non-wetland landcover type that might influence soil condition. If more than one Soil Pit must
be relocated, try to maintain 10m between soil pits.
Recording Soil Pit Locations - Record the new Soil Pit location on its corresponding Form S-
1. Fill in the Alternate Location bubble in the So/7 Pit Location field and record distance and
bearing of the pit from the SE corner of the nearest Veg Plot.
6.1.2 Description of Soil Profiles
At each of the four Soil Pit locations (see Section 6.1.1), the AB Team collects data describing
the properties of the soil profile (Form S-1: Soil Profile Data, Reference Cards S-1 through S-
5). Soils are characterized by multiple horizons, each of which has unique properties. Soil
horizons develop from the action of water, plants, and soil biota on the soil parent material. All
horizons present at a given location (e.g., an NWCA soil pit) constitute the soil profile.
Understanding general differences in major types of soil horizons (Text Box 6-1) can aid in
distinguishing horizon boundaries; however, the AB Team will not determine horizon types when
evaluating soils. During sampling, the AB Team consecutively numbers (beginning with 1 at the
soil surface) each distinct soil horizon observed at each Soil Pit. Horizon names will be added
post-sampling by a soil scientist based on the soil profile data collected by the AB Team.
Text Box 6-1. Major Soil Horizon Types
O - Organic horizon consisting of high accumulations of organic carbon (if you feel more than a couple of
mineral grains (grit from sand, stickiness from clay, silt deposits on hands) it is most likely a mineral
horizon high in organic matter (OM), not an organic soil)
A - Mineral horizon formed at the surface from significant organic carbon accumulation (will be darker in color
than the horizons below due to OM accumulation)
E - Mineral horizon that exhibits significant loss of organic carbon, Fe (Iron), Mn (Manganese), Al (Aluminum),
and/or clays (usually paler in color and lighter in texture (less clayey) than horizons below)
B -Mineral horizon with accumulations of Fe, Mn, secondary minerals, Al-organic compounds, and/or clay, or
development of soil structure (can be higher in clay, may be brighter in color, or may contain more
redoximorphic (redox) concentrations than the horizons above it)
C - Mineral soil little affected by soil genesis, or soft bedrock or former bedrock. Lacking properties of O, A, E,
and B horizons (lacks structure, may appear to look like parent material (hard bedrock) but breaks into
mineral grains and gravel upon excavation)
L - Inorganic and organic limnic materials deposited in water by precipitation or derived from underwater and
floating aquatic plants and aquatic animals (lacks structure, may appear to look like parent material (hard
bedrock) but breaks into mineral grains and gravel upon excavation)
R - Strongly cemented bedrock horizon
W- A layer of water found under floating but fixed vegetation
Note: O, A, E, B horizons, and mucky mineral layers must be at least 1-cm thick to be considered a horizon.
6-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Overview of Soil Profile Description Activities
To describe the soil profiles for each of the four Soil Pits in the AA, the AB Team will:
• Excavate the Soil Pit (Section 6.1.2.1)
• Make initial observations of changeable properties, if soil is saturated or inundated (6.1.2.2)
• Delineate soil horizons (Section 6.1.2.3)
• Describe soil texture for each horizon (Section 6.1.2.4),
• Estimate percent rocks and roots for each horizon (Section 6.1.2.5)
• Describe soil color, redoximorphic, and other features for each horizon (Section 6.1.2.6)
• Identify hydric soil indicators (Section 6.1.2.7)
• Photograph the soil profile (Section 6.1.2.3 and Appendix D)
Important: Note that although the soil profile description generally proceeds in the order listed
above, soil profile description is an iterative process and information from all steps inform
horizon delineation and hydric soil indicator identification.
The AB Team will use Soil Pits of two depths to describe soil profiles in the AA; three 60cm
deep Soil Pits and one 125cm deep Representative Pit. An overview of the two Soil Pit types is
provided here. Detailed protocols for profile description activities are presented in Sections
6.1.2.1 -6.1.2.7.
All Soil Pits Initially Excavated to 60cm - Each of the four Soil Pits is excavated to a depth of
60cm and its profile described.
1) As each Soil Pit is excavated to 60cm, immediately begin soil profile description; giving your
initial attention to characteristics that may fade or change rapidly upon exposure to air (i.e.,
hydrogen sulfide odor and color, Section 6.1.2.2).
2) Record on Form S-1, all components of the profile data for each horizon using the protocols
described in Sections 6.1.2.3-6.1.2.7.
3) Once the profile description is completed for one Soil Pit, move to the next Soil Pit location
and excavate and describe its soil profile.
One Representative Pit Excavated to 125cm - After the profile descriptions are completed for
the four 60cm Soil Pits, use this information to select one pit for expanded soil profile description
and collection of soil samples down to, or as near as possible to,125cm. The pit selected for
excavation to 125cm should be randomly selected from the subset of the four 60-cmpits that are
most representative of the soils in the AA.
Guidelines for selecting the Representative Soil Pit:
1) Random selection - If all four Soil Pits have similar or dissimilar soils, randomly select
the Representative Pit. If two pits are similar, and two are different from the first set, but
similar to one another, randomly select the Representative Pit from the two pits that
represent the dominant condition for the AA. For example, if two pits are inundated and
two are saturated and the dominant condition is saturation, randomly choose the
representative pit from the two that are saturated.
2) Common physical setting, texture, or hydric soil field indicators - If three of the four
pits are similar and one is different, randomly select the representative pit from the three
similar pits. For example: common physical settings (e.g., three pits lacking water and
6-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
one submerged, three pits in swales one on a low hummock), similar texture (e.g., three
pits with clayey soils and one with coarser, sandier texture), or presence of hydric soil
field indicators (e.g., three pits with hydric indicators, one without).
3) Ease of excavation - If any of the Soil Pits most representative of the AA soils coincide
with an obstacle (e.g., large roots, rocks, etc.); select the pit that is most easily sampled.
Expanding the Representative Pit to collect additional soil profile data:
1) Extract or view the soil profile from 60 to 125cm using one of the following approaches:
a) In most soils, an auger (Figure 6-2b) can be used to extend the depth of the
Representative Pit to 125 cm and extract successive segments of the soil profile.
b) For difficult soils, use the excavation technique appropriate for the soil conditions
(See the Difficult to Sample Soils subheading in Section 6.1.2.1).
2) Carefully lay out the soil core or slab segments end to end, on plastic sheeting placed on
the ground surface, in spatial order to mirror the in situ position of the soil.
3) View the reconstructed soil profile and describe all horizons between 60 and 125cm
(Sections 6.1.2.2-6.1.2.8).
4) Later, when the Representative Pit is expanded to collect soil samples (Section 6.1.3);
reexamine the pit wall to refine the soil profile description. Techniques for expanding the
pit for soil sample collection and protocols for collecting and preparing soil samples for
shipping to the laboratory are described in Sections 6.1.3 and 6.2, respectively.
6.1.2.1 Excavating Soil Pits for Profile Description
As each Soil Pit is excavated, complete the Soil Pit Attributes section, and, if applicable, the
Representative Pit section of Form S-1 (Front).
1) Record depth (cm) of the hole dug for each Soil Pit in the Total Pit Depth field. In the case of
the Representative Pit, this is the depth for the initial profile description (usually 60cm).
2) Note the time of pit excavation.
3) Indicate the prevailing Lighting Conditions during soil profile description activities.
4) Important- For the Representative Pit:
a) Fill in the Representative Pit bubble on the appropriate Form S-1
b) Record the Final Pit depth after excavation and sample completed (Section 6.1.2.3)
c) Ensure the site specific Sample ID for the Representative Pit on Form S-1 (typically
preprinted) matches the Sample ID on the Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample
Tag and the Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Label (Section 6.1.2.3). Note
that the last digit on the tags and labels is absent from Form S-1 because it reflects the
horizon number from which each sample is collected.
See procedures below for excavating Easy to Sample Soils and Difficult to Sample Soils.
Easy to Sample Soils (e.g., not submerged, not cemented)
1) Begin by removing the vegetation surface layer using a shovel with a long narrow blade
(e.g., ~30cm in length, Figure 6-2a).
6-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
a) Use shallow shovel cuts (~15cm deep or just through the vegetation layer) to outline a
rectangular area wider than the shovel blade and about 45cm long to define the
"vegetation cap".
b) Use the cutting edge of the shovel to slice through as many roots as possible. If
needed, use pruners to cut large roots that could tear the vegetation cap apart when it is
lifted. Scoop up this upper block of soil just under the root mass with the shovel.
c) Set the cap of rooted vegetation, shoot side up, in the shade. The vegetation cap will be
replaced after soil sampling is complete and the Soil Pit is backfilled, to allow the
vegetation to reestablish.
2) Each of the four Soil Pits should be excavated to 60cm. Initially, dig a pit to a depth of at
least 30 to 40cm. Use the shovel or an auger (Figure 6-2a,b, Text Box 6-2) to excavate the
remainder of the soil pit to a depth of 60cm.
3) If water or slumping soil in a pit prevents soil extraction to the 60cm depth, excavate the soil
slab to the greatest depth possible and describe the soil profile to that depth. Then, if
possible, use techniques for Difficult to Samples Soils (subheading below, Text Box 6-2) to
excavate down to 60cm and complete the profile description.
4) If a large rock, log, very large root, or disturbed area (animal burrow, tree-fall pit) is
encountered before reaching 60cm, move or expand the pit.
5) If a cemented horizon or similar impenetrable material is encountered and is large enough in
extent to make moving the pit impractical, excavate the pit to the maximum possible depth.
Record the occurrence and type of the impenetrable layer or object and its depth from the
surface in the Impenetrable Layer section on Form S-1.
6) Use a knife (e.g., inexpensive hunting or kitchen knife) or root pruners to clean the soil on
one narrow face of the pit by removing plant tissue or soil transferred from other depths.
7) Remove the soil slab and, if taken, auger cores:
a) On the cleaned face end of the pit, carefully make cuts perpendicular to the face of
approximately a shovel width to demarcate the sides of the soil slab to be extracted.
b) Slice through the soil about 10cm behind the cleaned pit face to connect the side cuts.
c) Push the shovel 30cm deep and pull back on the shovel as the other AB Team member
gently holds the soil against the blade.
d) Carefully slide the slab section from the shovel blade onto a clean plastic sheet or tarp.
e) Clean loose soil out of the pit and extract a second slab section to the 60-cm depth using
the shovel (or extract this lower section with an auger).
f) Match up the slab sections or the upper slab section and lower augered sections end-to-
end mirroring the soil's in situ position.
8) Once the soil slab, or slab and core, is extracted, immediately conduct the protocols for
detection of hydrogen sulfide odor, and if the soil is inundated or saturated, for initial matrix
color (Section 6.1.2.2). Then continue with all other soil profile description activities
(Sections 6.1.2.3 to 6.1.2.7).
6-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Difficult to Sample Soils
Subaqueous (submerged) soils, saturated sands, organic soils, and clayey soils can be
challenging when attempting to obtain an intact soil slab or soil core. See Text Box 6-2 and
Figure 6-2 and 6-2 continued for special tools and alternate extraction methods.
• Shallowly Submerged Soils (e.g., water < 0.25m deep) - If soil strength allows, soil pits
60cm deep may be excavated from under shallow water using a hand pump to evacuate
water and digging techniques similar to those used for soils that are not submerged. If
water is swift or soil too unconsolidated, special tools may be required.
• Saturated Soils - Slumping of soil may be minimized by lifting the soil slab away from the
pit face very slowly or using extraction tools other than a shovel.
• Submerged Sandy Soils - A tube extractor may be useful for unconsolidated sandy soils.
• Low-Strength Organic Soils - A peat auger may be required for high organic content soils.
• Heavy Clay Soils - To avoid breaking the shovel handle when excavating heavy clay soil
(particularly if dry), extract a thin slab.
Once the soil pit is dug and the slab and core extracted, immediately conduct soil profile
description activities (Sections 6.1.2.2 to 6.1.2.7).
Text Box 6-2. Special Tools and Soil Extraction Methods
1) Augers: Augers are available in many styles of bucket and cutting tips (Figure 6-2b) for
different soil conditions. Use an auger for extending the Representative Pit to 125cm and in
conditions where the soil cannot be retrieved with a shovel. Note, augers mix the soil sample so
they are not used to obtain bulk density samples. For profile description and chemistry sample
collection, take care to mark the depth from which the soil is removed using an auger because of
the potential for compression or expansion of the soil as it is extracted.
2) Tube extractor (King soil extractor, Figure 6-2 continued): The King soil extractor is used for
submerged sandy soils and low-strength organic soils. It is typically constructed from a plastic
or metal tube (15-cm diameter and 60cm long) with a metal tube-clamp at its base for adjusting
tube diameter. Hammer the King extractor into the unconsolidated substrate. Dig a slot
alongside the tube and insert a spade to cover the deep end of the tube. Tip the tube and spade
over into the slot and lift tube onto a floating sled. Expand the tube slightly and extrude the soil
in the tube, forcing it out with a plunger.
3) Coffer dam and hand pump (Figures 6-2 continued and 6-8c): For submerged soils with
shallow standing water, build a coffer dam using the spoils from the pit. If needed, use plastic or
metal sheeting to reinforce the dam walls around the soil pit area. With the dam in place,
remove the standing water with a hand pump and proceed to excavate a slab and describe the
soil profile. Remove vegetation around the base of the coffer dam if necessary to achieve a seal
for the dam walls against the ground. It may be necessary to operate the hand pump
continuously during extraction of the soil slab and collection of soil samples.
4) Plastic snow sled: At sites with standing water or soft sediments (Figure 6-2 continued), a
plastic snow sled is a useful platform to lay out slabs and cores for viewing for profile
description, for facilitating sample collection, and to store equipment.
5) Consult with local soil scientist: In some cases, the local soil scientist may suggest
alternative sampling methods appropriate to particular site conditions. The soil scientist may be
able to loan you the tools (e.g., peat sampler, gas-powered water pump, or specialized
equipment that is used locally) and provide training on their use so samples can be more readily
and quickly extracted.
6) Soil Probe (Figure 6-2d): May be useful for collecting isotope soil samples in drier clay soils.
6-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Figure 6-2. Examples of Tools for Soil Pit Excavation or Soil Extraction. Photos by Gregg Lomnicky. A.
(Left to right) Tiling, Sharpshooter, Regular Shovels. B. (Left to Right) Auger handle extensions, ratchet
handle, mud auger buckets (solid), bucket auger with handle, auger buckets. C. Bulk density corer (steel
tubing with beveled edge). D. (Left to Right) Soil Probe, Hammer Corer. The tools most commonly used
in the NWCA are a tiling or sharpshooter shovel (A) and an auger (B) for pit excavation and chemistry
sampling, and a can (see Figures 6-8 and 6-9) for bulk density sample collection. Other tools pictured (C
and D) may be useful for specific conditions and may be available from a local soil scientist (e.g., see
Text Boxes 6-2 and 6-6).
6-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
l»l» i
Figure 6-2 continued. Upper: King soil extractor and plastic snow sled (Photos by Regina Poeske).
Lower: Hand pump and soil coffer dam (Photos by Gregg Lomnicky)
6.1.2.2 Initial Color for Saturated Soil and Detection of Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) Odor
1) Assess these properties immediately upon excavating the soil pit and before delineating
the horizons, as color can change or hydrogen sulfide odor dissipate rapidly upon
exposure to air.
6-14
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
2) Record the results in the Initial Readings field of Form S-1 (Front):
INITIAL READINGS
O Hydrogen Sulfide odor (rotten egg)
O Inundated/saturated soil in pit:, If present:
Initial color:
Hue Value Chroma
Color reading depth from surface: cm
O Color change after exposure to air
3) If part of the soil profile is inundated or saturated, determine the initial color of the soil
matrix (Section 6.1.2.6 describes how to determine color) for the saturated area. Record
hue, value, and chroma, and depth from the surface to where the color reading is made.
4) Determine if an odor of H2S gas (hydrogen sulfide = rotten egg scent) occurs in the first
30cm of the profile. Be careful not to confuse rotten egg odor with rotting organic matter.
The odor should be evident upon excavation and not something that is only detected
when the soil is held close to the nose.
5) Continue with horizon delineation (see Section 6.1.2.3) and complete soil profile
description (Sections 6.1.2.4 through 6.1.2.7). Once the profile description is completed:
a) Compare the initial soil matrix color you recorded for the saturated or underwater
portion of the soil profile with the final color you recorded in the So/7 Matrix Color
section of Form S-1 (Section 6.1.2.6) for the horizon at the depth of initial reading.
b) If there is a change in color between the initial and final color reading, fill in the bubble
for Color change after exposure to air. A rapid change in color (difference of one or
more color chips in the Munsell Color Book (2009)) following exposure to air indicates
a reduced matrix, which is a hydric soil indicator (USDA, NRCS 2010).
6.1.2.3 Delineating Soil Horizons
1) For each Soil Pit, identify all distinct horizons visible on the spatially aligned soil slabs
and cores previously placed on the plastic ground sheet (Section 6.1.2.1). For the
Representative Soil Pit, it may be easier to view horizons above 60cm on the in situ soil
profile on the pit wall.
Horizons are delineated (Reference Card S-2, Side B) based on differences in:
• Soil structure - the arrangement of soil peds and pore space in varying forms (e.g.,
prismatic, platy, granular, blocky, etc.; see Reference Card S-3 Side A, Plate 1).
• Texture (Reference Card S-4 Side A and Section 6.1.2.4).
• Soil color based on Munsell Soil Color Charts (2009) (Section 6.1.2.6).
• Presence and type of redoximorphic features (Section 6.1.2.6, Reference Card S-3,
Side B).
2) Place a marker (e.g., golf tee, plastic or metal strip, large headed nail) at the bottom of
each horizon. Number the horizons in order from the top of the profile, for example, the
bottom of Horizon 1 is nearest the upper surface of the soil (Figure 6-3).
6-15
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Clear loose organic debris from the top of the profile at the ground surface, then measure
the depth from the top of the soil profile to the bottom of each horizon in centimeters (a
metric fiberglass seamstress tape with a fishing weight on the bottom end works well).
For the Soil Pit under consideration, record the depth to the lower boundary of each
horizon in the Depth to Lower Boundary of Horizon column of Form S-1 (Front). For
example, in Figure 6-3 (diagram), the lower horizon boundaries are at 2cm for Horizon 1,
4cm for Horizon 2, 7cm for Horizon 3, 20cm for Horizon 4, and 45cm for Horizon 5.
If either boundary of a horizon is less than 2cm wide,
the Horizons section of Form S-1 (Front).
in the abrupt boundary bubble in
Space is provided for nine horizons on Form S-1; although, it is unlikely you will routinely
encounter that many horizons in a particular profile. If more than nine horizons at a
single pit are ever encountered, flag the last horizon and make a note in the Comments
section that data for additional horizons are continued on another page of Form S-1
(Front).
Once the horizons are delineated and marked, photograph the soil profile as directed in
Appendix D.
Ground
Surface
Figure 6-3. Left top: Soil slab diagram with horizons marked. Left bottom: Soil slab photo by Eric
Vance, EPA. Right: Example soil profiles illustrating horizons distinguished by different colors,
structure, or texture. Profile photos from USDA-NRCS (2010).
6-16
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.1.2.4 Describing Soil Texture
Understanding whether soil is organic or mineral and noting major differences in texture
across the soil profile can help distinguish between horizons, and is important in determining
the presence of Field Indicators of Hydric Soils (Section 6.1.2.7, Form S-1 (Back)). Different
hydric soil indicators apply to specific soil textures. Sands and loamy sands are evaluated
using the Sandy (S) hydric soil indicators, while finer mineral textures are evaluated using the
Loamy and Clayey (F) indicators (USDA, NRCS 2010). The All-Soil (A) indicators are used
for both organic and mineral soils.
Procedures for Hand Texturing Soils
Use the following steps (which are repeated on Reference Card S-4, Side A) to describe the
soil texture for each horizon of a soil profile.
1) Determine whether the soil has organic or mineral content - Take a dime-sized
chunk of moist soil in your hand and gently rub the wet soil between forefingers and
thumb several times.
• If the soil feels greasy, the soil is either mucky mineral or organic soil; go to Step 2.
• If the soil does not feel greasy, the texture is a mineral soil; go to Step 3.
2) Texturing soils with high organic matter content Use Text Box 6-3 to distinguish
between mucky mineral and organic soil and to distinguish among types of organic
textures.
Text Box 6-3. Texturing Soils with High Organic Matter Content
a. Determine whether the soil is mucky mineral or organic. (Both have a greasy feel.)
Squeeze a chunk of wet soil.
• Mucky Mineral texture -The soil is a mucky mineral if it is gritty or sticks to your
hand when squeezed and rubbed. Identifiable plant fibers are rare to none.
• Organic texture -The soil has an organic texture, if when squeezed, it either
extrudes liquid or much of the soil material and whatever material remains does
not stick to your hand. Identifiable plant fibers are common. Go to Step b, below.
b. Distinguish among organic textures - Organic textures include: peat, mucky-peat,
or muck. The three textures are defined based on differences in percent volume of
plant fibers visible with a hand lens after rubbing.
• To distinguish between them, grab a fresh sample of moist soil, visually estimate
the percent volume plant fibers and dead roots after rubbing, and use the chart
below to determine the organic soil texture.
Organic Soil Texture
Peat
Mucky Peat
Muck
% Fibers Visible with 1 0X
Hand Lens After Rubbing
>40
20-40
<20
6-17
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
3) Texturing mineral soils - Use Figure 6-4 below to guide you through simple field tests
for determining texture for mineral soils.
Texturing Mineral Soil
Begin by picking up a golf ball-sized or slightly larger sample of soil from the center of the
horizon. Remove roots and rocks.
Add water with spray bottle and break down all
lumps. The soil is prepared when plastic and
moldable, like moist putty or cookie dough. Place
a golf-ball sized sample in your palm.
Does soil remain in a ball
when squeezed?
NO
Add dry soil and start again.
YES
Is soil too dry?
JNO
YES
Is soil too wet?
YES
Place ball of soil between thumb and forefinger gently pushing the soil with the
thumb, squeezing it outward into a thick ribbon. Push the ribbon over the
forefinger. Measure the length when it bends or breaks from its own weight.
YES
Does soil form a ribbon
more than 1/4 inch long?
LOAMY
AND
CLAYEY
SOILS
Figure 6-4. Flowchart for simple hand tests to determine soil texture of three major mineral
soil groups. Modified from Thien (1979).
4) Record the texture results for each horizon - For the Soil Pit and horizon you are
considering, fill in the bubble reflecting the observed texture for the horizon in the So/7
Texture section of Form S-1.
• If the soil is mucky mineral, loamy/clayey, or sandy, fill in the appropriate bubble.
• If the soil is organic fill in the appropriate texture bubble in the Organic field to indicate
whether the texture is peat, mucky peat, or muck. If you cannot determine which
organic texture applies, fill in the bubble for unspecified organic texture.
6-18
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.1.2.5 Estimating Percent Rocks and Roots
1) Examine an area of each horizon (e.g., ~10cm2) and estimate the percent of the surface
area of the soil matrix occupied by rocks > 2mm diameter and by roots.
Percent surface area is estimated directly from 0-100%. Review Plate 3. Surface Area
Estimation of Soil Features on Reference Card S-3, Side A to familiarize yourself with
the appearance of different percentages for a particular feature. Note that the same
percentage can look different depending on whether the feature is aggregated or
dispersed. Do not deliberate extensively over surface area estimates (e.g., for small
values choosing between 1 or 3%, or 5 or 10%; for higher values choosing between 25
and 35%, or 75% or 85%). It is not appropriate to agonize over small differences
because this precision exceeds the accuracy of our ability to detect surface area
differences.
2) Record the percentage for each feature in the appropriate column on Form S-1 (Front):
• Percent rock fragments > 2mm in diameter
• Percent roots
6.1.2.6 Describing Soil Color and Identifying Redoximorphic and Other Soil Features
For each horizon evaluate the following properties and record the data on Form S-1:
1) Determine the color of the soil matrix (dominant part of soil) using a Munsell Soil Color
Book (Munsell Color X-Rite 2009) (Figure 6-5) and the procedures in Text Box 6-4
(repeated on Reference Card S-4, Side B). Record the color codes for the hue, value,
and chroma matching the soil matrix in the So/7 Matrix Co/or section on Form S-1: NWCA
Soil Profile Data (Front). Color reflects physical and chemical properties of the soil and
provides information on hydric conditions. Soil color has three components; hue, value,
and chroma. Chroma is particularly important as a hydric soil indicator.
2) Determine whether redoximorphic, organic, or mottle features are present in the horizon.
See Reference Card S-3, Side B for examples illustrating some of these features.
Redoximorphic and other soil features provide information about inundation and other soil
properties.
• Redoximorphic (Redox) features are color patterns (deviations from the soil matrix
color) caused by recent redistribution of carbon (C), Iron (Fe), or Manganese (Mn) as
a result of reduction and oxidation processes associated with wetting and drying
cycles (Vepraskas 1995, USDA, NRCS 2010). Redox features include uncemented
concentrations and depletions (losses) of these elements, and are observed in pore
linings, ped faces, or the soil matrix as soft masses and colors that contrast with soil
matrix color (USDA, NRCS 2010). A soft mass is a splotch in the soil and a pore
lining would have iron or other elements coating the larger voids (i.e., root channels,
cracks between peds). Depletions are gray zones that occur in the matrix or on pore
linings and ped faces.
• Mottles are any other kind of splotch of color.
6-19
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
• Nodules and Concretion - Nodules are cemented bodies (commonly spherical or
tubular) that can be removed as discrete units from the soil, but which do not have
discernible crystalline structure when viewed with a 10X hand lens. Concretions are
similar to nodules, but have concentric layers of material around a point
(Schoeneberger et al. 2002).
• Organic bodies typically occur at the tips of roots and are commonly 1 to 3 cm in
diameter with muck or mucky modified textures.
• Other organic features include stripped zones and organic infilling. Stripped zones
are areas where iron-manganese oxides and/or organic matter have been stripped
from the matrix and the primary base color of the soil material is exposed. The
stripped areas and translocated oxides and organic matter form a contrasting pattern
of two or more colors with diffuse boundaries (USDA, NRCS 2010).
For more detailed discussion of these features, see Field Indicators ofHydric Soils in the
United States (USDA, NRCS 2010) and Schoeneberger et al. (2002).
3) If redox, organic, or mottle features are absent from a horizon, fill in the bubble in the
Absent field of the Redoximorphic, Organic, or Mottle Features section of Form S-1 and
proceed to describing the next horizon.
4) If present in a horizon, note which kind of redox or other features occur by filling in all
pertinent bubbles in the Feature Types fields of the Redoximorphic, Organic, or Mottle
Features section of Form S-1:
• Composition: Fe = iron, Mn = manganese, C = carbon, U = unable to specify.
• Redox Features: S = Soft masses, N = nodules, concretions, P= pore linings, D =
depletions.
• Mottles and Organic Features: M = mottles, MS = masked sand grains, OB = organic
bodies, OF = other organic features.
5) If masked sand grains are present (see Reference Card S-3, Side A, Plate 2), estimate
the percentage of the horizon that they occupy and record this value in the % Masked
Sand Grains field. This is important for determining if a sandy soil is hydric. Also a
sandy soil with a thick black surface and 30 percent or more unmasked grains is an
indication that the site is becoming drier. To determine if more than 70 percent of the
grains are masked it should look like almost 100 percent black to the naked eye when
soil is moist. Under a 10x hand lens you should see 30 percent or less of the individual
grains uncoated.
6) Estimate the percent surface area (0 to 100%) of a horizon occupied by a combination of
distinct and prominent redox features (see Reference Card S-3, Side B). Record these
estimates in the % Horizon with Distinct or Prominent Features column of the
Redoximorphic Features section of Form S-1.
• Note, the terms "faint", "distinct", and "prominent" refer to level of color contrast
between soil matrix and redox features, not to discreteness of redox features.
• Use the tables on Reference Card S-4, Side B (see Schoeneberger et al. (2002) for
more detail) to quickly distinguish faint from distinct and prominent contrast levels
between redox features and the soil matrix.
6-20
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
• Exclude faint contrast redoximorphic features from the percent estimates.
7) Determine the colors (see Text Box 6-4) of the most evident (in terms of contrast and
abundance) redoximorphic or other features observed in the matrix of each horizon. Record
this color information in the Hue, Value, and Chroma color fields in the Redoximorphic,
Organic, or Mottle Features section of Form S-1.
Text Box 6-4. Evaluating Color for the Soil Matrix and for Redoximorphic Features
Determining Color of the Soil Matrix:
1) To determine soil matrix color, choose a representative, freshly broken surface of a soil ped
that is not coated with clay, Fe (Iron), or Mn (Manganese).
2) Use a spray bottle to wet the soil if it is dry. Spray until moist, but not saturated. As soon as
the water is absorbed into the soil, read the color from the Munsell Soil Color Book (Munsell
Soil Color, X-Rite 2009) (See Step 3).
3) Match the soil matrix color (hue, value, and chroma) to the soil color chips from the Munsell
Soil Color Book (See Figure 6-5). Hue is found on the Munsell page tab and labeled using
numbers and letters (e.g., 2.SYR or 10R). Value is found on the leftside of the page along the
y-axis of the color chip array and is represented by numbers (e.g., 2.5, 8). Chroma is found at
the bottom of the page along the x-axis of the color chip array and is represented by numbers
or by numbers and letters forgleyed soils (e.g., 1, 8, 5G, 10GY).
4) Observe the soil color in direct sunlight with the sun at your back and shining over your right
shoulder whenever possible (Figure 6-5). Match the color of the soil with the closest color chip
from the Munsell Soil Color Book.
• Start at the 10YR page and go left for redder and right for yellower or grayer colors.
• The color chips in the Munsell Book have central holes so that the soil can be directly
compared through the hole to the chip of interest.
• Take care to keep the color chips clean and dry.
5) Record color codes for the hue, value, and chroma matching the soil matrix color on Form S-1:
NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front).
Determining Color of Redoximorphic, Organic, or Mottle Features:
1) When redoximorphic or other features (See Reference Card S-3 for examples) are present in
the horizon, determine the color for the most evident feature observed.
2) Select a representative, freshly broken surface of a soil ped that clearly illustrates the redox or
other feature of interest.
3) Focus on this feature and use Steps 2 through 4 (as described above for determining Soil
Matrix color) to match the feature color with the closest color chip from the Munsell Color Book.
Record the color codes for the hue, value, and chroma matching in the appropriate fields on
Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front).
6-21
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Viewing
book with
sun shining
over right
shoulder
Match soil
color by
viewing soil
clod through
center holes
to compare
to color chips
Figure 6-5. Using a Munsell Soil Color Book. Photos by Thanh Nguyen and Amanda
Nahlik, USEPA.
6.1.2.7 Identifying Hydric Soil Indicators
The next component of soil profile description is to evaluate the soil profile for the presence of
Hydric Soil Indicators using the:
Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States (USDA-NRCS 2010); hereafter the
Hydric Soil Indicators manual. This manual is the standard for the NWCA for
determining the presence of the hydric soil indicators.
Procedures for evaluating hydric soil indicators for the NWCA are described in Text Box 6-5
(repeated on Reference Card 5). Hydric soil indicators form as a result of the soil being
6-22
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
saturated, and anaerobic, long enough to meet the definition of a hydric soil. Note, hydric soil
indicators were designed for determining wetland boundaries, and hydric soils in the interior of
wetlands may not always display these indicators (USDA, NRCS 2010).
• Hydric Soil Indicators are texture specific - Different indicators apply to different texture
groups (USDA, NRCS 2010).
o The All Soil (A) indicators are applicable to all soils.
o Textures from sands to loamy fine sands are evaluated using the Sandy Soils (S)
indicators.
o Finer textured mineral soils (loamy very fine sand and finer) are evaluated using the
Loamy/Clayey Soil (F) indicators.
• Hydric Soil Indicators are regionally specific - Specific subsets of the hydric soil
indicators are used for different USDA Land Resource Regions (LLRs). A map illustrating
LRRs applicable to your state, and a list of hydric indicators for each LLR, are provided on
Reference Card S-5 and in the NRCS Hydric Soil Indicators Manual (USDA, NRCS 2010).
• Hydric Soil Indicator Codes - Hydric Soil Indicator names have two parts, a descriptive
label (e.g., Histic epipedon, Dark surface, Iron Manganese mass) and an alpha-numeric
code (e.g., A2, S7, F12, etc.), where A, F, or S each represent a texture group and the
number refers to a specific indicator in that group (See USDA, NRCS 2010, Reference
Card S-5, and Form S-1).
Text Box 6-5. Procedures for Evaluating Hydric Soil Indicators
1. Data describing Hydric Soil Indicators are recorded in the Hydric Soil Indicators section
of Form S-1 NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
2. Determine the USDA-NRCS Land Resource Region (LRR) in which the AA being
sampled is located by consulting the LRR map on Reference Card S-5 (or in the
Hydric Soils Indicators Manual).
The hydric soil indicators that apply to each LRR are listed on the back of Reference
Card S-5 and included in parentheses next to the indicator names in the Hydric Soil
Indicators section of Form S-1 NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
3. While examining the soil profile, use the Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United
States (USDA, NRCS 2010) manual and the information on texture, color,
redoximorphic features (which you previously recorded for each horizon on the front
side of Form S-1) to determine whether the hydric indicators specific to the LRR where
the AA is located are present.
4. Evaluate the profile for all regionally appropriate Hydric Soil Indicators that fall into the
soil texture groups A (All Soils), or F (Loamy/Clayey Soils), or S (Sandy Soils) pertinent
to the soil profile under examination.
5. Record the presence of any of these hydric soils indicators in the Hydric Soil Indicators
section of Form S-1 NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back) by filling in the appropriate
bubbles.
6. All hydric soil indicators that are observed are assumed to occur in the soil profile
location specified in the description of that indicator in Field Indicators of Hydric Soils
in the United States (USDA, NRCS 2010). If something unusual is observed, note the
soil horizon number and describe the anomaly in the Hydric Indicator Comments
section of Form S-1 NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
6-23
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
6.1.3 Soil Sample Collection
Soil samples are collected from the Representative Soil Pit after profile description down to
60cm has been completed for all four soil pits. The description of the lower soil profile may
have been completed for the Representative Pit earlier (See Section 6.1.2) if the soil was easily
augured to 125cm. Alternatively, if it is easier, complete the 60 to 125cm section of the soil
description of the Representative Pit as the pit expanded for sample collection.
Soil Sample Types
Four types of soil samples are collected at the Representative Pit in the following order:
1) Isotope Samples - collected for isotope analysis of 15N from the surface layer of three
locations near the Representative Pit (Section 6.1.3.1).
2) Sediment Enzyme Samples - collected for enzyme analysis from the surface layer of three
locations near the Representative Pit (Section 6.1.3.1).
3) Bulk Density (BD) Samples - collected for determination of bulk density from each horizon
greater than 8cm thick down to 60cm (Section 6.1.3.2).
4) Chemistry /Particle Size Density Analysis (PSDA) Samples (hereafter Chemistry) -
collected for chemical, physical, and nutrient analysis from each horizon greater than 8cm
thick down to 125cm (Section 6.1.3.2).
Carefully follow the protocols in Sections 6.1.3.1 and 6.1.3.2 for collection of each specific soil
sample type.
6.1.3.1 Collecting Soil Samples for Isotope and Enzyme Analysis
Soil isotope and soil enzyme (called sediment enzyme) samples are collected in near proximity
to the Representative Soil Pit before it is expanded for collection of bulk density and chemistry
samples. Collection of these two sample types is very similar, but note that three cores will be
collected and placed into a quart-size plastic bag for the isotope sample while 6 cores will be
collected in a gallon-size plastic bag for the soil enzyme sample.
Preparing the Sample Bags
1) Fill out the Soil Isotope Sample Label (example below). It is printed as an adhesive label
with a pre-assigned Sample ID# and Site ID. Fill in all requested information and affix the
label to the front of a quart-size zipper plastic bag. Place clear tape over top of the label to
protect it from dirt and debris, and to ensure that it stays affixed to the sample bag.
999981 +
SOIL ISOTOPE
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ /2011
6-24
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
2) Fill out the Sediment Enzyme Sample Label (example below). It is printed as an adhesive
label with a pre-assigned Sample ID# and Site ID. Fill in all requested information and affix
the label to the front of a gallon-size zipper plastic bag. Place clear tape over top of the
label to protect it from dirt and debris, and to ensure that it stays affixed to the sample bag.
999983
SEDIMENT ENZYMES
NWCA11-7771 Visit#:l
/ /2011
Collecting the Isotope and Sediment Enzyme Samples
1) Collect three isotope soil cores and six sediment enzyme cores, before expanding the
Representative Soil Pit for bulk density and chemistry samples. The core sampling locations
should be spaced evenly around the soil pit and positioned in undisturbed areas within a 1-
m radius of where the pit will be expanded (see diagram below). The spacing of the
sampling locations for the cores may be shifted so they are positioned in undisturbed areas.
2) Clear vegetation and any loose litter (e.g., fallen leaves, branches, etc.) from the surface of
the soil in the sampling area.
6-25
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
3) From each of the three locations, extract three 10-cm deep soil cores (measured from the
soil surface and including the O horizon - uppermost organic soil layer, if present) using the
soil syringe-corer device. Avoid sampling through thick root mats and rhizomes as this will
contaminate the analysis. Minimal amounts of small roots are acceptable in the core.
• Remove the plunger while taking the soil core (Figure 6-6a).
• Push the syringe tube into to the soil to the 10cm (60 ml_) mark on the wall of the syringe
tube. The air hole should be above the soil (Figure 6-6b).
• While the syringe tube is still in the soil, replace the plunger in the syringe, pushing it
down just enough to cover the air hole. This will create a vacuum to aid in removing the
core (Figure 6-6c).
• Carefully remove the syringe tube containing the soil from the ground by gently twisting
and lifting it upwards. If necessary, use your fingers or a hand trowel to break the soil
from under the core and support the core as it is lifted from the surrounding matrix
(Figure 6-6d).
• If this syringe device is unavailable (or if the soil is too dry for the device), a standard
stainless steel soil probe (7/8" or similar diameter, see Figure 6-2d) can be used to
collect a 10 cm deep soil core.
4) Remove each core from the coring device as described below.
• Extract the core after it is collected into the labeled sample bag using the plunger (Figure
6-6e) or your fingers if a soil probe is used.
• If using the plunger, avoid pushing it beyond the end of the syringe-corer (Figure 6-6f).
5) Place one of the three cores collected from each location in the prepared quart-size sample
bag for isotope analysis. Place two cores from each location in the prepared gallon-size
sample bag for sediment enzyme analysis. When all three locations are sampled there will
be three cores in the quart-size bag and six in the gallon-size bag.
6) Roll down the top of each sample bag to remove excess air. Once the air is evacuated from
the bag, seal the top by zippering it. Double check that the zipper is secure.
7) Record the Sample ID number from the Sample Label for the isotope and for the sediment
enzyme sample in the Sample ID field in the So/7 Isotope/Sediment Enzymes section on the
back of Form S-1. Note anything usual about the sample in the Comments field. If no
sample is collected for either soil isotopes or sediment enzymes, fill in the appropriate No
Sample Collected bubble, and explain the reason in the Comments field.
8) Place each sample bag in a second bag of the same size (i.e., double-bag the sample).
Press out the excess air and seal the top by zippering it. Double check that the zipper is
secure.
9) Keep the samples on ice or cool while in the field or traveling (e.g., in a small ice chest).
10) Follow the protocols in Section 6.2 on sample tracking, shipping, and handling of samples.
6-26
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Remove the plunger
Carefully remove the syringe,
supporting the soil core as it
is lifted.
©
Push the syringe 10 cm into
the soil. The air hole should
be above the soil.
Replace the plunger, pushing it
down just enough to cover the
air hole.
J
Slowly extract the core using
the plunger.
Avoid pushing the plunger
beyond the end of the coring
device.
Figure 6-6. Extracting a soil core for an isotope soil sample or sediment enzyme sample.
Photos by Casey Pollock and Amanda Nahlik, USEPA.
6-27
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.1.3.2 Collecting Bulk Density and Chemistry Samples
Soil samples for bulk density analysis and for chemistry analysis (includes chemical, physical,
and nutrient analyses) are collected from the Representative Pit. To collect samples:
• Select techniques for excavating soils and sample collection that are suitable for the
conditions encountered at each Representative Pit (See Expanding the Representative Pit
and Collecting Soil Samples and Text Box 6-6, below). Your local NRCS soil scientist may
be able suggest equipment appropriate to particular locations or conditions.
• Collect both the bulk density and the chemistry sample from a given horizon before moving
on to the next horizon.
• Collect bulk density samples for every horizon greater than 8cm thick down to 60-cm depth.
A bulk density sample is typically comprised of three individual cores of known volume for
each horizon that are placed together in one sample bag.
• Collect chemistry samples for every horizon greater than 8cm thick down to the125-cm
depth. Chemistry samples for each horizon are comprised of 1 to 2.5 liters or quarts of soil.
• Samples are generally collected for all described horizons (Form S-1 (Front)), except when
horizons are less than 8cm thick as these shallow horizons are not practical to sample. The
only exception to this shallow horizon rule is for Organic (O) and A horizons (at the top of
the profile, Text Box 6-1). In this situation, the O and A should be combined and sampled
as one layer.
• As each soil sample is collected, indicate that it has been collected by filling in its type (bulk
density or chemistry) in the appropriate horizon row of the Sample Collected column under
the Horizons section of the Form S-1 for the Representative Pit.
Protocols for collecting bulk density and chemistry samples are detailed in the next two
subheadings: 1) Preparing Labels and Sample Collection Bags, and 2) Expanding the
Representative Pit and Collecting Bulk Density and Chemistry Samples. Preparing sample
tags, labels, and collection bags is initiated prior to collecting samples, but some label
information is completed during sample collection. Properly sealing the sample bags continues
throughout sample collection. Thus, for convenience these activities are described before the
protocols for expanding the Representative Pit and collecting soil samples are presented.
Preparing Labels and Sample Collection Bags
Precise preparation of sample tags, labels, and bags for the Chemistry and Bulk Density
samples is critical to ensuring each soil sample is connected to the horizon, the NWCA site from
which it originated, and to its associated data on Form S-1 for the Representative Pit.
Before beginning preparation of sample bags, make certain that you have the correct set of
preprinted sample tags and labels for the NWCA Site at which you are working. As you collect
samples, be sure to associate the correct preprinted tag and label with each sample.
1) The Soil Sample Tag - For each horizon and sample type, begin by completing the
preprinted adhesive sample tag (see example below) with the Sample ID Number and
Horizon Number pertinent to the sample you will collect.
6-28
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-Q02-Q01-1
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 1 Horizon Location: cm to cm
a) The preprinted Sample ID Number at the top of the sample tag has several elements:
• Site ID number: In the example above = NWCA11-9999. Make sure the Site ID
matches the site you are sampling.
• Visit Identifier (1 = primary sampling visit, 2 = second visit (QA revisit)): In the
example, the visit number = 1. Be sure this number corresponds with the visit you
are making to the site.
• Information specific to each site that is automatically generated when the label is
printed to aid in sample tracking, but which is not immediately relevant to sample
collection:
o Last two digits of calendar year when samples are collected: In example =11.
o Code for state in which site occurs: In the example = OR (Oregon).
o Federal Information Processing Code (FIPS) for the county: In example = 002.
o County pedon number (generated by Information Management Team based on
number of sites in a particular county): In the example = 001.
o nth horizon (the horizon sampled): In the example = 1.
b) The Horizon Number is also pre-printed in the bottom row of the sample tag. Since the
sample tags are preprinted it is critical to double check that you are using the correct tag
for the horizon being sampled. If a horizon that was described on Form S-1 is too thin to
sample (< 8cm thick), avoid inadvertently using its preprinted tag on another sample.
c) Fill out the other sample and horizon specific information requested on the tag:
• Record the Date of sampling.
• Indicate whether this is Visit 1 (primary sample visit) or 2 (QA revisit).
• Indicate the Sample Type (Chemistry/PDSA or Bulk Density)
• Record the Horizon Location (the depth range in which the horizon occurs (e.g., 0 -
16cm, 27 - 54cm) from Form S-1.
d) Affix the completed sample tag to the outside front of an 8mil thick plastic soil sample
bag. Cover the entire label with clear tape to protect it from moisture and mud.
e) Note that the adhesive sheet of sample tags for a site is printed in two columns
(Section 6.6); one for bulk density and one for chemistry samples. Horizon numbers are
the same across rows (e.g., one tag for bulk density and one for the chemistry sample
for the same horizon), and increment between rows from Horizon 1 to Horizon 7. If more
than seven horizons are observed, use blank tags for the remaining horizons being
careful to record the Sample ID# from the preprinted tags and modifying the last digit to
reflect the horizon number of the sample you are labeling. For example, if you were
sampling Horizon 8 for the site in the example above, the Sample ID# would be NWCA-
9999-1-11-OR-002-001-8.
6-29
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
2) The Soil Sample Label (see example below) - Completely fill out the sample label
(preprinted on waterproof paper) for the same sample:
a) Make sure the Sample ID# and the Horizon # on the Soil Sample Label matches those
on the Soil Sample Tag.
b) Indicate whether the sample is a Chemistry/PSDA or a Bulk Density sample.
c) Fill in the Date and indicate the Visit #.
d) Provide the Horizon Location from Form S-1, making sure it matches the sample tag.
e) For bulk density samples only: Fill in the information for calculating volume after the
soil cores or blocks have been collected (See Collecting Bulk Density and Chemistry
Samples, below).
f) For chemistry samples only: If any rocks are removed from the chemistry sample
record the percent of sample volume comprised by the removed rocks. Unless very
large and heavy, rocks should not be removed from the chemistry sample, and rocks
should never be removed from the bulk density sample.
g) After the sample is collected, note anything unusual about the sample in the comments
section of the label.
3)
NWCA 2011: Bulk Densfty or Chemistry Soil Sample Label
•o
0
l*»
Ofl
TO
£t
Oj
Q.
£
ro
tft
lu.
Of
T3
3
<1>
Q.
OJ
in
Sample Type:
O Chemistry/PSDA
O Bulk Density
Sample ID:
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-1
Date: / /2011 Visit*: Ol O2
Horizon #: 1 Horizon Locat
ion: cm to cni
For Bulk Density Samples Only: Indicate cores or blocks collected by filling in appropriate babble.
Record volume information In one of the following ways: 1) The volume as cubic centimeters, 2) the
diameter and length of cylindrical core, or 3) the dimensions of a block.
O Core or Block 1:
Volume (cm3)
Cylindrical
1
a
Diameter (cm)
Length (cm)
Width (cm)
Length (cm)
Depth (cm)
O Core or Block 2:
Volume (cm3)
Diameter (cm)
Length (cm)
Width (cm)
Length (cm)
Depth (cm)
O Core or Block 3;
Volume (cm3)
Diameter (cm)
Length (cm)
Width (cmj
Length (cm)
Depth (cm)
Comments:
For Chemistry Samples Only: ft
must be removed, record the e
% Sample Volume Co
ocks in the soil should be retained in the sample; however, if they
stimated volume of the sample they comprised.
mprised by Removed Rock
Remember to ensure the Sample ID on the Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
and the Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Label matches the preprinted Sample ID
for the Representative Pit on Form S-1. Note that the last digit on the tags and labels is
absent from Form S-1 because it reflects the horizon number from which each sample is
collected.
6-30
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
4) As you collect each soil sample (see Expanding the Representative Pit and Collecting Soil
Samples, below), place it in its properly tagged 8-mil thick plastic sample bag. These bags
are durable, and when correctly folded and stapled retain the field state moisture content of
the sample. Consequently, it is critical to sample integrity to make sure this seal is properly
executed:
a) After the bag is filled with the required amount of soil, double check that all identification
data is correct and corresponds exactly on the sample tag and on the sample label.
b) Once this inspection is done, use the following procedures illustrated in Figure 6-7 to
attach the label and seal the bag:
*
1) Take the top 5cm (2 inches) of the sample bag and
make the first fold away from side of bag on which the
sample tag is affixed. Note, the sample tag displays key
tracking information and must always be affixed to the
front of the bag.
2) Make a second fold taking the top 2.5cm (1 inch)
of the first fold and folding backwards towards the
sample tag on the front of the bag.
3) Insert the sample label tab into the second fold with the label
information facing outward. Use a heavy duty stapler and staple through
the fold and label. Next staple the left and right sides of the double fold.
Note the bag in this illustration is thinner and somewhat smaller than the
actual sample bag will be.
Heavy Duty Stapler
Figure 6-7. Sealing the bulk density or chemistry soil sample bag. Photos 1-3, Teresa
Magee, USEPA, stapler image courtesy of Richard Pullman, USDA-NRCS.
6-31
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Expanding the Representative Pit and Collecting Soil Samples
To collect bulk density and chemistry samples and confirm the profile description conducted
earlier (Section 6.1.2), expand the Representative Pit using a shovel and/or tiling spade and an
auger. The basic procedure for expanding the Representative Pit and collecting samples is
described below under a) Overview, b) Collecting Bulk Density Samples, and c)Collecting
Chemistry Samples. Alternative sampling techniques for difficult to sample soils are provided in
Text Box 6-6.
• Figure 6-2 illustrates a variety of soil excavating and sampling tools.
• Figure 6-8 illustrates Representative Pit excavation and summarizes sample collection.
• Figure 6-9 illustrates details of bulk density sample collection.
Overview of Pit Expansion and Sample Collection
1) For the top 60cm of the soil profile in which both bulk density and chemistry samples are
collected, excavate the hole to the dimensions needed (usually not more than 1m X 1m and
60cm deep) to access (Figure 6-8a, b) and view the soil (Figure 6-8c).
2) Mark horizons with golf tees, nails, or plastic/metal tabs so that you have a guide for the
depths at which to collect the samples for each horizon (Figure 6-8c).
3) To collect soil samples, begin by clearing off vegetation and loose litter from the top horizon.
Collect both the bulk density sample (typically three cores of known volume) and the
chemistry sample (1 to 2.5 liters or quarts) for the top horizon before digging down to the
next horizon (Figure 6-8d, e).
4) Once a horizon is sampled, excavate off the remaining material from that horizon to form a
shelf with the horizontal surface being the top of the next horizon (Figure 6-8f).
5) When the next horizon is exposed, cut out three bulk density cores for that horizon and then
collect the chemistry sample (Figure 6-8g).
6) Continue excavation until all horizons (>8cm thick) to a depth of 60cm have been exposed
and all bulk density samples collected (bulk density samples are not collected below 60cm).
7) Collect chemistry samples from horizons that occupy the 60 to 125cm depth range with an
auger, or if it is easier, by using a shovel. When using an auger:
a) Take care to note the horizon boundary depths for the horizon for which you are
collecting the sample so that the soil is pulled from the correct depth. You can also
confirm that the correct soil horizon has been sampled by comparing the extracted soil
with the soil profile data collected earlier for this horizon.
b) For shallow horizons, it may be necessary to bore more than one auger hole to obtain
enough material (1.5 to 2.5 liters) for a chemistry sample.
c) When using an auger to grab chemistry samples be careful to extract a clean sample for
the horizon of interest (e.g., not contaminated by debris from other soil layers).
8) In some instances, water may seep in from the sides and fill the pit. If this happens it will be
necessary to pump water out of the pit to continue soil excavation and sample collection
(See Figure 6-8f-i). In some cases, (e.g., very wet, high organic, low-strength, cemented
soils, or other difficult soils) alternate excavation techniques will be needed (Text Box 6-6).
9) Keep all samples cool and out of the sun during the sampling day.
6-32
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
Figure 6-8. Expanding the Representative Soil Pit and Collecting Soil Samples Photos by Gregg Lomnicky. 1) Expand the Representative Pit using straight vertical cuts (a) at
existing pit edge and lifting out slab of soil (b). 2) Use the excavated soil to create a berm or coffer dam outside the Representative Pit (c). 3) Excavate the pit to 60cm or as deep
as possible before encountering ground water (c). 4) Mark horizon boundaries on the pit wall (c) to facilitate soil sample collection, and to confirm the initial soil profile description
you made for this pit. In this example, ground water was encountered at about 35cm deep so the pit was initially excavated to about 35cm (c). Three horizons are visible; Horizon
1 (0 to 10cm), Horizon 2 (10 to 20cm), Horizon 3 (20 to 29cm), and part of Horizon 4, which begins around 29cm and extends to 60cm+, can also be seen (c). 5) Collect bulk
density and chemistry soil samples (see d-h) from the exposed horizons above 60cm depth or above water level. If water is present, collect all accessible samples, then evacuate
water from pit (i), excavate the next lower horizons down to 60cm, and collect soil samples (this may require alternate excavation techniques; see Text Boxes 6-2 and 6-6). 6) In
soils that are above the water table and not completely saturated, use an auger to extract material to complete profile description and collect chemistry soil samples for each
horizon from 60 to 125cm deep. If the soil is saturated in this depth range, alternate sample approaches (see Text Boxes 6-2 and 6-6) may allow collection of samples.
Collecting soil for bulk density and
chemistry samples - Horizon 1
• Remove vegetation and debris
from top horizon and smooth
the surface of the soil at the
top of the pit to expose Horizon
• Collect the cores for the bulk
density sample (d) (See Figure
6-9 for details of bulk density
sample collection).
• Collect the soil for the
chemistry sample (e).
6-33
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
~
-.-•SSpwwaE -» _.
6-34
Figure 6-8 Continued.
Collecting soil for bulk density and
chemistry samples - Horizon 2 to
the Horizon at 60cm depth
• After collecting the Horizon 1
samples, remove any remaining
Horizon 1 soil in the sample area
to form a bench exposing Horizon
2(f).
• Collect the cores for the bulk
density sample. In (g), bulk density
cores were collected on the right
side of the Horizon 2 shelf (note
missing soil).
• Collect the soil for the chemistry
sample for Horizon 2 (g).
• Excavate any remaining Horizon 2
soil on the bench to expose
Horizon 3 and collect the bulk
density and chemistry samples (h).
• Continue this process until bulk
density and chemistry samples
have been collected for all
horizons down to 60cm.
• If needed pump out water to
access horizons (i).
Collect soil chemistry samples for
each horizon occurring between 60
and 125cm
• This is typically done using an
auger (not pictured).
• In some cases, (e.g., as in the very
wet soils as illustrated here or
other difficult soils) alternate
excavation techniques will be
needed (Text Box 6-6).
At the end of the day, once all
samples are collected, refill the pit.
• If possible, return the soil to the
pit in horizon order.
• Replace and tap vegetation to top
of the refilled pit(j).
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Collecting Bulk Density Samples
Knowing bulk density (ratio of the mass of solids to the total or bulk volume) is critical to
converting sample data from a weight to a volume basis to allow correct interpretation of
chemical and nutrient levels in the soil (USDA, NRCS 2009). A known volume of uncompacted
soil is necessary for determining bulk density.
General protocol for bulk density sample collection at each horizon above 60cm
1) Collect three soil cores, or alternatively (if required by soil characteristics) three soil blocks
(e.g., 5cm on a side) or one larger block or cylinder of soil.
2) Place all soil cores or blocks from one horizon together in the appropriate pre-tagged
sample bag. Do not remove or discard roots or rocks from the sample.
3) As each soil core or block is collected and deposited into the sample bag, record its volume
information (volume in cm3, if known; diameter and length for cores, dimensions for blocks)
on the bulk density sample label.
4) Carefully seal the sample bag and attach the sample label (see Preparing Labels and
Sample Collection Bags).
5) Once the sample is collected, fill in the bulk density bubble in the Sample Collected column
of Form S-1.
6) Make every effort to obtain the bulk density sample for each horizon. However, if soil
conditions prohibit sample collection, leave the bulk density bubble in the Samples Collected
column of Form S-1 unfilled, flag the horizon, and note the reason in the Comments section.
For many wetland soils, a small can with known diameter and depth (or with a known volume) is
an excellent, inexpensive tool for extracting bulk density cores (Figure 6-9). Consequently, the
NWCA will employ a small can as the primary tool for bulk density sample collection.
Some soils or site conditions (e.g., high organic matter soils, inundation, or severe compaction
when using can corer) will require other techniques for collecting bulk density samples and
several alternate methods are described in Text Box 6-6. Your local soil scientist may also be
able to alert you to problem soils in your sample area, before you go in the field, and advise you
on the bulk density sampling methods that will be most effective.
Can core method
Wherever possible (most moist to dry soils), use a small can to collect three cores for each bulk
density sample at a particular horizon). A small can, such as a sliced olive can (2.25 ounces dry
weight, 6 ounce liquid volume), with a 6.5-cm diameter and a 4.5-cm depth (-150 cm3 volume),
makes an excellent bulk density corer for most wetland soils. Cut two or three holes with a
bottle/can opener equidistantly around the rim of the can's bottom (Figure 6-9a-c) to allow air to
escape as the can is inserted into the soil and to allow you to see how full the can is during bulk
density sample collection. To collect bulk density cores at each horizon:
1) Begin with the top horizon (at the ground surface). Smooth a planar horizontal area at the
top of the horizon where bulk density will be sampled (see Figure 6-8d). Choose an area
that appears representative of the horizon from which to extract the sample.
2) Be careful to avoid compacting the core when inserting the can into the soil:
6-35
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 6. Soils
a) If the horizon is thicker than the height of the can, use the palm of your hand to gently
push the can into the smoothed area until the bottom of the can is flush with the soil
surface (Figure 6-9a, b).
b) If the horizon is not as thick as the can, carefully push the can into soil until the open end
of the can reaches, but does not cross, the lower boundary of the horizon.
c) If you hit some resistance in pushing the can into the soil, lay a board across the bottom
of the can and tap lightly with a hammer or geology pick until the bottom of the can is
flush with the ground surface or is at the lower boundary of the horizon.
3) Dig out the sampling can plus a little of the surrounding soil (Figure 6-9c, d) and, with a knife
blade, cut off the excess soil so the sample material is flush with the top of the can (Figure
6-9e). If the can is not full (e.g., because the horizon is thin), be careful not to push
additional soil into the can during excavation.
4) Empty the contents of the can into the previously labeled sample bag. Collect two more
cores to complete the sample for this horizon. Record volume information for each core on
the sample label.
5) Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each sampleable horizon down to 60cm.
\ -^. .*
*\r* -~- ~ -••
^
Figure 6-9. Collecting a bulk density core using a small can. Photos by Gregg Lomnicky.
6-36
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Collecting Chemistry Samples
Once you have collected the bulk density sample for a horizon, collect a chemistry sample from
the same horizon.
1) Slice or otherwise extract (Figure 6-8e, g) a representative sample from boundary to
boundary of the horizon and for a lateral extent large enough to include the observed short-
range variability.
2) If there are no rock fragments (larger than 2mm), then 1.0 to 1.5 liters or quarts of sample
are needed for the chemistry sample to accommodate the required lab tests.
3) If course rock fragments are present, collect a larger volume of soil. You do not need to
remove rock fragments; the lab will do that for you. However, once the rock fragments are
removed, 1.0 to 1.5 liters or quarts of soil must remain. Therefore, if your soil is 50% rock
you need 2 to 3 quarts of sample.
If there are large rock fragments too big to be placed in the sample bag, estimate their total
volume and remove them from the sample. Record the % volume of the sample comprised
by the rock removed in the For Chemistry Samples Only section of the Soil Sample Label.
This is critical information for calculating percent rock fragments during lab analysis.
4) Once the chemistry soil sample is obtained place it into the designated sample bag.
Carefully attach its completed label and properly seal the bag using the procedures
described above under the Preparing Labels and Sample Collection Bags subheading. Fill
in the chemistry bubble in the Sample Collected column of Form S-1.
5) Make every effort to obtain the chemistry sample for each horizon. However, if soil
conditions prohibit sample collection, leave the chemistry bubble in the Sample Collected
column of Form S-1 unfilled, flag the horizon and note the reason in the Comment section.
Text Box 6-6. Techniques for Collecting Bulk Density and Chemistry Samples in Difficult Soils
For All Alternate Techniques for Collecting Soil Samples: Carefully follow the procedures for bagging
and labeling the samples described in Preparing and Labeling Sample Bags above. Ensure that both the
sample tag and the sample label have been filled out completely for each sample. For bulk density
samples, be sure to record the diameter and length for each core or the dimensions of subsamples with
non-cylindrical shapes (e.g., cubes, rectangular blocks) on the Sample Label.
If the Soil has a Water Table Present: Excavate only to just above the depth of the water table.
Sample all horizons above the water table. Once the bulk density and chemistry samples are collected
for horizons above the water table, begin excavation below the water table using the hand pump to pump
the water out of the hole. Try to get to at least 60cm deep by excavation. Excavate to the bottom of each
lower horizon and sample it before trying to get deeper. If possible, for the bulk density sample at each
horizon above 60cm, carve out cubes of known dimension (e.g., 5cm on a side) and place the block(s) in
the sample bag. Remember to collect a chemistry sample for each horizon above 60cm as you are
collecting the bulk density samples. Once you get to 60cm, collect chemistry samples for the area from
60 to 125cm deep with a bucket auger, taking care to get a clean chemistry sample of each horizon.
Drier Soils (Hammered Corer): Hammered soil core samplers consist of a slide and a drop hammer
that is attached to a solid coring device about 5cm in diameter and of varying lengths (Figure 6-2).
Hammered corers are efficient for extracting bulk density samples in many soil conditions (excluding
gravelly, loose organic, soupy, or sandy soils); but this tool is heavy, so not ideal for routinely carrying into
the field over long distances. However, when soils are too dry for retrieving bulk density cores with a can,
a hammered corer (if available) may work well. You will need to ensure that the soil cores extracted using
6-37
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Text Box 6-6. Techniques for Collecting Bulk Density and Chemistry Samples in Difficult Soils
the hammered corer are not severely compacted. Check for compaction by comparing the length of the
soil core in the hammered corer with the depth of the void left by its removal. If the core length is more
than 10% less than the void length, another sampling approach should be selected. When using a
hammered corer, be sure to carefully follow the instructions for its operation.
Organic Soils: If the water table is below the surface, obtain the soil samples for the non-inundated
upper layers from the side of the pit. If the hydraulic conductivity is slow enough, dig and remove
samples below the water table as far as practical and place on a plastic sheet or sled in an orderly
fashion (i.e., in the in situ order from the surface) for describing and processing. If samples can be
removed for bulk density in the normal manner, do so. You can also carve out cubes of known dimension
(e.g., 5cm on a side) and place them in the bulk density sample bag. Note the sample dimensions on the
Sample Label. Collect samples from below the water table with a Macaulay peat sampler or using the
King soil extractor technique (see below). Place the sample for each horizon in its designated sample
bag, knead the bag to remove air, fold top, insert label in fold and staple. Place this sealed bag into
another sample bag, getting all the air out to limit oxidation, and staple this bag as well.
Sulfidic Soil Materials (Tidal Marsh): Follow this protocol whenever sampling tidal marsh soils and any
other soils known to contain sulfides (rotten egg odor usually present). Excavate using the normal
technique or one of the modified techniques for sampling saturated soils. Bulk density can be done in the
typical manner for the technique used. For chemistry samples, place samples in sample bags and knead
the bag so that all air is eliminated when the bag is secured. Fold top, staple, and label. Place in another
bag, getting all the air out, minimizing head space, and stapling this bag as well. It is important to avoid
exposure to air keep the soil from oxidizing or the pH of the soil will change drastically. Adding some
ambient soil water to the sample can limit oxidation. Keep containers in a dark and cool place. Indicate
in the comments section of the Soil Sample Label that the sample may contain sulfides so that
once it reaches the lab it can be stored correctly and processed as quickly as possible.
Tube Extractor Method (King soil extractor, see Figure 6-2): When using the King soil extractor to
obtain bulk density samples, use a sharp knife to slice through the bottom of the horizon being sampled
and then cut bulk density samples out of the middle of the horizon. You may need to use two or three
extractor tubes of sample to obtain enough soil for each horizon to get enough material for bulk density
and chemistry samples. Once the bulk density samples are obtained put the rest of the soil material for
that horizon into the chemistry sample bag.
6.1.4 Water Depth in Pit after Equilibration
After all AB Team sampling tasks are completed and prior to filling in the soil pit holes, collect
water depth data at each soil pit and record the data in the appropriate field of the So/7 Pit Water
Depth section of Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
1) If the area in the vicinity of the soil pit is inundated and surface water is present, record
water depth in centimeters in the Surface Water field as a positive number. If no surface
water is present, fill in the bubble in the Absent column.
2) If there is water in the soil pit, measure the depth in centimeters from the ground surface
down to the top of the water level and record this depth as a negative number in the Water
Level in Pit field. If no water is present in the pit, fill in the bubble in the Absent column.
3) Note whether the soil is saturated at a depth above any standing water in the pit or
anywhere in the pit if there is no standing water. Record the depth from the ground to the
point at which saturation occurs as negative number in the Saturation field. Saturated soil is
indicated by:
6-38
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
a) Water seeping from the pit walls above the water level (e.g., general seepage, or
along ped faces or from macropores).
b) Pit surfaces with a sheen of moisture or which appear to be glistening.
If no evidence of saturation is present, fill in the bubble in the Absent column of this field.
4) Record the time (24 hour clock) that the water level observation was made in the Time field
of the So/7 Pit Water Depth section of the form.
6.1.5 Backfilling the Soil Pits
Soils pits can be backfilled once the water depth data has been collected. Before backfilling a
soil pit, check to be certain all samples and profile data have been collected and all information
has been recorded on the data forms.
1) If the soil pit is the Representative Pit, for each horizon greater than 8cm thick, double check
that the bulk density samples (in horizons < 60cm deep) and chemistry samples (in horizons
to 125cm deep) that have been collected are recorded in the Sample Collected column
under the Horizons section of the Form S-1 for the Representative Pit.
2) Remember to record the Final Pit Depth for the Representative Pit in the Representative Pit
section of Form S-1.
3) Return the excavated soil into the pit.
4) Once the pit is filled, replace the vegetation cap that was removed and set aside at the
beginning of Soil Pit excavation.
5) Tamp the vegetation cap down into the soil to give it a chance to re-root and enhance its
likelihood of surviva (Figure 6-8j).
6.1.6 Soil Tool Decontamination and Maintenance
1) Clean soil sampling tools as thoroughly as possible at the end of every sample day while still
on-site to remove excess soil and any alien species propagules. See Chapter 2 for details
of procedures for preventing inadvertent transport of taxa from the site.
2) Once back at lodgings or other convenient location, carefully and thoroughly clean all soils
equipment and keep all threads for connecting joints well-oiled or lubricated. This is
imperative to keep tools in good working order.
3) Note: If tools are exposed to contaminants such as oil, use the appropriate state approved
safety protocols for cleaning them (See Appendix E for an example protocol).
6-39
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING
There are two components to soil sample handling. One is completed before leaving the site;
the other, at the field lodging or office.
6.2.1 At the Site
1) During the sampling day, keep all soil samples as cool as possible
a) Keep bulk density and chemistry samples out of direct sun and, if possible, in the shade.
b) Keep the soil isotope and sediment enzyme samples on ice and out of the direct sun and
in the shade whenever possible.
2) At the end of the sample day, double check that all samples (isotope, sediment enzyme,
bulk density, and chemistry) have been collected and that label and tag information is
accurate and legible.
3) Ensure a// identification information for each isotope, sediment enzyme, bulk density, and
chemistry sample corresponds exactly on all Sample Tags, Sample Labels, and Form S-1
for the Representative Pit.
4) Complete Form T-1: NWCA 2011 Site and Sample Status and Tracking.
a) In the Sample Status section of Form T-1, indicate the soil isotope (SISO), the sediment
enzyme (SEDE), and the soil chemistry and bulk density samples (SCBD) have been
collected for the site.
b) Record the sample id numbers for the soil isotope and sediment enzyme samples on
Form T-1 in the WRS Sample Tracking section. Make sure that the information on the
Isotope Soil Sample Label and the Sediment Enzyme Sample Label on the sample bags
and Form T-1 correspond exactly.
6.2.2 At Field Lodging or Office
See Chapter 2 for an overview of sample shipping and Appendix A for detailed protocols on
packing, tracking, and shipping soil samples and for shipping addresses.
Isotope and Sediment Enzyme Soil Samples
The isotope and sediment enzyme samples for each AA will be sent to the USEPA Lab in
Corvallis, Oregon, within 24 hours of collection in an ice chest with the other immediately
shipped samples. These samples are water chemistry, water chemistry duplicate (when taken),
algal toxins, and chlorophyll-a.
The protocol below covers the details of shipping that pertain to the isotope and sediment
samples. See Chapter 2 for information that pertains to all of the immediately shipped samples.
See Appendix A for detailed protocols on packing, tracking, and shipping samples and for
shipping addresses.
1) Confirm that the label affixed to each sample has the correct Site ID, is complete, and is
covered with clear tape.
2) Ensure that any air has been removed from the sample bag and that it is completely sealed.
6-40
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
3) Place each individual isotope and sediment sample bag in another, separate, gallon-sized
self-sealing plastic bag, making sure the gallon bag is sealed to protect the sample from
moisture in the ice-chest.
4) Affix the APHIS Regulated Soils permit on the outside of the ice-chest for immediately
shipped samples. Be certain you use the Regulated Soils Permit for isotope and sediment
enzyme soil samples, i.e., the permit for samples sent to the USEPA Lab in Corvallis,
Oregon.
5) Go to Chapter 2 and complete the protocols on packing and shipping the samples to be
immediately shipped.
Soil Bulk Density and Chemistry Samples
The bulk density and chemistry samples will be sent to the UDSA-NRCS Lab in Lincoln,
Nebraska. These soil samples may be stored and shipped in batches every two weeks.
1) For each sample, confirm the Sample Tag with the Sample ID is completed, legible, and
affixed to the front of the sample bag and covered with clear plastic tape.
2) For each sample, confirm the Sample Label is complete and legible, the sample bag has
been sealed and the Sample Label is stapled in the fold sealing the bag (see Figure 6-7)
3) Record tracking information (sample id and collection date) for the Bulk Density and
Chemistry Samples on Form T-4: NWCA Chemistry and Bulk Density Soil Sample
Tracking.
4) Ensure a// identification information and tracking data for each sample corresponds exactly
on the Sample Tag affixed to the bag, on the Sample Label stapled to the bag, and on Form
T-4.
5) Pack soil samples, organizing them by site, neatly in a shipping carton.
6) Make two copies of the completed Form T-4. Retain one for your records, transmit the
original to the Information Management Team, and place one inside a self-sealing plastic
bag and place in on top of the soil samples in the shipping box. See Chapter 2 for details of
copying forms and transmitting them to the Information Management Team.
7) An APHIS Regulated Soils permit must be displayed on the shipping package containing the
bulk density and chemistry soil samples. Ensure that you have the Regulated Soils Permit
for soil samples sent to the USDA-NRCS Lab in Lincoln, Nebraska and that it is affixed to
the outside of the package.
8) Fill out the shipping label (See Appendix A and Form T-4 for the shipping address).
9) Once you are certain that all samples and completed tracking forms are included in the
shipping box, carefully seal the package, affix shipping label.
10) Deliver the package of soil samples to the shipping company and retain all receipts and
records of shipping.
6-41
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.2.4 Soil Data Forms, Tracking Forms, and Shipping Records
After reviewing the soil data forms for completeness order them sequentially and place them in
the Data Packet for the AA. See Chapter 2 for protocols on copying and shipping completed
soils data and tracking forms to the Information Management Team. See Appendix D for
information on transmitting the image files of the soil profile photos.
6.3 LITERATURE CITED
Mitsch, W.J. and J.G. Gosselink. 2007. Wetlands. John Wiley & Sons, Hoboken, NJ.
Munsell Color X-Rite. 2009 . Munsell Soil Color Charts. Munsell Color Corporation. Grand
Rapids, Ml.
Schoeneberger, P.J., D.A. Wysocki, E.G. Benham, and W.D. Broderson. 2002. Field Book for
Describing and Sampling Soils, Version 2.0. Natural Resources Conservation Service, National
Soil Survey Center, Lincoln, Nebraska, USA.
ftp://ftp-fc.sc.egov.usda.gov/NSSC/Field Book/FieldBookVer2.pdf
Thien, S.J. 1979. A flow diagram for teaching texture by feel analysis. Journal of Agronomic
Education. 8:54-55.
Tiner, R.W. 1999. Wetland Indicators: A Guide to Wetland Identification, Delineation,
Classification, and Mapping. Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, FL.
USDA, NRCS (U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation
Service). 2009. Soil Survey Manual. Chapter 3. Soil Survey Division Staff. U.S.
Department of Agriculture Handbook 18. Updated electronically and available at:
http://soils.usda.gov/technical/manual/, verified 26 Feb. 2010.
USDA, NRCS (U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service).
2010. Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States, Version 7.0. L.M. Vasilas, G.W.
Hurt, and C.V. Noble (eds.). United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources
Conservation Service, in cooperation with the National Technical Committee for Hydric Soils.
(http://soils.usda.gov/use/hydric/or
ftp://ftp-fc.sc.egov.usda.gov/NSSC/Hydric Soils/Fieldlndicators v7.pdf)
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Preparation. Ecological Indicators for the
2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment. EPA-XXX-YY-0000. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
Vepraskas, M.J. 1995 (revised). Redoximorphic Features for Identifying Aquic
Conditions. Techical Bulletin 301, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC.
6-42
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.4 SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIAL
6.4.1 List of Soil Resources to be Carried in Vehicle
Munsell Color X-Rite. 2009. Munsell Soil Color Charts. Grand Rapids, Ml.
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service. 2010. Field
Indicators ofHydric Soils in the United States, Version 7.0. L.M. Vasilas, G.W. Hurt, and C.V.
Noble (eds.). USDA, NRCS, in cooperation with the National Technical Committee for Hydric
Soils.
Schoeneberger, P.J., D.A. Wysocki, E.G. Benham, and W.D. Broderson. 2002. Field Book for
Describing and Sampling Soils, Version 2.0. Natural Resources Conservation Service, National
Soil Survey Center, Lincoln, Nebraska, USA.
6.4.2 Other Useful Soil Resources
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service Website:
http://soils.usda.gov/
USAGE (United States Army Corps of Engineers). 2009. Regional Supplements to Corps
Delineation Manual. Website: http://www.usace.army.mil/cecw/pages/reg supp.aspx
Any additional references recommended by your regional soil scientist.
6.4.3 Glossary of Soil Terminology
Color Components:
Hue - The quality that distinguishes one color from another. Five principle colors: red,
yellow, green, blue, and purple and 5 intermediate colors. Hue is generally found in
the upper right hand corner of the Munsell Soil Color Book pages.
Value - The quality that distinguishes a light color from a dark one. This refers to the
grey level of the color and ranges from white to black. Value decreases as you go
down a column on the Munsell Soil Color Book pages.
Chroma -The quality that distinguishes the difference from a pure hue to a gray
shade. Chroma generally runs from left to right on the Munsell Color Book pages with
grayer colors as you go to the left.
Hydric Soils - Soils formed under conditions of saturation, flooding, or ponding long
enough during the growing season to develop anaerobic conditions in the upper part.
Matrix- The dominant soil volume that is continuous in appearance and may envelope
other features. When three colors occur, such as when a matrix, depletions, and
concentrations are present, the matrix may represent less than 50 percent of the total.
Mottle - Splotch of color in the soil matrix.
Muck- Sapric organic soil material in which virtually all of the organic material is so
decomposed that identification of plant forms is not possible.
6-43
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
Nodules and Concretion - Nodules are cemented bodies (commonly spherical or tubular) that
can be removed as discrete units from the soil, but which do not have discernible crystalline
structure when viewed with a 10X hand lens. Concretions are similar to nodules, but have
concentric layers of material around a point.
Organic Bodies - Typically occur at the tips of roots and are commonly 1 to 3cm in diameter
with muck or mucky modified textures.
Other Organic Features - Include stripped zones and organic infilling.
Fed- A single unit of soil structure.
Soil Horizon - A layer, approximately parallel to the surface of the soil, distinguishable
from adjacent layers by distinctive properties produced by soil-forming processes.
O Horizon - Organic horizon consisting of high accumulations of organic carbon (if you feel
more than a couple of mineral grains (grit from sand, stickiness from clay, silt deposits on
hands) it is most likely a mineral horizon high in organic matter (OM) not an organic soil).
A Horizon - Mineral horizon formed at the surface from significant organic carbon
accumulation (will be darker in color than the horizons below due to OM accumulation).
E Horizon - Mineral horizon that exhibits significant loss of organic carbon, Fe (Iron), Mn
(Manganese), Al (Aluminum), and/or clays (usually paler in color and lighter in texture (less
clayey) than horizons below).
B Horizon -Mineral horizon with accumulations of Fe, Mn, secondary minerals, Al-organic
compounds, and/or clay, or development of soil structure (can be higher in clay, may be
brighter in color, or may contain more redoximorphic (redox) concentrations than the
horizons above it).
C Horizon - Mineral soil little affected by soil genesis, or soft bedrock or former bedrock.
Lacking properties of O, A, E, and B horizons (lacks structure, may appear to look like
parent material (hard bedrock) but breaks into mineral grains and gravel upon excavation).
L Horizon - Organic and inorganic limnic materials deposited in water by precipitation or
derived from underwater and floating aquatic plants and aquatic animals (lacks structure,
may appear to look like parent material (hard bedrock) but breaks into mineral grains and
gravel upon excavation).
R Horizon - Strongly cemented bedrock horizon.
WHorizon - A layer of water found under floating but fixed vegetation.
Soil Profile - Vertical arrangement of layers of soil down to the bedrock or zone absent
of weathering.
Soil Texture - The relative proportions, by weight, of sand, silt, and clay particles in the
soil material less than 2mm in size.
Stripped Zones - Areas where iron-manganese oxides and/or organic matter have been
stripped from the matrix and the primary base color of the soil material is exposed. The stripped
6-44
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
areas and translocated oxides and organic matter form a contrasting pattern of two or more
colors with diffuse boundaries.
Redoximoprhic (Redox) Features - Features formed by the processes of reduction,
translocation, and/or oxidation of Fe and Mn oxides; formerly called mottles and low-
chroma colors. Redox features include uncemented concentrations and depletions
(losses) of these elements, and are observed in pore linings, ped faces, or the soil matrix
as soft masses and colors that contrast with soil matrix color (USDA, NRCS 2010). A
soft mass is a splotch in the soil and a pore lining would have iron or other elements
coating the larger voids (i.e., root channels, cracks between peds).
Redox Concentrations - Bodies of apparent accumulation of Fe-Mn oxides. Redox
concentrations include soft masses, pore linings, nodules, and concretions. They appear
as reddish, yellowish, or black splotches in the soil. For the purposes of hydric indicators,
nodules and concretions (hard, brittle concentrations) are excluded from the concept of
redox concentrations unless otherwise specified by specific indicators. Most hydric
indicators require distinct or prominent concentrations, therefore faint concentrations do
not reflect a hydric indicator.
Redox Depletions - Bodies of low chroma (2 or less) having value of 4 or more where
Fe-Mn oxides have been stripped or where both Fe-Mn oxides and clay have been
stripped. Redox depletions are gray splotches or zones that, for most hydric indicators,
must contrast distinctly or prominently with the matrix to count. Depletions can occur in
the matrix or on pore linings and ped faces.
6-45
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6-46
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.5 REFERENCE CARDS
Reference Card S-1, Sides A and B. Soil Protocol Flowchart
Reference Card S-2, Side A. Soil Pit Placement, Characteristics of Soil Horizon Types
Reference Card S-2, Side B. Distinguishing Soil Horizons
Reference Card S-3, Side A. Soil Structure, Coats and Films, and Guidelines for Cover
Estimation
Reference Card S-3, Side B. Examples of Some Redox and Other Soil Features
Reference Card S-4, Side A. Determining Soil Texture
Reference Card S-4, Side B. Soil Color Determinations
Reference Card S-5, Side A. USDA Land Resource Regions (LLRs)
Reference Card S-5, Side B. Hydric Soil Indicators by Land Resource Region, Evaluating
HydricSoil Indicators
6-47
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6-48
-------
Reference Card S-1, Side A. NWCA Soil Protocol Flowchart
A. Soil Pit Location and Excavation to 60cm (See Section 6.1.1)
designated Veg Plot).
is for Soil
corner of
NO
h.
Are standing water or obstacles present at the standard
Soil Pit Location?
__ — '
.
^
Place Soil Pit just outside SE corner of
designated Veg Plot. Record pit location
on Form S-1.
If water and soft sediment
< 0.25m deep, locate soil pit just
outside SE corner of Veg Plot.
Record pit location on Form S-1.
I
If water or mud > 0.25m deep or other
obstacle (e.g., TES species, large rock,
tree, woody debris) is present, move pit
to an alternate location as close to SE
corner of Veg Plot as possible. Record
pit location on Form S-1.
1) Place a lettered flag (A, B, C, or D) at the Soil Pit location to identify it.
2) Excavate one Soil Pit to 60cm deep and extract a slab for soil profile using appropriate tools and methods for soil
conditions.
• Record pit depth, time of excavation, and lighting conditions on Form S-1.
• If an impenetrable layer prevents excavation and pit cannot be moved, record pit depth and type of impenetrable layer
on Form S-1.
3) Collect all soil profile data (see below) in this pit, then dig the next Soil Pit to 60cm and describe its soil profile.
4) Repeat until all four pits have been excavated and described to 60cm. Choose the Representative Pit.
5) Do not refill any pit until all pits have been examined, all samples have been collected from the Representative Pit, and water
depth data have been collected in all four pits.
B. Soil Profile Description at Each Soil Pit (See Section 6.1.2)
Does soil have an inundated or saturated layer?
Immediately upon excavation, record initial soil
matrix color and determine whether H2S odor (rotten
egg) is detected (Form S-1).
Delineate soil horizons and for each
horizon observed at each Soil Pit,
determine and record on Form S-1
(Front):
1) Horizon depth
2) Horizon boundary abruptness
3) Soil texture
4) % Rock fragments
5) % Roots
6) Soil matrix color
7) Presence and type of
redoximorphic or other features
8) % Horizon composed of distinct
or prominent redox and other
features
9) Color of most evident redox or
other feature
Determine presence of Hydric Soil Indicators in the Soil Profile:
1) Use Reference Card S-5 to determine the Land Resource
Region (LRR) in which the AA occurs.
2) Evaluate the soil for the presence of Hydric Soil Indicators for the
selected LRR and record on Form S-1 (Back).
Photograph the Soil Profile (Appendix D) either after horizon delineation or
after the profile description is completed, as convenient.
I
Randomly select one Representative Soil Pit from the subset of pits that most
represent the soils conditions of the AA.
Excavate soil, using an auger, to 125cm from the Representative Pit, or if easier dig
pit to125 cm, and describe the soil profile from 60cm down to 125 cm. Complete
photography of the soil profile for this pit.
Continue to Soil Sample Collection flowchart (Reference Card S-1, Side B).
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) for more detail on the information summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card S-1, Side B. Soil Protocol Flowchart
C. Soil Sample Collection (See Section 6.1.3)
Once the Representative Pit has been identified, collect four kinds of soil samples.
Soil Isotope and Sediment Enzyme
Samples
Collect soil isotope sample and sediment
enzyme sample before expanding the
Representative Pit for bulk density and
chemistry sample collection. Collect 3 cores for
the isotope sample and 6 for the enzyme
sample. The same procedure is used for
collecting both kinds of samples.
1) Fill out the appropriate sample tag and
sample label. Affix tag to outside of bag.
2) Use the syringe-corer to extract the required
number of 10-cm long soil cores from evenly
spaced undisturbed locations within 1-m area
surrounding the 60-cm pit.
3) Place all cores for the sample into the
prepared sample bag. Properly fold the
Sample Label into the top edge of the bag
with the soil cores and carefully seal and
staple the bag.
4) Place sealed bag of soil into a plastic food
storage box, and place box in a small ice
chest to keep it cool during the sampling day.
Select tools appropriate to site conditions and expand the
Representative Soil Pit and collect Bulk Density and Chemistry Soil
Samples.
Bulk Density Samples
1) For each horizon > 8cm thick
located in the top 60cm of the
soil profile, prepare one bulk
density sample bag, with
completed sample tag and
sample label.
2) Collect 3 soil cores using a
small can, or if this is not
feasible, a known volume of soil
using another method, e.g., cut
out a block of soil.
3) Place all 3 cores, or the soil
blocks, into the sample bag.
4) Record the volume or
dimensions of each of the cores
or soil blocks making up the
sample on the Sample Label.
Chemistry/PSDA
Samples
1) For each horizon > 8cm
thick located down to
125cm, prepare one
chemistry sample bag,
with completed Sample
Tag and Sample Label.
2) Collect 1 to 2.5 liters of soil
(depending on rock and
root content) for each
sample.
D. Soil Pit Water Depth (Section 6.1.4), Back-filling Soil Pits (Section 6.1.5),
and Soil Tool Decontamination and Maintenance (Section 6.1.6)
1) Carefully remove air from
sample bag.
2) Properly fold sample label
into the top edge of the
bag and staple bag shut.
3) Keep samples in a cool
location during the day.
1) After all data and all samples have
been gathered at all four pits, collect
water depth data at each pit.
2) For each pit, record water depth values
in the appropriate fields of the Soil Pit
Water Depth section of its Form S-1:
NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
1) Ensure all data and
samples have been
collected from all soil pits.
2) Backfill each pit and replace
vegetation cap.
1) Clean and decontaminate soils
equipment.
2) Maintain soils equipment weekly
by routinely lubricating all
threads for connecting joints.
F. Soil Sample Handling and Processing (See Section 6.2, Chapter 2, Appendix A)
While at the Site:
4) Keep bulk density and chemistry samples as cool as possible
by placing them in a shaded location whenever possible, and
place isotope and sediment enzyme samples on ice.
5) At the end of the sample day, double check that all samples
have been collected.
6) Complete Form T-1: NWCA 2011 Site and Sample Status
and Tracking.
a) In the Sample Status section of Form T-1, indicate the soil
isotope, the sediment enzyme, and the soil chemistry and
bulk density samples have been collected.
b) Record sample id numbers on the labels for the soil isotope
and sediment enzyme samples on Form T-1 in the WRS
Sample Tracking section.
At Field Lodging or Office
5) Submit Form T-1 to Information Management Team; pack isotope
and enzyme samples in the ice-chest for immediately (within 24
hours) shipped samples to be sent to the EPA Lab, Corvallis, OR.
6) Ship batched bulk density and chemistry samples every two weeks
to the NRCS Lab with completed Form T-4: Bulk Density and
Chemistry Soil Sample Tracking.
7) When packing soil samples for shipping, include a copy of the
pertinent tracking forms in the package and send any required
copies to the Information Management Team.
8) Carefully seal the package, fill out shipping labels and affix to
package, affix required labels for regulated soils, and deliver
package to shipping company.
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) for more detail on the information summarized here.
-------
Reference Card S-2, Side A. Soil Pit Placement and Characteristics of Soil Horizon Types
0.25m deep, TES (threatened, endangered, or sensitive plant species)
large wood, or rock prevent soil access at the Standard Soil Pit Location, move the pit so it is outside of and as close as
possible to the SE corner of the Veg Plot.
Moving the Soil Pit - Place the Soil Pit so it is at least 2m away from an upland edge or other non-wetland landcovertype
that might influence soil condition. If more than one Soil Pit must be relocated, try to maintain 10m between soil pits.
Recording Soil Pit Locations — Record the new Soil Pit location on its corresponding Form S-l. Fill in the Alternate Location
bubble in the So/7 Pit Location field and record distance and bearing of the pit from the SE corner of the nearest Veg Plot.
Characteristics of Major Soil Horizon Types
You do not need to name horizons on Form S-l, but horizon
characteristics may help distinguish horizon boundaries.
0 - Organic horizon consisting of high accumulations of organic
carbon (if you feel more than a couple of mineral grains
(grit from sand, stickiness from clay, silt deposits on hands)
it is most likely not organic, but mineral soil high in organic
matter (OM))
A - Mineral horizon at the surface with significant organic
carbon accumulation (darker in color than the horizons
below due to OM accumulation)
E - Mineral horizon that exhibits significant loss of organic
carbon, Fe (Iron), Mn (Manganese), Al (Aluminum), and/or
clays (usually paler in color and lighter in texture (less
clayey) than horizons below)
B -Mineral horizon with accumulations of Fe, Mn, secondary
minerals, Al-organic compounds, and/or clay, or
development of soil structure (can be higher in clay, may
be brighter in color, or may contain more redoximorphic
(redox) concentrations than the horizons above it)
C- Mineral soil little affected by soil genesis, or soft bedrock or
former bedrock. Lacking properties of 0, A, E, and B
horizons (lacks structure, may appear to look like parent
material (hard bedrock) but breaks into mineral grains and
gravel upon excavation)
L- Organic and inorganic limnic materials deposited in water
by precipitation or derived from underwater and floating
aquatic plants and aquatic animals (lacks structure, may
appear to look like parent material (hard bedrock) but
breaks into mineral grains and gravel upon excavation)
R - Strongly cemented bedrock horizon
W-A layer of water found under floating but fixed vegetation
Note: 0, A, E, B horizons, and mucky mineral layers have a 1-cm
minimum thickness.
-------
Reference Card S-2, Side B. Distinguishing Soil Horizons.
Soil Pit
Bottom
Ground
Surface
Distinguishing Soil Horizons. Left top: Soil slab diagram with horizons marked. Left bottom: Soil
slab photo (Eric Vance, EPA). Right: Example soil profiles illustrating horizons distinguished by different
colors, structure, or texture. Profile photos from USDA, NRCS (2010).
Soil Horizons are delineated based on
differences in:
• Soil structure (e.g., Reference Card
S-3 Side A, Plate 1, see also
Schoeneberger et al. 2002).
• Texture (see Reference Card S-4
Side A).
• Soil color based on Munsell Soil
Color Charts (2009) (see Reference
Card S-4 Side B).
• Presence and type of redoximorphic
other features (See Reference Card
S-3 Side A and B).
Place marker (e.g., golf tee) at bottom of
each horizon. Number horizons in order
from the top of the profile (e.g., see
figure at left).
Measure depth from the top of the soil
profile to the bottom of each horizon in
centimeters (a metric fiberglass
seamstress tape works well).
For the Soil Pit under consideration,
record the depth to the lower boundary
of each horizon in the Depth to Lower
Boundary of Horizon column of Form S-l
(Front).
If the lower boundary of a horizon is less
than 2cm thick, fill in the abrupt
boundary bubble in the Horizons section
of Form S-l (Front).
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) for more detail on the reference information summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card S-3, Side A. Soil Structure, Coats and Films, Guidelines for Cover Estimation.
Plate 1. Examples of Soil Structure Types.
Grant lar
(Soil aggregates)
Plaiy
Wedge
Bloeky
(Subangular) (Angular;.
Fr smats
Co Lninar
TV'
Single Grain
(M neral,' rock grans)
Massive
(Continuous, unccnsolidated massl
Plate 2. Coats and Films on Peds. Formed by translocation
and deposition (e.g., clay films (argillans), clay bridging,
manganese (black), iron (orange or red) dark organic stains,
masked sand grains, etc.).
Peds
Pores
i'sand grains "waxed" over
clay
, . sand
(bridging)/^ )\ grain
Plate 3. Examples of Surface Area Estimation for Soil Features. Percent surface area
of soil matrix occupied by other components, (e.g., rocks, roots, redox and other
features with contrasting colors).
35%
75%
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) for more detail on the reference information summarized on this card.
Graphics from (or adapted from) Schoeneberger, P.J., D.A. Wysocki, E.G. Benham, and W. D. Broderson. 2002. Field Book for Describing and Sampling Soils, Version 2.0. Natural Resources
Conservation Service, National Soil Survey Center, Lincoln, Nebraska, USA.
-------
Reference Card S-3, Side B. Examples of Some Redox and Other Soil Features
,
i
Legend
A- Iron redox concentrations as pore linings
B - Iron redox concentrations as pore linings
C - Depletions as pore linings
D - Redox concentrations in sandy soil
E - Pore linings and soft masses
F - Redox concentration as soft masses
G - Stripped zones in sandy soil
H- Organic bodies
Photos by Lenore Vasilas, NRCS and Gregg Lomnicky, Dynamac
-------
Reference Card S-4, Side A. Determining Soil Texture. Use the following steps to describe the soil texture for each horizon.
Step 1. Determine whether the soil has organic or mineral
content
Take a dime-sized chunk of moist soil in your hand and gently rub the
wet soil between forefingers and thumb several times.
• If the soil feels greasy, the soil is either mucky mineral or organic
soil; goto Step 2.
• If the soil does not feel greasy, the texture is a mineral soil; go to
Step 3.
Step 2. Texturing Soils with High Organic Matter Content -
Distinguishing between mucky mineral and organic soil
a. Determine whether the soil is mucky mineral or organic. (Both
have a greasy feel). Squeeze a chunk of wet soil.
• Mucky Mineral texture -The soil is a mucky mineral if it is
gritty or sticks to your hand when squeezed and rubbed.
Identifiable plant fibers are rare to none.
• Organic texture - The soil has an organic texture, if when
squeezed, it either extrudes liquid or much of the soil material
and whatever material remains does not stick to your hand.
Identifiable plant fibers are common. Go to Step b, below.
b. Distinguish among organic textures - Organic textures include:
peat, mucky-peat, or muck. The three textures are defined based
on differences in percent volume of plant fibers visible with a hand
lens after rubbing.
• To distinguish between them, grab a fresh sample of moist soil,
visually estimate the percent volume plant fibers and dead roots
after rubbing, and use the chart below to determine the organic
soil texture.
Organic Soil Texture
Peat
Muck Peat
Muck
% Fibers Visible with
Hand Lens After Rubbing
>40
20-40
<20
Step 3. Texturing Mineral Soil*
Begin by picking up a golf ball-sized or slightly larger sample of soil from the center of the
horizon. Remove roots and rocks.
Add water with spray bottle and break down all
lumps. The soil is prepared when plastic and
moldable, like moist putty or cookie dough. Place a
golf-ball sized sample in your palm.
Add dry soil and start again.
Does soil remain in a ball
when squeezed?
YES
Is soil too wet?
YES
Place ball of soil between thumb and forefinger gently pushing the soil with the thumb,
squeezing it outward into a thick ribbon. Push the ribbon over the forefinger. Measure
the length when it bends or breaks from its own weight.
NO
Does soil form a ribbon
more than 1/2 inch long?
'Flowchart for simple hand tests to determine soil texture of three major mineral texture groups.
Modified from S.J. Thien. 1979 (USDA, NRCS 2009)
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) for more detail on
protocols summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card S-4, Side B. Soil Color Determinations
Evaluating Color for the Soil Matrix and for Redoximorphic Features
Determining Color of the Soil Matrix:
1) To determine soil matrix color, choose a representative, freshly broken surface of a soil ped
that is not coated with clay, Fe (Iron), or Mn (Manganese).
2) Use a spray bottle to wet the soil if it is dry. Spray until moist, but not saturated. As soon as
the water is absorbed into the soil, read the color from the Munsell Soil Color Book (Munsell
Soil Color, X-Rite 2009) (See Step 3). For horizons with high organic content (e.g., A and O
horizons), rub the soil between your fingers, then read the color of rubbed material.
3) Match the soil matrix color (hue, value, and chroma) to the soil color chips from the Munsell
Soil Color Book. Hue is found on the Munsell page tab and labeled using numbers and letters
(e.g., 2.SYR or 10R). Value is found on the left side of the page along the y-axis of the color
chip array and is represented by numbers (e.g., 2.5, 8). Chroma is found at the bottom of
page along the x-axis of the color chip array and is represent by numbers or by numbers and
letters for gley sois (e.g., 1, 8, 5G, 10GY).
4) Observe the soil color in direct sunlight with the sun at your back and shining over your right
shoulder whenever possible. Match the color of the soil with the closest color chip from the
Munsell Soil Color Book.
• Start at the 10YR page and go left for redder and right for yellower or grayer colors.
• The color chips in the Munsell Book have central holes so that the soil can be directly
compared through the hole to the chip of interest.
• Take care to keep the color chips clean and dry.
5) Record color codes for the hue, value, and chroma matching the soil matrix color on Form S-l:
NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front).
Determining Color of Redoximorphic, Organic, or Mottle Features:
1) When redoximorphic or other features (See Reference Card S-3 for examples) are present in
the horizon, determine the color for the most evident feature observed.
2) Select a representative, freshly broken surface of a soil ped that clearly illustrates the redox or
other feature of interest.
3) Focus on this feature and use Steps 2 through 4 (as described above for determining Soil
Matrix color) to match the feature color with the closest color chip from the Munsell Color
Book. Record the color codes for the hue, value, and chroma matching in the appropriate
fields on Form S-l: NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front).
Tables for Disti
Contrast for Re
Soil Matrix (fro
determine the re
which to estimat
Step 6).
SJ1
ii
JG
g_
.
n
t>
tr,
Q
f
-
Prominent
CM
H
-
Prominent
CM
Al
Contrast
A Chroma
dj
=1
2
<
e
fr.
Ll_
VI
n
1
B
en
c-j
Proriincnl
to
H
n
c
^- O QJ
t; 5 ^
;s ^ E
"- s s
Q_
•:
-
rj
-
fj
,»1
-
Hues differ by 3 or more (A h 2 3) '
T}
c
B
•vl
rj
t
O
CM
W
Contrast
A Chroma
A Value
Prariiricnl
\f_
1
!
>
6
Prominent
<•-.>
n
C~J
Prominent
CN
VI
Prominent
-*
/.i
OJ
VI
ors have a Value ^ 3 and a Chroma s 2,
Faint, regardless of Hue differences.
1 Except ion: If both co
the Color Contrast is
(J o O 0>
c c c c: c
;£= := -.^ "^ 'p
Ln t/i £ t t
b Q Q 2 S
Q_ CL
"vi " « ^ I
co n co c^ .
I I
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) for more detail on
protocols summarized on this card.
-------
Reference Card S-5, Side A. USDA Land Resource Regions (LRRs). Use this map to identify the LRR appropriate to the location of the
AA being sampled. Use the list of Hydric Soil Indicators by Land Resource Regions on Side B of this Reference Card to identify the Hydric
Soil Indicators pertinent to the AA.
USDA LAND RESOURCE REGIONS
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) and Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States (USDA, NRCS 2010) for more detail.
-------
Reference Card S-5, Side B. Hydric Soil Indicators by Land Resource Regions, Evaluating Hydric Soil Indicators
LRR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
R
S
T
U
Hydric Soil Indicators
All Soils
A1,A2,A3,A4,A11,A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A9, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, All , A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, A9, All,
A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A9, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A9, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, AID, All,
A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, AID, All,
A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7,
A9, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, All, A12
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7,
A9, All, A12, A16
Al, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7,
AS, All, A12
Sandy Soils
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S3, S4, S5, S6
SI, S2, S4, S5, S6
SI, S2, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6
SI, S3, S4, S5, S6
SI, S4, S5, S6, S7
SI, S4, S5, S6
S4, S5, S6, S7
SI, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7,
S8, S9
SI, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8,
S9
S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, S9
S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, S9
Loamy/Clayey Soils
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F9
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F9
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F9
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F12, F13
Fl, F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F12
F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F12, F13
F2, F3, F6, F7, F8
F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F19, F20
F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, Fll, F12,
F13, F17, F18, F20
F2, F3, F6, F7, F8, F10, F13
*For descriptions of the Hydric Soil Indicators please see: Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the
United States. **LLRs for areas outside the conterminous United States have been omitted.
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 6. Soils) and Field
Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States (USDA, NRCS 2010) for
more detail.
Procedures for Evaluating Hydric Soil Indicators
1. Data describing Hydric Soil Indicators are recorded in the
Hydric Soil Indicators section of Form S-1 NWCA Soil Profile
Data (Back).
2. Determine the USDA-NRCS Land Resource Region (LRR) in
which the AA being sampled is located by consulting the LRR
map on the front of this card or in the Hydric Soils Indicators
Manual.
The hydric soil indicators that apply to each LRR are listed in
the table to the left and included in parentheses next to the
indicator names in the Hydric Soil Indicators section of Form
S-1 NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
3. While examining the soil profile, use the Field Indicators of
Hydric Soils in the United States (USDA, NRCS 2010) manual
and the information on texture, color, redoximorphic features
(which you previously recorded for each horizon on the front
side of Form S-1) to determine whether the hydric indicators
specific to the LRR where the AA is located are present.
4. Evaluate the profile for all regionally appropriate Hydric Soil
Indicators that fall into the soil texture groups A (All Soils), or F
(Loamy/Clayey Soils), or S (Sandy Soils) pertinent to the soil
profile under examination.
5. Record the presence of any of these hydric soils indicators in
the Hydric Soil Indicators section of Form S-1 NWCA Soil
Profile Data (Back) by filling in the appropriate bubbles.
6. All hydric soil indicators that are observed are assumed to
occur in the soil profile location specified in the description of
that indicator in Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United
States (USDA, NRCS 2010). If something unusual is
observed, note the soil horizon number and describe the
anomaly in the Hydric Indicator Comments section of Form S-
1 NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back).
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6.6 SOIL EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORMS, AND LABELS
Equipment Checklist
Forms
Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front)
Form S-1: NWCA Soil Profile Date (Back)
Form T-4: NWCA Soil Sample Tracking
Sample Tags and Labels
Soil Isotope and Sediment Enzyme Sample Labels
Soil Bulk Density or Chemistry Sample Tag
Soil Bulk Density or Chemistry Sample Label
6-59
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 6. Soils
6-60
-------
SOIL EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLY CHECKLIST
Protocols, forms, checklists, supplies
This equipment checklist
References Cards S-1 through S-4
Data Forms on waterproof paper:
Form S-1: NWCASoil Profile Data (Four/site, but carry extras in case soil has many horizons)
Form T-4: NWCA Bulk Density and Chemistry Soil Sample Tracking
Form T-1: NWCA Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking Form
Site packet including a copy of the NRCS soils map and soil survey information for the site
2 covered clipboards, with storage for completed forms for the AB Team
Waterproof field notebook, pencils, mechanical pencils and lead, waterproof pens or marker
Clear packing tape to place over labels (labels listed by sample type below)
Field guides that must be carried in the field
For color determinations. Munsell Color X-Rite. 2009. Munsell Soil Color Charts. Grand Rapids, Ml.
ForHydric Soil Indicator determinations: United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources
Conservation Service. 2010. Field Indicators of Hydric Soils in the United States, Version 7.0. L.M. Vasilas,
G.W. Hurt, and C.V. Noble (eds.). USDA, NRCS, in cooperation with the National Technical Committee for
Hydric Soils.
Supporting reference to keep in vehicle or carry in field
Schoeneberger, P.J., D.A. Wysocki, E.G. Benham, and W.D. Broderson. 2002. Field Book for Describing and
Sampling Soils, Version 2.0. Natural Resources Conservation Service, National Soil Survey Center, Lincoln,
Nebraska, USA.
Sampling supplies and tools (Note: other soil tools may be available to borrow from local soil scientist)
Tote, pack, or field vest to carry tools and small equipment
Excavating and profile description supplies (Note: Carry excavating tools pertinent to likely soil conditions)
4 Pin flags labeled A, B, C, or D for marking soil pit locations
Tiling or Sharpshooter style shovel
Bucket auger with interchangeable extension handles and appropriate head(s) for anticipated soil conditions
(regular, mud, sand, dutch, etc). A ratchet handle crossbar may often be useful.
King tube soil extractor for saturated/inundated conditions, particularly in sandy soils
Root-pruners (or other cutting tools for roots)
Metal flashing 12" tall for supporting/sealing earthen coffer dam built from Soil Pit spoils for inundated soils
Small scoop for bailing water from pit
Hand water pump
Four, 6 mil thick, ~1.5m2 black plastic sheets for laying out soil slabs/cores at each Soil Pit
Plastic or metal strips or golf tees for marking soil horizons
Metric tape measure (e.g., a fiberglass seamstress's measuring tape with lead weight (e.g., fishing weight)
attached to the bottom)
Spray bottle with water for moistening soil as needed
10X Hand lens
Sharp knife shaving soil slices to expose fresh surface, for cutting out bulk density samples in difficult soils
(e.g., peat, or saturated soils extracted with the King tub extractor method).
Small flashlight for viewing in situ soil profile in Representative Soil Pit
Isotope soil sample and sediment enzyme samples supplies
Quart-size zipper plastic bag and gallon-sized zipper plastic bag
Isotope Soil Sample Label
Sediment Enzyme Sample Label
Syringe corer (2 - one for use and one for back-up)
Scalable plastic food storage container to store filled isotope soil and sediment enzyme sample bags
Moderate sized ice chest to keep isotope and sediment enzyme samples cool (chlorophyll-a samples will
also be kept in ice chest)
Bulk density and chemistry soil sample supplies
8ml thick plastic soil sample bags for bulk density and chemistry soil samples
Bulk density and chemistry soil sample tags and labels to affix to sample bags
Heavy-duty sample bag stapler
Small can to serve as soil bulk density core extractor (recommend a can ~6.5cm diameter, 4.5cm deep,
e.g., small, sliced olive can)
Tote, pack, and/or ice chest for storing and carrying soil samples
-------
-------
rFORM S-1 : NWCA SOIL PROFILE DATA (Front)
Soil Pit: O A OB OC OD Reviewed by '
Refer to Reference Cards S-1 through S-4 for summary of protocols for collecting data on this page.
Site ID: NWCA11- Soil Map Unit Symbol from Site Packet: Date: / / 2
O Fill in if this Soil Pit is the Representative Pit (up to12
Samples Collected column the bulk density (B) and C
collected.
Sample ID, if Representative Pit:
N W C A 1 1 -
SOIL PIT LOCATION
Near Veg Plot #:
O Standard location near
O Alternate Location
Distance
(from SE c
SE corner of
, Bearing
arner of Veg F
Horizons
Samples Collected
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Horizon
Name-
(soil
scientist
will
complete)
Depth
(cm) to
lower
boundary
of
Horizon
Fill in if
lower
boundary
is abrupt
(< 2 cm)
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
o
Veg Plot
o
lot)
5cm deep) and indicate in the
hemistry (C) samples
Final Pit Depth: cm
-
-
SOIL PIT ATTRIBUTES
Total Pit Depth: cm
Time of Pit Excavation
(hh:mm)
i 1 1 ' i 1 1 24 hr clock
Lighting Conditions:
O Bright O Dappled
O Overcast O Shaded
Soil Texture (fill one per horizon)
>s
•a
c
03
W
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Loamy/Clayey
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Mucky Mineral
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Organic
P = Peat,
M = Muck,
MP = Mucky Peat
U = Unspecified
OP
O M
OP
O M
OP
O M
OP
O"
OP
O'.'
C P
OM
OP
O M
OP
O M
OP
O M
O MP
Ou
O MP
Ou
O MP
Ou
O MP
Ou
O ''IP
Ou
O MP
Ou
O MP
Ou
O MP
Ou
O MP
Ou
% Rock Fragments
>2mm
% Roots
^
nitial):
0 1 1
^
CATEGORICAL DATA CELLS:
Q Fill in this bubble to confirm that a filled bubble in 1icc.'?s presence (except for Absent in the
Redox, Organic, or Mottle Features Section) a'.J ar en,,^ bubble indicates absence.
COVER DATA CELLS:
Fill in this bubble to confirm that empty Data Cells for % Surface Area Rock or Roots and %
U Horizon with Distinct or Prominent Features equal zero.
O IMPENE
If preser
QClay
O Ceme
O Bedrc
O Large
O Other
Dept>~ I
Soil Matrix Color
Hue
d
Value
F
Chroma
TRA
it, ini
Dan
nted
>ck
bou
3LE LAYER PRESFNT
Jicate Type:
layer
>elov\, Surface: cm
1
_Q
<
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
INITIAL READINGS
O Hydrogen Sulfide odor (rotten eggs)
O Inundated/saturated soil in pit:, If Present:
Initial Color:
Color reading depth from surface:
O Color change after exposure to air
Redoximorphic, Organic, or Mottle Features
Feature Types
(fill n all observed in horizon)
Composition
Fe = Iron
Mn =
Manganese
C = Carbon
U = Unable
to specify
O FeQ M
Oc O u
OFeQM
Oc Qu
O FeQ M
Oc O u
OFeQM
Oc Qu
O FeQ M
Oc O u
OFeQM
Oc Qu
O FeQ M
Oc O u
OFeQM
Oc Qu
O FeQ M
Oc O u
Redox
Features
S = Soft
masses,
N = nodules,
concretions,
P = pore
linings, D =
depletions
O s O N
O P O D
Os ON
OP OD
O s O N
O P O D
Os ON
OP OD
O s O N
O P O D
Os ON
OP OD
O s O N
O P O D
Os ON
OP OD
O s O N
O P O D
Mottles &
Org. Features
M = mottles
MS = masked
sand grains,
OB = organic
bodies, OF =
other organic
features
O M O MS
O OBO OF
OM O MS
O OBO OF
O M O MS
O OBO OF
OM O MS
O OBO OF
O M O MS
O OBO OF
OM O MS
O OBO OF
O M O MS
O OBO OF
OM O MS
O OBO OF
O M O MS
O OBO OF
%
Masked
Sand
Grains
'o
c
•>i ">
% of Horizon with Dis
or Prominent Feature
Color of Most Evident
Feature
Hue
Value
Chroma
cm
Flag
. Flag codes: K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1, F2, etc = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. .
Explain all flags in comment section on the back of this form. 1968209140
^ NWCA Soil Profile Data (Front) 01/21/2011 K a ^
-------
r
Site ID: NWCA11-
FORM S-1 : NWCA SOIL PROFILE DATA (Back)
Soil Pit: OA O B O C O D
Date:
Reviewed bv (initial):
/ / 2 0 1 1
Hydric Soil Indicators (USDA Land Resource Region in the 48 conterminous US States (A to U) in which each indicator applit~) Refer to 1) Reference Card
S-5 in the NWCA Field Operations Manual and 2) United States Department of Agriculture, National Resources Conservation Service. 2010 F>ld indicators of Hydric Soils in the United
States, Version 7.0. L.M. Vasilas, G.W. Hurt, and C.V. Noble (eds.), USDA, NRCS, in cooperation with the National Technical Committee for Hydric Soils.
Fill in all that apply: Loamy/Clayey Soils Sandy Soils
O - No Hydric Soil Indicator Observed O F1 - Loamy Mucky Mineral (A-M, O) O S1 - Sandy Mucky Mineral (A-O, R S)
O F2 - Loamy Gleyed Matrix (A-U) O S2 - 2.5 cm Mucky Peat or Pe=rt (G, h,
AM Soils O F3 - D
O A1 - Histosol (A-U) O F6 - R
O A2 - Histic Epipedon (A-U) O F7 - D
O A3 - Black Histic (A-U) O F8 - R
O A4 - Hydrogen Sulfide (A-U) O F9 - V
O AS - Stratified Layers (C, F, K-U) O F10 -
O A6 - Organic Bodies (P, T, U) O F11 -
O A7 - 5 cm Mucky Mineral (P, T, U) O F12 -
O A8 - Muck presence (U) O F13 -
O A9 - 1 cm Muck (D, F, G, H, P, T) O F16 -
O A10 - 2 cm Muck (M, N) O F17 -
O A11 - Depleted Below Dark Surface (A-U) O F18 -
O A12 - Thick Dark Surface (A-U) O F19- F
O A16 - Coast Prairie Redox (T) O F20 -
Soil Pit Water Depth (cm)
Water Type cm Abser
Surface Water (depth of water above ground Q
surface)
Water level in pit (depth from ground surface f\
down to water level)
Saturation (depth from ground surface down to /^
level of saturated soil, e.g. glistening, oozing pit wall)
Time of water level observation: ^ .
(hh:mm) 24 hr clock . , f .
Flag Comment
epleted Matrix (A-U) O S3 - 5 cm Mucky Peat or Peat (i M, R)
edox Dark Surface (A-U) O S4 - Sandy Gleyed Matrix (A-U)
epleted Dark Surface (A-U) O S5 - Sandy Redox (A-U)
edox Depressions (A-U) O S6 - Stripped M- .rix 'A-U)
ernal Pools (B-D) O S7 - Dark Surface (N, P R-U)
Mar| /u) O S8 - Polyvalue Below Surface (R-U)
Depleted Ochric (T) O S9 - Thit. Dark Surface (R-U)
ron-Manganese Mass (N-P, T)
LJmbric Surface (N, P, T)
High Plains Depressions (H)
Delta Ochric (T)
Reduced Vertic (T)
'iedmount Flood Plain Soils (S)
(\nomalus Bright Loamy So>. = (S, T)
Hydric Soil Indicator Comments
S^ Soil Isotope/Sediment Enzymes
it Flag •' ampK ID Comments Soil Isotope No Sample Collected Q
Sample ID
Comments Sediment Enzymes No Sample Collected Q
Flag Comment
k Flag codes:K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1, F2, etc = misc.flags assigned by each field crew. fifinanmnsd A
^ NWCA Soil Profile Data (Back) 01/21/2011 Explain all flags in comment section. bb0400JOb4 ^
-------
for
SOIL ISOTOPE
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ 72011
999983
SEDIMENT ENZYMES
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ 72011
999985
-------
-------
Example of Bulk Density or Chemistry Sample Adhesive Tags
for Bulk Density Samples Horizons 1-7
for Chemistry Soil Samples Horizons 1-7
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-1
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 1 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-1
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 1 Horizon Location:
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-2
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 2 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-2
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 2 Horizon Location:
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-3
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 3 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-3
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 3 Horizon Location:
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-4
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 4 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-4
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 4 Horizon Location:
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-5
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 5 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-5
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 5 Horizon Location:
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-6
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 6 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-6
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 6 Horizon Location:
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-7
Date: / /2011 Visit #: ol o2
O- Chemistry/PSDA O - Bulk Density
Horizon #: 7 Horizon Location: cm to cm
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Tag
NWCA11-9999-1-11-OR-002-001-7
Date:_/^j2011 Visit #: ol o2
O-Bulk Density
cm to cm
O- Chemistry/PSDA
Horizon #: 7 Horizon Location:
-------
-------
NWCA 2011: Bulk Density or Chemistry Soil Sample Label
•o
o
M-
00
to
£2
-------
-------
W FORM T-4: NWCA Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density Sample Tracking ^
~ Reviewed by (initial): ~
Sent By: Sender Phone: State Where Sites are Located:
Shipped Using: O FedEx O Other:
Airbill/Tracking Number: Date Shipped: J
Sample ID
NWCA11- --
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
NWCA11- --
i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i
NWCA11- --
i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
N W C A 1 1 - - -
NWCA11- --
NWCA11- --
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
NWCA11- --
111111111111111111111111111111
NWCA11- --
111111119111111111111111111111
N W C A 1 1 - -
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
N WC A 1 1 - --
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
NWCA11- --
i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i
2011 Collection
Date (MM/DD)
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
ill li
/
ill li
/
7.
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
iii ii
/
iii ii
/
iii ii
/
/
/
/ 2 0 1 1
Comments
NRCS LAB INFO Tracking Assistance:
Natural Resources Conservation Service Marlys Cappaert Michelle Cover
Rm 152, Federal Building pn: 541.754.4467 ph: 541-754-4793
100 Centennial Mall North
Lincoln, NE 68508-3866
Sample Tracking Contact Info:
. FAX: 541-754-4637 VOICE MESSAGE CENTER: 541 -754-4663 EMAIL: sampletracking@epa.gov .
^ NWCA Tracking - Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density Sample 01/21/2011 2936162256 ^
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
CHAPTER?. HYDROLOGY
Introduction 7-3
7.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES 7-3
7.1.1 Water Sources 7-4
7.1.2 Hydrology Stressors Within the AA 7-4
7.1.3 Ditch Depth Wthin the AA 7-5
7.1.4 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Indicators of Hydrology 7-6
7.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING 7-6
7.3 LITERATURE CITED 7-7
7.4 REFERENCE CARD 7-9
Reference Card H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology (Side A)
Reference Card H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology (Side B)
7.5 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DATA FORMS 7-13
Hydrology Equipment Checklist
Form H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology (Front)
Form H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology (Back)
7-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
7-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
CHAPTER?. HYDROLOGY
Hydrology is the major defining characteristic of wetland ecosystems; affecting both soil
development and vegetation composition, which in turn reflect ecological condition (Mitsch and
Gosselink 2007). The following protocol is designed to characterize the hydrologic
characteristics of the site being assessed. The types of data to be collected are:
• Identification of Water Sources
• Hydrology Indicators
• Hydrology Stressors, including measurements of ditches.
For detailed information on the rationale for the hydrology indicator, see "Ecological Indicators
for the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment" (in prep.).
This chapter provides the details necessary to collect hydrology data by the Assessment Area
and Buffer (AB) Team within the Assessment Area (AA). Prior to departure for the site the AB
Team will review pertinent hydrology information concerning the site and ready the forms and
equipment (See Section 7.5) needed for hydrology sampling. In locations under the influence of
tides, stage of tide may affect access to the site and may make portions of the AA
unsampleable or unsafe, particularly if the area is inundated by surface water 1m or more in
depth. Refer to local tide tables and plan the visit so that maximum time is available to sample
the site.
Collecting hydrologic data for the NWCA involves a number of tasks. These include: recording
the weather on the day of sampling and for the previous week; documentation and ranking of
hydrologic characteristics including surface water connectivity to the buffer; estimates of
hydrologic fluctuations based on evidence of seasonal water levels, and documentation and
ranking of hydrologic alterations or stressors. Additionally, indicators of hydrology including
observation of current or recently saturated soils, and evidence of recent inundation will also be
assessed and recorded.
To avoid impairing data collection for the Vegetation Indicator (Chapter 5), AB Team members
will avoid stepping into areas that might be delineated as Vegetation Plots, by waiting until the
Plots are marked before entering the AA. Assessment of hydrologic features occurring in
Vegetation Plots must be done from plot peripheries to avoid trampling vegetation in the plots.
The AB Team will survey the entire AA, as it fits into the overall survey schedule of the day's
activities to identify, rank, and record Hydrology Indicator data. Hydrologic indicators and
stressors in the buffer zone surrounding the AA will be evaluated using the buffer protocol
(Chapter 4). Additional hydrologic information will be collected as part of the soil (Chapter 6)
and water quality (Chapter 8) protocols.
7.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES
Protocols for the NWCA hydrology sampling are:
1) Identification and Ranking of Water Sources
2) Identification and Ranking of Hydrology Stressors
3) Ditch Measurements
4) Identification of Indicators of Hydrology.
7-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
Fill out the header information for Form H-1. Note the start time for collecting hydrology data in
the Time of Sampling field using a 24-h clock. In the appropriate field, describe the weather for
the day of sampling and the previous week, and indicate stage of tide, if applicable. Fill in the
bubble at the beginning of each section to confirm that items not completed were absent rather
than overlooked.
7.1.1 Water Sources
Water sources and outflows provide an indication of the seasonality and hydrograph of the
wetland. Sources of water input may include surface water (e.g., direct rainfall, stream inlets,
sheet flow, flooding) and groundwater. In estuarine environments, tidal surge or tidal channels
may be a significant source of water inundation within the AA. Particularly in urban settings,
surface water may originate from anthropogenic sources including pipes and ditches.
1) Walk the entire AA as necessary to identify the presence or suspected presence of various
water sources influencing site hydrology including inlets and outlets.
Use the aerial photos and topographic maps in the Site Packet to help identify potential
inlets to investigate at ground level, especially for heavily vegetated sites.
2) Record each type of water source found within the AA as Present in the Water Sources -
Natural section of Form H-1. If the water source is not listed, record the related data in
the Other field and describe the source using a flagged comment.
• Sources may include natural inlet streams/springs, tidal channels, ocean, lake,
groundwater, precipitation and surface water runoff.
• Some source indicators may require interpretation. Provide a best informed
decision for your determination. Flag any decisions that require clarification to
inform data interpretation.
3) Consider all natural types of water sources found, and rank the three most important.
Give each a score from 1 to 3 with a value of 1 to the most important, ecosystem driving or
influential type.
7.1.2 Hydrology Stressors Within the AA
Wetland hydrologic alterations include a number of human influenced changes in hydrologic
complexity, duration and magnitude that will be recorded on Form H-1. The Buffer Protocol
(Chapter 4) will document stressors found in the buffer zone adjacent to the AA that are
influencing the hydrology of the AA.
1) Identify the presence of anthropogenic hydrology stressors within the AA in the Hydrologic
Stressors section of Form H-1. The following list identifies a number of possible
hydrologic disrupters that may be observed:
a) Damming Features - Dikes/Berms/ Dams/ RR Beds/Roads- Record the presence of
these flow impeding structures within the AA. Such structures may elevate or lower the
natural water table of the AA.
7-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
b) Shallow channels - Record the presence of shallow channels (e.g., animal trampling,
vehicle ruts) within the AA.
c) Impervious surfaces - Record the presence of any impervious surfaces found present
within the AA. These surfaces (e.g., compacted soil roads, asphalt, concrete) hinder or
block infiltration of water, thus changing the local water table level.
d) Recent sedimentation - Note and record if the AA is receiving freshly deposited
sediment. Recently deposited sediment may be different in color (often lighter) than
sediment deposited in the past, be a different particle size than the wetland substrate,
and lack algae or vegetation growing on the deposit.
e) Pumps - Record the presence of any pumps within the AA used to divert water away
from or into the wetland. Many types of pumps may be used for purposes including crop
irrigation or household water supply.
f) Field tiling - If agricultural field tiling is apparent within the AA, mark present.
g) Excavation/Dredging - Record the presence of any dredging or other excavation activity
noted in the AA.
h) Pipes - Record the presence of pipes that act to direct water into or out of the AA.
i) Culverts - Record the presence of culverts that act to direct water into or out of the AA.
j) Other - Record presence of other hydrology stressors identified. Describe the stressor
in a flagged comment.
2) Review the stressors identified in the AA and rank the top three most influential hydrologic
stressors (1-3, with 1 being most stress) to complete the Hydrology Stressors section of
Form H-1.
7.1.3 Ditch Depth Within the AA
Ditches facilitate the movement of water from one location to another and generally lower the
local groundwater table. However, depending upon topography, ditches may expedite the
draining of a wetland or its flooding (by bringing in water that raises the water table).
1) Search for ditches within the AA.
a) If one ditch is present, proceed to Step 2.
b) If more than one ditch is present, identify the deepest ditch and proceed with
Step 2.
c) If there are no ditches in the AA, fill in the No Ditch Present bubble on Form H-1.
7-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
2) Measure the depth of the deepest ditch in three locations within the AA using a surveyor's
rod (also known as a stadia rod) and a ski pole or other graduated rod marked in
centimeters following the steps below.
a) One AB team member places the surveyor's rod across the ditch. For wider
ditches, the rod may need to be held to keep it horizontal without bowing from its
own weight.
b) The second AB team member holds a ski pole or other rod with graduations
marked in centimeters vertically from the bottom of the ditch up to the surveyor's
rod.
The intersection of the bottom of the horizontal surveyor's rod on the vertical rod
is the depth of ditch.
c) Record Depth 1 in centimeters on Form H-1.
d) Take two more measurements of ditch depth spaced fairly evenly within the AA.
e) Record Depth 2 and 3 on Form H-1.
f) Mark the depth measurement locations on the aerial photo from the Site Packet
and/or the sketch map on the back of Form AA-1 that is being used to document
the layout of the AA (Chapter 3).
7.1.4 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Indicators of Hydrology
Indicators of hydrology may take many forms. The AB team should carefully look around the
entire AA to note the presence of indicators and record their presence on the back of Form H-1.
Reference card H-1 has pictures and/or descriptions of some U.S. Army Corps indicators
(USACOE 2009) to help with identification.
1) Record the presence of surface water, saturated soils and other site condition evidence
that suggests the presence of various wetland characteristics by filling in all applicable
bubbles.
2) Record any evidence of recent inundation. Mark the bubbles for various residual marks
from water (stains, drift lines or deposits, mineral deposits, etc,) and sediment (deposits,
drainage patterns, crusts, etc.) and plant and animal presence or indicators.
3) Note any evidence of current or recent soil saturation. Mark bubbles for evidence
including olfactory as well as visual indicators.
4) For all indicators, if further explanation is required, use a flagged comment to elaborate.
7.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING
There are no physical samples to process and track for the Hydrology Indicator. All data is
recorded on Form H-1. See Chapter 2 for data form and records management protocols.
7-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
7.3 LITERATURE CITED
Mitsch, W.J. and J.G. Gosselink. 2007. Wetlands, 4th ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
NY. 582pp.
USACOE (U.S. Army Corps of Engineers). 2009. Regional Supplements to Corps Delineation
Manual. Website: http://www.usace.army.mil/cecw/pages/reg supp.aspx.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Preparation. Ecological Indicators for
the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment. EPA-XXX-YY-0000. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
7-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
7-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
REFERENCE CARD
Reference Card H-1: NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology
7-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
7-10
-------
Reference Card H-l: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA HYDROLOGY (side A)
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS HYDROLOGY INDICATORS***
Evidence of Recent Inundation
Water marks - Discolorations or stains on the bark of woody vegetation, rocks, bridge supports,
buildings, fences, or other fixed objects as a result of inundation
Sediment deposits (A) - Thin layers or coatings of fine-grained mineral material (e.g., silt or clay)
or organic matter (e.g., pollen), sometimes mixed with other detritus, remaining on tree bark,
plant stems or leaves, rocks, and other objects after surface water recedes
Drift deposits - Rafted debris that has been deposited on the ground surface or entangled in
vegetation or other fixed objects. Debris consists of remnants of vegetation (e.g., branches,
stems, and leaves), manmade litter, or other waterborne materials
Algal mat or crust (A) - A mat or dried crust of algae, perhaps mixed with other detritus, left on
or near the soil surface after dewatering
Iron deposits (B) - Thin orange or yellow crust or gel of oxidized iron on the soil surface or on
objects near the surface
Surface soil cracks (C) - Shallow cracks that form when fine-grained mineral or organic sediments
dry and shrink, often creating a network of cracks or small polygons
Water-stained leaves (D) - Water-stained leaves are fallen or recumbent dead leaves that have
turned grayish or blackish in color due to inundation for long periods
Drainage Patterns- Consists of flow patterns visible on the soil surface or eroded into the soil,
low vegetation bent over in the direction of flow, absence of leaf litter or small woody debris due
to flowing water, and similar evidence that water flowed across the ground surface
Salt crust (E) - Hard or brittle deposits of salts formed on the ground surface due to the
evaporation of saline surface water
Aquatic invertebrate - Presence of live individuals, diapausing insect eggs or crustacean
cysts, or dead remains of aquatic fauna, such as, but not limited to, sponges, bivalves, aquatic
snails, aquatic insects, ostracods, shrimp, other crustaceans, tadpoles, or fish, either on the soil
surface or clinging to plants or other emergent objects
Biotic crust (F) - Ponding-remnant biological crusts, benthic micro-flora, and the dried remains of
free-floating algae left on or near the soil surface after dewatering
Sparsely vegetated concave surface - Concave surfaces should contrast with vegetated slopes
and convex surfaces in the same area
Marl deposits (G) - Crumbly mixture of clays, calcium and magnesium carbonates, on the soil
surface
Moss trim lines (H)- Presence of lines of moss on trees (note arrow) or other upright objects in
seasonally inundated areas
f^~— "^ ,,- f(i i^"}^.
***U. S. Army Corps of Engineers. 2009. Regional Supplements to Corps Delineation Manual.
Website: http://www.usace.army.mil/cecw/pages/reg_supp.aspx
-------
Reference Card H-l: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA HYDROLOGY (sideB)
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS HYDROLOGY INDICATORS
***
Observations of Surface Water or Saturated Soils and Other Site Condition Evidence
Stunted or stressed plants - Present if individuals of the same species growing in the potential wetland are clearly of smaller stature,
less vigorous, or stressed compared with individuals growing in nearby drier landscape situations
Geomorphic position - present if the area in question is located in a localized depression, linear drainage-way, concave position
within a floodplain, at the toe of a slope, on the low-elevation fringe of a pond or other water body, or in an area where
groundwater discharges
Microtopographic relief - Presence of features that are founding areas of seasonal inundation or shallow water tables, such as
hummocks, flarks and strangs, tussocks, frost circles or pedestals, with micro-highs less than 90cm above the base soil level
Shallow aquitard - Occurs in and around the margins of depressions, such as temporary pools, and consists of the presence a low
permeability layer within the soil profile that is potentially capable of perching water within 12 in. (30 cm) of the surface
Surface water - Observation of surface water (flooding or ponding during a site visit)
High water table - Direct visual observation of the water table 30cm or less below the surface including perched water, through flow
and discharging groundwater
Saturation - Observation of soaked soil conditions 30cm or less from the soil surface. Indicated by water glistening on the surfaces
and broken interior faces of soil clods (See Chapter 6: Soils)
Evidence of Current or Recent Soil Saturation
Hydrogen sulfide odor - A rotten egg odor within 12 in. (30 cm) of the soil surface
Dry season water table - Visual observation of the water table between 12 and 24 in (30 and 60
cm) below the surface during the normal dry season or during a drier-than-normal year
Surficial thin muck - Consists of a layer of moist sticky mud and organic material 1 in
(2.5 cm) or less thick on the soil surface
Salt deposits - whitish or brownish deposits of salts that accumulate on the ground surface
through the capillary action of groundwater
Crayfish burrows (A) - Presence of crayfish tunnel, as indicated by openings in soft ground up to
2 in (5 cm) in diameter, often surrounded by chimney-like mounds of excavated mud
Fiddler crab burrows (B)- Presence of fiddler crab burrows in mud or sand characterized by
inorganic feeding pellets left near burrows after organic matter is removed
***U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 2009. Regional Supplements to Corps Delineation Manual.
Website: http://www.usace.army.mil/cecw/pages/reg_supp.aspx
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
7.5 EQUIPMENT LIST AND DATA FORM
7-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter/. Hydrology
7-14
-------
HYDROLOGY EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
_ Data Form and Reference Card
_ Pencils
_Telescoping surveyor's rod (also known as a stadia rod) (need one to measure ditch depth)
_Ski pole or rod marked in 1cm and 10cm gradations
-------
-------
•
FORM H-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA HYDROLOGY (Front)
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1
Reviewed bv (initial): ^fc
1
Time of Sampling (hh:mm): . Tjdal stage. Q NA Q |ncoming Q Outgoing Q slack O Flood
&4 tir CIOCK I i I! i i
Weather description: Day of sampling:
Week prior to sampling:
Identify and Rank Water Sources / Stressors:
Rank the top 3 Water Sources (1 = most influential). Rank the top 3 Stressors (1 = most stress) by perceived influence on the
Site/Assessment Area Hydrology.
Water Sources - Natural
O Fill in this bubble to confirm that all water sources were considered, but only those present were marked.
Stream Inflow (creeks, rivers)
Outflow
Springs (seeps)
Lake
Precipitation (rain, snow)
Groundwater
Present
O
0
0
O
O
0
Rank Top 3 Sources
from 1-3
O1 O2 O3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 O3
Q1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Flag
Snow Melt
Overbank Flooding
Estuary Tidal Channel
Tidal Surge
Other (describe with flag)
Present
O
0
O
o
0
Rank Top 3 Sources
from 1-3
Q1 Q2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Flag
Hydrologic Stressors
O Fill in this bubble to confirm that all hydrologic Stressors were considered, but only those present were marked.
Damming Features
Dikes
Berms
Dams
Railroad Bed
Roads
Shallow Channels
Animal Trampling
Vehicle Ruts
Impervious Surfaces
Roads
Concrete
Asphalt
Recent Sedimentation
Present
O
0
0
o
o
o
0
0
o
o
o
Rank Top 3
Stressors from 1 -3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
Q1 Q2 Q3
0)1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
Flag
Pumps
Irrigation
Water Supply
Other
Field Tiling
Excavation / Dredging
Pipes
Sewer Outfall
Standpipe outflow
Culverts
Corrugated Pipe
Box
Ditches
Inflowing
Outflowing
Other (describe with flag)
Present
O
0
o
0
o
0
o
0
0
o
0
0
Rank Top 3
Stressors from 1-3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Q1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
O1 O2 Q3
Flag
Depth of Deepest Ditch:
Measure cross sectional depth in 3 places if a ditch is present in the AA Flag
Flag
•
O No Ditch Present
Depth 1 =
(cm)
Depth 2 =
(cm)
Depth 3 =
(cm)
Comments
Flag codes: K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1,F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. ^^
Explain all flags in comment section. 9911639020 ^)
NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology 01/21/2011
-------
I FORM H-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA HYDROLOGY (Back) Reviewed byimmai): |
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
USACOE - Hydrology Indicators Fill in bubbles for all applicable indicators.
(Reference Card H-1 provides details about each indicator. Not all indicators will be found in every wetland).
Observation of Surface Water or Saturated Soils and other Site Condition Evidence FLAG
O Stunted or Stressed Plants Q Geomorphic Position Q Microtopographic Relief
O Surface Water O Hign Water Table Q Soil Saturation Q Shallow Aquitard
Evidence of Recent Inundation
O Water Marks Q Aquatic Invertebrate O lron Deposits Q Marl Deposits Q Salt Crust
O Algal Mat or Crust Q Drainage Patterns Q Sparsely Vegetated Q Drift Deposits Q Biotic Crust
Concave Surfaces
O Water-stained Leaves Q Sediment Deposits O Surface Soil Cracks Q Moss Trim Lines
Evidence of Current or Recent Soil Saturation
O Hydrogen Sulfide Odor O Fiddler Crab Burrows
O Dry Season Water Table Q Salt Deposits
O Crayfish Burrows O Surficial Thin Muck
Flag
Comments
Flag codes: K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1 ,F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comment section.
6783639024
NWCA Assessment Area Hydrology 01/21/2011
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
CHAPTERS. WATER QUALITY
Introduction 8-3
8.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES 8-3
8.1.1 Determination of Sampleable Water and Location of Sample 8-3
8.1.2 Characterization of the AA Surface Water Body 8-4
8.1.3 Collection of Water Chemistry Sample 8-4
8.1.4 Optional Protocol - Data Collection with a Hydrolab or
YSI Handheld Multi-probe Meter 8-8
8.1.5 After Sampling Clean-up 8-8
8.1.6 Determination of Maximum Surface Water Depth 8-8
8.1.7 Determination of Percent of AA Covered by Surface Water 8-9
8.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING 8-9
8.2.1 At the Site 8-9
8.2.2 At Field Lodging or Office 8-9
8.2.3 Data Handling 8-10
8.3 LITERATURE CITED 8-10
8.4 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORM, AND LABELS 8-11
Water Quality Equipment Checklist
Form WQ-1: NWCA Assessment Area Water Quality
Sample Labels
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
i-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
CHAPTERS. WATER QUALITY
This chapter describes the procedures and methods for the field collection and analysis of the
NWCA water quality indicators. The types of data to be collected as part of the water quality
protocol are:
• Characteristics of the Surface Water Body
• Water Sample for Chemical Analysis
• Maximum Depth
• Surface Water Extent
• Field Probe Readings (Optional)
For detailed information on the rationale for the use of the water quality indicator, see
"Ecological Indicators for the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment" (in prep.).
Prior to arrival on the site, the Assessment Area and Buffer (AB) Team should review the
summary of activities from this chapter and have the forms and equipment needed for water
quality sampling. The Team should also review information about the site that might influence
implementation of the protocol. This is particularly important for planning the timing of access
and to maximize time for sampling in tidally-influenced areas. Tides may make portions of the
AA unsampleable or unsafe if the area is inundated by surface water 1m or more in depth at
some time during the tidal cycle on the day of sampling.
8.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES
After delineation of the Assessment Area (AA) by the Vegetation (Veg) Team, the AB Team will
determine if surface water meeting the collection criteria (see Section 8.1.1) is present within the
AA. If necessary, the AB team should coordinate with the Veg Team to confirm that the water
sampling location is not in a Veg Plot. If sampleable water is found only within a Veg Plot, then
consult with the Botanist/Ecologist to determine the best strategy for sampling to avoid
compromising data for either indicator. If the site is tidal be sure to take stage of tide into
consideration in the timing of the sampling.
The AB team should complete the water quality sampling prior to collecting data for other
indicators to avoid degrading the water while completing other sampling tasks. Use flagging if
necessary to keep Crew members clear of the water sampling location until the water can be
sampled.
8.1.1 Determination of Sampleable Water and Location of Sample
Water in wetlands may be ponded or flowing. In either case, the sample must be collected from
an area that meets all of the following criteria:
• sufficient depth (i.e., 2x height of collecting dipper or ~15cm);
• within the AA and as close to the POINT as possible;
So
- O
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
• as close to the middle of the water body as practical given safety considerations; and
• away from inlets or outlets (natural or anthropogenic) because outlets and particularly
inlets may influence the composition of the water sample.
Fill in the header information on Form WQ-1 before initiating sample collection.
If there is no surface water in the AA, fill in the "No" bubble in the Presence of Surface Water in
the AA field on Form WQ-1 to complete the water quality data collection for the site. Proceed to
other tasks.
If surface water is present in the AA, fill in the fill in the "Yes" bubble in the Presence of Surface
Water in the AA field on Form WQ-1 and then fill in the appropriate bubble in the Confirm
Sampleable Surface Water field to indicate whether the water is sampleable, i.e., meets all of
the criteria listed above. If the water is not sampleable the protocol is complete. If the water is
sampleable complete the Characteristics of Sampled Water Location field of Form WQ-1,
indicating the salinity of the water (freshwater (<0.5 ppt), brackish (0.5>30 ppt), saline (>30
ppt)(Cowardin et al. 1979)), whether the location is tidal or non tidal, and the type of water body
sampled. Use the "Other" bubble and the associated space to describe something that is not
captured by the choices listed on the form. Proceed with the protocols below.
8.1.2 Characterization of the AA Surface Water Body
Characterize the surface water to be sampled and its location by filling out the Characteristics of
AA Surface Water Body field of Form WQ-1. Use the "Other" bubble and the associated space
to describe something that is not captured by the choices listed on the form. Use the flag box
and the Comments field on the back of Form WQ-1 to add any information that would clarify the
characterization of the surface water body.
Substrate Color - Identify the color of the predominant substrate lining the bottom of the
water body sampled.
Water Clarity - Describe the relative clarity of the water by filling in the appropriate bubble.
Substrate - Indicate whether vegetation is present. Determine the predominant substrate
and fill all bubbles that best describe it.
Water Smell - Identify the characteristic smell of the water and fill in the appropriate bubble.
Water Surface - Record the characteristics of the water surface by filling in appropriate
bubble(s).
8.1.3 Collection of Water Chemistry Sample
After the surface water sampling location has been identified and water body characteristics
described, prepare the gear to collect the water chemistry sample.
Collect surface water sample(s) prior to 11:00 a.m. to standardize the collection time frame for
water chemistry samples. This will limit the impact of diurnal changes in the water quality due to
i-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapters: Water Quality
metabolic activity of the organisms in the water. If the sample cannot be collected prior to 11:00
a.m., collect it close to 11:00 am as possible.
Duplicate samples will be collected for performing Quality Assurance checks (USEPA 2011 a,
USEPA 2011b). The AB Team should collect the duplicate sample at the first site visited
containing sampleable surface water in the AA, and then every 10th collection thereafter. This
will ensure that at least one duplicate sample will have been collected by each Crew. Note that
there is a field on Form WQ-1 for tracking the cumulative number of sites with sampleable
surface water since the last water chemistry sample was taken.
1) Label sample containers prior to filling. Use the preprinted, adhesive-backed label
provided by NWCA Information Management (IM) Team similar to the one shown below
(Figure 8-1). The preprinted labels will be provided together with the data forms as part of
the Site Packet materials (see Chapter 2). Actual labels will have the site identification
(ID) number pre-printed for all labels. Make sure the site ID number is correct for the site
being visited, the date is clearly written on the label with an indelible marker, and the label
is affixed to the correct container.
Use the duplicate water chemistry sample label when a duplicate sample is collected.
2) Cover the label with a strip of clear tape to protect the writing from getting smudged or
rubbed off. Keep the container upright with the lid closed until the water chemistry sample
is collected and ready to pour into the container. Keeping the lid closed until the AB team
is ready to sample helps keep contaminants out of the container.
WATER CHEMISTRY - NOT FILTERED
^ NWCA11-7771 Visit**: 1
/ /2011
SAMPLE ID
NOl^l
X
UPLICATE WATER CHEMISTRY - NOT FILTERED^
NWCA11-7771 Visit**: 1
/ /2011.
Figure 8-1. Water chemistry labels to be affixed to surface
water sample cubitainers.
3) Approach the surface water sample location (Figure 8-2) carefully. Do not step into the
water to avoid disturbing sediments, falling in, or fouling the water and potentially
contaminating or otherwise compromising the quality of the sample.
i-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
Figure 8-2. Example of long-handled dipper in use for sampling surface water.
(Photo credit- U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Eric Vance)
4) Put on nitrile gloves to avoid contaminating the sample with creams, ointments, sunscreen
or other materials that might be on the hands of the person taking the sample.
5) Rinse the dipper cup three times by immersing the cup in the water while being careful not
to stir or otherwise disturb bottom sediments as the dipper cup is rinsed. Pour the water
away from the area to be sampled so that the discarded water does not drain back into the
sample area and potentially affect the collected sample.
6) Take sample towards the center of the water body, away from inlets and/or outlets, and
from water deep enough (2X the height of the dipper or ~15cm) to avoid fouling the water
as the dipper is used to collect the sample.
Collect sample(s) in areas which are completely free of surface debris. If vegetation or
debris is present and cannot be avoided, slowly and carefully push aside the floating
vegetation or other debris with the long handle of the dipper to create a clear section of
water for sample collection. Use care not to disturb bottom sediments when pushing aside
debris or vegetation or when collecting water with the dipper. If bottom sediments become
disturbed, move to an adjacent area where the water has not been contaminated.
7) Remove the lid from the 1-liter cubitainer and expand it by gently pulling out the sides.
NOTE: DO NOT BLOW into the cubitainer to expand it since this will contaminate
the sample.
8) Rinse the inside of the cubitainer with sample water. Pour water from the dipper into the
container and then rinse the container by gently swishing the water around and then
pouring it away from where the sample will be taken. Repeat the process three times.
Hold the container while filling to keep the container from tipping over and spilling the
sample and/or allowing the opening to touch the ground which would contaminate the
sample.
8-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
To avoid sample contamination by substances potentially present on the gloved fingers,
do not touch the threads of the container opening or the inside of the cap to the container.
Collapsible containers usually have a molded collar just below the screw threads that
should be used to hold the container and keep fingers away from the screw threads while
filling (Figure 8-3).
Figure 8-3. Example of filling the cubitainer.
(Photo credit- U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Eric Vance)
9) Use the dipper to fill the container to just overflowing. When the container has been filled,
carefully cap and tighten to seal the container without capturing any air bubbles. Removal
of all air bubbles eliminates the opportunity for chemicals in the water to interact with air
and change chemical characteristics of the sample.
10) Should a bubble a cubic centimeter or greater occur in the sample, remove the lid, tap the
cubitainer slightly to cause any bubbles to rise to the surface and escape. Squeeze the
cubitainer slightly to expunge air and form a bulging meniscus so that air is not trapped in
the container when it is capped. Replace and tighten the cap, again taking care to avoid
touching the threads. If a sample is compromised by potential contamination, discard the
sample, and re-rinse the cubitainer and threads before starting over.
11) Record the time that the sample was collected and the Sample ID number from the label in
the Water Chemistry Sampling field of Form WQ-1.
12) Place the water chemistry sample on ice in a cooler as soon as possible after collection. If
a cooler is not immediately available on-site, place the cubitainer in a small white plastic
trash bag out of direct sunlight and in a cool location. Record on Form WQ-1 that the
sample was placed on ice by filling in the "Yes" bubble indicating that the sample was
chilled before and during transport back to base the base site.
13) If the Optional Field Probe Data are being collected, go to Section 8.1.4. If not, go to
Section 8.1.5 and complete clean up activities.
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
8.1.4 Optional Protocol - Data Collection with a Hydrolab or YSI Handheld Multi-probe
Meter
Collecting in situ data with a multi-probe meter is not required for the NWCA, but individual
states may choose to collect water quality data with multi-probe instruments using their state
specific protocols.
Make sure the meter has been calibrated according to the multi-probe manual specific to the
instrument being used by the Crew. Form WQ-1 contains a field, Optional - Surface Water
Field Probe Readings, to record field probe data.
1) Put on nitrile gloves, if not already wearing them, to avoid contaminating the water sample
with hand oils, lotions or other substances.
2) Collect the data for dissolved oxygen, pH, conductivity and temperature.
3) Record the results and the information on the instrument used on Form WQ-1.
4) Clean meter probes and proceed to Section 8.1.5.
8.1.5 After Sampling Clean-up
1) Empty any remaining water sample from the dipper cup and rinse the cup with deionized
water. Remove the cup from the handle and place it in a zippered plastic bag to keep it
clean.
2) Place the gloves in a trash container with the rest of the unrecyclable materials from the
day's sampling effort.
8.1.6 Determination of Maximum Surface Water Depth
Determine the maximum depth (up to 100cm or 1m) of the water body sampled after the water
sample has been collected.
1) Measure the depth of the water body (surface down to top of substrate) from which the
chemistry sample was collected. Use the handle of the long handled dipper if it has
centimeter graduations. Otherwise use a stadia rod or other graduated rod.
2) Record the value in the Surface Water Measurements field on Form WQ-1.
• Due to safety considerations, record the depth as > 100cm if water is over 1
meter deep rather than trying to measure the actual depth.
• In tidally influenced locations, make sure to fill in the bubble on the top of the AA
Hydrology form (Form H-1) identifying tidal stage because depth will vary with
tidal stage.
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
8.1.7 Determination of Percent of AA Covered by Surface Water
Estimate the percent of the AA covered by surface water (to the nearest 10%). There is no
minimum depth required for this measurement. Record the value in the Surface Water
Measurement field on Form WQ-1.
8.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING
There are two components to water chemistry sample handling. One is completed before
leaving the site; the other, at the field lodging or office.
8.2.1 At the Site
1) Complete Form T-1, NWCA 2011 Site and Sample Status/WRS Tracking for the water
chemistry sample and duplicate, whenever a duplicate sample is collected. Carefully, fill
out the tracking data that pertains to the water chemistry sample(s). For more information
on Form T-1 see Chapter 2.
• In the Sample Status - Were Samples Collected? field of Form T-1,
indicate that the water chemistry sample (CHEM) and the duplicate, of
appropriate, were collected.
• Record the water chemistry Sample ID numbers in the appropriate area
of the WRS Sample Tracking field.
2) Ensure all identification information and tracking data for the sample corresponds exactly
to the data on the label.
3) Transport samples to field lodging or the office in an ice chest on blue ice or wet ice.
8.2.2 At Field Lodging or Office
The water chemistry sample and, when collected, the duplicate sample for each AA will be sent
to the USEPA Lab in Corvallis, Oregon, within 24 hours of collection in an ice chest with the
other immediately shipped samples. These samples are soil isotope, sediment enzymes, algal
toxins, and chlorophyll-a.
The protocol below covers the details of shipping that pertain to the water chemistry sample.
See Chapter 2 for information that pertains to all of the immediately shipped samples. See
Appendix A for detailed protocols on packing, tracking, and shipping samples and for shipping
addresses.
1) Maintain the water chemistry sample(s) on blue ice, wet ice, or under refrigeration (4°C)
until the samples are shipped.
2) Confirm that the label affixed to each sample cubitainer has the correct site identification
number, is complete and legible, and is covered with clear tape.
8-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
3) Ensure that any air has been removed from each cubitainer (see #10 in Section 8.1.3) and
that the cubitainer is tightly sealed.
4) Go to Chapter 2 for the protocols on packing and shipping the samples to be immediately
shipped.
8.2.3 Data Handling
See Chapter 2 for protocols on copying and shipping the completed data forms to the
Information Management Team. See Appendix D for information on transmitting the image files
of any photos taken of any important features related to water quality that the AB team feels
should be documented.
8.3 LITERATURE CITED
Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet, and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of Wetlands and
Deepwater Habitats of the United States. FWS/OBS-79/31. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service,
Washington, DC.
Heitmuller, T. 2008. Gulf of Mexico Coastal Wetlands Condition Assessment- Pilot Survey:
Quality Assurance Project Plan. U.S. Geological Survey National Wetlands Research Center,
Gulf Breeze Project Office, Gulf Breeze, FL.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011a. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Quality Assurance Project Plan. EPA/843/R10/003. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Water and Office of Research and Development, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011b. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Laboratory Operations Manual. EPA/843/R10/002. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Water and Office of Research and Development, Washington, DC.
8-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
8.4 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORM, AND LABELS
8-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 8: Water Quality
8-12
-------
WATER QUALITY EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
_Clear tape strip packs for covering labels
_Collapsible 1-liter cubitainers for surface water sample
_De-ionized (Dl) water in a five gallon carbouy
_Form WQ-1: NWCA Assessment Area WATER QUALITY
_Large cooler with ice at vehicle
_Long-handled plastic dipper with cm graduations on handle
(See schematic below for making long handled dipper)
_Nitrile gloves, disposable (always carry half dozen per site)
_No. 2 Pencils
_Paper towels (for any clean up)
_Permanent marker (Fine-tip for labels)
_Plastic bags, 1-quart, zippered
_Squirt/squeeze bottle of Dl water
_Small white plastic trash bags (7-10 gallon)
_Small, soft-sided cooler w/ blue ice to fit (for sites not close to vehicle)
Optional items
Field meter calibration kit (can be contained in a good quality, plastic box, e.g. tackle
box) and should contain:
o Calibration cup with removable cove, DO membranes, backup probes and spare
parts (o-rings, etc).
o pH buffers
o Thermometer
o Squeeze bottle
o Appropriate size leak-proof, screw-cap containers (e.g., nalgene) for additional
calibration solutions
o Basic tools (assorted screwdrivers, Allen wrenches)
Multi-Probe Field Meter (Dissolved Oxygen, pH, Conductivity, Temperature)
% inch X or T
fitting cut with a bandsaw
on the long axis
C
Glue the fitting to the coupling
and the cap to the coupling with
universal plastic plumbing glue -
but leave the handle unglued for
transport and so that it can be
used for other purposes
L ip for bottom
is ^ "716 inch OD
i fits snug inside
ou| ling)
Exploded Schematic for Building Long-handled Water Dipper
-------
-------
R(
g FORMWQ-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA WATER QUALITY (Front) »>
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2
;viewed
(Initials)- ^H
0 1 1
Presence of Surface Water in the AA: O Yes Q No Confirm Sampleable Surface Water (>15cm): O Yes Q No
Characteristics of Sampled Water Location
Choose one: Choose one:
O Freshwater O Saline O Tidal O Pond
O Brackish O Non-Tidal O Lake
Choose One:
O Channel O Other:
O Backwater
Characteristics of AA Surface Water Body (where sampled) - Mark all that apply
SUBSTRATE COLOR: WATER CLARI
O Black O Clear
O Brown O Turbid
O Gray O Stained
O Milky
O Other O Other
TY: SUBSTRATE:
Vegetation Present?:
O Yes O No
O Sand O Cobble
O Muck O Shellhash
O Gravel Q Organic
O Other O Mineral Soil
WATER SMELL:
O None O Algae Odor
O Chemical O Rotten
Vegetation
O Sulphur O Fishy
O Other
Water Chemistry Sampling
Time Co
SAMPLE ID: Chilled: (hhmm) 24 ti
QYes
ONO . . ,:
lected
our clock
COMMENTS
Flag:
WATER SURFACE:
3 Film O Algae Bloom
3 Floe O Vegetation
0 Sheen
O Other
No Sample Collected O
Duplicate Water Chemistry Sampling
Collect duplicate sample at team's 1st, 10th, 20th site with sampleable water
Cumulative number of sites with sampleable water.
Time Co
DUPLICATE SAMPLE ID: Chilled: (hhmm) 24 Ji
O Yes
ONO . . ,:
lected
our clock
COMMENTS
Optional - Surface Water Field Probe Readings
Instrument manufacturer and model:
D
P
C
T«
Flag
O(mg/L) XX.X
H XX.XX
onductivity (uS/cm) XXX.XX
imp. (°C) XX.X
ii i i
Surface Water Measurements
Surface Water > 100cm O Yes O No
Maximum Depth of Surface Water(cm):
% AA covered with surface water:
^^ Flag codes: K = No measurement made, U = Suspect measurement, F1 ,F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew.
^H Explain all flags in comment section on the back of this form.
™ 01/07/2011 NWCA Water Quality
8980109746 |
-------
FORM WQ-1: NWCA ASSESSMENT AREA WATER QUALITY (Back)
Site ID: NWCA11-
Date:
/ 2 0 1 1
Flag
Comments
0601109748
01707/2011 NWCA Water Quality
-------
SAMPLE LABELS
WATER CHEMISTRY - NOT FILTERED
NWCA11-7771 Visit#: 1
/ /2011
999981
DUPLICATE WATER CHEMISTRY - NOT FILTERED
NWCA11-7771 Visit#: 1
/ /2011
999988
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
CHAPTERS. ALGAE
Introduction 9-3
9.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES 9-3
9.1.1 Protocols for Collection of Samples 9-3
9.1.2 Procedure for Algal Toxins Sampling 9-5
9.1.3 Procedure for Algae Taxonomic ID Sampling 9-8
9.1.4 Procedure for Collecting a Chlorophyll-a (Biomass) Sample 9-12
9.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING 9-15
9.2.1 At the Site 9-15
9.2.2 At Field Lodging or Office 9-15
9.2.2.1 Immediately Shipped Samples 9-15
9.2.2.2 Batch Samples 9-16
9.2.3 Data Handling 9-16
9.3 LITERATURE CITED 9-17
9.4 REFERENCE CARD 9-19
Reference Card ALG-1 Flowchart of NWCA, Algae Sample Collection
Activities
9.5 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORM, AND LABELS 9-23
Algae Equipment Checklist
Form: ALG-1: NWCA Algae
Sample Labels
9-1
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9-2
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
CHAPTERS. ALGAE
Disbursed by spores and moving water, algae are wide-spread across the landscape. They are
found on many substrates including mineral, organic, wood, and vegetation, as well as in the
water column. Some algae persist in soils that are saturated and never inundated. Although
some classes of wetlands dry out during a portion of the year, the silica frustules (skeletons) left
behind by diatoms (one group of algae taxa) can still be collected for analysis. Thus,
researchers are able to identify specific algal taxa inhabiting locations like seasonally wet
wetlands because frustules are unique (like fingerprints) for each species.
For detailed information on the rationale for the algae indicator, see "Ecological Indicators for
the 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment" (in prep.).
This chapter provides the protocols necessary to collect pertinent data for the algae indicator by
the Assessment Area and Buffer (AB) Team within the Assessment Area (AA). The algae data
collected will include a composite sample for identification and enumeration of taxa. Substrate
samples will be collected at all sites with suitable substrate regardless of whether surface water
is present because saturated soils produce conditions for algae to persist at the soil/air
interface.
Collecting algae data for the NWCA involves three main tasks: collecting substrate and epiphyte
(if available) subsamples for the Algae Taxonomic Identification (ID) composite sample,
collecting the Algal Toxins sample, and filtering surface water (if present) for a Chlorophyll-a
sample that will be analyzed to obtain an algal biomass estimate.
9.1 SAMPLING PROCEDURES
The AB Team will identify locations for algal sample collection in the AA during AA
establishment. The Chlorophyll-a sample can be collected only if sampleable (approximately
15cm deep) surface water exists. If surface water is located only in a Vegetation (Veg) Plot, the
AB team works with the botanist to minimize vegetation impacts while collecting the algal
samples.
9.1.1 Protocols for Collection of Samples
The vast majority of algae are found in the top few millimeters of the substrate or on submerged
or emergent vegetation, therefore, the protocols in this chapter focus on collection of the algae
from those areas within the AA. Collection of the Taxonomic ID composite sample may be a
multistep process in combination with the Algal Toxins protocol depending upon the presence of
submerged aquatic and/or emergent vegetation from which epiphytic algae can be obtained. If
no vegetation is present or the vegetation cannot be sampled for epiphytes, then only substrate
cores will be collected for the Taxonomic ID sample for analysis.
A flow-chart summary of sampling activities for collecting the various algae samples is
presented in Figure 9-1. This summary has been developed as a Reference Card (RC ALG-1,
Section 9.4) for use in the field.
9-3
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 9. Algae
Identify Algae Sampling Locations in the AA after the Vegetation Plots are
Established.
Is there surface water in the AA > 15cm?
Yes
Yes or No
No
Aquatic or emergent
vegetation is present
Yes
Collect 5
epiphyte
algae
subsamples
Chlorophyll-a:
Collect 500ml of surface
water in a
500-ml bottle using the long-
handled
dipper
Filter water using vacuum
flask
Add 2 drops MgC03 solution
to buffer
sample
Immediately place filtered
sample in a
labeled, 50-ml screw-top vial
Cover with aluminum foil,
and place
in a labeled, zippered plastic
bag
Set in second zippered bag,
and place on ice
No
1
Collect surface
water for Algal
Toxins sample
Collect 10
substrate
subsamples to
composite for
Algae Taxonomic
ID sample
Collect 10
substrate
subsamples for
the Taxonomic ID
sample in the
If 5 epiphyte subsamples are
taken,
Collect 5 substrate
subsamples
Algal Toxins (Epiphytes &/or Surface Water):
A. If no epiphytes,
• Fill Algal toxins bottle (125-mL) to shoulder
with surface water, label and place in
plastic zippered bag
• Place on ice in cooler
B. If epiphytes collected,
• Fill bottle to shoulder with surface water
from squirt bottle
• Mix to homogenize epiphyte subsamples in
125-ml bottle
• Form a partial Algal Taxonomic ID sample
by using a graduated cylinder to transfer
50mL of homogenized epiphyte subsample
into 250-mL Algae Taxonomic ID bottle
• Add surface water to refill 125-ml bottle to
shoulder
• Label bottle and place in zippered bag
• Place on ice in cooler
1 250-ml bottle J
are
L
' 1
s~
If no sampleable
substrate, mark
"No sample
collected" for all
algae samples
V
r
\
Algae Taxonomic ID:
Add substrate subsamples to the
Algae Taxonomic ID 250-mL
bottle which may:
o Contain a 50-mL partial
Taxonomic ID sample
collected during the Algal
Toxin procedure OR
o Be empty if no epiphytes
were collected.
Dilute to shoulder of labeled
250-ml bottle with
surface water, if present, or Dl
water
Add Lugol's solution, amount
appropriate for sample
Cap bottle and tape shut
Double bag and place on ice
Figure 9-1. Flowchart of NWCA, Algae Sample Collection Activities. A maximum of
three samples will be collected from each site for laboratory analysis: an Algae
Taxonomic ID sample, an Algal Toxins sample, and a Chlorophyll-a sample.
9-4
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 9. Algae
The following key guides the AB Team through collection of algae samples. Presence of
surface water and submerged aquatic and/or emergent vegetation will affect the ability to take
all samples.
Protocol Key:
Is there sampleable surface water present (> 15cm depth) in the AA?
a) Yes
b) No
Go to Section 9.1.2, Procedure for Algal Toxins Sampling
Fill in the "No Sample Collected" bubble in the Algal Toxins Sample and
the Biomass: Chlorophyll-a field of Form ALG-1 and
Go to Section 9.1.3, Procedure for Algae Taxonomic ID Sampling
9.1.2 Procedure for Algal Toxins Sampling
1) Fill in the header information on Form ALG-1: NWCA Algae prior to initiating sample
collection by recording the date of sampling and the site identification (ID) number.
2) Record the collection date on the preprinted, site specific, Algae Taxonomic ID and Algal
Toxins labels (Figure 9-2). Make sure the correct label is being used for the site being
visited by checking the Site ID number. Attach the Algae Taxonomic ID label to a 250-mL
plastic bottle and attach the Algal Toxins label to a 125-mL plastic bottle.
• Cover each label with a clear tape to protect the information on the label from
smudging or rubbing off.
• Write the Sample ID number in the Algae Taxonomic ID Sample and Algal Toxins
Sample fields on Form ALG-1.
ALGAE TAXONOMIC ID
NWCAll-7771-^Visitff: 1
/ /2011
999987^,
ALGAL TOXINS
NWCA11-7771 Visitft:
Figure 9-2. Examples of Algae Taxonomic ID and Algal Toxins labels with preprinted Site ID
and unique Sample ID numbers.
9-5
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
3) If submerged aquatic and/or emergent herbaceous vegetation is present, go to Step
4.
If submerged aquatic and/or emergent herbaceous vegetation is not present,
• Use the long-handled dipper (Chapter 8, Figure 8-2) to add some surface water to
the 125-mL Algal Toxins bottle. Rinse the bottle and dump the water out on the
ground away from the surface water source.
• Use the dipper to obtain more surface water and fill the 125-mL Algal Toxins bottle to
the shoulder.
• Replace the cap and tighten securely.
• Immediately place the Algal Toxins sample in a zippered plastic bag, deflate the bag
and close it. Put this sample on ice. If a cooler with ice is not immediately available,
place the sample out of the light in the coolest location possible, either in a white
plastic bag or in a small cooler filled with a frozen gel-pack until the sample can be
placed on ice in a cooler.
• Proceed to the Procedure For Algae Taxonomic ID (Section 9.1.3).
4) Use the long-handled dipper to add some surface water to a squirt bottle. Rinse the squirt
bottle and dump the water on the ground away from the surface water source. Fill the
bottle with the surface water from the dipper. Replace the top of the bottle.
5) Identify submerged aquatic and/or emergent herbaceous vegetation from which to collect
algal epiphytes.
6) Collect five pieces of plant stems and/or leaf surfaces of submerged aquatic or emergent
herbaceous vegetation sufficient for sampling a total of 5in2 of surface area. Try to take
the material from different plants and locations.
• The pieces of vegetation will be scraped to create a composite Algal Toxins sample
and a partial Algae Taxonomic ID sample.
• Use scissors or shears to cut sections of the stems if it makes collection of the algal
epiphytes easier.
NOTE: There may be situations where there is very little herbaceous submerged aquatic
and/or emergent vegetation in the AA. Sampling it might destroy what little vegetation of
that type exists at the site and the sample will not accomplish the goal of creating a
composite sample from different plants and locations. In such cases, fewer than five
subsamples can be collected and documented on Form ALG-1. Section 9.1.3 explains
how to adjust the number of substrate subsamples to account for this situation in the Algae
Taxonomic ID protocol.
7) Use a clean, soft-bristled toothbrush to gently brush a 1-in2 surface in a circular motion for
20 seconds to loosen algae on one of the pieces of plant material.
9-6
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
• Use the 60-mL corer as a convenient guide for an approximate 1-in2 removal area
from vegetation stems and leaves. The inside area of the opening of the syringe is
1in2.
• Always use a new toothbrush at each site so that algae remaining in the bristles do
not contaminate the sample at the next site where a toothbrush is used.
8) Rinse the loose algal material into the Algal Toxins bottle using a funnel and the squirt
bottle filled with surface water.
9) Repeat with each of the remaining pieces of vegetation to collect a total of 5in2 of
vegetation surface area.
10) Rinse the algal material caught in the toothbrush bristles into the bottle and give the funnel
a final rinse into the bottle.
11) Fill the 125-mL Algal Toxins bottle to the shoulder with surface water from the squirt bottle.
Cap the bottle and moderately shake it to homogenize the sample as much as possible.
12) Pour 50-mL from the Algal Toxins bottle into a 100-mL graduated cylinder before the
sample has a chance to start settling. Immediately, pour the water from the graduated
cylinder into the previously labeled 250-mL Algae Taxonomic ID bottle. Cap the Algae
Taxonomic ID bottle, and place it out of direct sun while completing the Algal Toxins
sample.
13) Fill the Algal Toxins bottle to the shoulder with surface water from the squirt bottle and
replace the cap and tighten securely. The Algal Toxins bottle now contains a composite of
epiphytic and surface water algae.
14) Immediately place the Algal Toxins sample in a zippered plastic bag, deflate the bag and
close it. Put the sample on ice. If a cooler with ice is not immediately available, place the
sample out of the light in the coolest location possible, either in a white plastic bag or in a
small cooler filled with a frozen gel-pack until the sample can be placed on ice in a cooler.
15) Complete the Epiphytic Algae field of the Algal Toxins Sample and the Algae Taxonomic
Sample sections of Form ALG-1 by:
• Filling in the Y (Yes) bubble in the Collected? field to indicate that a sample was
collected.
• Recording the total number of vegetation pieces scraped (i.e., a number up to five)
in the # of Subsamples field.
16) Proceed to the Procedure For Algae Taxonomic ID below.
9-7
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.1.3 Procedure for Algae Taxonomic ID Sampling
A total of ten subsamples are collected within the AA to create a composite sample for algal
taxonomy. If epiphyte subsamples were collected during Algal Toxin Sample collection (Section
9.1.2), they will account for up to five of the ten taxonomic subsamples, depending on how
many pieces of vegetation (subsamples) were scraped. If an epiphyte subsample was not
taken, ten subsamples are taken from substrate(s) within the AA.
The subsamples should be taken using a 60-mL syringe coring device (Figure 9-3) from several
locations within the AA rather than in close proximity. In addition, select and sample a mix of
soft soil or sediment, and hard (i.e., submerged rock or wood) substrates if both are present.
Note that the syringe corer is the same type as is used for the soil isotope and sediment enzyme
sampling. A separate corer should be dedicated to collecting algal substrate samples.
In cases where the AA has seasonally saturated soils and no surface water, samples can be
collected only if suitable substrate can be located. Look for low lying areas with bare ground
that might have dried algae crusted on the surface or areas that give some other visual
indication of previous inundation and probable algal growth (dried & cracked crust, sheen, etc.).
• If no sampleable surface water, submerged and/or emergent herbaceous
vegetation, and substrate are present in the AA, fill in the bubbles on Form ALG-
1 for "No Sample Collected" for all three kinds of algae samples (Algal Toxins, Algae
Taxonomic ID, and Chlorophyll-a). The Algae protocol is complete. Go on to other
AB Team tasks.
• If sampleable substrate is present in the A A, proceed with the protocol below.
1) If an epiphyte subsample was not taken (Section 9.1.2), go to Step 2.
If an epiphyte subsample was taken (Section 9.1.2), go to Step 6.
2) Fill in Form ALG-1: NWCA Algae header information by recording the date of sampling
and the Site ID number on the form.
3) Put on nitrile gloves, if desired, for protection from potentially harmful microorganisms that
might be present in the wetland.
4) Fill out the preprinted, site specific, Algae Taxonomic ID label (Figure 9-2) with the
collection date and make sure the correct label is being used for the site being visited.
Attach the Algae Taxonomic ID label to a 250-mL plastic bottle.
• Cover each label with clear tape to protect the information on the label from
smudging or rubbing off.
• Write the Sample ID number in the Algal Taxonomic ID Sample field on Form ALG-
1.
5) Use the long-handled dipper (Chapter 8, Figure 8-2) to add some surface water to a squirt
bottle. Rinse the squirt bottle and dump the water on the ground away from the surface
water source. Fill the bottle with the surface water from the dipper. Replace the top of the
bottle.
9-8
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
6) Determine the number of substrate subsamples needed from each type of sample location
in the AA by estimating the relative area occupied by each.
For example, if five epiphyte subsamples were taken, five substrate samples are
needed. The example AA has approximately 20% submerged wood (in this
example, Cypress knees), 40% soft substrate at the edge or near the water line,
and 40% soft, seasonally flooded substrate. Therefore, the substrate portion of
the sample should be made up of one subsample (1/5) from wood (submerged
hard substrate), two subsamples (cores) (2/5) from the soft substrate at the edge
or near the water line, and two subsamples (cores) (2/5) from the soft, seasonally
flooded substrate.
7) Identify suitable sampling locations free of vegetation, leaves, roots and other material that
would prohibit the syringe (Figure 9-3) from effectively collecting a core of the substrate.
• For soft substrates at the edge of the water, or, just above the water line if the area
shows signs of recent inundation, go to Step 8 and repeat until the number of
subsamples needed is collected.
• For submerged hard substrates such as rock or wood, go to Step 9 and repeat
until the number of samples needed is collected.
8) Take the 60-mL corer and align the edge of the plunger to the end of the syringe body
(Figure 9-3A).
• Collect the core by gently pressing the cut off end of the syringe into the substrate to
about the 20-mL mark on the syringe.
• Use a gentle back and forth twisting motion while pressing the syringe into the
substrate to help "cut" the core while using your other hand to gently pull back on the
plunger to create a vacuum that will help capture the core (Figure 9-3B).
• Use a finger, knife, plastic card, or a similar support, if necessary, to confine the core
inside the syringe while carefully extracting the syringe and core from the substrate.
• Carefully extrude the core from the syringe by pushing the plunger to the 5ml_ (5cc)
mark and cut off the exposed core flush with the tip of the syringe and discard (Fig 9-
3C-E). Angle the syringe tip upright so that the core remaining in the syringe does
not fall out while the excess is cut off.
• Extrude the portion of the core remaining in the syringe into the 250-mL Algae
Taxonomic ID bottle (Fig. 9-3F). Repeat until the number of subsamples needed is
collected. Go to Step 9.
9-9
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 9. Algae
A-Algae Syringe sampler with plungei
in ready position
B&C- Insertingthe plunger to collect an
oversize core of substrate F'ull gently on
plunger to help collect core in syringe
F-Expel remamingtarget
substrate core with
diatoms in the Algae
TaxonomicID bottle.
Col lea 10 cores if no
epiphyte algae were
collected
D&E- Carefully depress front edge of
plungerto 5cc and slice off unwanted
sediment core. The target port! on of
the core isagainstthe rubber plunger
Figure 9-3. Use of the 60-mL coring device (syringe with tip cut off and beveled edge) to take
an algae substrate core for the Algae Taxonomic ID sample.
9) Use the 60-mL corer to mark the area to sample on the hard surface by pulling back the
plunger to expose the beveled edge and pressing it against the wood or rock. Remember
that the inside area of the syringe is 1in2.
• Take the 30-mL syringe with uncut tip and carefully slurp up the material inside the
marked area that is deposited/growing on the rock or wood. The tip can be used to
rub the surface to further dislodge and collect algae from the wood or rock.
• Expel the 10-20ml_ of water and algae collected from the syringe into the Algae
Taxonomic ID bottle and replace the cap.
• Repeat until the number of subsamples needed is collected.
10) Record the combined number of substrate subsamples (soft and hard) in the Substrate
field of the Algae Taxonomic ID section of Form ALG-1. Confirm that the total number of
subsamples (epiphyte and substrate) collected for the composite sample is ten by adding
the number of epiphyte and substrate subsamples listed for Algae Taxonomic ID on Form
ALG-1 and recording the sum in the Total # of subsamples field.
11) Fill the 250-mL Algae Taxonomic ID bottle to the shoulder with surface water from the
squirt bottle. If no surface water is found in the AA, use deionized (Dl) water to fill the
bottle.
12) Carefully add 2-3mL of Lugol's solution to the 250-mL bottle with the aliquot dispenser or a
small syringe.
9-10
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
• When using Lugol's solution (see Chapter 2 for details for making Lugol's solution),
the final color of the preserved sample should look like weak tea (see the middle
bottle in Figure 9-4).
• Due to differences in substrate composition, the quantity of Lugol's solution
necessary to preserve the algae cells will vary slightly.
Visually determine the correct quantity of Lugol's solution to use each time by
following the procedure below.
o Add 2mL of solution initially to the sample bottle (See Figure 9-4).
o Cap the bottle and gently shake to distribute.
o Open the bottle and check the color of the sample.
o Add more Lugol's solution if necessary.
Note: It is better to add slightly more Lugol's solution than less since the
preservative will be soaked up by both the algae and other organic material in the
sample. However, adding too much Lugol's solution (right bottle in Figure 9-4) stains
the algae cells so dark that taxa identification is difficult or impossible.
Figure 9-4. Examples of Lugol's solution concentrations in algae samples (left to
right): too little solution, correct concentration (looking like weak tea), too much
Lugol's solution.
13) Tightly cap the sample bottle and tape the bottle cap securely with electrician's tape to
seal it.
14) Place the 250-mL bottle with the Algae Taxonomic ID sample in a zippered plastic bag,
seal and store upright in a cooler with ice.
Because Lugol's solution is not a fixative, the sample must be kept chilled for maintaining
the best quality samples.
15) Thoroughly rinse all equipment with Dl water before leaving the site. Discard the
toothbrush, if used, by placing it in the container for items for disposal.
Remember to replace the toothbrush with a new one before sampling the next site.
9-11
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.1.4 Procedure for Collecting a Chlorophyll-a (Biomass) Sample
If surface water is present in the AA, and the water meets the sampling criteria for water
chemistry (at least 15cm deep), then a Chlorophyll-a sample will be collected.
1) Put on nitrile gloves.
2) Set up an area for processing the sample. Sample processing should be done out of
direct sunlight whenever possible, because the sunlight readily breaks down the
Chlorophyll-a.
3) Rinse the long-handled dipper (Chapter 8, Figure 8-2) three times with surface water and
then rinse a 500-mL collection bottle three times with surface water. Pour the used water
on ground away from the surface water area to be sampled so that the sample is not
compromised.
4) Fill the 500-mL bottle with surface water by collecting water with the long-handled dipper.
Collect water from the same location that the water chemistry sample was taken.
5) Use clean, flat-bladed forceps (clean with tissue paper) to place a Whatman GF/F 0.7-um
glass fiber filter in the graduated filter holder with the gridded side of the filter facing down
(See Figure 9-5).
6) Filter as much of the 500ml_ of surface water from the sample bottle that will readily pass
through the filter following the procedure below.
• Begin by measuring 100ml_ of surface water from the 500-mL bottle into the
graduated cylinder.
o If the water is very green or turbid, use a smaller, measured volume.
o In subsequent iterations, use less water if filtering is slow.
o Use the space at the bottom of Form ALG-1 to make notes on the amount of
water filtered so that the total can be calculated and recorded.
• Pour all the water from the graduated cylinder into the filter holder.
• Replace the lid on the filter holder and the cap on the 500-mL bottle.
• Use the vacuum pump to pull the sample through the filter, not exceeding 7in of Hg
pressure (3.44psi).
• Check to assure that water is not leaking out of the apparatus and is moving through
the filter.
If 100mL of water from the AA will not pass through the filter, change the filter, rinse
the apparatus with Dl water, discard the water, and repeat the procedure using 50mL
of the water from the 500-mL bottle.
• Check the filter for visible color.
o If there is visible color, go to Step 7.
o If there is little or no visible color, repeat Step 6 until color is visible on the filter.
9-12
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 9. Algae
Figure 9-5. Set-up for filtering the Chlorophyll-a sample, (a) Filter flask with filter holder
and vacuum pump for sample filtration, (b) flat-bladed forceps, (c) Whatman glass fiber
filter, (d) screw top centrifuge tube with folded filter with the Chlorophyll-a sample inside,
(e) 100-mL graduated cylinder, (f) 500-mL bottle with graduations, (g) squeeze bottle for
Dl water.
7) Rinse the filter holder portion of the filter flask apparatus thoroughly using a squeeze bottle
filled with Dl water to dislodge any cells adhering to the filter flask.
• Pump the water through the filter, not exceeding 7in of Hg pressure (3.44psi).
• Monitor the level of water in the lower chamber to ensure that it does not contact the
filter or flow into the vacuum pump.
• If the filter starts to plug and the filtering starts to go more slowly, stop adding water
and allow the remaining water to finish being filtered.
• Add two drops of a saturated MgCO3 solution to the sample just prior to the end of
filtration when only a few milliliters of water are left to be filtered. If added
prematurely, it may greatly increase the sample filtration time. The MgCO3 acts to
buffer the sample.
8) Record the total surface water sample volume filtered in the Biomass: Chlorophyll-a
Sample field on FORM ALG-1.
9) Carefully remove the bottom chamber of the filter apparatus and discard the filtered water.
Replace the bottom chamber on the apparatus.
10) Remove the filter from the holder with clean, flat forceps. Avoid touching the colored
portion of the filter which contains the chlorophyll sample. Fold the filter in half using the
forceps, keeping the sample to the inside of the fold.
11) Place the folded filter into a 50-mL screw-top centrifuge tube and cap the tube.
12) Record the sample volume filtered and date on the CHLOROPHYLL-a label (Figure 9-5)
and attach it to the centrifuge tube (do not cover the volume markings on the tube). Ensure
9-13
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual
Chapter 9. Algae
that all written information is complete and legible. Cover the label with a strip of clear
tape to protect the information on the label.
CHLOROPHYLL-a
NWCA11-7771 Visit#: 1
/ /2011
Volume Filtered: ml_
999982
Sample ID
Figure 9-5. Chlorophyll-a label to be filled out and placed on the centrifuge tube
13) Record the sample ID number on the Chlorophyll-a label in the Biomass: Chlorophyll-a
Sample field of Form ALG-1.
14) Wrap the centrifuge tube in foil immediately to keep sunlight from degrading the sample.
Place the tube in a small Whirl-Pak or zippered plastic bag. Record the volume filtered
and date on the CHLOROPHYLL-a OUTER BAG label (Figure 9-6), and attach this label
to the outside of the plastic bag. Cover with a strip of clear tape to protect the information
on the label.
CHLOROPHYLL-a - OUTER BAG
NWCA11-7771 Visitft: 1
/ /2011
Volume Filtered: _ mL
999982
Sample ID
Figure 9-6. Chlorophyll-a, outer bag label to be filled out and placed on the plastic bag
containing the Chlorophyll-a sample.
15) Immediately place the Chlorophyll-a sample in a cooler with ice to keep it as cold as
possible.
9-14
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.2 SAMPLE AND DATA HANDLING
There are two components to algae sample handling and processing. One is done
before leaving the site; the other, at the base location.
9.2.1 At the Site
1) Check Form ALG-1 to ensure that all samples collected are present and that
the sample label information is accurate.
2) Complete the Sample Status - Were Samples Collected? field on Form T-1,
NWCA 2011 SITE AND SAMPLE STATUS/WRS TRACKING by filling in the
appropriate bubbles to record whether samples were collected and, if so, which
types. In the case of algae, the types of samples that should normally have
been collected are Algal Toxins, Chlorophyll-a, and Algae Taxonomic ID.
3) Complete the WRS Sample Tracking field on Form T-1 for the Chlorophyll-a
(CHLA) and Algal Toxins (ALGT) samples. Ensure all identification information
and tracking data for each sample corresponds exactly to the data on the
sample label.
4) Transport samples to field lodging or the office in an ice chest on blue or wet
ice.
9.2.2 At Field Lodging or Office
Maintain all samples on blue or wet ice, or under refrigeration (4°C) until they are shipped
(USEPA2011a,b).
9.2.2.1 Immediately Shipped Samples
Prepare the Algal Toxins and Chlorophyll-a samples for shipment with the other immediately
shipped samples (water chemistry, soil isotopes, and sediment enzymes). These samples will
be sent in an ice chest within 24 hours of collection to the USEPA Lab in Corvallis, Oregon.
• Confirm that the label affixed to each sample has the correct site identification
number, is complete and legible, and is covered with clear tape.
• Go to Chapter 2 for the protocols on packing and shipping all samples to be
immediately shipped.
9-15
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.2.2.2 Batch Samples
The Algae Taxonomic ID samples may be stored in the cold, then shipped in batches
every two weeks on the same schedule as the soil bulk density and chemistry
samples.
1) Retrieve the samples from cold storage and confirm that the label affixed to
each sample has the correct site identification number (as listed on Form ALG-
1 from the date of sampling), is complete and legible, and is covered with clear
tape.
2) Enter the information for each of the Algae Taxonomic ID samples on Form T-
5: NWCA 2011 TRACKING - BATCHED SAMPLES by completing the
following fields:
Site ID
• Date Sample Collected
• Visit Number (1 = the visit when the sampling was done; 2 = scheduled
revisit)
• Sample ID from the sample label
• Sample Type (in this case ALGA)
• # of containers (in this case 1)
• comments, if needed.
3) Ensure that the information recorded on Form T-5 matches that on the label for
each sample.
4) Fill in the bubble for EcoAnalysts in the Lab section of Form T-5.
5) Pack the samples in an ice chest with ice according to the protocol in Appendix
A.
6) Make two copies of Form T-5.
• Transmit the original to the Information Management Team. See Chapter
2 for details on transmitting forms to Information Management.
• Place one copy in a self-sealing plastic bag and place on top of the
samples in the ice chest.
• Retain the second copy for your records.
7) Seal the ice chest according to the protocol in Appendix A and affix the
shipping label. See Appendix A for detailed information on shipping company,
shipping labels, and shipping addresses.
8) Deliver the package of samples to the shipping company and retain all receipts
and records of shipping.
9.2.3 Data Handling
See Chapter 2 for protocols on copying and shipping the completed data forms to the
Information Management Team. See Appendix D for information on transmitting the image files
of any photos taken of any important algal features the AB team feels should be documented.
9-16
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.3 LITERATURE CITED
USEPAa (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Integrated Quality Assurance Project Plan. EPA/843/R10/003. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water and Office of Research and Development,
Washington, DC.
USEPAb. (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). 2011. National Wetland Condition
Assessment: Laboratory Operations Manual. EPA/843/R10/002. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Water and Office of Research and Development, Washington, DC.
USEPA (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency). In Preparation. Ecological Indicators for the
2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment. EPA-XXX-YY-0000. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Washington, DC.
9-17
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9-18
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.4 REFERENCE CARD
Reference Card ALG-1 Flowchart of NWCA, Algae Sample Collection Activities
9-19
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9-20
-------
Reference Card ALG-1. Flowchart of Algae Sampling Activities
Identify Algae Sampling Locations in the AA after the Vegetation Plots are Established.
Is there surface water in the AA ^ 15cm?
Yes
Yes or No
Aquatic or emergent vegetation is present
Yes
i No
Collect surface
water for Algal
Toxins sample
Collect 5
epiphyte algae
subsamples.
Collect 10 substrate
subsamples to
composite for Algae
Taxonomic ID sample
If 5 epiphyte subsamples are taken,
Collect 5 substrate subsamples
z
Chlorophyll-a:
Collect 500ml of surface water in a
500-ml bottle using the long-handled
dipper
Filter water using vacuum flask
Add 2 drops MgC03 solution to buffer
sample
Immediately place filtered sample in a
labeled, 50-ml screw-top vial
Cover with aluminum foil, and place
in a labeled, zippered plastic bag
Set in second zippered bag, and place
No
Collect 10 substrate
subsamples for the
Taxonomic ID sample in
the 250-ml bottle
Algal Toxins (Epiphytes &/or Surface Water):
A. If no epiphytes,
• Fill Algal toxins bottle (125-mL) to shoulder with surface
water, label and place in plastic zippered bag
• Place on ice in cooler
B. If epiphytes collected,
• Fill bottle to shoulder with surface water from squirt bottle
• Mix to homogenize epiphyte subsamples in 125-ml bottle
• Form a partial Algal Taxonomic ID sample by using a
graduated cylinder to transfer 50mL of homogenized epiphyte
subsample into 250-mL Algae Taxonomic ID bottle
• Add surface water to refill 125-ml bottle to shoulder
• Label bottle and place in zippered bag
• Place on ice in cooler
If no sampleable
substrate,
Mark "No sample
collected" for all algae
samples
Algae Taxonomic ID:
Add substrate subsamples to the Algae
Taxonomic ID 250-mL bottle which may:
o Contain a 50-mL partial Taxonomic ID
sample collected during the Algal Toxin
procedure OR
o Be empty if no epiphytes were collected.
Dilute to shoulder of labeled 250-ml bottle with
surface water, if present, or Dl water
Add Lugol's solution, amount appropriate for
sample
Cap bottle and tape shut
Double bag and place on ice J
Refer to NWCA-Field Operations Manual (Chapter 9: Algae)
for details of the protocols
-------
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9.5 EQUIPMENT LIST, DATA FORM, AND LABELS
9-23
-------
2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual Chapter 9. Algae
9-24
-------
ALGAE EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
Algal Toxin and Taxonomic ID samples
Long-handled dipper (Schematic in Chapter 8, Sect. 8.4)
1, 250-mL plastic bottle (for Algae Taxonomic ID sample)
1, 125-mL plastic bottle with screw lid (Algal Toxins bottle)
_60-mL syringe core sampler with beveled edge (for taking substrate subsample
for algal taxonomy)
_30-mL syringe (for sucking up algae off hard substrate)
_Small funnel
_Soft bristled toothbrush (need a new one for each site)
_Small knife or plastic card (to shear off excess core)
_Plant shears (for cutting vegetation stems for easier epiphytic algae collection)
_Lugol's solution with aliquot dispenser
_Electrician's tape for sealing taxonomic sample
_Squirt bottle for surface water
Chlorophyll-a Sample
Aluminum foil or foil squares (to wrap Chlorophyll-a sample vial)
Centrifuge tube, 1, 50-mL screw cap type (for Chlorophyll-a filter)
De-ionized (Dl) water carbouy (2.5 gallon) filled with Dl water
Dl squirt bottle
Disposable flat forceps
Graduated cylinder (100-mL)
Hand-operated vacuum pump
Magnesium Carbonate (MgCO3) saturated solution in dropper bottle
500-mL plastic bottle
Portable acrylic vacuum filter flask (e.g., Nalgene, Millipore)
Tygon tubing (for connection vacuum pump to filter flask)
Whatman GF/F 0.7 urn glass fiber filter (47-mm diam. filters to fit filter flask)
Whirl-Pak & zippered plastic bags in which to place the Chlorophyll-a vial prior
to shipping
General
Ice chest with ice
Soft pack cooler with frozen gel-packs (for longer distance hikes away from
vehicle)
Data Form (Form ALG-1), Reference Card (RC ALG-1) & Labels
No. 2 pencils & fine tipped permanent marker
Nitrile gloves
-------
-------
• FORM ALG-1 : NWCA ALGAE Reviewed bvnmtian A
Site ID: NWCA11- Date: / / 2 0 1 1
Algal Toxins Sample
SAMPLE ID: a r
Epiphytic Algae
Collected?
OY
#of
Subsamples
No Sample Collected Q
Comments *
Comments *
>
X^
<£>
/ >
Bio nass: Chlorophyll-a
SAMPLE ID:
^^ ^J
Vol filtered
(500 ml max)
x\N
(&
^J
Sample No Sample Collected Q
Comments *
r^mment field to explain: No measurement, suspect measurement or observation made.
0 6285024681 £
NWCA Algae 01/21/2011
-------
-------
EXAMPLE SAMPLE LABELS
ALGAE TAXONOMIC ID
NWCA11-7771 Visitft: 1
/ 72011
999987
ALGAL TOXINS
NWCA11-7771 Visitft: 1
/ /2011
999984
CHLOROPHYLL-a
NWCA11-7771 Visitft: 1
/ /2011
Volume Filtered: mL
999982
CHLOROPHYLL-a - OUTER BAG
NWCA11-7771 Visittt: 1
/ /2011
Volume Filtered: mL
S99982
These labels will be included on an adhesive sheet with a set of labels for each site (see
Chapter 2).
-------
-------
APPENDIX A
SHIPPING AND TRACKING GUIDELINES
-------
-------
NWCA Field Operations Manual Appendix A. Shipping and Tracking Guidelines
I. Tracking Forms
If you have access to a computer, fill out the electronic tracking forms available on the
USEPA provided USB-drive in your base kit and at ftp://ftp.glec.com (user id: NWCA;
password: swamp).
• Be careful to fill out all information on the electronic form(s) accurately and completely,
including the Site ID.
• Email the tracking form to sampletracking@epa.gov. Be sure to save and print a copy of
all forms for your records.
If you cannot use a computer before shipping:
• Fill out the paper version of the appropriate tracking form.
• Notify the Information Management Center (contact info on bottom of tracking form) by
faxing the form or leaving voice message with ALL the information on the form.
• Include the original form in the shipping cooler or box and make a copy for your records.
1 - Tracking and Sample Status - Form T1
• Form T-1 is filled out for the samples that are shipped immediately after each sampling
event, i.e., water chemistry, chlorophyll-a, soil isotopes, algal toxins, and sediment
enzyme samples
• All of these samples will go together in one cooler to the USEPA lab in Corvallis,
Oregon.
• Save the file of the completed electronic form according to the file naming convention on
the bottom of the form.
• Email the file to sampletracking@epa.gov (address on bottom of the form) and print a
copy of the form to include in the shipping cooler.
*Emailing the electronic Form T-1 serves as the "status report" for that sampling event
2 - Tracking (Batched and Retained Samples) (Forms T-2, T-3, T-4, T-5)
• BATCHED samples are held and shipped within 2 weeks. BATCHED SAMPLES ARE
soil chemistry, bulk density, unknown plant specimens, QA plant specimens,
algae taxonomic ID and the Data Packet.
• Submit the appropriate electronic form via email when samples are shipped.
o Form T-2: NWCA Unknown Plant Sample Tracking
o Form T-3: NWCA QA Plant Sample Tracking
o Form T-4: NWCA Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density Sample Tracking
o Form T-5: NWCA Tracking - Batched Sample (for use with algae taxonomic ID
samples and for the Data Packet).
• Save the file of the completed electronic form according to the file naming convention on
the bottom of the form.
A-1
-------
NWCA Field Operations Manual Appendix A. Shipping and Tracking Guidelines
Email the file to sampletracking@epa.gov (address on bottom of the form) and print a
copy of the form to include in the shipping cooler.
Use one tracking form for each set of samples in each shipping container shipped to a
laboratory.
Status Report
• After sampling each site, the Field Crew Leader must file a status report with the
Information Management Center and the Field Logistics Coordinator to track
visits/samples and to report on Crew activities, problems, and requests.
• Emailing the electronic Form T-1 serves as the status report!
• If Form T-1 cannot be emailed, faxing or phoning the information serves as the status
report.
II. Overview of Shipping Guidelines
Before shipping, it is very important to handle each sample as directed in the Sample and Data
Handling section of the appropriate chapter in the NWCA Field Operations Manual. General
directions for sample processing, shipping and tracking are found in Chapter 2, Section 2.6.
• Store the samples as specified before shipping (Reference Card ST-1, Side A).
• Be aware of the holding times for each type of sample (Reference Card ST-1, Side B):
o Water chemistry samples must be shipped within 24 hours of collection.
o Chlorophyll-a, soil isotopes, algal toxins, and sediment enzymes samples will be sent
with the water chemistry samples because they are going to the same laboratory.
o Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density Samples can be batched and shipped every 2 weeks.
o Soil Pesticides will not be taken at every site; the site packet will have a collection
protocol and forms (the soil pesticide kit) indicating that this sample should be collected
at the site.
o Plant specimens (unknowns and QA samples) must be pressed immediately upon
collection and completely dried. After drying; they are sent in batches to the
appropriate laboratory (see Chapter 5, Section 5.25 for more information on shipping
and packing the plant specimens).
When ice is used for shipment (water chemistry, chlorophyll-a, sediment enzymes, soil
isotopes, algal toxins)
• Ensure that the ice is fresh.
• Double-bag the ice within 1-gallon self-sealing plastic bags.
• Use white or clear bags and label with a dark indelible marker. Label all bags of ice as "ICE"
to prevent misidentification by couriers of any water leakage as a possible hazardous
material spill.
• Line the cooler with a large, 30-gallon plastic bag.
• Pack the entire cooler full of ice.
• Place bagged samples and bags of ice inside the cooler liner and seal the liner.
• Secure the cooler with strapping tape.
A-2
-------
NWCA Field Operations Manual Appendix A. Shipping and Tracking Guidelines
When soils are being shipped an APHIS Regulated Soils Permit must be displayed on the
shipping package. In the site kit, there is a copy of the Soils Permit for samples sent to the
USEPA lab in Corvallis, Oregon (soil isotopes and sediment enzymes). There is also a copy of
the Soils Permit for samples (soil chemistry and bulk density) sent to the NRCS in Lincoln, NE.
A-3
-------
NWCA Field Operations Manual Appendix A. Shipping and Tracking Guidelines
III. Shipping Locations
USEPA Lab, Corvallis, Oregon (Water Chemistry, Chlorophyll-a, Soil Isotopes, Algal Toxins,
Sediment Enzymes)
Attn: Phil Monaco, Dynamac
c/o U.S. EPA, NHEERL-WED
1350 SE Goodnight Ave
Corvallis, OR 97333
USEPA Data Management Cetner, Corvallis Oregon (Data Packet)
Attn: Marlys Cappaert, SRA
c/o U.S. EPA, NHEERL-WED
200 S.W. 35th Street
Corvallis, OR 97333
NRCS Soil Survey Research and Laboratory (Soil Chemistry and Bulk Density)
NRCS Soil Survey Research and Laboratory
National Soil Survey Center
Natural Resources Conservation Service
Federal Bldg., MS-41
100 Centennial Mall North
Lincoln, NE 68508
EcoAnalyst (Algae and Vegetation Taxonomy)
EcoAnalyst
1420S. Elaine St., Suite 14,
Moscow, ID 83843
USEPA Lab, Ft. Meade, MD (Soil Pesticide)
Attn: Thuy L. Nguyen
c/o EPA OPP Analytical Chemistry Laboratory
Environmental Science Center
701 Mapes Road
Ft. Meade, Maryland 20755-5350
A-4
-------
Reference Card ST-1, Side A. NWCA Sample Packaging and Shipping Flowchart for Different Sample Types.
CHLOR-a
WATER
CHEM
SOIL
ISOTOPE
ALGAL
TOXINS
SEDIMENT
ENZYMES
SOIL
PESTICIDES
(If Collected)
DATA
PACKET
SOIL
CHEMISTRY
&
BULK DENSITY
ALGAE
TAXONOMY
PLANT
QA VOUCHERS
& UKNOWN
SPECIES
STORE ON BLUE OR WET ICE
SHIP IMMEDIATELY ON WET ICE
(WITHIN 24 HOURS)
KEEP
SAMPLE
COOL
(No Ice)
PRESERVE
WITH
LUGOL'S
SOLUTION
PRESS AND
DRY
SPECIMENS
SHIP IN BATCHES
(1-2 weeks)
OVERNIGHT COURIER REQUIRED
Saturday Delivery OK
GROUND
COURIER
No Saturday
Delivery
OVERNIGHT
COURIER
Saturday Delivery OK
EPA Lab
Corvallis, OR
(Or State Lab As Applicable)
EPA Lab
Ft. Meade,
MD
EPA
IM Team
Corvallis, OR
EcoAnalyst Lab
(Or State Lab as Applicable)
NRCS Lab
Lincoln, NE
Refer to Section 2.6 and Appendix A of the 2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual for more detail on packaging and shipping.
-------
Reference Card ST-1, Side B. NWCA Summary of Sample Handling, Shipping
Procedures, and Shipping Permits
SAMPLE
Water Chemistry
Chlorophyll-a
Soil Isotopes
Sediment
enzymes
Algal Toxins
Soil Pesticides
Soil Chemistry
and Bulk Density
Algae Taxonomy
Sample
Plant specimens
Data Packet
STORAGE
CONDITIONS
Blue or wet ice in
field
Blue or wet ice in
field
Blue or wet ice in
field
Blue or wet ice in
field; refrigerate to
hold
Blue or wet ice in
field; freeze to hold
Blue or wet ice in
field
Keep samples in
shade in field
Preserve with
Lugol's solution
Dry in plant press,
then store in dry
conditions in
newsprint folders
NA
PACKAGING FOR
SHIPMENT
Ship in cooler with
wet ice
Ship in cooler with
wet ice
Ship in cooler or
sturdy container
Ship in sturdy
container
Ship dry samples in a
sturdy container (see
Chapter 5, Section
5.2.5)
Ship in a sturdy
container
HOLDING TIME
24 hours; ship these
samples together to
USEPA Lab, Corvallis, OR
24 hours; ship these
samples together to
USEPA Lab, Corvallis, OR
Corvallis Lab holds and
batch ships every 4 weeks
to USEPA Lab Duluth, MN
24 hours; ship these
samples together to
USEPA Lab, Corvallis, OR
Corvallis Lab holds and
batch ships every 4 weeks
to USGS Lab
24 hours, ship immediately
to Ft. Meade Lab
Batch; ship every 2 weeks
to NRCS, Lincoln, NE Lab
Batch; ship every 2 weeks
to EcoAnalyst Lab
Batch; ship every 2 weeks
to EcoAnalyst Lab or to
state lab, as appropriate
Batch; ship every 2 weeks
to the Information
Management Team in
Corvallis, OR
SHIPPING
PERMITS
None
APHIS Regulated
Soils
APHIS Regulated
Soils
None
APHIS Regulated
Soils
APHIS Regulated
Soils
None
None
None
Refer to Section 2.6 and Appendix A of the 2011 NWCA Field Operations Manual for
more detail on packaging and shipping.
-------
Appendix B
Target Invasive Alien Plant Species
-------
Introduction 3
Eurasian Watermilfoil 5
Waterhyacinth 6
Yellow Floating heart 7
Giant Salvinia 8
Garlic Mustard 9
Poison Hemlock 11
Mile-a-Minute Weed 13
Birdsfoot Trefoil 14
Purple Loosestrife 15
Knotweed 16
Japanese Knotweed 17
Perennial Pepperweed 18
Giant Reed 19
Cheatgrass 20
Reed Canary Grass 21
Common Reed 22
Johnsongrass 23
Kudzu 24
Multiflora Rose 25
Common Buckthorn 26
Himalayan Blackberry 27
Tamarisk 28
References 29
-------
Introduction
The NWCA is one in a series of statistically-valid National Aquatic Resource Surveys (NARS)
conducted by the Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) in partnership with states, tribes,
and other federal agencies to provide the public with a comprehensive assessment of the
condition of the Nation's waters. The NWCA objectives are to:
1. Produce a national report that describes the ecological condition of the nation's
wetlands,
2. Assist states and tribes in the implementation of wetland monitoring and assessment
programs that will guide policy development and aid project decision-making, and
3. Advance the science of wetlands monitoring and assessment to support management
needs.
NWCA is an ecological assessment of wetlands based on chemical, physical, and biological
data. It employs a statistically-valid probability design stratified to allow estimates of the
condition of wetlands on national and regional scales. The NWCA responds to the long-term
goals outlined in USEPA's current strategic plan (USEPA 2006a) to improve the Nation's water
quality (Goal 2.3) and to protect, sustain, and restore the health of critical natural habitats and
ecosystems, including wetlands (Goal 4.3). Development of the NWCA builds on the
accomplishments of the U.S. Fish and Wldlife Service (USFWS) and their production of national
reports on status and trends in wetland acreage. When taken together, NWCA and the USFWS
Wetland Status and Trends (S&T) results will over time be used to measure progress toward
attainment of the national goal to increase the quantity and quality of the Nation's wetlands.
These complementary assessments can influence how wetlands are managed at local, state,
and national scales.
Special consideration will be given to the analysis of alien invasive plants during data analysis.
The hypothesis is that reported wetland degradation will likely be explained, in part, by the
occurrence of alien invasive plants. Another hypothesis is that alien plant invasion is correlated
to buffer occurrence. The third hypothesis is that alien plant invasion is correlated to abiotic
(including structural) condition and other stressors in a wetland (e.g., water level fluctuation
-------
beyond reference condition). A possible outcome of data analysis is policy consideration of the
role of wetland buffers in sustaining or improving wetland condition.
Richardson et al (2000) developed the following terminology, which the NWCA will use:
• Alien Plants: any species outside of its native range.
• Casual Alien Plants: escaped alien plant that is not self-sustaining in the new
environment.
• Naturalized Plants: self perpetuating alien species.
• Invasive Plants: alien species that invade aggressively.
• Weeds: any plant that grows where it is not wanted, usually with negative ecologic or
economic impacts.
• Transformers: invasive plants that change the ecosystem they have invaded.
Species selected for inclusion in the NWCA buffer protocol: 1) are defined as Invasive Plants
and Transformers (hereafter called Invasive Species) because of the impacts they have on
various ecosystems, 2) are readily identifiable in the field since the AB team will be responsible
for identifying them, and 3) have national distributions. The list of Invasive Species for use in the
NWCA buffer protocol is not meant to be comprehensive for any geographic location.
Invasive Species selected for inclusion in the buffer protocol will be used to inform the
prevalence of stressors on the landscape and their potential impacts on wetland condition.
Invasive Species are a major cause of global change; often promoting declines in biodiversity
and changes in ecosystem processes that lead to impairment of ecosystem services and to
economic losses (Dukes and Mooney 2004, Pimentel et al. 2005, Meyerson and Mooney 2007).
Numerous direct and indirect effects of Invasive Species on native vegetation and other
ecosystem components demonstrate their role as stressors and as indicators of reduced
ecosystem integrity. The Invasive Species list is not intended to be representative of all Invasive
Species present at a site. The vegetation data collected within the assessment area will
characterize the presence of all other Invasive Species present.
-------
Eurasian Watermilfoil
Myriophyllum spicatum L.
Haloragaceae
Synonyms: Spiked Watermilfoil
Description
• Submersed aquatic plant
• Rooted emergent stems reach 3 to 10 ft. (0.9-3m) in
length; can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m) long.
• Grows in dense mats
• Bright green, finely dissected, whorled leaves
• Delicate leaflets have feathery appearance
• Native to Europe, Asia, and northern Africa
USDA PLANTS Database
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Dense mats restrict light availability
• Causes decline in diversity and abundance of native plants
• Displaces the native species of watermilfoil
• Reduces habitat for fish spawning and feeding
Distribution
• Lakes, ponds, and other aquatic environments
• Stagnant to slowly moving water
• Can tolerate brackish conditions
States Where Invasive
CA, CT, DE, ID, NH, NJ, NV, NY, OH, OR, PA, TN, VA, WA, Wl
-------
Waterhyacinth
Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Solms
Pontederiaceae
Synonyms: Floating Water Hyacinth
Description
• Free floating aquatic plant
• Grows to 3 ft. (1 m) in height
• Leaves are oval to elliptical, thick, up to 6 in.
(15 cm) wide and waxy with spongy petioles
• Leaves curve inward at the edge
• Showy blue-purple flowers are born on
upright spikes
• Flowers have six petals with the uppermost having a
yellow patch
• Native to South America
Wilfredo Robles,
MSU
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Reproduces mainly by vegetative means; quickly forms dense floating mats of
vegetation
• Dense mats restrict light to the underwater environment and deplete the oxygen levels.
Distribution
• Invades aquatic areas throughout the eastern and southern portions of the US
• Invades lakes, ponds, rivers, marshes, and other types of wetland habitats
IP*^
<~ ^^e?\
X T?\
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DE, FL, GA, HI, IL, KY, LA, MO, MS, NC, NH, NY, OR, SC, TN, TX,
VA, WA
-------
Yellow Floating heart
Nymphoides peltata
Menyanthaceae
Synonyms: none
Description
• Perennial, water-lily like plant
• Carpets the water surface with long-
stalked, heart-shaped leaves
• Showy five-petaled yellow flower
occur on long stalks and rise a few
inches above the water surface
• Leaves average 3 to 10 cm in
diameter A. Mrkvicka, 2007
Fruit capsule is 2.5 cm long and contains numerous seed
• Seeds are oval and flat (about 3.5 mm long) and hairy along their outer edges
Impacts
• Grows in dense patches, excluding native species
• Creates stagnant areas with low oxygen levels underneath the floating mats
• Mats reduce fish habitat
• Hinder recreation on the water
Distribution
States where invasive
CT, ME, MA, OR, VT, WA
-------
Giant Salvinia
Salvinia molesta D.S. Mitchell
Salviniaceae
Synonyms: Kariba Weed, Salvinia, Water Fern
Description
Aquatic fern
Floating leaves that are 0.5 to 1.5 in. (2.5-3.8 cm)
long, oblong, and vary in color from green to gold
to brown
Leaf surfaces have rows of arching hairs that
look like little egg-beaters
Young leaves are smaller and lie flat on the surface of
the water
Mature leaves forms chains that run together to form thick mats on the surface of the
water
Submerged fronds are "stringy" and resemble roots
Plants reproduce by spores and by budding of broken stems or attached nodes
Native to South America
Scott Robinson,
GADNR
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Mats restrict oxygen and light availability causing death of the primary producers and
disrupting the aquatic food chain
Distribution
• On the Federal Noxious Weed list and can invade most any type of aquatic system
States Where Invasive
AL, AZ, CA, FL, GA, HI, LA, MS, NC, SC, TX
-------
Garlic Mustard
Alliaria petiolata (Bieb.) Cavara & Grande
Brassicaceae
Synonyms : Hedge Garlic, Sauce Alone, Jack-by-the Hedge, Poor Man's Mustard, Jack-
n-the-Bush, Garlic Root, Garlicwort, Mustard Root
Chris Evans,
River to River CWMA
Bugwood.org
Description
• Herbaceous, biennial forb
• First-year plants are basal rosettes with green, heart-shaped,
in. (2.5-15.2 cm) long leaves
• Second-year plants produce a 1-4 ft. (0.3-1.2 m) tall flowering
• Flowers are small, white
• Flowers early spring
• Plants can be easily recognized by a
garlic odor that is present when any
part of the plant is crushed and by
the strongly toothed, triangular
leaves
• Native to Europe
1-6
stalk
Tom Huette,
USDA Forest Service
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Shades out native understory flora
• Allelopathic compounds inhibit seed germination of other
species
Distribution
• Aggressive invader of wooded areas throughout the eastern and middle US
• Invade high-quality, mature woodlands
^PLANTS
States Where Invasive
AK, CT, DC, DE, GA, IA, IL, IN, KY, MA, MD, ME,
VA, VT, Wl, WV
I, MO, NC, NH, NJ, NY, OH, OR, PA, TN,
-------
Canada Thistle
Cirsium arvense (L.) Scop.
Asteraceae
Synonyms: Californian Thistle, Creeping Thistle, Field
Thistle
Description
• Tall, erect, spiny, perennial
• Grows to 4 ft. (1.2m) tall
• Extensive creeping rootstock
• Leaves are lance-shaped, irregularly lobed, 2-6 in. (5-
15 cm) long with prickly margins
• Stems are ridged and hairy
• Flowers are purple to white and can be up to 0.5 in.
(1.8 cm) in diameter
• June to August
• Achene fruit 1 to 1.5 in. (2.5-3.8 cm) long with feathery
pappus
• Native to Europe and Asia
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
Leslie J. Mehrhoff,
University of Connecticut
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• It forms dense stands which can shade out and displace native vegetation
• Once established it spreads rapidly and is difficult to remove
Distribution
• Canada thistle can invade a variety of open habitats including prairies, savannas, fields,
pastures, wet meadows and open forests
States Where Invasive
AK, AZ, CO, CT, DE, IA, ID, IN, MD, Ml, MN, MO, MT, ND, NJ, OH, OR, PA, Rl, SD, TN, VA,
WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
Poison Hemlock
Conium maculatum L.
Apiaceae
Synonyms: Deadly Hemlock, Poison Parsley
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
Description
• Biennial (usually)
• Grows from 3-10 ft. (1-3 m) in height
• Stems are hollow, ribbed and purple-spotted
• Plants begin as a rosette of leaves and flower in the second year of
growth
• Leaves are opposite, finely dissected, 8-16 in. long, triangular and
emit a foul odor when crushed
• Petioles often sheath the stem
• Flowers May to August,
• Flowers umbels of small, white flowers develop at the apex of the
stems
• Umbels are 2-2.5 in. (5-6.2 cm) in diameter and contain many 5-
petaled flowers
• Native to Europe
• All parts of this plant are poisonous!
Impacts
• One plant can produce over 30,000 seeds
• Plants, when eaten, are poisonous to most animals
Distribution
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, GA, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, LA, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MN, MO,
MT, NC, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NV, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VA, VT, WA,
Wl, WV, WY
-------
Leafy Spurge
Euphorbia esula L.
Euphorbiaceae
Synonyms: None
Description
• Erect, perennial, herbaceous plant
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
Grows from 2 to 3.5 ft. (0.6-1.1 m) tall
Leaves are oval-shaped, smooth and 1-4 in. (2.5-
10.2 cm) long
Produces a milky sap if stem is broken or a leaf is removed
Stem is smooth and bluish-green
Flowers late spring (and sometimes the late summer)
Flowers are yellow, form clusters at the apex of the plant
Fruits are 3 lobed capsules that explode when mature, spreading seeds up to 15 ft. (4.6
m)
Native to Europe
Impacts
• Large infestations give the landscape a yellowish tinge due to the
yellow bracts
• Overtakes large areas of land and displace native vegetation
Distribution
• Invades prairies, pastures and other open areas
• Major pest of national parks and nature preserves in the western US
Norman E. Rees,
USDA Forest Service
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AZ, CA, CO, CT, DE, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MN, MO, MT, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM,
NV, NY, OH, OR, PA, SD, UT, VA, VT, WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
MiIe-a-Minute Weed
Polygonum perfoliatum L.
Polygonaceae
Synonyms : Devil's Tearthumb
Description
• Herbaceous, annual vine
• Delicate stems are reddish, highly branched and covered with
small, curved spines
• Circular, leafy structures (ocreae) surround the stem at the
base of the petioles
• Leaves alternate, triangular, light green, 1-3 in. (2.5-7.6 cm)
wide and barbed on the undersurface
• Flowers are small, white, inconspicuous, and arise from the
ocreae
• Fruits, present in mid-July through the first frost, are metallic
blue and segmented with each segment containing a single black or reddish black seed
• Native to Eastern Asia and the Philippines
Impacts
• Covers existing vegetation and restrict light availability, potentially killing plants below
• Dense mats restrict establishment of new vegetation.
Distribution
• Invades disturbed areas in Oregon and portions of the northeastern US
• Invades open disturbed areas such as fields, forest edges, roadsides, ditches and stream
banks
Leslie J. Mehrhoff,
University of Connecticut
Bugwood.org
^PLANTS
States Where Invasive
CT, DC, DE, MA, MD, NJ, NY, PA, VA, WV
-------
Birdsfoot Trefoil
Lotus corniculatus L.
Fabaceae
Synonyms: Birdfoot, Deervetch, bloomfell, cat's clover, crowtoes, ground honeysuckle
Description
• Low-growing, perennial forb
• Stems 2 ft. (0.6 m) long
• Leaves are compound (with 5 oval to linear leaflets),
stipulate and alternate
• Leaflets (upper 3) are 0.5 in. (1.3 cm) long and less than
1/8 in. (0.3 cm) wide; the lower two resemble leaf-like
stipules
• Flowers May to August,
• Flowers yellow, sweet pea-like in clusters of 2-8 on a
long peduncle (stalk)
• Fruits are brown to black (1.5-3.5 cm) pods that occur in
head-like clusters
• Native to Eurasia and North Africa
Distribution
• Occurs in pastures, roadsides, wetlands, disturbed
grasslands and riparian areas
David Cappaert,
Michigan State University
Buawood.ora
Ohio States Weed Lab Archive,
Ohio State University
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, GA, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MN, MO, MT,
NC, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SD, TN, TX, UT, VA, VT, WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
Purple Loosestrife
Lythrum salicaria L.
Lythraceae
Synonyms : Purple Lythrum, Rainbow Weed, Salicaire, Spiked Loosestrife
Description
• Tall, multi-stemmed (30-50 per plant),
• Perennial forb
• Up to 10ft. (3 m) in height
• Opposite orwhorled leaves; dark-green, lance-shaped, sessil
1.5-4 in. (3.8-10.2 cm) long
• Leaves round or heart-shaped at the base
• Flowers July to October
• Flowers: pink to purplish; 4-16 in. (10.2-40.6 cm) long spikes at
the tops of the stems
• Flowers have 5-7 petals and twice as many stamens as petals
• Fruits are capsules that are enclosed in the hairy sepals
• Native to Europe and Asia
Impacts
• Dense stands displace native vegetation
• Spreads very rapidly through prolific seed production
Linda Wilson,
University of Idaho
Bugwood.org
Distribution
• Wetlands: wet meadows, prairie potholes, river and stream banks, lake shores, tidal and
non-tidal marshes, and ditches
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MN, MO, MS, MT, NC,
ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NV, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SD, TN, TX, UT, VA, VT, WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
Knotweed
Polygonum aviculare L.
Polygonaceae
Synonyms: Prostrate knotweed
Description
• Germinating plant is grass-like with long,
dark green leaves
• Forms a mat up to 2 feet wide on slender
wiry stems
• Papery sheath at each node gives stems
a knotted or swollen appearance
• Leaves alternate; small; narrowly oval;
dull, bluish green; up to 1 % inches long and 1/3 inch wide
• Flowers are small, borne in clusters in leaf axils
• Flower buds are purplish opening to white to yellow flowers during
• Flowers June through October
Impacts
• Dense mats outcompetes native vegetation
Distribution
• Found in compacted, infertile soils or thin turn in the sun
^PLANTS
WSA Invasive Species
Document
States Where Invasive
AK, AL, AR, AZ, CO, CT, DC, DE, FL, GA, HI, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, LA, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MN,
MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NV, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT,
VA, VT, WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
Japanese Knotweed
Polygonum cuspidatum Siebold & Zucc.
Polygonaceae
Synonyms: Fleeceflower, Japanese Bamboo
Description
Jan Samanek,
State Phytosanitary Administration
Bugwood.org
Dense shrub
Grows to 10ft. (3m)
Semi-woody stem is hollow with enlarged nodes
Leaves are alternate, 6 in. (15.2 cm) long, 3-4 in. (7.6-10 cm) wide and broadly-ovate
Flowers late summer
Flowers small, greenish-white in long panicles in
the axils of the leaves
Plants are dioecious (male and female flowers
occur on separate plants)
Native to eastern Asia
Impacts
• Reproduction occurs both vegetatively (rhizomes) and
seeds,
• Extremely hard to eradicate
• Dense patches shade and displace other plant life and reduce wildlife habitat
Jack Ranney,
University of Tennessee
Bugwood.org
Distribution
• Invades disturbed areas with high light, such as roadsides and stream banks
States Where Invasive
AK, CT, DC, DE, GA, IN, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MO, NC, NH, NJ, NY, OH, OR, PA, Rl, TN, VA, VT,
WA, Wl, WV
-------
Perennial Pepperweed
Lepidium latifolium L.
Brassicaceae
Synonyms: Virginia Pepperweed, Broadleaved
Pepperweed, Tall Whitetop, Broadleaved Peppergrass
Leslie J. Mehrhoff,
University of Connecticut
Bugwood.org
Description
• Perennial forb
• Grow from 1-5 ft. (0.3-1.5 m) in height
• Rosette leaves are long petiolate 4-12 in. (10-30cm) long and 1-2 in. (2.5-5 cm) wide and
toothed
• Cauline (stem) leaves are alternate, 1-3 in. (2.5-7.6 cm) long and oblong
• Flowers late spring to summer
• Inflorescences are flat, dense clusters that develop at the
apex of the flowering stem
• Individual flowers are 4-petaled and white
• Fruit are round to oval, hairy pod that is 1/16 in. (1.5 mm)
in diameter
• Native to Eurasia
Impacts
• Adapts readily to natural and disturbed wetlands.
• Creates large monospecific stands that displace native
plants and animals.
Distribution
• Occurs in coastal wetlands, riverbanks, marshes, rangelands
and roadsides
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
CA, CO, CT, OR UT, WA
-------
Giant Reed
Arundo donax L.
Poaceae
Synonyms : Elephant Grass
Description
Chris Evans,
River to River CWMA
Bugwood.org
Perennial grass
Grows up to 20 ft. (6.1 m) in
height
Stem resembles a corn stalk and has long, flat leaves up to 1.5
ft. (0.5 m) long
Flowers late summer to early fall
Large, dense flower plumes develop at the tops of the culms
Plums can grow up to 3 ft. (0.9 m) in length
Native to India
David J. Moorhead,
University of Georgia
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Suppresses and removes native vegetation very easily
• Reduces wildlife habitat, increases fire risks and interferes with
flood control
Distribution
• Invades wetlands such as ditches, stream banks and lake
shores
James H. Miller
USDA Forest Service
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AZ, CA, GA, MD, NM, NV, TX, VA
-------
Cheatgrass
Bromus tectorum L.
Poaceae
Synonyms: Downy brome, early chess, military grass, thatch bromegrass
Description
• Annual grass that forms tufts
• Grows up to 2 ft. (0.6 m) tall
• Leaves and sheaths are covered in short, soft hairs
• Flowers occur as drooping, open, terminal clusters that can have
a greenish, red, or purple hue
• Flowers early summer
• Senescence usually occurs in summer
• Native to Europe and parts of Africa and Asia
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Replaces native vegetation and change fire regimes
Distribution
• Invades rangelands, pastures, prairies, and other open
areas
• Occurs throughout the United States and Canada, but is
most problematic in areas of the western US with lower precipitation levels
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AK, AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, FL, GA, HI, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, LA, MA, MD, ME, M
MN, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NV, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SC, SD, TN, TX,
UT, VA, VT, WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
Reed Canary Grass
Phalaris Arundinacea L.
Poaceae
Synonyms: Reed Canarygrass
Description
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
:. ' i :t. r., . ,
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
» Cool-season perennial grass
• Grows to 6 ft. (1.7m) tall
• Leaf blades are flat, 1-4 ft.
(0.3-1.2 m) long, up to 3/4 in.
(1.9 cm) wide, glabrous and taper gradually
» Ligule is membranous (transparent) and long
» Flower/seed heads can be green, purple, or brown in color
and usually 3-6 in. (7.6-15.2 cm) in length.
• Flowers May to July
• Variable in morphology, so characteristics may depend upon
the habitat
Native to Europe and possibly parts of Asia
Impacts
• Spreads by seeds and rhizomes and can exclude all other vegetation
• Extremely difficult to eradicate once established
Distribution
• Quickly dominates wetlands, ditches, prairie potholes and other sites with moist soil
States Where Invasive
AK, AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MN, MO, MT,
NC, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NV, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SD, TN, UT, VA, VT, WA, Wl, WV, WY
-------
Common Reed
Phragmites australis (Cav.) Trin. Ex Steud.
Poaceae
Synonyms: Phragmites
Description
• Tall, perennial grass
• Grows to heights of 15 ft. (4.6 m) or more
• Leaves are broad and pointed, arising from thick stalks
• Leaves are 6-23.6 in. (15-60 cm) long, 0.4-2.4 in. (1-6 cm) wide,
flat and glabrous
• Flower heads are dense, fluffy, gray or purple in color and 5.9-
15.7 in. (15-40 cm) long
• Flowers July to October
• Native to Eurasia and Africa
• Native Phragmites do occur in the United States
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Displaces native wetlands plants
• Alters hydrology
• Block sunlight to the aquatic community
Distribution
• Found in dense thickets growing in or near shallow water
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
CO, CT, DC, DE, GA, IN, KY, MD, Ml, NC, NH, NJ, NY, OH, PA, TN, VA, VT, Wl
-------
Johnsongrass
Sorghum halepense (L.) Pers.
Poaceae
Synonyms: None
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
James H. Miller,
USDA Forest Service
Bugwood.org
Description
• Tall (up to 8 ft. [2.4 m]),
rhizomatous, perennial grass
• Leaves 2 ft. (0.6 m) long,
lanceolate and arranged alternately along a stout, hairless,
somewhat upward branching stem
• Leaves have distinct, white midribs
• Flowers occur in a loose, spreading, purplish panicle
• Native to the Mediterranean region
Impacts
• Forms dense colonies which displace native vegetation and restrict
tree seedling establishment
Distribution
• Invades open areas throughout the United States.
• Adapted to a wide variety of habitats including open forests, old fields, ditches and
wetlands
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, FL, GA, HI, IA, ID, IL, IN, KS, KY, LA, MA, MD, Ml, MO, MS,
MT, NC, ND, NE, NH, NJ, NM, NV, NY, OH, OK, OR, PA, Rl, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VA, VT, WA,
Wl, WV, WY
-------
Kudzu
Pueraria montana (Lour.) Merr.
Fabacaea
Synonyms: None
Description
• Climbing, deciduous vine
• Grows over 100 ft. (30.5 m)
• Leaves are alternate, compound (with three, usually lobed,
leaflets), hairy and up to 5.4 in. (15 cm) long
• Flowers midsummer
• Flowers 0.5 in. (1.3 cm) long, purple, fragrant
• Flowers hang, in clusters, in the axils of the leaves
• Fruit are brown, hairy, flat, 3 in. (7.6 cm) long, 0.3 in. (0.8 cm)
wide seed pods
• Native to Asia
Chuck Bargeron,
University of Georgia
Bugwood.org
Impacts
• Grows over, smothers and kills all other
vegetation, including trees
Distribution
• Invades open, disturbed areas such as roadsides, right-of-
ways, forest edges and old fields
Kerry Britton,
USDA Forest Service
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, CT, DC, DE, FL, GA, HI, IL, IN, KS, KY, LA, MA, MD, ME, MO, MS, NC, NE, NJ, NY,
OH, OK, OR, PA, SC, TN, TX, VA, WA, WV
-------
Multiflora Rose
Rosa multiflora Thunb. Ex Murr.
Rosaceae
Synonyms: None
Description
• Multi-stemmed, thorny, perennial shrub
• Grows up to 15ft. (4.6 m) tall
• Stems are arching canes which are round in cross section and
have stiff, curved thorns
• Leaves are pinnately compound with 7-9 leaflets
• Leaflets are oblong, 1-1.5 in. (2.5-3.8 cm) long and have serrated edges
• The fringed petioles
• Small, white to pinkish, 5-
petaled flowers occur
abundantly in clusters
• Fruit are small, red, rose hips
that remain on the plant
throughout the winter.
• Native to Asia
Impacts
• Restricts human, livestock, and
wildlife movement and
displaces native vegetation
Distribution
• Forms impenetrable thickets in
pastures, fields and forest
edges
Chris Evans,
River to River CWMA
Bugwood.org
WSA Invasive Species
Document
^PLANTS
States Where Invasive
AR, CA, CO, CT, DC, DE, GA, IL, IN, KY, LA, MA, MD, ME, Ml, MO, MS, NC, NH, NJ, NY, OH,
OR, PA, Rl, SC, TN, VA, VT, Wl, WV
-------
Jan Samanek,
State Phytosanitary Administration
Bugwood.org
Common Buckthorn
Rhamnus cathartics L.
Rhamnaceae
Synonyms: European Buckthorn
Description
• Deciduous shrub or small tree
• Grows to 25 ft. (7.6 m) in height
• Bark is dark gray and the inner bark is orange
(easily seen when the tree is cut)
• Twigs are usually tipped with a sharp spine
• Leaf arrangement is usually subopposite, but
examples of opposite and/or alternate arrangements
are commonly found
• Leaves are dark green, oval, 1.5 to 3 in. (3.8-7.6 cm) long, slightly serrate with 3 to 4
pairs of curving veins and a somewhat folded tip
• Flowers in the spring
• Fllowers yellow-green, 4-petaled and develop in clusters of 2 to 6 near the base of the
petioles
• Plants are dioecious (male and female flowers occur on separate plants)
• Fruits are small, black berries that are 0.25 in. (0.6 cm) in diameter
• Native of Europe
Impacts
• Dense thickets crowd out native shrubs and understory plants
• Difficult to remove once established
Distribution
• Common buckthorn invades forests, prairies and savannas in the Midwestern US
States Where Invasive
CO, CT, IA, IL, IN, MD, MA,
WY
I, MN, MO, MS, ND, NH, NJ, NY, PA, Rl, SD, TN, VA, VT, Wl,
-------
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
Himalayan Blackberry
Rubus armeniacus Focke
Rosaceae
Synonyms: None
Description
• Perennial shrub
• Stems grow to 15 ft. (4.6 m) before arching and
then trailing over the ground for up to 40 ft. (12.2
m)
• As stems touch the ground they root at the nodes, producing a dense thicket
• Leaves of the prima cane (first year shoots) are 2.8-7.9 in. (7-20 cm) long and palmately
compound with 5 leaflets
• No flowers are produced on the first year's growth
• The second year several side shoots are
produced (flora canes) having smaller leaves
with 3 leaflet
• Leaflets are oval and toothed with thorns
along the underside of the mid-rib
• Flowers late spring to early summer
• Flowers white to pale pink flowers develop on
the flora canes
• Flowers have 5 petals, numerous stamens
and are 0.8-1 in. (2-2.5 cm) in diameter
• Fruits are an aggregate of drupelets that are
black, when mature, and 0.5-0.8 in. (1.2-2
cm) in diameter
• Native to Eurasia
Richard Old,
XID Services Inc.
Bugwood.org
Distribution
• Occurs in pastures, riparian areas, wastelands, fence lines and right-of-ways
States Where Invasive
AL, AR, AZ, CA, CO, DC, DE, HI, ID, IL, KY, MA, MO, MT, NJ, NM, NV, OH, OR, PA, TN, UT,
VA, WA
-------
Tamarisk
Tamarix spp. L.
Tamaricaceae
Synonyms : Saltcedars
Description
• Deciduous shrub
• Grows up to 15 ft. (4.6 m) in height
• Leaves small (1/16 in. [0.15 cm] long), scale-like,
gray-green, and overlap along the stem
• Leaves are often coated with salt crystals
• The bark is smooth and reddish on younger
plants, turning brown and furrowed with age
• March to September
• Flowers are pink to white and develop in 2 in.
(5.1 cm) long clusters (spikes) at the tips of the branches
• Native to Eurasia and Africa
Impacts
• Crowds out native riparian species
• Diminishes early successional habitat
• Reduce water tables
• Salt secretions inhibit other plants
Distribution
• Several species are considered invasive in US
• Invades stream banks, sandbars, lake margins,
wetlands, moist rangelands and saline environments
• Most troublesome in Southwest US
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
Steve Dewey,
Utah State University
Bugwood.org
States Where Invasive
AR, AZ, CA, CO, CT, DE, FL, GA, ID, IL, KS, KY, LA, MA, Ml, MO, MS, MT, NC, ND, NE, NJ,
NM, NV, OH, OK, OR, PA, SC, SD, TN, TX, UT, VA, WA, WY
-------
References
USDA, NRCS. 2009. The PLANTS Database (http://plants.usda.gov, 25 November 2009).
National Plant Data Center, Baton Rouge, LA 70874-4490 USA.
Swearingen, J. 2006. WeedUS database, Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas. Plant
Conservation Alliance, Alien Plant Working Group.
http://www.invasive.org/weedus/index.html
http://www.invasive.org/weedcd/
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/fact.htm
Dukes, J. S. and H. A. Mooney. 2004. Disruption of ecosystem processes in western North
America by invasive species. Revista Chilena De Historia Natural 77:411-437.
Meyeson, L. A. and H. A. Mooney. 2007. Invasive alien species in an era of globalization.
Frontier in Ecology and the Environment 5:199-208.
Pimentel, D., R. Zuniga, and D. Morrison. 2005. Update on the environmental and economic
costs associated with alien-invasive species in the United States. Ecological Economics
52: 273-288.
Richardson, D.M., P. Pyek, M. Rejmanek, M. Barbour, F.D. Panetta, C.J. West. Naturalization
and invasion of alien plants: Concepts and definitions. Diversity and Distributions 6:93-
107
-------
Appendix C
Vegetation Resources
List of Potentially useful resources, not intended to be exhaustive
-------
I. Nomenclatural Source
USDA Plants:
http://plants.usda.gov/java/
II. Regional Floras and Field Guides
Note that some of the floras and field guides listed below are not regional in scope and
only apply to the areas listed (i.e., for a particular state).
Region I
Peterson, R.T. 1968. A Field Guide to Wildflowers of Northeastern and North-Central North
America. Houghton Mifflin, Boston. 420 pp.
Gleason and Cronguist. 1963. Manual of the Vascular Plants of Northeastern United States and
Adjacent Canada. Van Nostrand, Princeton NJ. 910 pp.
Gleason, H.A., N.H. and P.K. Holmgren. 1998. Illustrated Companion to Gleason and Cronguit's
Manual: Illustrations of the Vascular Plants of Northeastern United States and Adjacent
Canada. New York Botanical Garden, New York. 937 pp.
Common Wetland Delineation Sedges of the Northeast - Robert Lichvar
Knobel, E. 1977. Field Guide to the Grasses, Sedges, and Rushes of the United States. Dover
Publications. 96 pp.
Brown, L. 1992.Grasses: An Identification Guide. Houghton Mifflin Harcourt. 256 pp.
Petrides, G.A and R.T. Peterson. 1973. A Field Guide to Trees and Shrubs: Northeastern and
North-Central United States and Southeastern and South-Central Canada. 464 pp.
Farnsworth, A., B. Cobb, and C. Lowe. 2005. Peterson Field Guide to Ferns, Second Edition:
Northeastern and Central North America. Houghton Mifflin Harcourt. 440 pp.
Newcomb, L. 1989. Newcomb's Wildflower Guide. Little, Brown and Company. 490 pp.
Ballard, B.D, H.L. Whittier, C.A. Newark. 2004. Northeastern Shrub and Short Tree
Identification. SUNY. 120 pp.
Hallowell, A.C, and E.G. Hallowell. 2001. Fern Finder: A Guide to Native Ferns of Central and
Northeastern United States and Eastern Canada. Wilderness Press. 64 pp.
Semple, J. 1999. The Goldenrods of Ontario: Solidago L. and Euthamia Nutt. 3rd Edition.
University of Waterloo Biology Department. 90 pp.
-------
McQueen, C.B. 1990. Field Guide to the Peat Mosses of Boreal North America. University
Press of New England. 163 pp.
Gleason, H.A. 1968. The new Britton and Brown illustrated flora of the Northeastern United
States and adjacent Canada. Macmillan Pub Co. New York Botanical Garden. 1098 pp.
Campbell, C.S. 1978. Winter Keys to Woody Plants of Maine. University of Maine Press. 52 pp.
Region II
Peterson, R.T. 1968. A Field Guide to Wildflowers of Northeastern and North-Central North
America. Houghton Mifflin, Boston. 420 pp.
Gleason and Cronquist. 1963. Manual of the Vascular Plants of Northeastern United States and
Adjacent Canada. Van Nostrand, Princeton NJ. 910 pp.
Gleason, H.A., N.H. and P.K. Holmgren. 1998. Illustrated Companion to Gleason and Cronquit's
Manual: Illustrations of the Vascular Plants of Northeastern United States and Adjacent
Canada. New York Botanical Garden, New York. 937pp.
Region III
Peterson, R.T. 1968. A Field Guide to Wildflowers of Northeaster and North-Central North
America. Houghton Mifflin, Boston. 420 pp.
Gleason and Cronquist. 1963. Manual of the Vascular Plants of Northeastern United States and
Adjacent Canada. Van Nostrand, Princeton NJ. 910 pp.
Gleason, H.A., N.H. and P.K. Holmgren. 1998. Illustrated Companion to Gleason and Cronquit's
Manual: Illustrations of the Vascular Plants of Northeastern United States and Adjacent
Canada. New York Botanical Garden, New York. 937pp.
Region IV
Eastman, J. 1995. The book of swamp and bog. Stackpole Books, Mechanicsburg, PA.
Foote, L.E., S. B. Jones, Jr. 2005. Native shrubs and woody vines of the Southeast. Timber
Press, OR.
Godfrey, R.K. 1989. Trees, Shrubs, and Woody Vines of Northern Florida and Adjacent Georgia
and Alabama. The University of Georgia Press
(http://www.ugapress.uga.edu/index.php/ugapressbook/trees shrubs/)
Godfrey, R.K., J.W. Wooten. 1979. Aquatic and Wetland Plants of Southeastern United States,
Monocotyledons. The University of Georgia Press
(http://www.ugapress.uga.edu/index.php/ugapressbook/aquatic_and_wetland_plants/)
Godfrey, R.K., J.W. Wooten. 1981. Aquatic and Wetland Plants of Southeastern United States,
Dicotyledons. The University of Georgia Press
(http://www.ugapress.uga.edu/index.php/ugapressbook/aquatic and wetland plantsl/)
-------
Harrar, E.S., J.G. Harrar. 1962. Guide to southern trees. Dover Publications, Inc., NY.
Florida
Clewell, A.F. 1988. Guide to the vascular plants of the Florida panhandle. University Presses of
Florida.
Langeland, K.A., K. Craddock Burks, eds. 1998. Identification and biology of non-native plants
in Florida's natural areas. University of Florida (this may all be available on-line now at
http://aquatlifas.ufl.edu/)
Osorio, R. 2001. A gardeners guide to Florida's native plants. University Presses of Florida.
Tobe, J.D., K. Craddock Burks, R.W. Cantrell, M.A. Garland, M.E. Sweeley, D.W. Hall, P.
Wallace, G. Anglin, G. Nelson, J.R. Cooper, D. Bickner, K. Gilbert, N. Aymond, K.
Greenwood, and N. Raymond. 1998. Florida wetland plants: an identification manual.
Florida Department of Environmental Protection, Tallahassee, Florida, USA.
Region V
Peterson, R.T. 1968. A Field Guide to Wildflowers of Northeaster and North-Central North
America. Houghton Mifflin, Boston. 420 pp.
Gleason, Henry A. and Arthur Cronquist. 1991. Manual of Vascular Plants of the NE U.S. and
Adjacent Canada. NY Botanical Garden. Bronx, NY.
Newcomb, Lawrence. 1977. Newcomb's Wildflower Guide. Little, Brown, and Co. New York.
Holmgren, Noel H. et al. 1998. Illustrated Companion to Gleason and Cronquist's Manual. NY
Botanical Garden. Bronx, NY.
Swink, Floyd and Gerould Wilhelm. 1994. Plants of the Chicago Region. 4th Ed. Indiana
Academy of Science. Indianapolis.
Chadde, S.W. 2002. A Great Lakes Wetland Flora: Second Edition. Pocketflora Press. 648pp.
Crow, G.E., et al. 2006. Aquatic Wetland Plants of Northeastern North America. 536pp.
Michigan
Voss, Edward G. 1972, 1985, 1996. Michigan Flora, Part I, II, III. Cranbrook Institute of
Science and University of Michigan Herbarium. Bulletin 55.
Barnes, Burton V. and Warren H. Wagner. 1981,2004. Michigan Trees. The University of
Michigan Press. Ann Arbor.
Soper, James H. and Margaret L. Heimburger. 1982. Shrubs of Ontario. The Royal Ontario
Museum. Toronto.
Harris, James G. and Melinda Woolf Harris, 2001. Plant Identification Terminology: An
Illustrated Glossary, 2nd Ed. Spring Lake Publishing
-------
Core, Earl L. and Nelle P. Ammons. 1958. Woody Plants in Winter. The Boxwood Press.
Pacific Grove, California.
Steven G. Newmaster, Allan G. Harris, and Linda J. Kershaw 1997. Wetland Plants of Ontario,
Lone Pine Publishing; Edmonton, Alberta, Canada.
Semple, John C. and Gordon S. Ringius. 1992. Goldenrods of Ontario. University of Waterloo.
Waterloo, Ontario, Canada.
Symonds, George W.D. 1963. The Shrub Identification Book. William Morrow & Co. New
York.
Mohlenbrock, Robert H. 1999. The Illustrated Flora of Illinois-Sedges: Carex. Southern
Illinois University Press. Carbondale, Illinois.
Mohlenbrock, Robert H. 2001. The Illustrated Flora of Illinois - Sedges: Cyperus to Scleria.
2nd Ed. Southern Illinois University Press. Carbondale, Illinois.
Mohlenbrock, Robert H. 1970. The Illustrated Flora of Illinois - Flowering Rush to Rushes.
Southern Illinois University Press. Carbondale, Illinois.
Semple, John C., Stephen B. Heard, and Chun Sheng Xiang. 1996. The Asters of Ontario.
University of Waterloo. Waterloo, Ontario, Canada.
Region VI
Stutzenbaker, Charles D. 1999. Aquatic and Wetland Plants of the Western Gulf Coast. Texas
Parks and Wildlife Press (distributed by the University of Texas Press). 465pp.
Correll, D.S, and M.C Johnston. 1970. Manual of vascular plants of Texas. Texas Research
Foundation, renner. 1881 pp.
Diggs, G.M Jr., B.L. Lipscomb, and R.J. O'Kennon. 1999. Botanical Research Institute of Texas,
Fort Worth, Texas. 1626 pp.
Arkansas
Smith. E.B. 1994. Keys to the Flora of Arkansas. University of Arkansas Press. 376 pp.
New Mexico
Martin, W.C. 1981. Flora of New Mexico. Lubrecht & Cramer, Limited. 3000 pp.
Region VII
Missouri
-------
Yatskeivych, George. 1999. Steyermark's Flora of Missouri, Volume 1. Missouri Botanical
Garden Press. 991 pp.
Steyemark's Flora of Missouri, Volume 2. 2006. Missouri Botanical Garden Press. 1200 pp.
Region VIM
Hitchcock, C.L and A. Cronquist. 1973. Flora of the Pacific Northwest: An Illustrated Manual.
University of Washington Press. 730 pp.
Great Plains Flora Association. 1986. Atlas of the flora of the Great Plains. Coordinator, R.L.
McGregor Editor!. M. Barkley. University Press of Kansas 1408 pp.
Wilson et al. 2008. Field Guide to the Sedges of the Pacific Northwest. Oregon State University
Press.
Colorado
Weber, W.A. and R.C. Wittmann. 2001. Colorado Flora Eastern Slope, Third Edition. University
Press of Colorado. 521 pp.
Weber, W.A. and R.C. Wittmann. 2001. Colorado Flora Western Slope, Third Edition. University
Press of Colorado. 488 pp.
Kershaw L.J., A. MacKinnon, and J. Pojar. 1998. Plants of the Rocky Moutains. Lone Pine
Press. 384 pp.
Beidleman, L.H., R.G. Beidleman, and B.E. Willard. 2000. Plants of Rocky Mountain National
Park. Falcon Press. 266 pp.
Carter, J. L. 2006. Trees and Shrubs of Colorado, Revised and Expanded. Mimbres Publishing.
165 pp.
Hurd, E.G., N.L. Shaw, J. Mastroguiseppe, L.C. Smithman, and S. Goodrich. 1998. Field Guide
to Intermountain Sedges. RMRS-GTR-10. USDA Rocky Mountain Research Station. 282
pp. (http://www.fs.fed.us/rm/pubs/rmrs gtr010.html.)
Montana
Dorn, R.D. and J.L Dorn. 1984. Vascular Plants of Montana. Mountain West Pub. 276 pp.
Region IX
California
Hickman, James C., Editor. 1993. The Jepson Manual of Higher Plants of California. University
of California Press, Berkeley, California. Third printing with corrections 1996.
Region X
-------
Hitchcock, C.L, and A. Cronquist. 1973. Flora of the Pacific Northwest: An Illustrated Manual.
University of Washington Press 730 pp.
Kozloff, E. 2005. Plants of Western Oregon, Washington & British Columbia. Timber Press Inc.
608 pp.
Pojar, J., and A. MacKinnon. 1994. Plants of the Pacific Northwest Coast: Washington, Oregon,
British Columbia & Alaska. Lone Pine Publishing 528 pp.
Parish, R. 1999. Plants of Southern Interior British Columbia and the Inland Northwest. Lone
Pine Publishing 464 pp.
Wilson, B., R. Brainerd, D. Lytjen, B. Newhouse, and N. Otting. 2008. Field Guide to the Sedges
of the Pacific Northwest. Oregon State University 432 pp.
Tuner, M. and P. Gustafson. 2006. Wildflowers of the Pacific Northwest. Timber Press, Inc 512
pp.
Guard, B.J. 2010. Wetland Plants of Oregon and Washington. Lone Pine Publishing 240 pp.
Cooke, S.S. 1997. A Field Guide to the Common Wetland Plants of Western Washington &
Northwestern Oregon. Seattle Audubon Society 403 pp.
Jolley, R. 1988. Wildflowers of the Columbia Gorge. Oregon Historical Society Press, First
Edition 331 pp.
http://www.okanogan1.com/botany/flora/wooten-salix-current.pdf
http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/NR/rdonlyres/5DABA8B5-10F6-4CBA-B87D-E76F814CA66
9/0/SalixKey.pdf
http://info.ag.uidaho.edu/pdf/SB/SB039.pdf
III. Sensitive, Threatened, or Endangered Species Resources
US FWS Endangered Species (search by state feature):
http://www.fws.gov/endangered/
In addition, state lists of Threatened, Endangered and Sensitive (TES) Species may be
available.
IV. Alien and Invasive Species Resources
Invaders Database System (USDA supported searchable database- creates state lists):
http://invader.dbs.umt.edu/Noxious Weeds/state guery.asp
National Wetland Plant List:
http://wetland plants.usace.army.mil/
-------
Invasive Plants of the United States:
http://www.invasive.org/weedcd/
Plant Conservation Alliance's Alien Plant Working Group:
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/fact.htm
V. Regional Lists of Wetland Plants
Reed, P.B. Jr. 1988. National list of plant species that occur in wetlands: national summary.
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Biological Report 88(24). 244 pp.
Reed, P.B. Jr. 1988. National list of plant species that occur in wetlands: Northeast (Region 1).
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Biological Report 88(26.1). 111 pp.
National Wetland Plant List:
http://wetland plants.usace.army.mil/
VI. Plant Identification or Plant Image Web Databases
National
National Wetland Plant List:
http://wetland plants.usace.army.mil/
USDA Plants:
http://plants.usda.gov/iava/
Regional
Midwest
Illinois Natural History Survey Gallery of Illinois Plants:
http://www.inhs.illinois.edu/animals plants/plants/ilgallery/
Kansas Wildflowers and Grasses:
http://www.kswildflower.org/
Michigan Wildflowers Index:
http://www.carsoncity.k12.mi.us/~hsstudent/wildflowersOO/
Missouriplants.com:
http://www.missouriplants.com/index.html
Missouri Wildflower Guide:
http://www.missouriwildflowerguide.com/
Tennessee Wildflowers:
-------
http://www.blueshoenashville.com/wildflowers.html
South
Alabamaplants.com:
http://www.alabamaplants.com/
Wildflowers of Alabama:
http://www.auburn.edu/~deancar/
Institute for Systematic Botany Atlas of Florida Vascular Plants:
http://florida.plantatlas.usf.edu/Default.aspx
Fairchild Tropical Botanic Garden Virtual Herbarium:
http://www.virtualherbarium.org/
Stinger's Large Image Collection:
http://www.stingersplace.com/photolistsp.html
East
Delaware Wildflowers:
http://www.delawarewildflowers.org/
Wildflowers of Eastern North America:
http://www.nearctica.com/flowers/index.htm
New England Wild Flower Society:
http://www.newfs.org/
Old Dominion University Plant Site:
http://www.odu.edu/~lmusselm/plant/index.php
Georgian Court University Plants of New Jersey Pinelands:
http://www.georgian.edu/pinebarrens/index.htm
Southern Appalachian Wildflowers:
http://www.pbase.com/waterfallrich/southern appalachian wildflowers&page=all
West
Califlora:
http://www.calflora.org/
Idaho Mountain Wildflowers:
http://www.larkspurbooks.com/
Image Archive of Central Texas Plants:
http://www.sbs.utexas.edu/bio406d/PlantPics archive.htm
Lady Bird Johnson Wildflower Center:
-------
http://www.wildflower.org/
Nevada Natural Heritage Program:
http://heritage.nv.gov/images.htm
North Arizona Flora:
http://www.nazflora.org/index.html
San Diego County Wildflowers:
http://www.kenbowles.net/SDwildflowers/ReadMe.htm
Southwest Colorado Wildflowers, Ferns, and Trees:
http://www.swcoloradowildflowers.com/index.htm
Utah Weeds and Wildflowers:
http://www.rootcellar.us/wildflowers/contenta.htm
Wildflowers and Other Wild Plants of Southern California:
http://www.calflora.net/bloomingplants/index.html
-------
Appendix D
Photography
-------
I. Taking Photographs
Taking photographs is a required NWCA field activity that provides an important visual record of
sampling activities at each site. Photographs are taken with a digital camera.
Ensure that the date and time stamp features are enabled on the digital camera before taking
photos when taking photographs at an NWCA site. Alternatively, an initial photograph of an 8.5
x 11 inch piece of paper with the site ID, date, and name of the individual(s) taking the picture
printed in large, thick letters can be taken first, to begin the series of photos (this piece of paper
could be printed out in advance).
After the photo of the site ID information, take the following photographs at each site:
• Assessment Area (AA) characterization photographs
• Soil profile photographs and
• Threatened, Endangered and Sensitive (TES) species photographs.
Be sure to include photos that provide a frame of reference, including photos of crew members
collecting the sample. It is strongly suggested that the permission to take photos be obtained
from each of the individuals photographed.
1 - AA Characterization Photos
During the Assessment Area (AA) characterization, the VegTeam takes the following digital
photos after establishing the Veg Plots (Chapter 5):
Overview of the setting around the POINT: This photograph should contain the flag
marking the POINT.
Overview of the setting around the CENTER: This photograph is only taken if the
CENTER is in a different location than the POINT. The flag marking the center of the AA
should also be visible in this photograph.
View from the CENTER along each of the plot placement lines for vegetation sampling:
This photograph is taken for each Vegetation Plot placement line. Note the compass
bearing for the plot placement line and, if possible, capture any relevant flagging. The
optimal time to take this photograph is when the sun lights the scene from the side. This
will ensure the photograph has depth. Keep the camera level with the horizon and
ensure the image contains no more than one-third sky.
-------
Important features: This photograph can be taken for any feature of interest, e.g.,
stressors present in the site. Where possible, include a frame of reference.
Figure D-1. Right top: Overview of the setting around the point photo. Right bottom and left:
Plot placement line photos. All photos courtesy of Elizabeth Riley, EPA.
2 - Soil Profile Photos
A soil profile photo is an image that clearly shows the soil horizon and depth designations made
by the AB Team. This photo will be reviewed by NRCS State Soil Scientists to confirm horizon
and depth designations and for other QA purposes. Photographs can illustrate important soils
characteristics, and become reference sources of basic soils information. Photographs should
be taken of each soil profile before horizon designations have been made. However, if the
horizon breaks change during profile description, photographs may be retaken after the
description is done.
The profile will need to be properly prepared to bring out significant contrast in structure and
color between the soil horizons. Beginning at the top, fragments of the soil can be broken off
with a spatula, kitchen fork, or small knife to eliminate digging marks. Dust and small fragments
-------
can be brushed or blown away. Moistening the whole profile or part of it with a hand sprayer is
helpful in obtaining uniform moisture content and contrast.
Place a tape measure or meter stick starting from the top of the soil profile next to where the
horizons have been marked. When taking photos of soils, the profile should be oriented so that
the maximum amount of light will strike the prepared face at the proper angle (i.e., the sun
comes over your right shoulder). The camera should be held 1.5 to 2.5m from the profile.
Figure D-2. Top: Soil profile photo courtesy of Dave Rider, EPA. Bottom: Soil slab photo
courtesy of Eric Vance, EPA.
-------
3 - Threatened, Endangered and Sensitive Species Photos
A plant photo voucher is an image that shows enough plant characteristics to allow identification
by plant experts. As with all vouchers, all relevant data must be kept for each plant
photographed. If the site contains a species that is considered, or is suspected of being, a
Threatened, Endangered or Sensitive (TES) plant species, the Veg Team takes a photograph to
document the occurrence. The photograph must include as many diagnostic features as
possible to aid in identification. Try to get close-ups of flowers (from two or more angles),
inflorescences, fruits, seed heads, leaves (upper and lower surfaces), branching patterns, buds,
roots, and other diagnostic features. Take photos of the whole plant. Include a scale in the
photo, using objects of known size, such as a pencil, coin, shoe, finger, or a person.
•~-v
,.. -J' * _ Butotnus urrtbelhtus
Figure D-3. Series of plant voucher photos showing diagnostic features for Butomus
umbellatus. Photos courtesy of Elizabeth Riley, EPA.
-------
Figure D-4. Series of plant voucher photos showing different objects that can be used as a
scale. Clockwise from top left, field crew member with Typha latifolia, bees with Alisma triviale,
index finger with Dichorisandra thursifolia (photos courtesy of Elizabeth Riley, EPA), and a ruler
with Woodwardia areolata (photo courtesy of Janet Nestlerode, EPA).
6
-------
II. Tracking Photographs
Back at the office, save each photograph using the appropriate naming convention provided in
more detail below. The naming convention for each type of photograph includes the site ID, a
special modifier indicating the type of photograph taken, and the date. Images must be saved in
a medium- to high-quality jpeg format, with the resulting file name of each picture noted in an
excel spreadsheet photo log. Maintain a separate excel spreadsheet for each type of photo.
Include a brief description of each photograph, the name of the photographer, and the compass
bearing (for plot placement line photographs only) in the log.
Photo Name
Description
Photographer
Compass Bearing
Photographs are BATCHED and uploaded to the NWCA FTP site (see below) every 2 weeks.
Place photos in the appropriate state and photograph type folder. Make sure to include the
excel photo log in the folder.
To access the NWCA FTP Site, navigate to the address below via Windows Explorer (i.e. a 'My
Documents' window) or your FTP client:
ftp://ftp.glec.com
You will be prompted to login. Enter the username and password below:
username: NWCA
password: swamp
There you will find a folder labeled "Site Photographs" into which teams can upload their photos.
It is suggested that teams use Windows Explorer (i.e. a 'My Documents' window) to navigate to
the FTP site if they don't have an FTP client program. Just type the address into the address
bar of Windows Explorer, and drag-and-drop the files/folders from another window or your
desktop just as you would to move files on your own computer.
-------
Use the following naming conventions when saving photos:
AA Characterization Photos
o Site ID number (i.e., in the format NWCA11-0000 or other assigned number)
o Photos taken to characterize the AA are signified by the letters AA
o Modifier indicating the AA characterization photo taken:
• POINT: photo taken of the setting around the POINT
• CENTER: photo taken of the setting around the CENTER, if different from
POINT
• Photos taken from the CENTER along each of the plot placement lines for
vegetation sampling are designated by the letter P and the bearing of the
plot placement line.
• Photos taken of important features are designated by the letter F and a
sequential number for each feature documented at the site (i.e., F-1, F-2,
etc).
o Date in the format MM.DD (note: you do not need to include the year in the date
because it is included in the site ID number)
o Example photo tracking code:
• NWCA11-1516_AA_POINT_08.15.jpg
• NWCA11-1516_AA_CENTER_08H.jpg
• NWCA11-1516_AA_P-290_08.15.jpg
• NWCA11-1516_AA_P-310_08.15.jpg
• NWCA11-1516_AA_F-1_08.15.jpg
-------
Soil Profile Photos
o Site ID number (i.e., in the format NWCA11-0000 or other assigned number)
o Photos taken of the soil profile are designated by the letter S and the letter used
to designate the soil pit (A, B, C, or D) assigned by the AB Team during data
collection (see Soils Chapter and Reference card S-1 side A).
o Date in the format MM.DD (note: you do not need to include the year in the date
because it is included in the site ID number)
o Example photo tracking code:
• NWCA11-1516_S-A_08.15.jpg
TES Species Photos
o Site ID number (i.e., in the format NWCA11-0000 or other assigned number)
o Photos taken of a Threatened, Endangered or Sensitive plant species are
designated by the letters TES
o Species name or pseudonym if the species is unknown but suspected of being a
TES species.
o Date in the format MM.DD (note: you do not need to include the year in the date
because it is included in the site ID number)
o Example photo tracking codes:
• NWCA11-1516_TES_l_edum groenlandicum_08.15.jpg
• NWCA11-1516_TES_Carex1-3 stigmas_08.15.jpg
-------
Appendix E
Example Oil Decontamination Procedures
-------
COPY
Region 4
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Science and Ecosystem Support Division
Athens, Georgia
OPERATING PROCED
Title: Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
Number: SESDPROC-205-R1
Authors
Name: Donald Hunter
Title: Environmental Scientist, Regional Expert
Signature:
Date:
7
Name: Doug Jager
Title: Environmental Scie
Signature
Date:
Approvals
Name: Antonio Quinones
Name:
Title: Chief, Ec^ogica
\
Name: Laura Ackerman
Title: Field/Quality Manager, Science and Ecosystem Support Division
Signature:
l\ \
SESD Operating Procedure Page 1 of 14
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination__AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
SESDPROC-205-R1
-------
Revision History
This table shows changes to this controlled document over time. The most recent version
is presented in the top row of the table. Previous versions of the document are
maintained by the SESD Field Quality Manager.
History
SESDPROC-205-R1, Field Equipment Cleaning and
Decontamination, replaces SESDPROC-205-RO.
General
Corrected any typographical, grammatical and/or editorial errors.
Title Page
Changed title for Antonio Quinones from Environmental
Investigations Branch to Enforcement and Investigations Branch.
Changed Bill Cosgrove's title from Acting Chief to Chief.
Section 1.3
Updated information to reflect that the procedure is located on the H:
drive of the LAN. Clarified Field Quality Manager (FQM)
responsibilities.
Section 1.5
Alphabetized and revised the referencing style for consistency.
Section 1.6.1
Corrected the title of the Safety, Health, and Environmental
Management Program Procedures and Policy Manual.
SESDPROC-205-RO, Field Equipment Cleaning and
Decontamination., Original Issue
Effective Date
November 1, 2007
February 05, 2007
SESD Operating Procedure Page 2 of 14
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
SESDPROC-205-R1
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 General Information 4
1.1 Purpose 4
1.2 Scope/Application 4
1.3 Documentation/Verification 4
1.4 Definitions 4
1.5 References 5
1.6 General Precautions 5
1.6.1 Safety 5
1.6.2 Procedural Precaution 6
2 Introduction to Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination 7
2.1 General 7
2.2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions 7
2.3 Disposal of Cleaning Solutions 8
2.4 Sample Collection Equipment Contaminated with Concentrated Materials 8
2.5 Sample Collection Equipment Contaminated with Environmental Media 8
2.6 Handling of Decontaminated Equipment 9
3 Field Equipment Decontamination Procedures 10
3 1 General 10
3.2 Specifications for Decontamination Pads 10
3.3 "Classical Parameter" Sampling Equipment 11
3.4 Sampling Equipment used for the Collection of Trace Organic and Inorganic
Compounds 11
3.5 Well Sounders or Tapes 12
3.6 Redi-Flo2® Pump 12
3.7 Downhole Drilling Equipment 12
3.7.7 Introduction 13
3.7.2 Preliminary Cleaning and Inspection 13
3.7.3 Drill Rig Field Cleaning Procedure 14
3.7.4 Field Decontamination Procedure for Drilling Equipment 14
SESD Operating Procedure Page 3 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
Contents
General Information
1.1 Purpose
This document describes general and specific procedures, methods and considerations to
be used and observed when cleaning and decontaminating sampling equipment during the
course of field investigations.
1.2 Scope/Application
The procedures contained in this document are to be followed when field cleaning
sampling equipment, for both re-use in the field, as well as used equipment being
returned to the Field Equipment Center (FEC). On the occasion that SESD field
investigators determine that any of the procedures described in this section are either
inappropriate, inadequate or impractical and that other procedures must be used to clean
or decontaminate sampling equipment at a particular site, the variant procedure will be
documented in the field log book, along with a description of the circumstances requiring
its use.
1.3 Documentation/Verification
This procedure was prepared by persons deemed technically competent by SESD
management, based on their knowledge, skills and abilities and have been tested in
practice and reviewed in print by a subject matter expert. The official copy of this
procedure resides on the H: drive of the SESD local area network. The Field Quality
Manager (FQM) is responsible for ensuring the most recent version of the procedure is
placed on the H: drive and for maintaining records of review conducted prior to its
issuance.
1.4 Definitions
Decontamination: The process of cleaning dirty sampling equipment to the degree to
which it can be re-used, with appropriate QA/QC, in the field.
Field Cleaning: The process of cleaning dirty sampling equipment such that it can be
returned to the FEC in a condition that will minimize the risk of transfer of contaminants
from a site.
De-ionized water: Tap water that has been treated by passing through a standard de-
ionizing resin column. At a minimum, the finished water should contain no detectable
heavy metals or other inorganic compounds (i.e., at or above analytical detection limits)
SESD Operating Procedure Page 4 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
as defined by a standard inductively coupled Argon Plasma Spectrophotometer (ICP) (or
equivalent) scan. De-ionized water obtained by other methods is acceptable, as long as it
meets the above analytical criteria. Organic-free water may be substituted for de-ionized
water.
Organic-free water: Tap water that has been treated with activated carbon and de-ionizing
units. At a minimum, the finished water must meet the analytical criteria of de-ionized
water and it should contain no detectable pesticides, herbicides, or extractable organic
compounds, and no volatile organic compounds above minimum detectable levels as
determined by the Region 4 laboratory for a given set of analyses. Organic-free water
obtained by other methods is acceptable, as long as it meets the above analytical criteria.
Soap: A standard brand of phosphate-free laboratory detergent, such as Luminox®.
Tap water: Water from any potable water supply. De-ionized water or organic-free
water may be substituted for tap water.
Drilling Equipment: All power equipment used to collect surface and sub-surface soil
samples or install wells. For purposes of this procedure, direct push is also included in
this definition.
1.5 References
SESD Operating Procedure for Management of Investigation Derived Waste,
SESDPROC-202, Most Recent Version
SESD Operating Procedure for Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination at the FEC,
SESDPROC-206, Most Recent Version
United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA). 2001. Environmental
Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual. Region 4
Science and Ecosystem Support Division (SESD), Athens, GA
US EPA. Safety, Health and Environmental Management Program Procedures and Policy
Manual. Region 4 SESD, Athens, GA, Most Recent Version
1.6 General Precautions
1.6.1 Safety
Proper safety precautions must be observed when field cleaning or
decontaminating dirty sampling equipment. Refer to the SESD Safety, Health
and Environmental Management Program (SHEMP) Procedures and Policy
Manual and any pertinent site-specific Health and Safety Plans (HASPs) for
guidelines on safety precautions. These guidelines, however, should only be used
SESD Operating Procedure Page 5 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
to complement the judgment of an experienced professional. Address chemicals
that pose specific toxicity or safety concerns and follow any other relevant
requirements, as appropriate. At a minimum, the following precautions should be
taken in the field during these cleaning operations:
When conducting field cleaning or decontamination using laboratory detergent,
safety glasses with splash shields or goggles, and latex gloves will be worn.
No eating, smoking, drinking, chewing, or any hand to mouth contact should be
permitted during cleaning operations.
1.6.2 Procedural Precaution
Prior to mobilization to a site, the expected types of contamination should be
evaluated to determine if the field cleaning and decontamination activities will
generate rinsates and other waste waters that might be considered RCRA
hazardous waste or may require special handling.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 6 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
2 Introduction to Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
2.1 General
The procedures outlined in this document are intended for use by field investigators for
cleaning and decontaminating sampling and other equipment in the field. These
procedures should be followed in order that equipment is returned to the FEC in a
condition that will minimize the risk of transfer of contaminants from a site.
Sampling and field equipment cleaned in accordance with these procedures must meet the
minimum requirements for the Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) of the study or
investigation. Site-specific alterations to these procedures should be documented in the
study plan. Deviations from these procedures should be documented in the field records.
Cleaning procedures for use at the Field Equipment Center (FEC) are found in SESD
Operating Procedure for Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination at the FEC
(SESDPROC-206).
2.2 Handling and Containers for Cleaning Solutions
Improperly handled cleaning solutions may easily become contaminated. Storage and
application containers must be constructed of the proper materials to ensure their
integrity. Following are acceptable materials used for containing the specified cleaning
solutions:
• Soap must be kept in clean plastic, metal, or glass containers until used. It should
be poured directly from the container during use.
• Tap water may be kept in tanks, hand pressure sprayers, squeeze bottles, or
applied directly from a hose.
• De-ionized water must be stored in clean, glass or plastic containers that can be
closed prior to use. It can be applied from plastic squeeze bottles.
• Organic-free water must be stored in clean glass or Teflon® containers prior to
use. It may be applied using Teflon® squeeze bottles, or with the portable
system.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 7 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
2.3 Disposal of Cleaning Solutions
Procedures for the safe handling and disposition of investigation derived waste (IDW);
including used wash water and rinse water are in SESD Operating Procedure for
Management of Investigation Derived Waste (SESDPROC-202).
2.4 Sample Collection Equipment Contaminated with Concentrated Materials
Equipment used to collect samples of concentrated materials from investigation sites
must be field cleaned before returning from the study. At a minimum, this should consist
of washing with soap and rinsing with tap water. When the above procedure cannot be
followed, the following options are acceptable:
1. Leave with facility for proper disposal;
2. If possible, containerize, seal and secure the equipment and leave on-site for later
disposal;
3. Containerize, bag or seal the equipment so that no odor is detected and return to
the SESD.
It is the project leader's responsibility to evaluate the nature of the sampled material and
determine the most appropriate cleaning procedures for the equipment used to sample
that material.
2.5 Sample Collection Equipment Contaminated with Environmental Media
Equipment used to collect samples of environmental media from investigation sites
should be field cleaned before returning from the study. Based on the condition of the
sampling equipment, one or more of the following options must be used for field
cleaning:
1. Wipe the equipment clean;
2. Water-rinse the equipment;
3. Wash the equipment in detergent and water followed by a tap water rinse.
4. For grossly contaminated equipment, the procedures set forth in Section 2.4 must
be followed.
Under extenuating circumstances such as facility limitations, regulatory limitations, or
during residential sampling investigations where field cleaning operations are not
feasible, equipment can be containerized, bagged or sealed so that no odor is detected and
returned to the FEC without being field cleaned. If possible, FEC personnel should be
SESD Operating Procedure Page 8 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
notified that equipment will be returned without being field cleaned. It is the project
leader's responsibility to evaluate the nature of the sampled material and determine the
most appropriate cleaning procedures for the equipment used to sample that material.
2.6 Handling of Decontaminated Equipment
After decontamination, equipment should be handled only by personnel wearing clean
gloves to prevent re-contamination. In addition, the equipment should be moved away
(preferably upwind) from the decontamination area to prevent re-contamination. If the
equipment is not to be immediately re-used it should be covered with plastic sheeting or
wrapped in aluminum foil to prevent re-contamination. The area where the equipment is
kept prior to re-use must be free of contaminants.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 9 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
Field Equipment Decontamination Procedures
3.1 General
Sufficient equipment should be transported to the field so that an entire study can be
conducted without the need for decontamination. When equipment must be
decontaminated in the field, the following procedures are to be utilized.
3.2 Specifications for Decontamination Pads
Decontamination pads constructed for field cleaning of sampling and drilling equipment
should meet the following minimum specifications:
• The pad should be constructed in an area known or believed to be free of surface
contamination.
• The pad should not leak.
• If possible, the pad should be constructed on a level, paved surface and should
facilitate the removal of wastewater. This may be accomplished by either
constructing the pad with one corner lower than the rest, or by creating a sump or
pit in one corner or along one side. Any sump or pit should also be lined.
• Sawhorses or racks constructed to hold equipment while being cleaned should be
high enough above ground to prevent equipment from being splashed.
• Water should be removed from the decontamination pad frequently.
• A temporary pad should be lined with a water impermeable material with no
seams within the pad. This material should be either easily replaced (disposable)
or repairable.
At the completion of site activities, the decontamination pad should be deactivated. The
pit or sump should be backfilled with the appropriate material designated by the site
project leader, but only after all waste/rinse water has been pumped into containers for
disposal. See SESD Operating Procedure for Management of Investigation Derived
Waste (SESDPROC-202) for proper handling and disposal of these materials. If the
decontamination pad has leaked excessively, soil sampling may be required.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 10 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
3.3 "Classical Parameter" Sampling Equipment
"Classical Parameters" are analyses such as oxygen demand, nutrients, certain inorganics,
sulfide, flow measurements, etc. For routine operations involving classical parameter
analyses, water quality sampling equipment such as Kemmerers, buckets, dissolved
oxygen dunkers, dredges, etc., may be cleaned with the sample water or tap water
between sampling locations as appropriate.
Flow measuring equipment such as weirs, staff gages, velocity meters, and other stream
gauging equipment may be cleaned with tap water between measuring locations, if
necessary.
Note: The procedures described in Section 3.3 are not to be used for cleaning field equipment to be used
for the collection of samples undergoing trace organic or inorganic constituent analyses.
3.4 Sampling Equipment used for the Collection of Trace Organic and Inorganic
Compounds
For samples undergoing trace organic or inorganic constituent analyses, the following
procedures are to be used for all sampling equipment or components of equipment that
come in contact with the sample:
1. Clean with tap water and Luminox® soap using a brush, if necessary, to remove
particulate matter and surface films. Equipment may be steam cleaned
(Luminox® soap and high pressure hot water) as an alternative to brushing.
Sampling equipment that is steam cleaned should be placed on racks or saw
horses at least two feet above the floor of the decontamination pad. PVC or
plastic items should not be steam cleaned.
2. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
3. Rinse thoroughly with organic-free water and place on a clean foil-wrapped
surface to air-dry.
4. All equipment must be wrapped with foil. If the equipment is to be stored
overnight before it is wrapped in foil, it should be covered and secured with clean,
unused plastic sheeting.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 11 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
3.5 Well Sounders or Tapes
The following procedures are recommended for decontaminating well sounders (water
level indicators) and tapes:
1. Wash with soap and tap water.
2. Rinse with tap water.
3. Rinse with de-ionized water.
3.6 Redi-Flo2® Pump
The Redi-Flo2® pump should be decontaminated prior to use and between each
monitoring well. The following procedure is required:
CAUTION - Make sure the pump is not plugged in.
1. Using a brush, scrub the exterior of the pump, electrical cord and garden hose
with soap and tap water. Do not wet the electrical plug.
2. Rinse with tap water.
3. Rinse with de-ionized water.
4. Place the equipment in a clean plastic bag.
To clean the Redi-Flo2® ball check valve:
1. Remove the ball check valve from the pump head. Check for wear and/or
corrosion, and replace as needed.
2. Using a brush, scrub all components with soap and tap water.
3. Rinse with de-ionized water.
4. Replace the ball check valve to the Redi-Flo2® pump head.
3.7 Downhole Drilling Equipment
These procedures are to be used for drilling activities involving the collection of soil
samples for trace organic and inorganic constituent analyses and for the construction of
monitoring wells to be used for the collection of groundwater samples for trace organic
and inorganic constituent analyses.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 12 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
3.7.1 Introduction
Cleaning and decontamination of all equipment should occur at a designated area
(decontamination pad) on the site. The decontamination pad should meet the
specifications of Section 3.2 of this procedure.
Tap water brought on the site for drilling and cleaning purposes should be
contained in a pre-cleaned tank.
A steam cleaner and/or high pressure hot water washer capable of generating a
pressure of at least 2500 PSI and producing hot water and/or steam (200° F plus),
with a soap compartment, should be obtained.
3.7.2 Preliminary Cleaning and Inspection
Drilling equipment should be clean of any contaminants that may have been
transported from off-site to minimize the potential for cross-contamination. The
drilling equipment should not serve as a source of contaminants. Associated
drilling and decontamination equipment, well construction materials, and
equipment handling procedures should meet these minimum specified criteria:
• All downhole augering, drilling, and sampling equipment should be
sandblasted before use if painted, and/or there is a buildup of rust, hard or
caked matter, etc., that cannot be removed by steam cleaning (soap and
high pressure hot water), or wire brushing. Sandblasting should be
performed prior to arrival on site, or well away from the decontamination
pad and areas to be sampled.
• Any portion of the drilling equipment that is over the borehole (kelly bar
or mast, backhoe buckets, drilling platform, hoist or chain pulldowns,
spindles, cathead, etc.) should be steam cleaned (soap and high pressure
hot water) and wire brushed (as needed) to remove all rust, soil, and other
material which may have come from other sites before being brought on
site.
• Printing and/or writing on well casing, tremie tubing, etc., should be
removed before use. Emery cloth or sand paper can be used to remove the
printing and/or writing. Most well material suppliers can provide
materials without the printing and/or writing if specified when ordered.
Items that cannot be cleaned are not acceptable and should be discarded.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 13 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
• Equipment associated with the drilling and sampling activities should be
inspected to insure that all oils, greases, hydraulic fluids, etc., have been
removed, and all seals and gaskets are intact with no fluid leaks.
3.7.3 Drill Rig Field Cleaning Procedure
Any portion of the drill rig, backhoe, etc., that is over the borehole (kelly bar or
mast, backhoe buckets, drilling platform, hoist or chain pulldowns, spindles,
cathead, etc.) should be steam cleaned (soap and high pressure hot water) between
boreholes.
3.7.4 Field Decontamination Procedure for Drilling Equipment
The following is the standard procedure for field cleaning augers, drill stems,
rods, tools, and associated equipment. This procedure does not apply to well
casings, well screens, or split-spoon samplers used to obtain samples for chemical
analyses, which should be decontaminated as outlined in Section 3.4 of this
procedure.
1. Wash with tap water and soap, using a brush if necessary, to remove
particulate matter and surface films. Steam cleaning (high pressure hot
water with soap) may be necessary to remove matter that is difficult to
remove with the brush. Drilling equipment that is steam cleaned should
be placed on racks or saw horses at least two feet above the floor of the
decontamination pad. Hollow-stem augers, drill rods, etc., that are hollow
or have holes that transmit water or drilling fluids, should be cleaned on
the inside with vigorous brushing.
2. Rinse thoroughly with tap water.
3. Remove from the decontamination pad and cover with clean, unused
plastic. If stored overnight, the plastic should be secured to ensure that it
stays in place.
SESD Operating Procedure Page 14 of 14 SESDPROC-205-R1
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination
Field Equipment Cleaning and Decontamination_AF.R1
Effective Date: November 1, 2007
-------
-------
USA RAM
MANUAL
Version 11
January 2011
-------
This document is formatted for 2-sided copies.
This page is intentionally blank.
-------
Table of Contents
Basic Guidance 1
Purposes of USA-RAM 1
Basic Assumptions of USA-RAM 1
Structure of USA-RAM 1
Joint Sampling for USA-RAM and NWCA FOM 2
How to Use USA-RAM Version 10 2
Scoring Plan 3
Establishing the Assessment Area and Buffer Area 3
Integration of USA-RAM and NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines... 4
Section A: Assessment of the Buffer 5
Integrated Sampling of the Buffer 5
Metric 1: Percent of AA having Buffer 6
Metric 2: Buffer Width 8
Metric 3: Stress to the Buffer Zone 11
Section B: Assessment of Wetland Form and Structure 14
Physical Structure Attribute 14
Metric 4: Topographic Complexity 14
Metric 5: Patch Mosaic Complexity 15
Biological Structure Attribute 18
Metric 6: Vertical Complexity 18
Metric?: Plant Community Complexity 19
Section C: Assessment of Stressors to the AA 22
Hydrology Attribute 23
Metric 8: Stressors to Water Quality 23
Metric 9: Alterations to Hydroperiod 24
Physical Structure Attribute 25
Metric 10: Habitat /Substrate Alterations 25
Biological Structure Attribute 26
Metric 11: Percent Cover of Invasive Plant Species 26
Metric 12: Vegetation Disturbance 28
Glossary 29
-------
11
This document is formatted for 2-sided copies.
This page is intentionally blank.
-------
USA-RAM Errata
The following minor errors and clarifications pertain to the USA-RAM Manual and Forms which
are used in association with the NWCA.
1) Unlike many of the other NWCA Forms, the USA-RAM forms do not include a "super-bubble"
that teams will fill in to confirm that a filled bubble on the rest of the form indicates
presence/rank and an empty bubble indicates absence. For the USA-RAM forms listed below, it
is assumed that empty bubbles indicate absence of the given indicator.
• FORM USA-RAM 2: Metric 3
• FORM USA-RAM 3: Metric 4
• FORM USA-RAM 6: Metric 7
• FORM USA-RAM 7: Metric 8
• FORM USA-RAM 8: Metric 9
• FORM USA-RAM 9: Metric 10
• FORM USA-RAM 11: Metric 12
2) Table 2 - Buffer Land Cover Criteria - Line 4 in this table incorrectly indicates that if a buffer is
separated from the AA by a non-buffer cover or open water > 5 meters, it should not be counted
as buffer for the purposes of RAM Metric 1. Since open water itself is considered a buffer, this
line should read:
Is not separated from the AA by a non-buffer cover that is > 5m wide.
3) Figure 3 - Example calculations of Metric 2: buffer width - This figure contains two aerial
photos and two worksheets that contain example calculations of Metric 2 (labeled A and B).
The figures and worksheets are mis-matched such that the calculations displayed in Worksheet
3A actually pertain to Figure 3B and vice versa.
4) Throughout the USA-RAM Manual, example worksheets are provided and instructions are given
for the calculation of the final Metric score. These are provided so that teams may better
understand how the individual rankings contribute to the overall score for each Metric. This
would also be helpful for states/tribes that choose to use this method to develop their own
RAM protocols. For NWCA, however, the individual rankings will be placed directly on the RAM
data sheets and all calculations will be done by the Information Management Team.
5) Metric 11, Percent Cover of Invasive Plant Species, has been revised. Previously the metric
instructed that the percent cover of invasive species in each plant strata in the AA be assessed
separately. The metric has been updated so that it now calls for an assessment of the absolute
percent cover of invasive species in the AA for all strata combined. Information gathered in
Metric 7 can be used to inform this metric, however this metric is based on the invasive species
cover for all strata combined over the entire AA. Invasive species include those indentified in
the NWCA Invasive Species List as well as those in any approved state or regional lists, (see field
data form below). Table 17 of the USA RAM manual should not be consulted as a list of invasive
species for the purposes of the NWCA (Russian olive is not on the list of target invasive alien
plant species provided in Appendix B)
-------
FORM USA-RAM 10: USA-RAM Metric 11 - Percent Cover of Invasive Plant
Species in the AA
Reviewed by (initials)
Site ID: NWCA11-
Date:
/2011
Metric 11: Data table to indicate the percent cover of invasive plant species in the AA. Estimate
the absolute percent cover of all invasive species in the AA. Information gathered in Metric 7 can be
used to inform this metric, but note that this metric is based on an estimate of the invasive species
cover for all strata combined over the entire AA. Invasive species include those identified in the
NWCA invasive species list as well as those in any approved state or regional lists. Fill in the
bubble corresponding to the choice for the cover class.
Cover Class
Fill bubble for appropriate cover
class:
1. Absent (none)
O
2. Trace (nearly absent): < 5% cover
O
3. Moderate: 5 - 25% cover
O
4. Extensive: 25 - 75% cover
O
5. Dominant: > 75% cover
O
-------
Basic Guidance
Purposes of USA-RAM
The primary purpose of USA-RAM is to assess the overall condition and stress for the
nation's wetlands as part of the USEPA 2011 National Wetland Condition Assessment
(NWCA). Secondary purposes include exploring relationships between stress and
condition as mediated by buffers, and providing a RAM to US States and Tribes that they
can further develop for their own purposes.
Assumptions of USA-RAM
• The overall condition of a wetland is its capacity or potential to provide its full
suite of functions and services, relative to reference sites.
• The overall condition of a wetland can be assessed in terms of the complexity of
its visible form and structure, relative to reference sites.
• The overall stress on a wetland is the sum total and extent of human-caused
processes and events that are likely to degrade wetland form and structure.
• The overall stress on a wetland can be assessed as the number of evident stressors
and their cumulative extent. As the number and extent of stressors accumulates,
wetland overall condition declines, regardless of wetland type or vegetation
community composition.
• Indicators are visible representations of wetland form, structure, or stress. Suitable
indicators can be identified using conceptual models that relate wetland form and
structure to wetland processes, functions, and stress.
• For any wetland type or class, larger wetlands with more intact structure and less
stress tend to have greater levels of characteristic functions and services. This can
be represented by Condition Profiles and Stress Profiles.
Structure of USA-RAM
USA-RAM is designed to assess overall condition and stress for a 0.5-ha Assessment
Area (AA) and its buffer (defined here as the area within 100m distance from the
perimeter of the AA). Each AA is assessed in terms of Attributes of condition and stress,
based on Metrics of the Attributes and Field Indicators of the Metrics (Table 1).
USA-RAM recognizes four Attributes of condition and stress: Buffer, Hydrology,
Physical Structure, and Biological Structure. However, for the following reasons, the
Hydrology Attribute is only assessed in terms of its stressors.
• All aspects of wetland condition are affected by hydrology. Physical structure,
biological structure, and buffer condition tend to be correlated to hydrology. The
importance of the Hydrology Attribute is therefore adequately reflected by the
assessment of these other Attributes of condition, without having to assess
-------
hydrological conditions per se. An assessment of hydrological stressors is
necessary, however, to understand the results for of the condition assessment.
The hydrological conditions that account for the conditions of the other Attributes
is not always evident during the assessment. The observed conditions might be
affected by the hydrology of a previous season or year. In general, efforts to
reconstruct previous hydrological conditions tend to incur substantial uncertainty.
Hydrology varies more that the other Attributes of condition, both within and
among wetland classes. Different metrics of hydrological condition are needed to
assess different types of wetlands. Wetland hydrology is therefore not well
assessed by a single set of hydrological metrics, as required for USA RAM.
Table 1: USA RAM Attributes and Metrics of wetland condition and stress.
Attributes
Buffer
Hydrology
Physical Structure
Biological Structure
Condition Metrics
Percent of AA Having Buffer
Buffer Width
None
Topographic Complexity
Patch Mosaic Complexity
Vertical Complexity
Plant Community Complexity
Stress Metrics
Stress to the Buffer Zone
Alterations to Hydroperiod
Stress to Water Quality
Habitat/Substrate Alterations
Percent Cover of Invasive Plants
Vegetation Disturbance
Joint Sampling for USA-RAM and the Field Operations Manual
During data collection for the NWCAA, field crews will be organized to simultaneously
collect all data necessary to complete both the USA-RAM and the Field Operations
Manual (FOM; USEPA 2010). The Vegetation Team and the AB Team will be tasked
with completing different sections of USA-RAM. The AB Team will verify and collect
data for the USA-RAM Buffer Metrics (Metrics 1 - 3), while the Vegetation Team will
collect data for the Stressor and Condition Metrics (Metrics 4 - 12). This will streamline
data collection efforts, making time spent in the field more efficient, while matching the
Metrics to the different expertise of the Teams. Each Team will receive the appropriate
Field Data Forms for its particular set of USA-RAM Metrics.
How to Use USA-RAM Version 11
• Learn USA-RAM in it entirety before applying it in the field. Many of the Metrics
can be addressed more-or-less concurrently when all the Metrics are understood
in detail. The time required to apply USA-RAM decreases as experience in its use
is gained.
• Begin each application by inspecting the entire AA and its buffer zone. Many of
the Metrics can be provisionally assessed during this initial inspection.
-------
• Record all data on the appropriate Field Data Forms using the protocols described
in the FOM.
• Use USA-RAM faithfully. Finalize all the Metrics while in the field at the AA.
Do not alter any Metric. However, recommendations to improve the method
should be recorded and provided to the USEPA NWCA team.
Scoring Plan
USA-RAM will provide separate scores for stress and condition for each AA and its
associated buffer zone. Each AA score and each buffer zone score will be the sum of
their respective Attribute scores. The Attribute scores will be sums of their respective
Metric scores. The Metric scores will be derived from standardized "scoring tables."
The scoring tables will be used to assign each Metric result to one of four categories of
condition or stress. The categories will have unique numerical values that are scaled to
help distinguish between similar AAs.
Separate scoring tables will be developed for each wetland class and NWCA region. This
will help assure that the USA-RAM results reflect the natural variation in form and
structure between wetland classes and regions, and that similar scores for like wetlands in
different regions indicate similar condition or stress (i.e., scores for like wetlands will be
comparable across the country).
A regional cumulative frequency distribution (regional CFD) will be calculated for the
AA scores of each wetland class. It is likely that each AA score will be assigned to one
of four categories of overall condition that correspond to the quartiles of the affiliated
regional CFD. This will support regional and national reports on the distribution of
wetlands among different categories of condition and stress.
A final stage in the analysis of USA-RAM results will be quantification of the effect of
buffer condition on the correlation between AA condition and AA stress. The intent of
this analysis is to explore how buffers might be used to mitigate stress.
Establishing the Assessment Area (AA) and Buffer Area
The rules for establishing an AA and its buffer zone are the same for USA-RAM and the
NWCA Field Operations Manual (FOM; USEPA 2010). Highlights of the rules are
described below. For a full description of the rules see Chapters 3 and 4 of the FOM
The FOM provides strict guidelines for establishing an AA. Once the sampling POINT
has been identified, the AA can be been planned. After the plan has been verified in the
field (see FOM Section 3.1.2), the AA can be established (see FOM Section 3.2). The
guidelines for establishing an AA are summarized below.
• The "Standard Circular AA" is a 40m-radius circle centered on the POINT.
The "Standard Circular AA-Shifted" is used when the center of the AA has to be
shifted away from the POINT to fit within the wetland area that can be assessed.
-------
. The "Polygon AA" is used for sites that are large enough for a full-sized (0.5 ha)
AA, if the AA is not a circle. In this situation a 0.5 ha polygon is established with
the center of the AA situated as close to the POINT as possible.
The "Wetland Boundary AA" is used when the total area of the site is less than
0.5 ha but at least 0.1 ha. In this case, the AA boundary coincides with the
wetland boundary.
The buffer zone for an AA will be established as follows (see Chapter 4 of the FOM for
full details).
• For a Circular AA, the buffer zone is the area that lies within a 100m distance of
the AA perimeter or 140m from the A A center. To mark the edge of the buffer
zone, four (4) 140m transects are established in the four cardinal directions from
the AA center, whether or not the center is the POINT (Figure 1A on page 7
below). The buffer zone is defined by the distance greater than 40m from the AA
center.
. For a Polygon AA, the buffer zone is the area that lies within a 100m distance
from the polygon boundary (Figure IB on page 7 below).
• For a Wetland Boundary AA, the buffer extends 100m from the wetland
boundary.
Integration of USA-RAM with the NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines
Before fieldwork begins, a desktop evaluation of each sampling POINT will be done as
described in the NWCA Site Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2010). The primary
purpose of this evaluation is to determine if the selected POINT is, or likely will be, in
the target population. Sources of information that will be used in the desktop evaluation
include, but are not limited to, aerial photos, topographic maps, NWI data, NAIP
imagery, and state, county or tribal wetland resource data.
As part of the data collection for the NWCA, several of the USA-RAM Metrics will be
assessed using the NWCA imagery of the POINTS as described in the NWCA Site
Evaluation Guidelines (USEPA 2010). The Metrics for which data will be derived in this
way are:
Metric 1: Percent of the AA Having Buffer
Metric 2: Buffer Width
Metric 6: Patch Mosaic Complexity
The measurements needed for these Metrics will be determined by the Field Crews
before the AA is assessed (i.e., during the desktop evaluation) using the site packet that
contains information about site location and site access (e.g., maps and aerial images).
-------
Section A: Assessment of the Buffer
The following three Metrics are designed to evaluate the form and condition of the buffer
zone and the kind of stressors and amount of stress to which it is subject. Here we define
the buffer as land adjacent to the AA that is comprised of natural vegetation and lacks
evidence of intrusive human activity. As described above, the buffer has a maximum
width of 100m. It is assumed that the buffer helps protect the AA by mitigating stress,
including the deleterious effects of human land uses that adjoin the buffer zone.
Metrics 1 and 2 will be completed in two steps. Metric 1 consists of a desktop evaluation
at the time of AA planning (USEPA 2010, Chapter 3, FOM) to determine the land use
surrounding each sample POINT. Once the AA is established, the land area within 100m
of the AA boundary will comprise the buffer zone (i.e., the area that has the potential to
serve as buffer, depending on its land use). Examples of the buffer configuration to be
used for the Standard Circular AA and the Polygon AA are shown in Figure 1. The
second step for metric 1 is a field verification of the data derived from the aerial imagery.
Integrated Sampling of the Buffer
In order to streamline data collection for the NWCA, the AB Team will collect data for
the Buffer Metrics that are included in USA-RAM, as well as complete the field protocol
for sampling the buffer zone as described in the FOM. This will allow for efficient
sampling of the buffer and enable field crews to use the information provided on aerial
imagery to gather data and then perform a rigorous field verification of these data.
A
Figure 1. Establishment of the 100m buffer zone, defined as the 100m distance from the
AA perimeter for a Circular AA (A) or the Polygon AA (B). Note the four transects laid
out in the cardinal directions (North, South, East, West), along which are located the plots
for assessing the buffer according to the FOM (original figure modified from the FOM;
USEPA 2010). USA-RAM Buffer Metrics 1 and 2 will be verified when walking the
four cardinal-direction transects.
-------
Metric 1: Percent of AA having Buffer.
Land only counts as buffer if it consists of a land cover type that is capable of "buffering"
the AA by protecting it from multiple kinds of stressors originating in the surrounding
landscape outside. This Metric is based on the percent of the AA perimeter that adjoins a
general type of "buffer land cover" as defined in Table 2. For the NWCA, land covers
that might provide limited buffering under special circumstances, such as pasture land
managed for ecological functions are not considered to be buffers because adequate
knowledge of such localized circumstances cannot be assured throughout the survey.
General approach - The NWCA sample point imagery will be used to score this Metric,
followed by ground verification of the imagery during the fieldwork. Site imagery plus
field reconnaissance will be used to examine the entire perimeter of the AA and to
estimate the percent of the perimeter that adjoins any type of Buffer Land Cover, based
on Tables 2 and 3 below. Make estimates in increments of 5% of the distance of the
perimeter of the AA. The AB Team) will implement USA-RAM protocol described here
as well as the buffer sampling protocol described in the Field Operations Manual.
Table 2: Buffer Land Cover Criteria. To qualify as buffer, a land cover must meet all
four of the listed criteria.
Buffer Land Cover Criteria
1.
2.
3.
4.
Is on the list of "buffer land covers" in Table 2
Is at least 5m wide
Extends at least 10m along the AA boundary as a contiguous cover patch
Is not separated from the AA by a non-buffer cover or open water that is >
5m wide
-------
Table 3: List of Buffer Land Covers based on the Anderson Land Cover Class system.
Buffer Land Covers
Non-buffer Land Covers
Open water (surfaces of lakes, bays, ponds,
rivers, etc. with <5% plant cover)
Wetlands
Permanent ice or snow (year round snow
or ice surfaces with <5% plant cover)
Natural, non-vegetated earth surfaces
(natural rock outcrops, sand, gravel, etc.
with <5% plant cover)
Natural vegetation (areas with > 5% cover
of mostly non-impacted vegetation,
including herbaceous, forest, or old fields
undergoing succession; excludes lawns,
playing fields, agricultural crops of any
kind, recent clear-cuts or otherwise
impacted forest lands, or recently burned
lands)
Trails (foot trails, equestrian trails, single-
track bicycle trails, etc.)
Built structures (houses, factories, schools, etc.)
Artificial, non-vegetated land surfaces (parking
lots, solar farms, feed lots, etc. that support <5%
plant cover)
Active mining areas (quarries, strip mines,
gravel pits, etc.)
Any active agriculture (orchards, vineyards, row
crops, hay or grain fields, sod farms, feedlots,
recently clear-cut or otherwise severely
impacted forest lands, etc. Includes fallow
agricultural fields)
Any recently burned lands
Urban and recreational lawns, sports fields, etc.)
Any roadway dangerous to wildlife (railroads,
busy streets, highways, etc.)
AT V trails
Figure 2. Two examples of Buffer Metric 1, percent of AA perimeter having buffer.
Example 2A Worksheet
Percent of AA Perimeter Adjoining
Buffer
Land Use
Buffer
Non-buffer
Total % AA
Perimeter with
Buffer
% of Perimeter
100
0
100
Figure 2a: Example of buffer extent for a Standard Circular AA. Yellow indicates
portions of the AA perimeter that adjoin a buffer land cover. In this case the buffer
extent is 100% of the AA perimeter (image from Google Earth).
-------
Example 2B Worksheet
Percent of AA Perimeter
Adjoining Buffer
Land Use
Buffer
Non-buffer
Total % AA
Perimeter with
Buffer
% of Perimeter
75
25
75
Figure 2b. Example of buffer extent for a Standard Circular AA. Yellow indicates
portions of the AA perimeter that adjoin a buffer land cover. In this case, about 75% of
the AA perimeter is buffered (image from Google Earth).
Table 4: Metric 1 data table.
Choose 1
0
0
0
0
Percent of AA Perimeter adjoining buffer
< 25 %
26 - 50%
51 - 75%
> 75%
Metric 2: Buffer Width.
The ability of an area to buffer a wetland from external stressors depends on the width of
the buffer area. Minimum effective buffer widths can vary among stressors. However, it
is assumed that buffers do not usually need to be wider than 100m. A width of 100m has
become a commonly used definition of what constitutes a buffer for the sake of
assessment in many programs, and land use in the 100m buffer has been found to be
correlated with wetland condition.
For the NWCA, the AB Team will implement the USA-RAM protocol described here as
well as the buffer sampling protocol described in the Field Operations Manual.
General approach - Four lines, each 100m long, are drawn from the AA perimeter on
the site imagery in the cardinal directions (N, S, E, W); these are the transect lines along
which the sampling plots for the FOM buffer protocol will be located. Another four lines
are drawn in the ordinal directions (NE, SE, SW, NW), outward from the AA perimeter
-------
(see Figure 3 below). Lines are numbered clockwise with North as "1" as shown. Starting
at the AA perimeter, the following procedure is followed.
• On each of the eight (8) transect lines, estimate the distance (meters) between the
AA perimeter and the point at which the line first intercepts any type of non-
buffer land cover (see Table 3 above). This distance equals the buffer width for
each transect line.
• Make estimates of buffer width in increments of 5m.
• Ignore any non-buffer areas that do not cover at least 5m of a line.
• Enter the buffer width for each line in the Metric 2 Worksheet.
• See Tables 2 and 3 above for examples of buffer and non-buffer land covers.
There is potential that landuse changes may have occurred since the aerial imagery used
in this Metric was developed. To ensure the best possible estimate of buffer width, the
AB Team will need to ground-check the accuracy of the aerial imagery in the field. If
there has been substantial change to the landscape in the 100m buffer zone, the data to
indicate buffer width that are based on the imagery will have to be corrected, based on
the following procedure.
• As the AB Team walks the cardinal-direction transects to assess the buffer
according to the FOM, it will also assess the usability of the aerial imagery.
• The buffer zone may also be observed from a nearby high vantage point.
• Any needed corrections should be noted by drawing on the aerial imagery.
• If the AB Team estimates that more than 10% of the buffer zone has changed
(e.g., from forest to subdivision, or grassland to row crops) then the buffer width
estimates along the eight transect lines must be corrected, based on the revised
imagery, and the new estimates recorded on the Metric 2 Worksheet.
Figure 3. Example calculations of Metric 2: buffer width.
Example 3A Worksheet
Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Average Width
Buffer Width
(m)
100
100
LOO
100
100
100
90
100
99
-------
10
Example 3B Worksheet
E
Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Average Width
Buffer Width
(m)
100
0
0
10
100
20
0
15
31
Figure 3A (top) and 3B (bottom). Example of buffer width calculation for Standard
Circular AAs, showing AA perimeter (red), 100m area around AA (blue), and wetland
boundary (orange). The eight transect lines are shown including the four cardinal-
direction lines (yellow) with the buffer plots (yellow boxes) according to the FOM. Red
portions of transect lines indicate non-buffer land use. The example worksheets show the
buffer width along each line, and the average buffer width that is the Metric result.
Table 5: Metric 2 data Table.
Transect Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Average Width
Buffer Width (m)
-------
11
Metric 3: Stress to the Buffer Zone.
Buffer areas can provide some protection to wetlands from human activities and the
stressors they can generate. This metric is designed to tabulate and characterize the types
and severity of stressors that can act to reduce the effectiveness of the buffer in protecting
the AA from activity in the surrounding landscape.
For the sake of this Metric, the buffer zone is considered to be the entire 100m area
around the AA, regardless of land use. Stressors that occur in land use covers, whether
or not they count as buffers (see Table 3), have the potential to directly impact the AA.
Therefore, stressors that occur in any land use within 100m of the AA will be tallied
using the provided checklist.
General approach - Buffer stress will be assessed by the AB Team as it walks the four
cardinal-direction transects (N, S, E, W) established in the buffer zone to assess the
buffer according to the FOM. The AB Team will thoroughly examine the buffer zone
along these transects and the visible adjoining buffer zone for evidence of stressors. It is
particularly important to investigate any evidence of stressors noted in the buffer zone on
the aerial imagery or maps, even if such evidence occurs away from the four cardinal-
direct transect lines.
Observations will be made using site imagery, direct field observations, maps, and any
other useful sources of information. Only stressors that are observed at the time of the
field assessment should be counted. Indicators of past disturbance tend be less reliable
and should not be considered.
This Metric is assessed based on the number of stressors that are evident (i.e., their
presence - absence), as well as their severity. The severity of a stressor is characterized
based on the portion of the entire buffer zone that the stressor apparently influences,
using the guidelines shown in Table 6. The field indicators of stress are provided in
Table 5, and are organized by Stressor Category (i.e., Hydrology, Habitat/Vegetation,
Residential/Urban/Commercial Land Use, and Agriculture). All stressor indicators that
are observed in the buffer zone should be checked, and the severity of that stressor must
be indicated. After the checklist has been completed for a Stressor category, the overall
severity of stress for the Categories is estimated on the field form.
Table 6: Guidelines for assessing stressor severity.
Portion of Buffer Zone
Influenced by Stressor
less than one-third
between one-third and two-thirds
at least two-thirds
Severity Code
1
2
3
-------
12
Table 7: Indicators of stress in the buffer zone. Rank each observed indicator based on
Table 6 above. Rank the overall severity of stress for any Stressor Category with
observed stress indicators Do not include these overall rankings for Stressor
Categories in the final tally of stressors.
If Stressor is
present, mark
its severity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Field Indicators by Stressor Category
Hydrological Stressors
Ditches/ drains/ channelization
Dikes/dams/levees/ railroad or road beds
Culverts, pipes (point source discharge except stormwater) in buffer zone
Water level control structure
Obvious spills, discharges or odors; unusual water color or foam
Moderate to heavy formation of filamentous algae
Excavation, dredging
Fill / spoil banks
Wall/riprap
Inlets and outlets
Input from impervious surfaces (stormwater culvert)
Habitat/Vegetation Stressors
Soil subsidence, scour or surface erosion (root exposure)
Substrate disturbance (ATVs off-road vehicles, mountain biking)
Sediment input (construction, erosion, agricultural runoff)
Forest - selective cut
Forest - clear cut
Removal of large woody debris
Tree plantation present
Heavily grazed grasses, excessive grazing
Tree canopy herbivory
Shrub layer browsed
Fire lines (fire breaks)
Recently burned forest canopy
Recently burned grassland
Mowing/shrub cutting (brush hogging)
Other mechanical plant removal
Chemical vegetation control (herbicide application)
Cover of non-native or invasive species
Presence of power lines or utility corridors (continual maintenance)
Oil/gas wells
Logging roads
Trails
Residential/Urban/Commercial Stressors
Suburban residential land use
Urban multifamily land use
Urban/commercial buildings
-------
13
Table 7 (continued).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ix
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2jc
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3x
Road - gravel
Road - 1 or 2 lane paved
Road- 4 lane
Parking lot/ pavement
Lawn/ park
Golf course
Landfill
Gravel pit/mining
Surface mine
Military land
Trash/ dumping
Agricultural Stressors
Pasture / rangeland
Row crops
Small grains
Nursery
Orchard
Dairy
Confined animal feeding operations
Irrigation (irrigated land)
Fallow field - recent
Fallow field - old
Rural residential
A. Note the total number of marks in each column (not including
marks for Stressor Category)
B. Multiply "A" above by its corresponding severity score
C. Add together the numbers from "B" above.
-------
14
Section B: Assessment of Wetland Form and Structure
Physical Structure Attribute
Metric 4: Topographic Complexity.
Natural wetlands develop topographic relief due to variations in sediment production or
deposition, erosion or oxidation of sediments, variations in hydroperiod, wildlife
activities, etc. The resulting relief can be evident at multiple spatial scales. Increases in
micro-relief represent increases in the surface area of a wetland and therefore can lead to
increased bio- and geo-chemical processes at the sediment-water or sediment-air
interface. It can also represent an increase in habitat quantity and diversity for diminutive
forms of plants and animals, including plant propagules, insects, and amphibian larvae.
Increases in macro-relief can lead to increases in the diversity of larger species or larger
colonies of diminutive species, and plant community zonation.
General approach - the number of standard indicators of macro- and micro-topographic
relief evident in the AA is used to assess its overall topographic complexity. To aid in the
assessment, the likely influence of the indicators on the topographic cross-section of AA
should be considered (Figure 4).
Macro-relief refers to the overall shape of the profile, including major changes in its
steepness and the locations and sizes of persistent topographic features such as benches,
plains, berms, furrows, channels, etc. Micro-relief refers to less persistent relief that
occurs as details or elements of the macro-relief, such as animal burrows, soil cracks,
surface objects (e.g., woody debris, cobbles or boulders), etc.
sloping bench
without micro-relief
Diameter of AA
Figure 4: Example topographic cross-section of an AA showing the effect of macro- and
micro-relief on overall topographic complexity. In this example, there are two benches
and intervening slopes that account for the macro-relief of each half of the AA. Some of
the benches and slopes have micro-relief, which might result from woody debris,
tussocks, cobbles, animal burrows, etc. The vertical scale, which spans the total range of
macro-relief, is exaggerated relative to the horizontal scale, which spans the AA.
-------
15
Table 8: Checklist of field indicators of topographic complexity observed in the AA.
Bold terms are in the glossary. An indicator should not be checked unless it
covers at least 2m2 of the AA. For example, animal burrows should not be
checked unless, in aggregate, they cover at least 2m2 of the AA.
Indicators
Multiple horizontal plains, benches, terraces, or flats at different elevations
Multiple slopes of varying steepness
Natural or artificial levee or berm
Bank slumps or undercut banks
Undercut banks
Multiple high water marks etched in substrate
Potholes, sink holes or similar depressions not caused by animals
Natural or artificial channels
Natural or artificial swales
Animal burrows or spoil piles from burrows (including ant or termite mounds)
Animal tracks deep enough to hold water (e.g., cattle or elk tracks)
Wallows, pig damage, or similar scale excavations by animals
Inorganic sediment mounds not made by animals
Natural or artificial debris or wrack along high water lines
Natural or artificial debris in topographic low areas
Natural or artificial debris dispersed across AA (tree limbs, lumber, etc)
Plant hummocks or tussocks
Soil cracks or fissures
Cobbles or boulders
Bare ground
Total Number of Indicators Observed
Check if
observed
Metric 5: Patch Mosaic Complexity.
This metric addresses the structural complexity of the AA in plan-view (i.e., as viewed
from above), based on the number of structural patches and their zonation or
interspersion. When viewed from above, most wetlands are mosaics of different patches
of substrate or plant cover. The complexity of the mosaic has two basic aspects: the
diversity of the component patches and the degree to which they are interspersed (i.e.,
the amount of interface between multiple patches). Within a given wetland class, the
diversity and levels of ecological function of a wetland mosaic are expected to increase
-------
16
with its overall complexity. The basic assumption is that more patches and more
interface between them translates into more kinds of habitat and broader ranges in habitat
condition, as well as more kinds and higher levels of material and energy transformation
per unit area of the mosaic.
General approach - This metric is assessed based on visual comparisons between the
AA, as viewed in NAIP imagery or imagined in plan-view, and schematic diagrams of
the full range of possible patch mosaic complexity. The scale at which the AA is viewed
must be standardized. The AA should be viewed or envisioned in its entirety. The 1m-
pixel NAIP imagery supports this view. However, expert field personnel can also imagine
a detailed orthogonal view of the entire AA based on their on-the-ground reconnaissance.
Table 9: Suggested patch types. The following surfaces or land covers should be
considered possible patches, if they are obviously visibly distinct when the
entire AA is viewed or envisioned from above. Each patch must cover a
contiguous area of at least 10m to be considered for this metric. Inert
constructed covers, such as pavement, roofs, etc., are ignored.
Mono-specific patches, including patches of one tree or shrub species, etc.
Visibly distinct assemblages of plant species; patches may have species in common.
Surface water visible in lakes, lagoons, channels, wetlands, etc.
Bare substrate (i.e., < 5% plant cover), such as bedrock outcrops, river bars, etc.
Natural organic debris, including tree fall, flood deposits, etc.
Figure 5: Example sketch of a patch mosaic (right-side image) based on NAIP imagery
(left-side image). The white area in the mosaic is the matrix or background patch type.
The other colors represent patches of different plant species, distinct assemblages of
plant species, or bare ground. This mosaic has eight patch types, including the matrix.
-------
17
Figure 6: Schematic diagrams of alternative patch mosaics. Each column of sketches
represents a different patch pattern or template, ranging from separate circular patches
(far left column) to parallel linear patches (far right column). For each column, mosaic
complexity increases from Row 1 to Row 4. The large circle in each case represents the
AA. The non-colored (white) area represents the matrix of the AA, or its background
patch type. It could be upland. Blue represents standing water. Other colors represent
patch types based on Table 9 above.
\Row 1
n
xRow4
Select the diagram that most closely resembles the actual AA. The mosaic within the AA
might appear to consist of replications of one of these diagrams. Any AA with a simpler
mosaic than indicated in Row 1 should be assumed to belong to Row 1. Any AA with a
more complex mosaic than indicated in Row 4 should be assumed to belong to Row 4.
-------
18
Table 10: Metric 5 data table.
Selected
the Row Number of the Mosaic
That Most Resembles the AA
1
2
3
4
Biological Structure Attribute
Metric 6: Vertical Complexity.
This metric addresses the vertical structure of the plant community in terms of its
component number of plant strata. Different strata provide different physical and
ecological services. Tall vegetation tends to be more efficient at intercepting and holding
rainwater, providing shade, serving as sources of allochthonous inputs, and moderating
air temperature. Low-growing vegetation can shield soils from intense rainfall while
serving as forage for herbivorous game. Transpiration by wetland plants can cause diel
fluctuations in groundwater height or surface water depth. Perennial wetland plants tend
to produce abundant below-ground biomass that influences substrate elevation and
chemistry. Animal species tend to partition themselves vertically among wetland and
riparian plant strata. The basic assumption is that more strata translates into more kinds
of habitat and broader ranges in habitat condition, as well as more kinds and higher levels
of material and energy transformation for the wetland as a whole.
General approach -The following worksheet is used to identify the dominant plant
strata of the AA. USA-RAM recognizes seven (7) strata: Submerged Plants, Floating
or Floating-Leaved Plants, Tall Emergent Plants, Short Emergent Plants, Short
Woody Plants, Tall Woody Plants, and Vines. The absolute percent cover of each plant
stratum is estimated in increments of 10%, based on a reconnaissance of the AA and site
imagery. Each stratum is then assigned to one of five cover classes based on Tablell
below. Dominant strata cover at least 10% of the AA. Cover estimates should include
vegetation covering the AA but rooted outside the AA. Data can include standing stock
from previous seasons, but all data must represent observed conditions rather that
hindcasts or forecasts.
-------
19
Table 11: Absolute cover of plant strata. Mark the category of absolute percent
coverage of the AA that best fits each plant stratum. Since strata can overlap,
their combined coverage can exceed 100%. See Glossary for definitions.
Plant Strata (see glossary)
Submerged Plants
(any depth)
Floating or Floating-leaved Plants
Short Emergent Plants
(< 0.5 m)
Tall Emergent Plants
(> 0.5 m)
Short Woody Plants
(shrubs and trees <5.0m)
Vines
Tall Woody Plants
(shrubs and trees > 5.0m)
Percent Coverage
< 10%
10-15%
16-25%
26-50%
>50%
Total Number of Plant Strata Covering at Least 10% of the AA
Metric 7: Plant Community Complexity.
Metric 7 addresses the diversity of plant species that dominate the plant strata. Since
different species tend to have different growth patterns and morphometry, an increase in
species diversity within a stratum tends to increase its internal architectural complexity.
Different species are hosts to different parasites and diseases, may support and depend on
different pollinators, can serve as cover or forage for different animal species, and may
play very different roles in pollutant uptake and nutrient cycling. Within a wetland class,
the diversity and levels of ecological function of a wetland are expected to increase with
the number and abundance of different plant species. The basic assumption is that within
a wetland class, greater diversity of co-dominant species translates into more kinds and
higher levels of wetland functions.
General approach - In Table 12 below, mark the dominant plant strata (those that cover
at least 10% of the AA), based on Table 11 of Metric 6. For each of these dominant
strata, list the plant species that comprises at least 10% relative cover. Estimates of
relative cover should be made in 10% increments. The listed species are the co-dominant
species for each dominant stratum. The invasive status of each co-dominant species
should also be determined. Users of this method may refer to local invasive plant species
lists or resource agencies to determine which species are to be considered invasive. For a
-------
20
list of targeted species defined for the NWCA, consult the NWCA FOM Appendix B -
Targeted Invasive Alien Plant Species. This information will be useful in the
assessment of stress due to invasive species in Metric 11.
Table 12: The invasive status and relative percent cover of co-dominant plant species of
the dominant plant strata. Disregard strata with less than 10% absolute cover
of AA (see Metric 6). Information about invasive status is used in Metric 11.
Plant Strata
disregard
strata with
less than
10%cover
(see Metric 6)
Submerged
(any depth)
Floating or
Floating-
leaved
Short
Emergent
(herbaceous,
< 0.5m)
Tall
Emergent
(herbaceous,
> 0.5 m)
Short
Woody
(shrubs, trees
<5.0m)
For each Plant Stratum
List All Plant Species Comprising at least 10% Relative Cover
Species Name
mark if
Invasive
oj
o
U
£
Species Name
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
mark if
Invasive
oj
o
U
£
-------
21
Table 12 (continued).
Vines
(any present)
Tall Woody
(shrubs, trees
> 5.0m)
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
Total Percent Coverage for All Invasive Species in Stratum
Total number of listed species for all plant strata combined
(Do not count any species more than once).
-------
22
Section C: Assessment of Stressors in the AA
The following Metrics are used to assess stressors within the AA. Stress to the buffer is
considered in the preceding Section A.
The primary purpose of the Stressor Metrics is to assess the distribution and severity of
stressors within and among regions of the US. Information on stressors is valuable for
diagnosing the causes of impairment and for determining what remediation or
rehabilitation measures are warranted. A secondary purpose is to gain insight into
possible causes for low condition scores. To meet this purpose, each Stressor Metric is
designed to provide information relevant to one or both Metrics of an Attribute of
condition. As explained in Section B, the Hydrology Attribute is assessed only in terms
of its stressors.
The effects of stressors on wetland condition tend to increase with the number of
different kinds of stressors and their severity, regardless of wetland type or vegetation
community. The severity of a Stressor depends on its duration, intensity, frequency, and
proximity. The field indicators of stress tend to integrate across these parameters, such
that they are not assessed independently.
However, by observing whether the Stressor indicators are obvious and pervasive, subtle
and highly restricted, or characterized as more moderate, the users should be able to
judge whether each stressor has a high, medium, or low degree of severity. Additional
evidence of stressors that is provided by maps, aerial imagery, and local reports can also
be used. Each observed indicator will be ranked according to Table 13 below.
Table 13: Descriptions of stressor severity ranks.
Severity
Rank
Not severe - the stressor is present, but does not appear to negatively impact any
Attribute of condition in the AA.
Moderately severe - the stressor is present and appears to have moderately negative
impacts on one or more Attributes of condition in the AA.
Severe - the stressor is present and appears to have major negative impacts on one or
more Attributes of condition in the AA.
The stressors in the following Metrics will be assessed based on these integrated rankings
of stressor duration, intensity and frequency, and not based on aerial extent as was done
for Metric 3. Walking the AA to make observations will be necessary, but care must be
taken not to damage or trample the vegetation or other habitat features within the AA.
-------
23
Hydrology Attribute
Metric 8: Stress to Water Quality.
Hydrology has been called the "master variable" that determines the structure, function
and ecosystem services provided by wetlands. It includes measures of both water quality
(Metric 8) and quantity (Metric 9). Human activities that degrade water quality include
discharge from point sources, watershed activities that result in high sediment loads,
nutrient runoff, mine drainage, or excess salts. As stressors accumulate at a site, services
such as biodiversity support and biogeochemical cycling are compromised and
downstream aquatic systems become altered. Water quality impacts can reduce
vegetation diversity and lead to the establishment of invasive species. The water quality
purification function of a wetland is typically reduced as water contaminants accumulate.
General approach - This Metric accounts for activities that affect or degrade water
quality in the AA. It is assessed based on a checklist of field indicators of water quality
stressors (Table 14 below). The indicators are listed in Stressor Categories.
All indicators of water quality stressors that are observed in the AA should be noted, and
the severity of the indicated stressors should be ranked based on Table 13 above. After
completing the checklist for a Stressor Category, the overall severity of stress for the
Stressor Category as a whole should be estimated, unless none of the indicators in the
category were observed. To complete the assessment for this Metric, the noted severity
ranks should be tallied (added together) and recorded on the field form. Ranks for the
Stressor Categories are not included in the tally of the indicator ranks.
Table 14: Indicators of water quality stress observed in the AA. Each observed indicator
is ranked as (1) not severe; (2) moderately severe; or (3) severe, based on Table
13. Each indicator can have only one severity rank. Tally all the marked ranks to
complete the metric, excluding the ranks for the Stressor Categories. Bold terms
are in the glossary.
If Stressor is
present, mark
its severity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
J
3
3
3
3
Field Indicators by Stressor Category
Point Sources
Point source inputs (discharge from wastewater plants, factories, etc)
Stormwater inputs (discharge pipes, culverts, sewer outfalls)
Sedimentation/Pollutants
Debris lines on plants, trees or silt-laden vegetation
Sedimentation (e.g., the presence of sediment fans, deposits or plumes)
Industrial or domestic spills or discharges (odors; foam, oil sheen*)
Turbidity in the water column
-------
24
Table 14 (continued).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
J
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Eutrophication
Direct discharges from feedlot manure pits, etc.
Direct discharges from septic or sewage systems
Direct application of fertilizer
Agricultural runoff (drain tiles, etc. discharging to site)
Formation of heavy algal or Lemna sp. surface mats or heavy benthic algal
growth
Mining Impacts
Acid mine drainage discharge (excessively clear water (low pH)
presence/accumulation of "yellow-boy" orange precipitate)
or
Salinity
Obvious increases in the concentration of dissolved salts (dead or
plants; salt encrustations, etc)
Tally of all Ranks (excluding ranks for Stressor Categories)
stressed
Oil sheen should not be confused with surface iron films (normal in many wetlands);
iron films can be broken while oil films cannot.
Metric 9: Alterations to Hydroperiod.
The hydroperiod (pattern of water level change over time) affects wetland vegetation
community composition and productivity, the provision of spawning and nursery grounds
for fish and amphibians, migratory waterfowl habitat, and biogeochemical processes.
Functions such as floodwater storage and flood peak reduction are reflected in the
hydroperiods of wetlands.
General approach - This Metric is assessed using a checklist of field indicators of
hydroperiod alterations in the AA (Table 15 below). While many hydroperiod alterations
will occur outside of the AA, only those that occur within the AA are considered in the
Metric. Hydrologic alterations that are outside of the AA are assessed in Metric 3 or
using other assessment methods.
The occurrence of any stressor indicator in the AA should be noted in the checklist, and
its severity should be estimated, based on Table 13 above. To assess this Metric, the
severity ranks (1, 2, and 3) noted for each observed indicator should be tallied (added
together) and the sum should be recorded on the field form.
-------
25
Table 15: Indicators of altered hydroperiod observed in AA. Each observed indicator is
ranked as (1) not severe; (2) moderately severe; or (3) severe based on Table
13. Each indicator can have only one severity rank. Tally all the marked ranks
to complete the Metric. Bold terms are in the glossary.
If stressor is
present, mark
its severity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Field Indicators
Ditches/channelization within AA
Dikes/dams/levees/berms at AA margin or within AA or roadbed or railroad
(acting as block to water flows into or through AA)
Channels have deeply undercut banks and/or bank slumps or slides
Culverts, pipes (point sources) into AA (change in water quantity)
Water level control structure that impound water in all or part of the AA
Upland plant species encroaching into AA (due to drying of wetland)
Die-off of trees within AA due to increased ponding (exempting beaver
impounded sites)
Tidal restriction in tidal wetlands (restricts flows to and from AA )
Presence of agricultural tiles or culverts at AA margin or within AA
Siphons, pumps moving water in or out of AA
Stormwater inputs from impervious surfaces/flashy flows into AA
Tally of all Ranks
Physical Structure Attribute
Metric 10: Habitat /Substrate Alterations.
There is a range of anthropogenic events and activities that alter wetland habitats by
disturbing their substrates. Off-site events and activities are usually hydrological. For
example, floods caused by excessive runoff or major releases of water from dams can
cause scouring of substrates or large deposits of sediment and debris. Onsite events and
activities that alter substrates include grading, mining, off-road vehicle use, and
vegetation control. Some urban wetlands are severely impacted by dumping of yard
debris and other trash. Substrate alterations can cause changes in drainage and soil
productivity that subsequently alter wetland plant communities. Severe alterations of
wetland substrates often lead to plant invasions.
General approach - This Metric is assessed using a checklist of field indicators of
stressors that affect or degrade the substrate observed in the AA (Table 16).
-------
26
Table 16. Indicators of altered substrate observed in AA. Each observed indicator is
ranked as (1) not severe, (2) moderately severe, or (3) severe based on Table
13. Each indicator can have only one severity rank. Tally all the marked ranks
to complete the metric. Bold terms are in the glossary.
If stressor is
present, mark
its severity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Field Indicators
Soil subsidence, scour or surface erosion (root exposure, etc)
Off-road vehicles, mountain biking, trails cut, etc.
Inorganic sedimentation inflow (sediment accumulation around vegetation,
deep sediment splays, recent vegetation burial, etc)
Dredging or other prominent excavation at AA margin or in AA
Grazing by domesticated or feral animals in AA (includes trampling,
digging, wallowing, etc)
Grazing by native ungulates.
Recent farming activity (plowing, disking, etc.)
Soil compaction by human activity (parking by cars, heavy machinery, etc)
Filling, grading, or other prominent deposition of sediment
Dumping of garbage or other debris
Mechanical plant removal that disturbs substrate (rutting, grubbing by
heavy machinery, etc.)
Fire lines (fire breaks) dug in AA or at AA margin
Tally of all Ranks
Biological Structure Attribute
Metric 11: Percent Cover of Invasive Plant Species.
Wetland plants are particularly useful as indicators because they are an easily observed,
universal component of wetland ecosystems. Plant community composition, including the
occurrence of invasive species, provides clear and robust signals of human disturbance.
This Metric is assessed based on field observations of the percent cover of invasive
species in each of the plant strata within the AA. The observations made to assess
Metric 7 will be useful, although in this metric the presence of any invasive species (i.e.,
any cover) is tallied using four broad cover classes (<5%, 5-25%, 26-75%, >75%). Users
of this method may refer to local invasive plant species lists or resource agencies to
determine which species are to be considered invasive. For a list of targeted species
defined for the NWCA, consult the NWCA FOM Appendix B - Targeted Invasive
Alien Plant Species. Some common invasive species are listed below (Table 17). This
is not an exhaustive list.
-------
27
Table 17: List of invasive plant species common to wetlands in many regions of the US.
This is not an exhaustive list.
Invasive Plant Species That Commonly Invade Wetlands
European milfoil (Myriophyllum spicatum)
Garlic mustard (Alliaria petiolatd)
Giant reed (Phragmites australis)
Giant salvinia (Salvinia molesta)
Poison hemlock (Conium maculatum)
Purple loosestrife (Lythrum salicaria)
Reed canarygrass (Phalaris arundinacea)
Russian olive (Elaeagnus angustifolia)
Salt cedar (Tamarix spp)
Water hyacinth (Eichhornia crassipes).
General approach - A visual survey of the AA and its plant species composition will be
used to note the percent cover of invasive species in each of the plant strata listed below.
The information gathered to complete Metric 7 will be useful for this metric but will not
be enough to complete it. For this Metric, all invasive species will be noted and recorded
in one of the four cover classes, regardless of their cover. Strata that have no cover (zero)
of any invasive species should be assigned a rank of "0".
Table 18: Metric 11 data table. Numbers indicate the rank score for each cover
class in each strata. Circle one choice for each plant layer and tally all
ranks for the final score.
Plant Strata
(see glossary)
Submerged
(any depth)
Floating or Floating-
leaved
Short Emergent
(herbaceous,_< 0.5m)
Tall Emergent
(herbaceous, > 0.5m)
Short Woody Plants
(shrubs and trees < 5m)
Vines (any present)
Tall Woody Plants
(shrubs and trees < 5m)
Percent Cover of Invasive Species
None
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<5%
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5-25%
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
26-75%
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Tally of all Ranks
>75%
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
-------
28
Metric 12: Vegetation Disturbance.
This metric accounts for human activities that directly alter the plant community in the
AA. Vegetation is an easily observed component of wetlands that responds predictably
to disturbance. As vegetation communities shift in response to stress, important wetland
services, such as biodiversity support and water quality improvement, may be affected.
General approach - This Metric is assessed based on a checklist of field indicators of
anthropogenic disturbance to the plant community (Table 19 below). The indicators are
listed in Stressor Categories. All stressors observed in the AA are noted, and the severity
of the indicated stressors is ranked based on Table 13. Only on-going or recent
disturbances that are clearly impacting the vegetation are considered. After completing
the checklist for a Stressor Category, the overall severity of stress for the category as a
whole should be estimated, unless none of the indicators in the category were observed.
To complete this Metric, the noted severity ranks should be tallied (added together) and
recorded on the field form. Exclude the ranks for the Stressor Categories from the tally.
Table 19. Indicators of vegetation disturbance observed in AA. Each observed indicator
is ranked as (1) not severe, (2) moderately severe, or (3) severe based on
Table 13. Each indicator can have only one severity rank. Bold terms are in
the glossary.
If Stressor is
present, rank
its severity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Field Indicators by Stressor Category
Human Use and/or Management
Mowing within AA ( or at AA margin)
Forest - selective cut
Forest - clear cut
Prominent removal of large woody debris
Mechanical plant removal besides tree cutting or woody debris removal
Evidence of planting of non-native vegetation
Chemical vegetation control (herbicide application, defoliant use)
Farming (recent plowing, disking, etc)
Excessive Grazing or Herbivory
Grazing by domestic or feral animals (cows, sheep, pigs, etc)
Excessive wildlife herbivory (deer, muskrat, geese, carp, beaver, etc.)
Excessive insect herbivory of tree canopy, shrub stratum
Fire
Evidence of intentional burning at AA margin or in AA
Fire lines (fire breaks)
Tally of all Ranks (excluding ranks for Stressor Categories)
-------
29
USA RAM
Glossary
Acid mine drainage - acidic water typically with high metal concentrations that results
from water flowing over sulfur bearing materials. Acid mine drainage often results
from the process of mining, particularly coal mining.
Bank slumps - sediment or soil collapse from the face of a riverbank.
Bench - A flat, horizontal area of land that is longer than wide, with the long axis general
parallel to a nearby shoreline or bank, one long side bounded by land sloping
steeply upward, and the other side bounded by land sloping steeply downward.
Berm - A narrow bench of land typically along the top or bottom of a slope that separates
two areas, also termed "ledge" and "shelf (see "bench").
Channel - A landscape feature with well-defined bed and banks that has been formed by
water and which under normal circumstances is maintained by the flow of water,
or that is purposefully constructed and maintained to convey water.
Clear cut - a logging practice in which most or all of the trees in an area of forest are cut
and removed.
Die-off - The relatively sudden, severe, and cotemporaneous deaths of most of the plants
and/or animals of a kind in one area or habitat type, such as a lake or wetland.
Dike - An embankment or wall, typically of earth and stone, built to prevent flooding.
Disking - in farming, turning and loosening the soil with a series of discs (as in plowing)
Ditch - A small channel dug for the purposes of moving water, often used to speed
drainage of an area.
Emergent (herbaceous) - Plants rooted in the soil with basal portions often in the water
and whose leaves, stems, and reproductive structures are aerial. Examples include
cattails (Typha spp.) and reed canary grass (Phalaris arundinacea).
Fire line - A gap in vegetation cut by fire crews in advance of a wildfire to stop its
spread buy depriving the fire of fuel. Also known as fire breaks.
Flashy flows - Stream flows characterized by rapid rises and falls in water levels in
response to rainfall. This includes higher peak flows (discharge) and lower base
flows and is the result of impervious surfaces in the watershed. High water flows
can lead to bank erosion and associated water quality issues.
Flat - A non-vegetated, horizontal area of land of any shape with at least one side
bounded by water.
-------
30
Invasive species - Plant species that are 1) non-native (alien) to the AA, and 2) whose
introduction is likely to cause economic or environmental harm.
Large woody debris - Trees or portions of trees (limbs, rootwads, etc) typically with a
diameter of 10 cm or more that have fallen into aquatic sites. These provide
substantial habitat benefits.
Levee - An embankment that runs along the bank of a river or channel. It can be natural
(due to flooding and sediment deposition) or human-made.
Macro-relief - Variations in ground surface elevation due to such factors as ground
subsidence, erosion by waves, differential weathering rates of geologic strata, land
slides, etc.
Micro-relief - Small scale variations in ground surface elevation due to such factors as
animal burrowing, spatial differences in sediment accumulation, buried debris, etc.
Mosaic - An arrangement or array of patches of a landscape (see "patch").
Patch - An area assigned to a single land cover type or class that differs from its
surroundings.
Pig damage - A wallow caused by wild or feral pigs digging into the ground (see
"wallows").
Plant hummock or tussock - a compact tuft especially of grass or sedge, or an area of
raised solid ground that is bound by roots of low-growing vegetation.
Plant Stratum (strata) - A class of plant height. Plants are classified based on their
maximum height above the substrate, including aquatic plants rooted in benthic
substrates and floating plants.
Point Source - any discernible confined and discrete conveyance including a pipe, ditch,
channel, or conduit from which pollutants may be discharged.
Pothole - Any depression or hole in the land surface that is caused by physical processes
other than subterranean erosion by groundwater, and that has a maximum width
less than 3m.
Sediment mound - Any mound of sediment of any shape having a maximum height less
that 2m and a maximum width or diameter less than 5m.
Sediment splay - A small fan of sediment deposited at the margin of a sudden and
temporary inundation of the land surface by flood waters. Sediment splays are
common on active riverine floodplains and interfluves.
Selective cut - Forestry practice in which certain desirable trees are cut and the
remainder is left standing.
Shrub - Shrubs are woody species that have a relatively low height (typically 1.5 m or
-------
31
less). This group includes true shrubs (woody species that lack a single trunk), and
young or stunted trees. Common examples include blackberries (Rubus spp.).
Soil cracks - Cracks less than 1m deep in the permeable ground surface caused by its
shrinking and swelling, or by freezing and thawing.
Soil subsidence - The downward movement of a soil surface. In wetlands this is often
due to dewatering and peat oxidation or to sediment starvation when floodplains
are cut off from the river and sediment deposition is reduced.
Submerged - Plants that spend their entire life cycle below the surface of the water
except for flowers, which are typically borne about the water. Most are rooted
although there are rootless species that float free in the water column.
Floating-leaved, and floating plants - Plants having leaves that float on the water
surface. Floating-leaved species are rooted and included members of the water lily
family, and some pondweeds (Potamogeton sp.). Floating plants are not rooted
and so float on the water surface. They include some of the most troublesome
invasive species such as water hyacinth (Eichhornia crassipes).
Swale - A channel with gently sloping banks that is as wide or wider than the channel
bed (see "channel").
Terrace - A terrace is a former floodplain that is no longer inundated frequently enough
to be termed active (ser "riverine floodplain" and "lacustrine floodplain").
Tidal restriction - Restrictions of tidal flows caused by water control structures such as
floodgates that prevent the free movement of tidal inflows and outflows.
Tree - Woody plants that dominate the canopy of forested wetlands with a height greater
than 6m. Young and small stature individuals can also be seen in the sub canopy,
typically ranging from 1.5 to 5m in height. Common species include Melaleuca sp.
Turbidity - A measure of substances in the water column that interfere with the passage
of light, such as suspended sediments, algae.
Vine - Weak-stemmed, climbing plants that gain support by growing on other, more
robust plant species or substrates. Common species include grapevines (Vitis spp.)
Wallow - Any depression in the land surface that is wider than deep and is caused by
animals sitting, lying, or rolling on the ground surface or digging into it.
Woody debris - tree limbs, branches, lumber, and other large pieces of wood.
Wrack - Debris, including plant material and trash that is transported and deposited on
the land surface by water.
------- |